Cat. No. W309-E1-09
SYSMAC
CS1W-CLK21-V1
CJ1W-CLK21-V1
C200HW-CLK21
CVM1-CLK21
CQM1H-CLK21
(CS1W-RPT01/02/03 Repeater Units)
Controller Link Units
OPERATION MANUAL
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CS1W-CLK21-V1
CJ1W-CLK21-V1
C200HW-CLK21
CVM1-CLK21
CQM1H-CLK21
(CS1W-RPT01/02/03 Repeater Units)
Controller Link Units
Operation Manual
Revised January 2006
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice:
OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified operator
and only for the purposes described in this manual.
The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual. Always heed
the information provided with them. Failure to heed precautions can result in injury to people or dam-
age to property.
!DANGER
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury. Additionally, there may be severe property damage.
!WARNING
!Caution
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury. Additionally, there may be severe property damage.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or
moderate injury, or property damage.
OMRON Product References
All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual. The word “Unit” is also capitalized when it refers to
an OMRON product, regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name of the product.
The abbreviation “Ch,” which appears in some displays and on some OMRON products, often means
“word” and is abbreviated “Wd” in documentation in this sense.
The abbreviation “PLC” means Programmable Controller. “PC” is used, however, in some Program-
ming Device displays to mean Programmable Controller.
Visual Aids
The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of
information.
Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient opera-
tion of the product.
1,2,3...
1. Indicates lists of one sort or another, such as procedures, checklists, etc.
OMRON, 1997
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form, or
by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of
OMRON.
No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because OMRON is con-
stantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is subject to change without
notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Nevertheless, OMRON assumes no responsibility
for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in
this publication.
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Unit Versions of CS/CJ-series Controller Link Units
Unit Versions
A “unit version” has been introduced to manage CS/CJ-series Controller Link Units according to differ-
ences in functionality accompanying upgrades.
Unit Version Notation on Products
The unit version code is provided on the nameplate of the CS/CJ-series Controller Link Units for which
unit versions are being managed. This system applies to Controller Link Units with unit version 1.2 or
later.
Example: CS1W-CLK21-V1
Nameplate
CS-series Controller Link Unit
CS1W-CLK21-V1
CONTROLLER LINK UNIT
Unit version 1.2
Lot No. 040901 0000 Ver.1.2
OMRON Corporation
MADE IN JAPAN
Confirming Unit Versions with Support Software
CX-Programmer version 5.0 or higher can be used to confirm the unit version in the Unit Manufacturing
Information.
1,2,3...
1. 1. In the I/O Table Window, right-click on the Controller Link Unit, and then
select Unit Manufacturing Information.
2. The following Unit Manufacturing Information Dialog Box will be displayed.
Indicates the unit version.
Example: In this Unit Manufacturing Information Dialog Box, unit version
1.2 is displayed. Use this dialog box to confirm the unit version of the Con-
troller Link Unit that is connected online.
vi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Unit Version Labels
Unit version labels are provided with the product. These labels can be attached to the front of previous
Controller Link Units to differentiate between Controller Link Units of different unit versions.
Unit Version Notation
The unit versions are indicated in this manual as follows:
Notation in product nameplate Notation in this manual
Ver.1.2 or later after the lot number CS/CJ-series Controller Link Units Information for which no particular
Remarks
with unit version 1.2 or later
version is specified applies to all
unit versions.
Blank after the lot number
Pre-Ver. 1.2 CS/CJ-series Control-
ler Link Units
Function Support by Unit Version
Functions
Earlier version (Pre-Ver. 1.2)
Unit version 1.2
CS1W-CLK21-V1
CJ1W-CLK21-V1
CS1W-CLK21-V1
CJ1W-CLK21-V1
Maximum number of data link
words (data link area for sending/
receiving that is created for a sin-
gle node in a single CPU Unit)
12,000 max.
20,000 max.
Data Link Area
The same area cannot be allo-
cated for both Area 1 and Area 2. for both Area 1 and Area 2.
The same area can be allocated
Maximum number of Units con-
nected to a single CPU Unit
4 Units 8 Units
Note Use the CX-Net in CX-Programmer version 5.0 or later to set a data link area
in which the number of send and receive words exceeds 12,000 words, or to
set data link tables that allocate the same area for Area 1 and Area 2.
Unit Versions and Manufacturing Dates/Lot Numbers
Model
CS1W-CLK21-V1
CJ1W-CLK21-V1
Until August 2004
Pre-Ver. 1.2
From September 2004
Unit version 1.2
(Lot No. 040901 and later)
vii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
viii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
3
4
5
Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating Environment Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Applications Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conformance to EC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xx
xx
xx
xxi
xxii
xxiv
SECTION 1
1-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2 Specifications and Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3 Selection of Communications Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4 Basic Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5 Application Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
11
25
26
27
SECTION 2
2-1 Data Links Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32
2-2 Message Service Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
40
SECTION 3
3-1 Component Names and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2 Unit Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4 Constructing Networks with Repeater Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
44
58
66
78
SECTION 4
4-1 CS-series Controller Link Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2 CJ-series Controller Link Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3 C200HX/HG/HE Controller Link Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4 CVM1 and CV-series Controller Link Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5 CQM1H-series Controller Link Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-6 Repeater Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
86
89
93
97
100
102
ix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 5
5-1 What Are Data Links? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2 Setting Data Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3 Starting and Stopping Data Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4 Checking Data Link Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
106
113
153
156
SECTION 6
6-1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2 Selecting Communications Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3 Using the Message Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4 FINS Commands and Responses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5 Commands and Responses for Controller Link Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6 Commands and Responses for C200HX/HG/HE and CQM1H-series PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7 Response Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
166
186
189
199
201
212
225
SECTION 7
7-1 What is Network Interconnection? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2 Remote Programming and Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3 Routing Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4 Setting Routing Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
234
236
239
240
SECTION 8
8-1 Communications Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2 Communications Cycle Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-3 Data Link I/O Response Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-4 Message Delay Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
248
251
253
265
SECTION 9
9-1 Troubleshooting Using Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-2 Status Area and Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-3 Error Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-4 Troubleshooting Error Messages in CX-Net Data Link Table Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-5 Cleaning and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-6 Handling Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
276
292
313
320
323
324
x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 10
10-1 Adding Nodes Using a Repeater Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
332
10-2 Changing the Data Link Tables with Active Data Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
336
Appendices
A
B
Standard Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Relay Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
343
347
Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
xi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
xii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About this Manual:
This manual describes the installation, setup, and operation of the C200HW-CLK21, CS1W-CLK21-
V1, CJ1W-CLK21-V1, CVM1-CLK21, and CQM1H-CLK21 Controller Link Units for C200HX/HG/HE,
CS/CJ-series, CVM1, CQM1H-series, and CV-series PLCs, and includes the sections described
below. The Controller Link Units are used to connect these PLCs to a Controller Link Network. Infor-
mation is also provided in this manual on CS1W-RPT01/02/03 Repeater Units. The following three
manuals are directly related to application of the Controller Link Network.
Name
Contents
Cat. No.
(suffixes omitted)
W309
SYSMAC CS1W-CLK21, CJ1W-CLK21,
C200HW-CLK21, CVM1-CLK21.
CQM1H-CLK21 Controller Link Units
Operation Manual (this manual)
Installation, setup, and operating procedures for the Con-
troller Link Units. Controller Link Units are used to connect
PLCs to a Controller Link Network.
3G8F7-CLK12-E-V1/CLK52-E-V1/
CLK21-E-V1 Controller Link Support
Boards for PCI Bus
Operating procedures for Controller Link Support Boards
for PCI bus connections. Controller Link Support Boards
are used to connect IBM PC/ATs or compatibles to a Con-
troller Link Network.
W383
W388
Operation Manual
3G8F7-CLK12-E/CLK52-E/CLK21-E Con- Installation and setup procedures for Controller Link Sup-
troller Link Support Boards for PCI Bus
Installation Guide
port Boards for PCI bus connections. Controller Link Sup-
port Boards are used to connect IBM PC/ATs or
compatibles to a Controller Link Network.
3G8F5-CLK11-E, 3G8F5-CLK21-E Con- Installation, setup, and operating procedures for Controller W307
troller Link Support Boards for ISA Bus
Operation Manual
Link Support Boards for ISA bus connections. Controller
Link Support Boards are used to connect IBM PC/ATs or
compatibles to a Controller Link Network.
CS1W-CLK12, CVM1-CLK12 Optical
Ring Controller Link Units
Operation Manual
Installation, setup, and operating procedures for the Optical W370
Ring Controller Link Units. Controller Link Units are used to
connect C200HX/HG/HE CV-series, and CS-series PLCs
to a Controller Link Network.
C200HW-ZW3AT2-E-V2 Controller Link
Support Software
Operation Manual
Installation and operating procedures for the Controller
Link Support Software. The Controller Link Support Soft-
ware enables manually set data links and other procedures
for a Controller Link Network.
W369
Depending on the system, you may also need the CX-Programmer, or a Programming Console. Refer
to the body of this manual for details. Please read this manual and related manuals carefully and be
sure you understand the information provided before attempting to install and operate a Controller Link
Unit.
Precautions provides general precautions for using the Controller Link Unit and related devices.
Section 1 provides basic information on Controller Link Networks, and will give the reader an overview
of what Controller Link Networks can do and how best to use them.
Section 2 describes the basic procedures to use the Controller Link Unit. The settings necessary for
using each of the functions are also explained briefly. For more details, refer to the following sections
on individual functions.
Section 3 describes how to install a Controller Link Unit and how to wire the Controller Link Network.
Details are also provided on installation, wiring, and basic operating procedures of Repeater Units,
including information on using them to construct networks.
Section 4 describes the settings required for starting communications. These basic settings are
required for both data links function and the message service. Carry out the settings described here
before turning on power to the Controller Link Unit.
Section 5 describes how to use data links in a Controller Link Network. Refer to SECTION 2 Basic
Procedures for an outline of data link application.
Section 6 explains how to use the message service provided by a Controller Link Unit. It also explains
the FINS commands and responses supported by Controller Link Units and those supported by
C200HX/HG/HE, CVM1, and CV-series PLCs.
xiii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 7 describes the method used to connect multiple networks through CS/CJ-series, CVM1, and
CV-series PLCs. The section also describes remote programming and monitoring with Programming
Devices.
Section 8 explains details on Controller Link Network communications. Refer to this section for net-
work communications that require accurate communications timing.
Section 9 provides information on troubleshooting errors that occur during Controller Link Unit opera-
tion, as well as daily inspection, cleaning, and other maintenance procedures.
Section 10 provides information on functions that can be performed without turning OFF the PLC
power to the existing network, such as adding nodes to the Controller Link Network using a Repeater
Unit and changing data link tables while the data links are active.
Appendix A provides a list of standard OMRON products related to Controller Link Networks.
Appendix B provides easy reference to the words in PLC memory areas used by Controller Link Net-
works.
Appendix C provides information on how to use the CJ1W-TB101 Wired Controller Link Unit Relay
Terminal Block, including details on connection and replacement.
!WARNING
Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may
result in personal injury or death, damage to the product, or product failure.
Please read each section in its entirety and be sure you understand the infor-
mation provided in the section and related sections before attempting any of
the procedures or operations given.
xiv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Read and Understand this Manual
Please read and understand this manual before using the product. Please consult your OMRON
representative if you have any questions or comments.
Warranty and Limitations of Liability
WARRANTY
OMRON's exclusive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials and workmanship for a
period of one year (or other period if specified) from date of sale by OMRON.
OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING NON-
INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE
PRODUCTS. ANY BUYER OR USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS
DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR
INTENDED USE. OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED.
LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY
OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,
LOSS OF PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS,
WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, OR STRICT
LIABILITY.
In no event shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on which
liability is asserted.
IN NO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY, REPAIR, OR OTHER CLAIMS
REGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRON'S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS
WERE PROPERLY HANDLED, STORED, INSTALLED, AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO
CONTAMINATION, ABUSE, MISUSE, OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR.
xv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Application Considerations
SUITABILITY FOR USE
OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards, codes, or regulations that apply to the
combination of products in the customer's application or use of the products.
At the customer's request, OMRON will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying
ratings and limitations of use that apply to the products. This information by itself is not sufficient for a
complete determination of the suitability of the products in combination with the end product, machine,
system, or other application or use.
The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given. This is not
intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of the products, nor is it intended to imply that the uses
listed may be suitable for the products:
• Outdoor use, uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference, or conditions or
uses not described in this manual.
• Nuclear energy control systems, combustion systems, railroad systems, aviation systems, medical
equipment, amusement machines, vehicles, safety equipment, and installations subject to separate
industry or government regulations.
• Systems, machines, and equipment that could present a risk to life or property.
Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products.
NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR
PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO
ADDRESS THE RISKS, AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RATED AND
INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM.
PROGRAMMABLE PRODUCTS
OMRON shall not be responsible for the user's programming of a programmable product, or any
consequence thereof.
xvi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disclaimers
CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS
Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other
reasons.
It is our practice to change model numbers when published ratings or features are changed, or when
significant construction changes are made. However, some specifications of the products may be changed
without any notice. When in doubt, special model numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key
specifications for your application on your request. Please consult with your OMRON representative at any
time to confirm actual specifications of purchased products.
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be used for manufacturing purposes, even when
tolerances are shown.
PERFORMANCE DATA
Performance data given in this manual is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does
not constitute a warranty. It may represent the result of OMRON's test conditions, and the users must
correlate it to actual application requirements. Actual performance is subject to the OMRON Warranty and
Limitations of Liability.
ERRORS AND OMISSIONS
The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate; however, no
responsibility is assumed for clerical, typographical, or proofreading errors, or omissions.
xvii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
xviii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRECAUTIONS
This section provides general precautions for using the Controller Link Unit and related devices.
The information contained in this section is important for the safe and reliable application of the Controller Link
Unit. You must read this section and understand the information contained before attempting to set up or operate
a Controller Link Unit.
5
6
Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Applications Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conformance to EC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxii
xxiv
xix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Intended Audience
1
1
Intended Audience
This manual is intended for the following personnel, who must also have
knowledge of electrical systems (an electrical engineer or the equivalent).
• Personnel in charge of installing FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of designing FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities.
2
General Precautions
The user must operate the product according to the performance specifica-
tions described in the operation manuals.
Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the
manual or applying the product to nuclear control systems, railroad systems,
aviation systems, vehicles, combustion systems, medical equipment, amuse-
ment machines, safety equipment, and other systems, machines, and equip-
ment that may have a serious influence on lives and property if used
improperly, consult your OMRON representative.
Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the product are
sufficient for the systems, machines, and equipment, and be sure to provide
the systems, machines, and equipment with double safety mechanisms.
This manual provides information for programming and operating OMRON
PLCs and related devices. Be sure to read this manual before attempting to
use the software and keep this manual close at hand for reference during
operation.
!WARNING It is extremely important that a PLC and all PLC Units be used for the speci-
fied purpose and under the specified conditions, especially in applications that
can directly or indirectly affect human life. You must consult with your OMRON
representative before applying a PLC System to the above mentioned appli-
cations.
3
Safety Precautions
!WARNING Do not attempt to take any Unit apart while the power is being supplied. Doing
so may result in electric shock.
!WARNING Do not touch any of the terminals or terminal blocks while the power is being
supplied. Doing so may result in electric shock.
!WARNING Provide safety measures in external circuits (i.e., not in the Programmable
Controller), including the following items, to ensure safety in the system if an
abnormality occurs due to malfunction of the PLC or another external factor
affecting the PLC operation. Not doing so may result in serious accidents.
• Fail-safe measures must be taken by the customer to ensure safety in the
event of incorrect, missing, or abnormal signals caused by broken signal
lines, momentary power interruptions, or other causes.
• Emergency stop circuits, interlock circuits, limit circuits, and similar safety
measures must be provided in external control circuits.
xx
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Environment Precautions
4
• The PLC will turn OFF all outputs when its self-diagnosis function detects
any error or when a severe failure alarm (FALS) instruction is executed.
As a countermeasure for such errors, external safety measures must be
provided to ensure safety in the system.
• The PLC outputs may remain ON or OFF due to deposition or burning of
the output relays or destruction of the output transistors. As a counter-
measure for such problems, external safety measures must be provided
to ensure safety in the system.
• When the 24-VDC output (service power supply to the PLC) is overloaded
or short-circuited, the voltage may drop and result in the outputs being
turned OFF. As a countermeasure for such problems, external safety
measures must be provided to ensure safety in the system.
!Caution Execute online edit only after confirming that no adverse effects will be
caused by extending the cycle time. Otherwise, the input signals may not be
readable.
!Caution Confirm safety at the destination node before transferring a program to
another node or changing contents of the I/O memory area. Doing either of
these without confirming safety may result in injury.
4
Operating Environment Precautions
!Caution Do not operate the control system in the following locations:
• Locations subject to direct sunlight.
• Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the range specified
in the specifications.
• Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes in tem-
perature.
• Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases.
• Locations subject to dust (especially iron dust) or salts.
• Locations subject to exposure to water, oil, or chemicals.
• Locations subject to shock or vibration.
!Caution Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when installing systems in
the following locations:
• Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise.
• Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields.
• Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity.
• Locations close to power supplies.
!Caution The operating environment of the PLC System can have a large effect on the
longevity and reliability of the system. Improper operating environments can
lead to malfunction, failure, and other unforeseeable problems with the PLC
System. Be sure that the operating environment is within the specified condi-
tions at installation and remains within the specified conditions during the life
of the system.
xxi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications Precautions
5
5
Applications Precautions
Observe the following precautions when using the Controller Link Unit.
!WARNING Failure to abide by the following precautions could lead to serious or possibly
fatal injury. Always heed these precautions.
• Always ground the system to 100 Ω or less when installing the system to
protect against electrical shock.
• Always turn OFF the power supply or the backup power supply to the PLC
or the computer before attempting any of the following. Performing any of
the following with the power supply turned ON may lead to electrical
shock:
• Installing or removing the Controller Link Unit.
• Assembling the Units.
• Setting DIP or rotary switches.
• Connecting or disconnecting any cables or wiring.
• Connecting or disconnecting any terminal block.
!Caution Failure to abide by the following precautions could lead to faulty operation or
the PLC or the system or could damage the PLC or PLC Units. Always heed
these precautions.
• Always use the power supply voltages specified in the operation manuals.
An incorrect voltage may result in malfunction or burning.
• Take appropriate measures to ensure that the specified power with the
rated voltage and frequency is supplied. Be particularly careful in places
where the power supply is unstable. An incorrect power supply may result
in malfunction.
• Install external breakers and take other safety measures against short-cir-
cuiting in external wiring. Insufficient safety measures against short-cir-
cuiting may result in burning.
• Separate the line ground terminal (LG) from the functional ground termi-
nal (GR) on the Power Supply Unit before performing withstand voltage
tests or insulation resistance tests. Not doing so may result in burning.
• Do not attempt to disassemble, repair, or modify any Units. Any attempt to
do so may result in malfunction, fire, or electric shock.
• Install the Units properly as specified in the operation manuals. Improper
installation of the Units may result in malfunction.
• Be sure that all the mounting screws, terminal screws, and cable connec-
tor screws are tightened to the torque specified in the relevant manuals.
Incorrect tightening torque may result in malfunction.
• Leave the label attached to the Unit when wiring. Removing the label may
result in malfunction if foreign matter enters the Unit.
• Remove the label after the completion of wiring to ensure proper heat dis-
sipation. Leaving the label attached may result in malfunction.
• Use crimp terminals for wiring. Do not connect bare stranded wires
directly to terminals. Connection of bare stranded wires may result in
burning.
xxii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications Precautions
5
• Double-check all wiring and switch settings before turning ON the power
supply. Incorrect wiring may result in burning.
• Wire all connections correctly.
• Mount Units only after checking terminal blocks completely.
• Be sure that the Bus Connection Units and other items with locking
devices are properly locked into place. Improper locking may result in
malfunction.
• Use special packing box when transporting the Controller Link Unit. Han-
dle the product carefully so that no excessive vibration or impact is
applied to the product during transportation.
• Check the user program for proper execution before actually running it on
the Unit. Not checking the program may result in an unexpected opera-
tion.
• Confirm that no adverse effect will occur in the system before attempting
any of the following. Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation.
• Changing the operating mode of the PLC. (including the setting of the
startup operating mode)
• Force-setting/force-resetting any bit in memory.
• Changing the present value of any word or any set value in memory.
• Inappropriate settings in data link tables or routing tables can cause unex-
pected system operation. Always check table settings before starting
operation, and always test the settings in trial operation before starting or
stopping the data links in actual operation.
• CPU Bus Units will be automatically restarted when routing tables are
transferred from a Programming Device to the CPU Unit. Resetting is
required to use the new tables. Confirm that restarting the CPU Bus Units
will not adversely affect system operation before transferring routing
tables.
• Observe the following precautions when wiring the communications
cables.
• Separate the cables from the power lines or high-tension lines.
• Do not bend the cables.
• Do not pull on the cables.
• Do not place heavy objects on top of the cables.
• Route cables inside conduits.
• Before touching the Unit, be sure to first touch a grounded metallic object
in order to discharge any static build-up.
xxiii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Conformance to EC Directives
6
6
Conformance to EC Directives
The Controller Link Units conform to EMC and Low Voltage Directives as fol-
lows:
EMC Directives
OMRON devices that comply with EC Directives also conform to the related
EMC standards so that they can be more easily built into other devices or the
overall machine. The actual products have been checked for conformity to
EMC standards (see the following note). Whether the products conform to the
standards in the system used by the customer, however, must be checked by
the customer.
EMC-related performance of the OMRON devices that comply with EC Direc-
tives will vary depending on the configuration, wiring, and other conditions of
the equipment or control panel on which the OMRON devices are installed.
The customer must, therefore, perform the final check to confirm that devices
and the overall machine conform to EMC standards.
Note Applicable EMS (Electro-Magnetic Susceptibility) and EMI (Electro-Magnetic
Interference) standards in the EMC (Electro-Magnetic Compatibility) stan-
dards are as follows:
EMS
EN61131-2
EMI
EN61000-6-4
CQM1H-CLK21
C200HW-CLK21
CVM1-CLK21
CS1W-CLK21(-V1)
CJ1W-CLK21(-V1)
EN61000-6-2
Low Voltage Directive
Always ensure that devices operating at voltages of 50 to 1,000 VAC and 75
to 1,500 VDC meet the required safety standards for the PLC (EN61131-2).
The Controller Link Units that comply with EC Directives (CVM1-CLK21,
C200HW-CLK21, CS1W-CLK21(-V1), CJ1W-CLK21(-V1), and CQM1H-
CLK21) must be installed as follows:
1,2,3...
1. The Controller Link Units are designed for installation inside control pan-
els. All Controller Link Units must be installed within control panels.
2. Use reinforced insulation or double insulation for the DC power supplies
used for the communications power supply and I/O power supplies.
3. The Controller Link Units that comply with EC Directives also conform to
the Common Emission Standard (EN61000-6-4). Radiated emission char-
acteristics (10-m regulations) may vary depending on the configuration of
the control panel used, other devices connected to the control panel, wir-
ing, and other conditions. You must therefore confirm that the overall ma-
chine or equipment complies with EC Directives.
xxiv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECTION 1
Features and System Configuration
This section provides basic information on Controller Link Networks, and will give the reader an overview of what
1-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1-1 What Is the Controller Link? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1-2 Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2 Specifications and Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-1 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-2 General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-3 Communications Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-4 Controller Link Unit Models and PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-5 Devices for Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-6 Programming Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3 Selection of Communications Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4 Basic Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5 Application Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
2
8
11
11
13
14
16
19
21
25
26
27
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
Section 1-1
1-1 Overview
1-1-1 What Is the Controller Link?
The Controller Link is an FA network that can send and receive large data
packets flexibly and easily among the OMRON C200HX/HG/HE Programma-
ble Controllers (PLCs), CS-series PLCs, CJ-series PLCs, CVM1 PLCs, CV-
series PLCs, CQM1H-series PLCs, and IBM PC/AT or compatible computers.
The Controller Link supports data links that enable data sharing and a mes-
sage service that enables sending and receiving data when required. Data
link areas can be freely set to create a flexible data link system and effectively
use data areas.
High-volume data transmissions are possible at high speed and so a wide
range of networks, from low-level systems to high, can be easily created.
There are two types of networks: networks connected with shielded twisted-
pair cable and networks connected with optical fiber cable. Using a Repeater
Unit in networks connected with twisted-pair cable makes it possible to use a
variety of different wiring configurations, such as T-branch wiring, long-dis-
tance wiring, and partial conversion to optical fiber. (Refer to the CS1W-
CLK12, CVM1-CLK12 Optical Ring Controller Link Units Operation Manual
(W370) for detail on optical fiber connections.)
The functions of a Controller Link Network are illustrated below.
Manual settings
Controller Link
Data link
Automatic settings
Message service
RAS functions
SEND/RECV instructions
CMND instruction
Status area function
Error log function
Polling node backup
Wired System
(Twisted-pair Cable)
CS-series, CJ-series, C200HX/HG/HE, CVM1, CV-series, and CQM1H-series
PLCs
CS1W-CLK21-V1
Controller Link Unit
CJ1W-CLK21-V1
Controller Link Unit
C200HW-CLK21
CVM1-CLK21
CQM1H-CLK21
Controller Link Unit
IBM PC/AT or
compatible
Controller Link Unit Controller Link Unit
CVM1, CV-series
PLC
CQM1H-series
PLC
C200HX/HG/HE
PLC
CS-series
PLC
CJ-series PLC
C
P
U
C
P
U
C
P
U
C
P
U
C
P
U
Twisted-pair cable
3G8F7-CLK21-E-V1
Controller Link
Support Board
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
Section 1-1
Connecting Repeater Units Using Twisted-pair Cable (Wired Units)
T-Branch Wiring
Wired Controller Link Unit
Wired Controller Link Unit
CS1W-RPT01
Repeater Units
Twisted-pair cable
Twisted-pair cable
Long-distance Wiring
Wired Controller Link Unit
Twisted-pair cable
CS1W-RPT01
Repeater Units
500 m max.
(See note.)
Twisted-pair
cable
Wired Controller Link Unit
500 m max.
(See note.)
Twisted-pair cable
500 m max. (See note.)
Note: At 2 Mbit/s
Converting Part of the Transmission Line to Optical Fiber
Wired Controller Link Unit
Wired Controller Link Unit
CS1W-RPT02 or
CS1W-RPT03
Repeater Units
Twisted-pair cable
Twisted-pair cable
Optical cable (H-PCF or GI)
Two Repeater Units of the same model must be used when part of the trans-
mission line uses optical fiber.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
Section 1-1
Maximum 62-node Configuration
Wired Controller Link Unit
CS1W-RPT01
Repeater Unit
Twisted-pair cable
31 nodes max.
Wired Controller Link Unit
Twisted-pair cable
31 nodes max.
The following Controller Link Units/Support Boards must be used to construct
a network with more than 32 nodes:
CS1W-CLK21-V1
CJ1W-CLK21-V1
3G8F7-CLK21-V1
Note
1. The network will not operate correctly unless all nodes within the network
use the above Units/Boards.
2. Only node addresses 1 through 32 can be used on networks for which 62
nodes have not been enabled.
Connecting Repeater
CS-series and CVM1/CV-series PLCs only.
Units Using H-PCF Optical
Fiber Cable
Token Ring Mode
CS1W-CLK12-V1
Controller Link Unit
(token ring mode)
CVM1-CLK12
Controller Link Unit
(token ring mode)
CS-series PLC
CVM1/CV-series PLC
Personal computer
C
P
U
C
P
U
H-PCF Optical fiber cable
(ring connection)
Backup
power supply
(24 V DC)
3G8F7-CLK12-V1
Controller Link Support Board
for PCI Bus (token ring mode)
C
P
U
C
P
U
CS-series PLC
CVM1/CV-series PLC
CS1W-CLK12-V1
Controller Link Unit
(token ring mode)
CVM1-CLK12
Controller Link Unit
(token ring mode)
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
Section 1-1
Token Bus Mode
Personal
computer
PC/AT or
compatible
CVM1-CLK12
Controller Link Unit
(token bus mode)
CS1W-CLK12-V1
Controller Link Unit
(token bus mode)
CS1W-CLK11
Controller Link Unit
Personal computer
CVM1/CV-series
PLC
CS-series PLC
CS-series PLC
C
P
U
C
P
U
C
P
U
H-PCF Optical
fiber cable
(daisy chain
connection)
3G8F5-CLK11
Controller Link
Support Board for
ISA Bus
3G8F7-CLK12-V1
Controller Link
Support Board
for PCI Bus
Backup
power supply
(24 V DC)
(token bus mode)
Connecting Repeater
Units Using GI Optical
Fiber Cable
CS-series and CVM1/CV-series PLCs only.
Token Ring Mode
CS1W-CLK52-V1
Controller Link Unit
(token ring mode)
CVM1-CLK52
Controller Link Unit
(token ring mode)
CS-series PLC
CVM1/CV-series PLC
Personal computer
C
P
U
C
P
U
GI Optical fiber cable
(ring connection)
Backup
power supply
(24 V DC)
3G8F7-CLK52-V1
Controller Link
Support Board
for PCI Bus
C
P
U
C
P
U
(token ring mode)
CS-series PLC
CVM1/CV-series PLC
CS1W-CLK52-V1
Controller Link Unit
(token ring mode)
CVM1-CLK52
Controller Link Unit
(token ring mode)
Token Bus Mode
CS1W-CLK52-V1
Controller Link Unit
(token bus mode)
CS1W-CLK52-V1
Controller Link Unit
(token bus mode)
CVM1-CLK52-V1
Controller Link Unit
(token bus mode)
Personal computer
CVM1/CV-series
PLC
CS-series PLC
CS-series PLC
C
P
U
C
P
U
C
P
U
3G8F7-CLK52-V1
Controller Link
Support Board
for PCI Bus
GI Optical fiber cable
(daisy chain
connection)
Backup
power supply
(24 V DC)
(token bus mode)
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
Section 1-1
Data Links
Data links allow the constant sharing of data in predetermined data areas
between nodes, between PLCs, or between a PLC and an IBM PC/AT or com-
patible computer on the network. Data links do not require the use of commu-
nications programs on the PLC (CPU Unit) or IBM PC/AT or compatible
computer. Data written in the send area of the local node will be automatically
sent to the receive area of other nodes.
The I/O area (CIO area), link area (LR area), DM Area area (DM area), and
extended DM Area area (EM area) can be freely set in the send or receive
area. (The area used for sending or receiving data using the data link function
is called “data link area.”)
The data link area can be set automatically or manually.
Controller Link Unit
PLC
PLC
PLC
Constant data exchange (sharing)
Automatic Setting
Manual Setting
Used for simple data link processing. Data link can be performed by simply
setting parameters in the DM area of the PLC.
Send data size per node is the same for all nodes. All nodes participating in
the data link share the same data.
Used for flexible data link processing depending on each system.
Using the Controller Link Support Software, individual data link tables can be
set for each node and the data link area can be freely allocated for each node.
Send data size per node can be freely set. It is also possible to set nodes for
only send or receive data. With the Controller Link Unit, the data link can be
set to receive only a part of the data link area of other nodes.
Message Service
This function controls data transmission with particular nodes, reading or writ-
ing of status data, changing of operation modes, etc., by executing communi-
cations instructions on a program. The communications instructions include
SEND/RECV instructions for data transmission and CMND instructions for
issuing various commands.
Controller Link Unit
PLC
PLC
PLC
Data transmission (under certain conditions)
as required
Communications instruction
User program
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
Section 1-1
SEND/RECV
The SEND or RECV instruction sends or receives data in an area of a particu-
lar node.
The SEND instruction sends data from an area of the local node and writes to
an area in the designated node.
The RECV instruction requests the designated node to send area data and
writes the data to the local node.
CMND
The CMND instruction issues a command to read or write data of other nodes,
control, or read error logs. With the Controller LInk Unit, OMRON’s command
protocol called “FINS commands” is used.
Note Since the C200HX/HG/HE PLCs do not support the CMND instructions, arbi-
trary commands cannot be issued.
RAS
RAS performs real-time monitoring of the network status. If an error occurs in
the network, RAS records and displays the time and contents of the error.
Status Area
Data Link Status Area
When the data link function is used, the data link status is reflected in the data
link status area of the PLC.
Network Status Area Other than the Data Link:
The network status such as the state of node participation is reflected in the
status area of the PLC.
Controller Link Unit
Controller Link Unit
CPU Unit
CPU Unit
Status Area
•
•
Data link status
Status other than the data link
Error Log
The error log function records contents (codes) and times of errors that occur
in the network into the RAM or EEPROM, up to the maximum of 39 errors.
The recorded errors can be read using the Controller Link Support Software
or the message service function.
Controller Link Unit Controller Link Unit
Controller Link Unit
Controller Link Unit
C200HX/HG/
HE CPU Unit
CJ-series
CPU Unit
CS-series
CPU Unit
CVM1, CV-
series CPU
Unit
Error log table
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
Section 1-1
1-1-2 Features
The Controller Link Network has the following features to meet the various
requirements of FA sites.
Data Links
Flexible and efficient data links can be created for large capacities of data as
listed below.
Item
Specifications
Number of send words
per node
1,000 max.
Number of send and
C200HX/HE/HG, CVM1, CV-series, and CQM1H-series PLCs: 8,000 max.
receive words per node
CS/CJ-series PLCs:
Pre-Ver. 1.2: 12,000 words max.
Unit Ver. 1.2 or later: 20,000 words max.
IBM PC/AT or compatible: 32,000 max. (PCI or ISA Board)
Data links can be automatically set, or they can be set by the user to freely
change the sizes of the data areas used. A data link can also be created so
that one node receives only part of the data sent from another node. This
function enables users to receive only the required data, thereby increasing
data link efficiency.
Data link tables for which the number of send and receive words exceeds
12,000 words can be set using CX-Net in CX-Programmer Ver. 5.0 or higher.
Message Service
The message service can send and receive up to 2,012 bytes of data (includ-
ing the FINS header), allowing high volumes of data to be sent and received
without having to split it up.
Twisted-pair Cable or Optical Fiber Cable Connection
The Controller Link Units can be connected to the network using either
shielded twisted-pair cables or optical fiber cables. Select the system that
suits your application.
Features of Twisted-pair Cable
Twisted-pair cable is easy to connect and maintain. The cable can be pro-
cessed much more easily than coaxial or optical cable, thereby reducing the
cost of tools and assembly time.
Connections are made to a terminal block on the Controller Link Unit and to a
special connector on the Controller Link Support Board for easy system
assembly and modification.
The network is equipped with the required terminating resistance built into the
Units allowing the terminating resistance to be easily set at both ends of the
network using a simple switch.
Features of Optical Fiber Cable
Optical Fiber Cable has superior noise resistance, so this system can provide
highly reliable communications even in very noisy conditions.
The communications distance can be up to 20 km total (1 km max. between
nodes) if H-PCF cable is used and up to 30 km total (2 km max. between
nodes) if GI cable is used, which allows long-distance or large-scale net-
works.
Once the Optical Fiber Cable has been fitted with special connectors, the
cables can be easily connected or disconnected.
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
Section 1-1
Compatible with Different Node Configurations
The following Controller Link Units are available for communications between
different models. It must be noted, however, that the wired system and optical
system cannot exist in one Controller Link Network.
Wired System
• Controller Link Unit for CS/CJ-series Programmable Controllers
• Controller Link Unit for C200HX/HG/HE Programmable Controllers
• Controller Link Unit for CVM1 and CV-series Programmable Control-
lers
• Controller Link Unit for CQM1H-series Programmable Controllers
• Controller Link Support Board for IBM PC/ATs or compatibles (ISA or
PCI bus)
Flexible Inter-network Connections
The Controller Link Network can connect to other networks (Ethernet, SYS-
MAC NET, SYSMAC LINK, and another Controller Link network) via CVM1,
CV-series, CS-series, or CJ-series PLCs. By installing a Communications Unit
for the Ethernet, SYSMAC NET or SYSMAC LINK on the same CS/CJ-series
or CV-series PLC as a Controller Link Unit, a message service can be created
with nodes in interconnected networks through the CVM1 or CV-series PLC.
Up to eight network levels are possible.
Note CS/CJ-series PLC cannot be connected directly to SYSMAC NET networks
and CJ-series PLC cannot be connected directly to SYSMAC LINK networks
The programming and monitoring of other PLCs on the network can be con-
ducted from Programming Devices connected to the PLC’s CPU Unit. Inter-
network connections are possible in this case also and can cover up to eight
network levels.
Use a CS/CJ-series CPU Unit with unit version 2.0 or later and CX-Program-
mer Ver. 4.0 or higher to enable internetwork connections for up to eight net-
works.
Improved Error Handling
An error log enables quick handling of errors by recording the time the error
occurred and error details. The current Controller Link Unit and Support Board
status are also available, as are the data link and network status.
When an error occurs in the polling node that controls the Controller Link Net-
work, another node automatically becomes the polling node. This prevents an
error at a single node from influencing other nodes on the network, achieving
a highly reliable system.
Using Repeater Units for T-Branches, Network Extensions, Network Expansions,
Converting Network Sections to Optical Fiber, and Device Modularization
T-Branches enable greater wiring freedom during layout, restructuring, and expansion of
networks.
Wire-to-Wire Repeater Units enable Controller Link T-Branches. T-Branches
provide the following advantages:
• Cabling can conform to the layout of equipment.
• It is possible to add nodes by adding or inserting Repeater Units at
branch points of an existing wired Controller Link system.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
Section 1-1
• If Repeater Units are installed at likely future branch points in the network
in advance, new nodes can be added by simply connecting them to these
Repeater Units.
The total length of wired networks can be extended.
At a baud rate of 2 Mbps, conventional wired networks can be up to 500 m
long. By using two Repeater Units, this can be extended to a maximum of
1.5 km.
The maximum number of nodes can be extended to 62 for wired networks.
By combining version-1 Controller Link Units/Support Boards and a Repeater
Unit, it is possible to construct networks containing up to 62 nodes.
Improved noise resistance through the use of optical cabling.
By installing two Wire-to-Optical Repeater Units, optical cabling can be used
for sections of the network that are the source of noise.
Devices can be modularized.
• Devices can be modularized according to Repeater Units, making wiring
easier when adding, removing, or modifying devices.
• When starting up devices, components can be added to the network and
debugged as they are completed.
Features and Functions of Version-1 Models
The following features and functions apply to the CS1W-CLK21-V1 and
CJ1W-CLK21-V1 Controller Link Units and the 3G8F7-CLK21-V1 Controller
Link Support Board only.
Up to 62 nodes can be connected.
Overview
When a CS1W-RPT01 Repeater Unit is used, the maximum number of nodes
that can be used in the network increases to 62. (The previous limit was 32.)
Method
Use Repeater Units and turn ON bit 11 (Wired Network 62 Node Enable Bit)
in the DM Parameter Area software switch D30000 + 100 × Unit No. of all
nodes to enable a maximum of 62 nodes.
Restrictions
The maximum 62 nodes cannot be achieved if version-1 models and pre-ver-
sion-1 models are used together in the same network.
Automatic data link creation is possible with 1:N allocations.
Overview
It is possible to perform unequal 1:N allocations of data between nodes with
automatic data link creation. This makes it easy to perform data links that for-
merly required the user to manually edit data link parameters.
The following four automatic data link creation patterns can be used:
• Equality layout (the previous pattern)
• 1:N allocation, common type
• 1:N allocation, 1 to 1 type
• 1:N allocation, chain type
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications and Configurations
Section 1-2
Method
Allocation addresses and sizes are all specified using the Automatic Data Link
Creation Parameters (D30000 × Unit No. + 12 to 20) in the DM Parameter
Area. These values can be set using the CX-Net in the CX-Programmer ver-
sion 3.2 or higher.
Objective
This function is effective in applications that collect data from slave PLCs into
a master PLC.
Restrictions
Automatic data link creation with 1:N allocations cannot be performed if ver-
sion-1 models and pre-version-1 models are used together in the same net-
work.
Change manually created data link tables during data link operation.
Overview
It is possible to modify a manually created data link table while data links are
running.
Note This is possible only with manually created data link tables. Any attempt to
change automatically created data link tables when data links are running will
fail with an error message saying that the tables cannot be edited during data
link operation will be displayed.
Method
This function can be set using the CX-Net in CX-Programmer version 3.2 or
higher.
Objectives
• In systems that operate non-stop and cannot be turned OFF, this function
makes it possible to change the data link table to accommodate the addi-
tion of new nodes and to transfer data link tables without having to stop
manually set data link communications.
• If this function is combined with the use of Repeater Units to add network
nodes, it becomes possible to construct systems of greater flexibility.
Operation
When a node is being modified online, this function temporarily stops refresh-
ing of data link data until modifications have been completed.
Nodes will participate in data links after changes to the data link table have
been completed.
1-2 Specifications and Configurations
1-2-1 System Configuration
Wired Systems
Wired systems can be used to connect CS/CJ-series PLCs, C200HX/HG/HE
PLCs, CVM1 PLCs, CV-series PLCs, and IBM PC/AT or compatible comput-
ers.
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications and Configurations
Section 1-2
CS1W-CLK21-V1
Controller Link Unit
CJ1W-CLK21-V1
Controller Link Unit
C200HW-CLK21
CVM1-CLK21
CQM1H-CLK21
Controller Link Unit
IBM PC/AT or
compatible
Controller Link Unit Controller Link Unit
CVM1, CV-series
PLC
CQM1H-series
PLC
C200HX/HG/HE
PLC
CS-series
PLC
CJ-series PLC
C
P
U
C
P
U
C
P
U
C
P
U
C
P
U
Twisted-pair cable
3G8F7-CLK21-E-V1
Controller Link
Support Board
Connecting Repeater Units Using Twisted-pair Cable in Wired Systems
T-Branch Wiring
Wired Controller Link Unit
Wired Controller Link Unit
CS1W-RPT01
Repeater Units
Twisted-pair cable
Twisted-pair cable
Long-distance Wiring
Wired Controller Link Unit
Twisted-pair cable
CS1W-RPT01
Repeater Units
500 m max.
(See note.)
Twisted-pair
cable
Wired Controller Link Unit
500 m max.
(See note.)
Twisted-pair cable
500 m max. (See note.)
Note: At 2 Mbit/s
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications and Configurations
Section 1-2
Converting Part of the Transmission Line to Optical Fiber
Wired Controller Link Unit
Wired Controller Link Unit
CS1W-RPT02 or
CS1W-RPT03
Repeater Units
Twisted-pair cable
Twisted-pair cable
Optical cable (H-PCF or GI)
Two Repeater Units of the same model must be used when part of the trans-
mission line uses optical fiber.
Maximum Configuration of 62 Nodes
Wired Controller Link Unit
CS1W-RPT01
Repeater Unit
Twisted-pair cable
32 nodes max.
Wired Controller Link Unit
Twisted-pair cable
32 nodes max.
The following Controller Link Units/Support Boards must be used to construct
a network with more than 32 nodes:
CS1W-CLK21-V1
CJ1W-CLK21-V1
3G8F7-CLK21-E-V1
Note
1. The network will not operate correctly unless all nodes within the network
use the above Units/Boards.
2. Only node addresses 1 through 32 can be used on networks for which 62
nodes have not been enabled.
1-2-2 General Specifications
General specifications are the same for the C200HX/HG/HE, CS-series, CJ-
series, CVM1, CV-series, and CQM1H-series PLCs.
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications and Configurations
Section 1-2
1-2-3 Communications Specifications
Wired System
Items
Specifications
Communications method
Code
N:N token bus
Manchester code
Baseband code
Modulation
Synchronization
Transmission path form
Flag synchronization (conforms to HDLC frames)
Multi-drop bus
Baud rate and maximum
transmission distance
The maximum transmission distance varies with the baud rate as follows:
2 Mbps: 500 m
1 Mbps: 800 m
500 Kbps: 1 km
Media
Specified shielded twisted-pair cable
Number of signal lines: 2, shield line: 1
Node connection method
PLC: Connected to a terminal block
IBM PC/AT or compatible: Connected via a special connector (included)
Maximum number of nodes 32 or 62 nodes (See note 2.)
Communications functions Data links and message service
Number of data link words
Transmission area per node: 1,000 words (2,000 bytes) max.
Data link area (send/receive words) per node
CS/CJ Series:
20,000 words max. (unit Ver. 1.2 or later)
12,000 words max. (pre-Ver. 1.2)
C200HX/HG/HE, CVM1/CV, CQM1H: 8,000 words max.
Personal computer: 32,000 or 62,000 words max. (See note 3.)
Number of data link words in one network (total transmission):
32,000 words (64,000 bytes) or 62,000 words max. (See note 3.)
Data link areas
Message length
RAS functions
Bit-access areas (IR, AR, LR, CIO), DM Area (DM), and extended DM Area (EM)
2,012 bytes max. (including the header)
Polling node backup function
Self-diagnosis function (hardware checking at startup)
Echoback test and broadcast test (using the FINS command)
Watchdog timer
Error log function
Error control
Manchester code check
CRC check (CCITT X16 + X12 + X5 + 1)
Note
1. The maximum distance between nodes depends on the connector and ca-
ble processing methods.
2. At least one Repeater Unit is required to construct networks that uses a
node address higher than 32. The following Controller Link Units/Support
Boards must also be used, and the Wired Network 62 Node Enable Bit of
the DM Parameter Area software switch of all nodes must be turned ON
(62 nodes max.).
CS1W-CLK21-V1, CJ1W-CLK21-V1, and 3G8F7-CLK21-V1
3. 62,000 data link words applies to configurations of 62 nodes.
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications and Configurations
Section 1-2
Communications Specifications when Using the CS1W-RPT01 Repeater Unit in a Wired
Network
Item
Within 1 segment (See
note 1.)
Entire network
Transmission path form
Multi-drop
Tree type (Connection of
segments with Repeaters)
Baud rate and maximum trans- 2 Mbps: 500 m
mission distance (See note 2.) 1 Mbps: 800 m
500 Kbps: 1 km
2 Mbps: 1.5 km
1 Mbps: 2.4 km
500 Kbps: 3.0 km
Maximum number of nodes
Total number of Control- Controller Link Units/Sup-
ler Link Units + Repeater port Boards (See note 3.):
Units: 32 nodes (See
62 nodes
note 5.)
Maximum number of Repeater ---
stages (See note 4.)
2 stages
Note
1. Specifications within a segment are identical to the specifications of a
Wired Controller Link Network.
2. Maximum transmission distance: Total length of cables in the longest path
connecting any two nodes.
3. A maximum of 62 nodes is possible only when using CS1W-CLK21-V1,
CJ1W-CLK21-V1 and 3G8F7-CLK21-V1 Units.
4. Maximum number of Repeater stages: The maximum number of Repeater
Units that can be inserted into the path connecting any two nodes. For
wire-to-optical connection, two Repeater Units make up a single set, which
is counted as a single Repeater stage.
5. The Repeater Units each have a unique node address. Up to 32 Units,
consisting of Controller Link Units and Repeater Units, can be connected
within a single segment.
: Controller Link Unit/Support
Board
Wire
: Wire-to-wire Repeater Unit
Optical
fiber
cable
: Wire-to-optical Repeater Unit
(two Units used in a pair)
: Range of a single segment
Note: The Repeater Unit will be
counted in the number of
nodes for each segment that
it is connected to.
Specifications of Optical Fiber Cables Used with Wire-to-Optical
Connections
Item
H-PCF type
GI type
Optical fiber cable
H-PCF 200/230 µm two- GI 50/125 µm two-core cable
core cable
or GI 62.5/125 µm two-core
cable
Maximum transmission
distance (See note 2.)
Adhesion-polished: 1 km 50/125 µm: 1 km
Crimp cut: 800 m 62.5/125 µm: 2 km
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications and Configurations
Section 1-2
1-2-4 Controller Link Unit Models and PLCs
Wired System
There are five Controller Link Units: One for CVM1 and CV-series PLCs, one
each for CS-series and CJ-series PLCs, one for the C200HX/HG/HE PLC,
and one for CQM1H-series PLCs.
Item
Specifications
Model
CS1W-CLK21-V1
CJ1W-CLK21-V1
C200HW-CLK21
External appear-
ance
CL
K2
1
RUN
ERC
ERH
INS
SD
RD
TER
M/A
LNK
4
E D C A
56
2
1
8
U
NIT
0
9
No.
1 2 3 4
5
NODE
No.
0
9 8 7 6
x101
1 2 3
5
0
9 8 7 6
ON
x100
1
ON
SW1
2
1
2
BAUD
RATE
TER SW
ON
BD
BD
H
L
SHLD
Installation
devices
None required.
CS-series PLCs
None required.
C200HW-COM01/04 Commu-
nications Board and
C200HW-CE001/002/012 Bus
Connection Unit
PLC
CJ-series PLCs
C200HX/HG/HE PLCs
(Except C200HE-CPU11(-Z))
Max No. of Units 8 maximum for unit Ver. 1.2 or
8 maximum for unit Ver. 1.2 or
2 maximum
per PLC
later and 4 maximum for pre-Ver. later and 4 maximum for pre-Ver.
CPU Backplane
1.2 Units.
1.2 Units on CPU or Expansion
Rack
CPU
Unit
CPU Backplane
CPU
Unit
2 max.
Of these
slots,
installation is
possible in up
to 8 slots (unit
Ver. 1.2 or
later).
2/3/5/8/10 slots
Installation in
up to 4 slots
is possible for
pre-Ver. 1.2
Units.
Expansion
Backplane
3/5/8/10 slots
Installation site
Install onto a CPU Backplane or Install onto a CPU Rack or
CS-series Expansion Backplane Expansion Rack (Classified as a plane. (Classified as a Special
Install onto a CPU Back-
(Classified as a CPU Bus Unit.)
CPU Bus Unit.)
I/O Unit for communications.)
Controller Link Unit
Storage location CPU Bus Unit Area (in the CPU Unit parameter area)
for network
parameters
Storage location CPU Unit parameter area
for routing tables
DM 6450 to DM 6499 in CPU
Unit
Weight
400 g
110 g
400 g
Current con-
sumption
330 mA
350 mA
300 mA
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications and Configurations
Section 1-2
Item
Specifications
CQM1H-CLK21
Model
CVM1-CLK21
External
appearance
Installation
devices
None required.
None required.
PLC
CVM1 and CV-series PLCs
4 maximum
CQM1H-CPU51/61
1 maximum
Max No. of
Units per PLC
CPU
Unit
Power Supply
Unit
CPU Backplane
Of these
3/5/10 slots
14, 16, or
21 slots,
installa
tion is
CPU
Unit
Connect
here.
possible
Expansion CPU
Backplane
in up to 4
slots.
11 slots
Installation site Install onto a CPU Backplane or
Expansion CPU Backplane (Classi- cations Unit between Power
fied as a CPU Bus Unit.) Supply Unit and CPU Unit.
Connected as a Communi-
Storage loca-
tion for net-
work
CPU Bus Unit Area (in the CPU Unit Controller Link Unit
parameter area)
parameters
Storage loca-
tion for routing
tables
CPU Unit parameter area
DM 6450 to DM 6499 in
CPU Unit
Weight
550 g
200 g
Current con-
sumption
300 mA
290 mA
Note A Controller Link Support Board can be installed into an IBM PC/AT or com-
patible computer to connect the computer to the network. Refer to the Con-
troller Link Support Boards Operation Manual (W307) for details.
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications and Configurations
Section 1-2
CS/CJ-series Controller Link Unit Models
Item
Unit Ver. 1.2 (-V1
suffix)
Pre-Ver. 1.2 (-V1
suffix)
Without -V1 suffix
Model
CS1W-CLK21-V1
CJ1W-CLK21-V1
CS1W-CLK21-V1
CJ1W-CLK21-V1
CS1W-CLK21
CJ1W-CLK21
Maximum number of send/receive data link
words (data link area for sending/receiving that
is created for a single node in a single CPU Unit)
20,000 words max.
12,000 words max.
Data Link Area
Area 1 and Area 2 can Area 1 and Area 2 cannot be allocated in the
be allocated in the
same area.
same area.
Maximum number of Units connected to a single 8 Units
CPU Unit
4 Units
Automatic data link setting
Select from equality layout, 1:N allocations
(common type, 1:1 type, chain type)
Equality layout only
Not supported.
32 Units
Changing data link allocations during active data Supported. (Data link tables can be changed
links
during active data links.)
Maximum number of nodes that can be con-
nected
62 Units (requires CS1W-RPT01 Repeater
Unit).
Mixed use
Supported (See note.)
Note A network can contain both nodes with maximum of 20,000 data link words
and nodes with 12,000 data link words. When models with -V1 suffix and
those without -V1 suffix are both used in the same network, 1:N automatic
data links and configurations of 62 nodes cannot be used.
Use the CX-Net in CX-Programmer version 5.0 or higher to set a data link
area in which the number of send and receive words exceeds 12,000 words.
CX-Programmer version 3.2 or higher can be used to change data link alloca-
tions while manually set data links are active.
Up to eight CS/CJ-series Controller Link Units with unit version 1.2 or later
can be connected to a single CPU Unit. When connecting multiple Controller
Link Units to the CPU Unit, consider the current consumption of the CPU Unit
and each CPU Bus Unit before selecting the Power Supply Unit. For details on
Controller Link Unit current consumption, refer to Controller Link Unit Models
and PLCs on page 16. For details on current consumption of each Unit, refer
to the operation manual of the PLC that is being used.
The following table provides an example of current consumption.
Example: Using the C200HW-PA204 Power Supply Unit supplying a maxi-
mum current of 4.6 A (5 V) and maximum power of 30 W.
Name
Model
Current consumption
per Unit (A)
Number of
Units
Current consumption
(A)
CPU Backplane (8 slots)
CPU Unit
CS1W-BC083
0.11 A
0.82 A
1
1
8
0.11 A
0.82 A
2.64 A
CS1H-CPU67H
Controller Link Unit (Optical) CS1W-CLK21-V1 0.33 A
Total
3.57 (power consump-
tion: 17.85 W)
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications and Configurations
Section 1-2
1-2-5 Devices for Connection
To set up a Controller Link Network, the following devices are needed in addi-
tion to a Controller Link Unit and a PLC.
Communications Cables
The following shielded twisted-pair cables are recommended for Wired Con-
troller Link Network connections.
Model
Manufacturer
Remarks
Li2Y-FCY2 x 0.56 qmm
Kromberg & Schubert,
Komtec Department
German company
Draka Cables Industrial
Spanish company
1 x 2 x AWG – 20PE +
Tr.CUSN + PVC
#9207
Belden
USA company
ESVC 0.5 x 2 C-1362
ESNC 0.5 x 2 C-99-087B
Bando Densen Co.
Japanese company
Japanese company
Nihon Electric Wire &
Cable Co.
Note Use the special connector provided with the Board to connect the Controller
Link Support Board to the network.
Repeater Units (when Required)
The following Repeater Units can be used to facilitate the use of T-Branch wir-
ing, long-distance wiring, and the addition or removal of nodes.
Three types of Repeater Unit are available for use with different transmission
line types (i.e., connection methods).
Item
Specifications
Model
CS1W-RPT01
CS1W-RPT02
CS1W-RPT03
External appearance
Supported Units/
Boards
All Controller Link Units/Boards for wired networks.
Note To construct a network that can contain up to 62 nodes, it is necessary to use version-1
models, which support 62 nodes.
Transmission line
Twisted-pair cable
H-PCF cable (optical
two-core cable)
GI cable (optical two-
core cable; 62.5/125 µm,
50/125 µm)
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications and Configurations
Section 1-2
Item
Specifications
Transmission line
format
Multi-drop
Tree
1:1 type
1:1 type
T-Branch Wiring
Partial Conversion to Optical
Wire cable
Wire cable
Repeater Unit
Repeater Unit
Repeater Unit
Optical cable
Long-distance Wiring
500 m max.
(at 2 Mbit/s)
Repeater Unit
500 m max.
(at 2 Mbit/s)
62-node Configuration
31 nodes max.
Repeater Unit
31 nodes max.
Installation
Weight
Units are not mounted on the PLC, but are attached to DIN Track or screw-mounted.
126 g 113 g (excluding mount- 116 g (excluding mount-
ing bracket) ing bracket)
Current consumption 24 V DC at 60 mA max.
24 V DC at 60 mA max. 24 V DC at 70 mA max.
Power supply volt-
age
24 V DC
Allowable power
supply voltage range
20.4 to 26.4 V DC (24 V DC −15 to 10%)
2.5 A max. at 24 V DC (5 ms after startup)
Inrush current
Note
1. Repeater Units do not use a node address.
2. See Connection Procedure for an explanation of how Repeater Units are
used.
3. The following Power Supply Unit is recommended: OMRON S82K Series
Relay Terminal Blocks
The following Relay Terminal Block can be used to make maintenance easier
by facilitating replacement of the Controller Link Unit after system operation
has begun.
Name
Model
Remarks
Relay Terminal Block for
Wired Controller Link Units
CJ1W-TB101
Cannot be used on the nodes
on the ends of the network
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications and Configurations
Section 1-2
Note Normally, the communications cable must be disconnected from a Wired Con-
troller Link Unit to replace it. Doing this, however, will interrupt communica-
tions on the network, requiring that all node be turned OFF to ensure safety
before replacing a Unit. With the above Relay Terminal Block, a Controller
Link Unit can be replaced by turning OFF only the specific Unit being
replaced, i.e., without turning OFF any other Units. The communications
cables are left connected to the Relay Terminal Block and only the Relay Ter-
minal Block is removed from the Controller Link Unit. (The built-in terminating
resistance connected at the Units at the end of the network prevents using the
Relay Terminal Block on the end Units.) Refer to Appendix C Using the Relay
Terminal Block for details on using the Terminal Relay Block.
1-2-6 Programming Devices
A Programming Device for the PLC, the Controller Link Support Software, or
CX-Programmer are needed to use a Controller Link Network.
Programming Device for the PLC
One of the following Programming Devices is necessary when using the auto-
matically setting data links or the message service.
Programming
CPU Unit
Start-up node
Console
or
Controller Link
+
CX-Programmer
Software switches (DM Area)
IBM PC/AT or
compatible
The following operations are possible.
• Selecting manual or automatic setting for data links.
• Setting the data link mode to “automatic” (software switch setting).
• Starting/stopping data links (Start Bit: ON/OFF)
• Programming for the message service.
• Reading (monitoring) the network status.
Programming
Device
External
appearance
Model
Applicable PLCs
CX-Programmer
(for PLC)
CS/CJ-series,
WS02-CXPC@-E-
V@
C200HX/HG/HE,
CVM1-series, and
CQM1H-series PLCs
Programming
Console
CQM1-PRO01-E
C200H-PRO27-E
C200HX/HG/HE,
C200H/C200HS,
CQM1, and
CQM1H-series PLCs
CVM1-PRS21-EV1
CVM1 and
CV-series PLCs
Note
1. Use the CX-Net in CX-Programmer version 5.0 or higher to set data link
send and receive areas that exceed 12,000 words, and to set data link ta-
bles that allocate the same area for Area 1 and Area 2.
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications and Configurations
Section 1-2
2. For automatic data link creation with 1:N allocations or when changing
data link tables while the data link is active (CS1W-CLK21-V1 and CJ1W-
CLK21-V1), use the CX-Net in CX-Programmer version 3.2 or higher.
Controller Link Support Software (Version 2.00)
The Controller Link Support Software can be used to manually set data links,
to set Controller Link parameters, and to monitor the Controller Link Network.
The Controller Link Support Software is run on a personal computer con-
nected to a C200HX/HG/HE, CVM1, or CV-series PLC or a personal com-
puter in which a Controller Link Support Board has been mounted.
• Setting the data link mode to “manual” (creating and storing data link
tables).
• Starting/stopping data links.
• Reading (monitoring) network status.
• Reading error logs.
• Setting routing tables.
• Testing the Network.
• Changing network parameters.
• Reading the network connection configuration data and status (in token-
ring mode only).
Using an Independent
Computer
A computer that is not part of the Network can be used to control the Control-
ler Link Network.
C200HX/HG/HE and
CQM1H-series PLCs
CVM1 and CV-series PLCs
Controller
Link Unit
Controller
Link Unit
Nodes
Nodes
+
CPU Unit
CPU Unit
Controller Link
Support Software
RS-232C
IBM PC/AT or
compatible
Transmissions
CS-series PLCs
Controller
Link Unit
Nodes
Setting data link tables
CPU Unit
RS-232C
C200HX/HG/HE,
CVM1, and CV-series
PLCs
CS-series PLC
Note
1. The Controller Link Support Software cannot be connected to a CS/CJ-se-
ries PLC. It is possible to monitor and set a Controller Link Unit on a CS/
CJ-series via the network by connecting the computer running the Control-
ler Link Support Software to a C200HX/HG/HE, CVM1, CV-series, or
CQM1H-series PLC.
2. The Controller Link Support Software can be used as a part of the SYS-
MAC Support Software.
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications and Configurations
Section 1-2
Using a Computer Node
A computer that is a node on the Network can also be used to control the
Controller Link Network.
IBM PC/AT or compatible
Controller Link
Support Software
+
Controller Link
Support Board
Setting data link tables
Software
External
appearance
Model
Applicable PLCs
Remarks
Controller Purchased
Link Sup- separately
C200HW-ZW3AT2-
EV2
CS/CJ, C200HX/ For IBM PC/AT or
HG/HE, CVM1,
CV-series, or
CQM1H-series
PLC
compatible
port Soft-
ware
Provided
with Con-
3G8F5-CLK21-EV2
For Controller
Link Support
Board (included
with the Board)
(Wired systems)
troller Link
Support
Board
3G8F5-CLK11-E
For IBM PC/AT or
compatible
(included with the
Board) (Optical
systems)
Note Use Controller Link Support Software version 1.1 for an ISA Controller Link
Support Board.
The Controller Link Support Software can also be used with the Controller
Link Support Board.
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications and Configurations
Section 1-2
Controller Link Support Software Menu Overview
Menu items:
Data Link
•
•
•
Edit table
•
•
•
Save table
•
•
•
Print table
Set Network parameters
Routing tables
Copy table
Initialize table
Retrieve table
Transfer table
Start/Stop
Monitor status
Echoback test
Broadcast test
Monitor Network
•
Check table
•
Delete table
•
Device info set
Display Error log
Display Node status
Display Board setup
•
•
•
Unit backup
Maintenance
Connection Info*
Edit PC ID
Board backup
Initialize network parameters
System setup
*Optical Ring Link Systems only.
Note
1. Refer to the Controller Link Support Software Operation Manual (W308)
for detailed operating procedures.
2. Use the CX-Net in CX-Programmer version 5.0 or higher to set data link
areas in which the number of send and receive words exceeds 12,000, or
to set data link tables that allocate the same area for Area 1 and Area 2.
Controller Link Support Software cannot be used for these settings.
3. For automatic data link creation with 1:N allocations or when changing
data link tables while the data link is active (CS1W-CLK21-V1 and CJ1W-
CLK21-V1), use the CX-Net in CX-Programmer version 3.2 or higher. Con-
troller LInk Support Software cannot be used to perform these functions.
CX-Programmer
The CX-Net operations within the CX-Programmer is required when using
user-set data links, or when setting or monitoring detailed settings of the Con-
troller Link Unit. This software can be used with a CS/CJ-series PLC and is
ideal for the following applications.
• Setting the data link mode to “manual” (creating and storing data link
tables).
• Starting/stopping data links.
• Reading (monitoring) network status.
• Reading error logs.
• Setting routing tables.
• Testing the Network.
• Changing network parameters.
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selection of Communications Functions
Section 1-3
When Operating on Personal Computer as Peripheral Software
Controller
Link Unit
+
Nodes
CX-Net in
IBM PC/AT or
CX-Programmer
compatible
CPU Unit
RS-232C
Transmissions
Setting data link tables
When Operating on Personal Computer Connected as a Node
IBM PC/AT or compatible
CX-Net in
CX-Programmer
+
Controller Link
Support Board
Setting data link tables
Software
CX-Programmer
External
appearance
Model
WS02-CXPC@-E-V@
Applicable PLCs
CS/CJ-series,
C200HX/HG/HE,
CVM1, CV-series,
and CQM1H-series
PLCs
Note
1. For further details about the CX-Programmer, refer to the WS02-CXPC@-
E-V@ CX-Programmer Operation Manual.
2. Use version 1.54 or higher of CX-Net in version 2.04 or higher of the CX-
Programmer for the CJ-series Controller Link Unit.
3. For automatic data link creation with 1:N allocations or when changing
data link tables while the data link is active (CS1W-CLK21-V1 and CJ1W-
CLK21-V1), use the CX-Net in CX-Programmer version 3.2 or later.
1-3 Selection of Communications Functions
Select the data link function if alarm or status data (in bits) must be constantly
shared between PLCs or between a PLC and an IBM PC/AT or compatible
computer or if the present value or set value data (in words) must be con-
stantly shared between PLCs or between a PLC and an IBM PC/AT or com-
patible computer.
Select the message service function (SEND/RECV instructions or CMND
instructions) if data (in words) must be sent (or received) from one PLC to
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Procedures
Section 1-4
other PLCs in other nodes or from one PLC to IBM PC/AT or compatible com-
puters.
1-4 Basic Procedures
Preparations
C200HX/HG/HE and CQM1H-series PLCs
1,2,3...
1. Perform mounting and wiring.
• Mount to the PLC.
• Connect the communications cables.
2. Set the node address on the front rotary switches.
• 01 to 32
3. Set the baud rate and operating level on the front DIP switch.
• 2 M, 1 M, or 500 Kbps
• Operating level 0 or operating level 1 (C200HX/HG/HE PLCs only)
4. Set the terminating resistance on the sliding switch.
• ON or OFF (Only the end nodes are set to ON.)
5. Connect power to all nodes.
6. Connect the Programming Device to the PLC.
7. Create I/O tables (not necessary for C200HX/HG/HE and CQM1H-
series PLCs and not necessary for CJ-series PLCs unless user-created
I/O tables have been specified).
8. Register routing tables as required.
CVM1, CV-series, and CS/CJ-series PLCs
1,2,3...
1. Perform mounting and wiring.
• Mount to the PLC.
• Connect the communications cables.
2. Set the Unit number on the front rotary switches.
• 00 to 15 (0 to F: CS/CJ-series display is in hexadecimal)
3. Set the node address on the front rotary switches.
• 01 to 32 (01 to 62) (See note a.)
4. Set the baud rate and operating level on the front DIP switch.
• 2 M, 1 M, or 500 Kbps (wired systems only)
5. Set the terminating resistance on the front slide switch.
• ON or OFF (Only the terminal node is set to ON.)
6. Connect power to all nodes.
7. Connect the Programming Device to the PLC.
8. Create I/O tables (not necessary for C200HX/HG/HE and CQM1H-
series PLCs and not necessary for CJ-series PLCs unless user-created I/
O tables have been specified).
9. Set the Wired Network 62 Node Enable Bit in the DM Parameter Area soft-
ware switches. (See note b.)
• ON (62 nodes max.) or OFF (32 nodes max.)
10. Register routing tables.
Note a) Setting 62 nodes is possible only with the CS1W-CLK21-V1 and
CJ1W-CLK21-V1. The Wired Network 62 Node Enable Bit in the
DM Parameter Area software switches must be set.
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Application Precautions
Section 1-5
b) This setting is valid only with the CS1W-CLK21-V1 and CS1W-
CLK21-V1. Reset the power to the PLC after setting.
Data Link Procedure
Set the data link mode in the data link parameters in the DM area of the star-
tup node to either automatic or manual data link creation using the Program-
ming Device.
Manually Setting Data Links
1,2,3...
1,2,3...
1. Register data link tables for all nodes using the Controller Link Support
Software or CX-Programmer.
2. Start the data links either using the Controller Link Support Software, CX-
Programmer, or by turning ON the Start Bit from the Programming Device.
Automatically Setting Data Links
1. Set the DM area of the startup node using the Programming Device.
2. Start the data links by turning ON the Start Bit from the Programming De-
vice.
Message Service
Procedure
Execute communications instructions in the program.
1-5 Application Precautions
• Turn ON the terminating resistance switch only for the nodes at both ends
of the network and turn OFF the switch for all other nodes.
• Turn OFF the power of all the nodes on the network before connecting or
disconnecting a cable.
• Use the specified cable only.
• Set the same baud rate for all nodes on the same network.
• Be sure to set routing tables for CVM1 and CV-series PLCs. When a
CVM1 or CV-series PLC is connected to the network, set routing tables at
all the nodes.
Routing tables are necessary
at all the nodes.
C
L
K
C
P
U
C
L
K
C
P
U
C
L
K
C
P
U
CLK: Controller Link Unit
C200HX/HG/HE PLC C200HX/HG/HE PLC CVM1 or
CV-series PLC
Note Routing tables are not required if all of the CVM1 and CV-series CPU Units if
the Controller Link Network were manufactured on or after May 1996.
Independent Controller Link Network
CVM1 or
CV-series PLC
CVM1 or
CV-series PLC
Routing tables not
necessary
C200HX/
HG/HE
PLC
C
P
U
C
L
C
P
U
C
L
C
L
C
P
U
K
K
K
Manufactured after May 1996
Manufactured after May 1996
Note The manufacturing date can be determined from the four-digit lot number on
the side of the CPU Unit.
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Application Precautions
Section 1-5
Lot No.: @
@
5
6 . . . . . Manufactured in May 1996
Indicates the last digit of the manufacturing
year. In this example, the year is 1996.
Indicates the month of manufacture. October,
November, and December are indicated by x, y,
and z respectively. In this example, the month is
May.
• Set routing tables at all the nodes in all the networks when multiple net-
works are connected.
Controller Link Network 1
Controller Link Network 2
C
L
C
P
U
C
L
K
C
P
U
C
L
K
C
L
K
C
P
U
C
L
K
C
L
K
C
L
K
C
P
U
C
P
U
K
CVM1 or
CV-series PLC
C200HX/HG/HE PLC
CVM1 or
CV-series PLC
CVM1 or
CV-series PLC
C200HX/HG/HE PLC
Routing tables are necessary at all the nodes regardless.
• When using the SEND/RECV or CMND instructions on a PLC for which
routing tables have been set, be sure to specify the network addresses
that are set in the routing tables.
• When using manually set data links, delete the data link tables from all
nodes not participating in the data links.
• Do not transfer (write) routing tables when data links are active (i.e.,
started). CPU Bus Units and Communications Units are reset when rout-
ing tables are transferred.
• Do not restart or reset the polling node while data links are active.
• The following table shows the status of the data link refresh areas when a
node registered in the data link table generates a communications error.
Communications error type
Data link areas
A node separates from the net-
work while a data link is running.
Data received immediately prior to the error
continues to be refreshed in the data link
areas of the relevant nodes.
A node does not join the network Zero (0) data continues to be refreshed in
after the data links start. the data link areas of the relevant nodes.
• When CS1W-CLK21-V1 and CJ1W-CLK21-V1 Units are used with other
models in the same network, set the node addresses of all nodes to
between 1 and 32. It is not possible to construct a network that uses a
node address higher than 32 in a network that includes pre-version-1
models.
Turn OFF the Wired Network 62 Node Enable Bit (bit 11 of D30000 + 100
× Unit No.) in the DM Parameter Area software switch of all CS1W-
CLK21-V1 and CJ1W-CLK21-V1 Units to restrict the network to 32 nodes
max. If a different value is specified, the network will be incorrectly config-
ured.
• To construct a network that uses a node address higher than 32, it is nec-
essary for all nodes to be CS1W-CLK21-V1 or CJ1W-CLK21-V1 Units.
In addition, the Wired Network 62 Node Enable Bit in the DM Parameter
Area software switches of all nodes must turned ON to enable 62 nodes
maximum. If a different value is specified, the network will not be correctly
configured.
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Application Precautions
Section 1-5
• The Wired Network 62 Node Enable Bit in the DM Parameter Area soft-
ware switches of CS1W-CLK21-V1 and CJ1W-CLK21-V1 Units is read
when the Unit is restarted.
• When using automatic data link creation with 1:N allocation, all nodes
must be CS1W-CLK21-V1 or CJ1W-CLK21-V1 Controller Link Units.
Other models cannot participate in data links that employ 1:N allocations.
• Communicate between the CPU Unit and Communications Units by exe-
cuting the SEND(090), RECV(098), and CMND(490) instructions for the
internal logic ports (8 ports max.). Up to eight Controller Link Units can be
connected to a single CPU Unit with unit version 1.2 or later. Perform
exclusive control of the ports using the ladder program when using the
SEND(090), RECV(098), and CMND(490) instructions to perform mes-
sage servicing on multiple networks (Units).
• Up to 20,000 data link send and receive words can be allocated per node
(Unit) when using unit version 1.2 or later. Data of 20,000 words is divided
and refreshed across three CPU Unit cycles. Make sure that the response
time has been considered in the system design. (Data is synchronous for
each node when data is refreshed in the CPU Unit, in the same way as for
earlier versions. If the number of data link words is 12,000 words or less,
the response with earlier unit versions (pre-Ver. 1.2) is exactly the same.)
• For details on Controller Link Unit current consumption, refer to Controller
Link Unit Models and PLCs on page 16. For details on current consump-
tion of each Unit, refer to the operation manual of the PLC that is being
used. For an example of calculating current consumption, refer to
page 18.
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Application Precautions
Section 1-5
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECTION 2
Basic Procedures
This section describes the basic procedures to use the Controller Link Unit. The settings necessary for using each of the
functions are also explained briefly. For more details, refer to the following sections on individual functions.
2-1 Data Links Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-1 Manually Setting Data Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-2 Automatically Setting Data Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2 Message Service Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32
32
34
40
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Links Procedures
Section 2-1
2-1 Data Links Procedures
2-1-1 Manually Setting Data Links
When the data link mode is set for manual data link table creation, the data
link tables can be input using the Controller Link Support Software or CX-Pro-
grammer. Use the following procedure.
1,2,3...
1. Install and wire the Units.
Contents
Method
Nodes
All nodes
Page
---
---
a. Mount the Units to
the PLCs.
All nodes
66
b. Wire the Network.
2. Prepare for communications.
Contents
Method
Nodes
Page
Use the front rotary
switches.
CS/CJ-series, CVM1, 98
and CV-series PLCs
only
a. Set the unit num-
ber.
Use the front rotary
switches.
All nodes
b. Set the node
address.
Use the DIP switch.
Use the DIP switch.
All nodes
95, 99
c. Set the baud rate.
only
d. Set the operating
level.
Use the front switch
for CVM1, CV-series,
CS/CJ-series, and
CQM1H-series PLCs
or the bottom switch
for C200HX/HG/HE
PLCs.
All nodes
96, 99
e. Set the terminal
resistance
End nodes on the net-
work: ON
All other nodes: OFF
3. Turn ON the power to the PLC.
Contents
Method
Nodes
Page
---
Turn ON the power to ---
the PLC.
All nodes
4. Connect the Programming Device.
Contents
Method
Nodes
Page
Connect the Program- Use the special con-
ming Console or Con- nection cable.
troller Link Support
CS/CJ-series, CVM1, 21
and CV-series PLCs
Software.
5. Create I/O tables.
Contents
Method
Nodes
Page
Input the I/O tables.
Use the Support Soft- CS/CJ-series, CVM1, ---
ware or Programming and CV-series PLCs
Console.
only
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Links Procedures
Section 2-1
6. Set the data link mode.
Contents
Method
Nodes
Page
Enable 62 nodes for a Use Support Software All nodes
78
wired network.
for the PLC or the Pro-
gramming Console.
Note: This setting
must be made to con-
struct a network that
uses a node address
higher than 32 (See
note a.)
Set data link mode to Use Support Software Data link startup node 113
manual.
for the PLC or the Pro- only
gramming Console.
The node that is used
(See note b.)
to start the data links
is called the startup
node. It is necessary
to decide beforehand
which node will be the
startup node.
Set the data link status Use Support Software Data link startup node 160
storage format. (CS/
CJ Series only)
for the PLC or the Pro- only (See note c.)
gramming Console.
Note a) When using fewer than 33 nodes, make sure that the Wired Net-
work 62 Node Enable Bit if the DM Parameter Area software
switch is turned OFF to restrict the network to 32 nodes maximum.
To construct a network that uses a node address higher than 32,
all nodes must use the CS1W-CLK21-V1 or CJ1W-CLK21-V1.
b) Only node addresses 1 through 32 can be used on networks for
which 62 nodes have not been enabled.
c) Be sure that the data link mode in the data link parameters in the
DM Area is set to 00 when using manually set data links.
d) When using the 8-bit storage format, make sure that the relevant
locations in the DM Parameter Area are set to 0. The storage for-
mat used by all models other than CS1W-CLK21-V1, CS1W-
CLK21, CJ1W-CLK21-V1, and CJ1W-CLK21 is fixed at 8-bit, re-
gardless of the setting.
7. Register the data link tables by making the following settings for each
node.
Contents
Method
Nodes
Page
First data link status word Use the Controller
All nodes within the 115
network
Link Support Soft-
Data link nodes
ware or CX-Pro-
Delete from the data
link tables all nodes
that are not in a data
link.
Area First data link sta-
grammer.
1
tus words
Numbers of data
link words
Data link offsets
Area First data link sta-
2
tus words
Numbers of data
link words
Data link offsets
Note Offsets are used to control where data is placed within the receive
area.
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Links Procedures
Section 2-1
8. Start the data links.
Contents
Method
Nodes
Page
Start the data links.
Switch the Data link
Start/Stop Bit (listed
below) from OFF to
ON using either the
Programming Device,
the user program, the
Controller Link Sup-
port Software or CX-
Programmer.
Data link startup node 153
(The Start Bit can be
turned ON in more
then one node to
make sure the data
links start even when
the startup node is
down.)
Note a) Data link Start/Stop Bit (N= unit number):
CS/CJ Series:
C200HX/HG/HE:
Word 0 of DM30000 + 100 × N
AR 0700 (operating level #0),
AR 0704 (operating level #1)
Word 0 of DM 2000 + 100 × N
AR 0700
CVM1/CV Series:
CQM1H Series:
b) The data links will not start if there is an error in the data link
tables in the startup node.
9. Stop the data links.
Contents
Stop the data links.
Method
Nodes
Page
Switch the Data link
Start/Stop Bit (listed
below) from OFF to
ON using either the
Programming Device,
the user program, the
Controller Link Sup-
port Software or CX-
Programmer.
Any node that is active 153
in the data link
Note Data link Start/Stop Bit (N= unit number):
CS/CJ Series:
C200HX/HG/HE: AR 0700 (operating level #0),
AR 0704 (operating level #1)
Word 0 of DM30000 + 100 × N
CVM1/CV Series: Word 0 of DM 2000 + 100 × N
CQM1H Series:
AR 0700
2-1-2 Automatically Setting Data Links
Data link tables can be automatically created by setting the data link mode to
automatic data link table creation. Use the following procedure.
1,2,3...
1. Install and wire the Units.
Contents
Method
Nodes
All nodes
Page
---
---
a. Mount the Units to
the PLCs.
All nodes
66
b. Wire the Network.
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Links Procedures
Section 2-1
2. Prepare for communications.
Contents
Method
Nodes
Page
Use the front rotary
switches.
CS/CJ-series, CVM1, 98
and CV-series PLCs
only
a. Set the unit num-
ber.
Use the front rotary
switches.
All nodes
b. Set the node
address.
Use the DIP switch.
Use the DIP switch.
All nodes
95, 99
c. Set the baud rate.
only
d. Set the operating
level.
Use the front switch
for CVM1, CV-series,
CS/CJ-series, and
CQM1H-series PLCs
or the bottom switch
for C200HX/HG/HE
PLCs.
All nodes
96, 99
e. Set the terminal
resistance
End nodes on the net-
work: ON
All other nodes: OFF
3. Turn ON the power to the PLC.
Contents
Method
Nodes
Page
---
Turn ON the power to ---
the PLC.
All nodes
4. Connect the Programming Device.
Contents
Method
Nodes
Page
Connect the Program- Use the special con-
ming Console or Con- nection cable.
troller Link Support
CS/CJ-series, CVM1, 21
and CV-series PLCs
only
Software.
5. Create I/O tables.
Contents
Method
Nodes
Page
Create the I/O tables. Use the Support Soft- CS/CJ-series, CVM1, ---
ware or Programming and CV-series PLCs
Console.
only
6. Set the data link mode.
Contents
Enable 62 nodes for a Use Support Software All nodes
Method
Nodes
Page
78
wired network.
for the PLC or the Pro-
gramming Console.
Note: This setting
must be made to con-
struct a network that
uses a node address
higher than 32 (See
note a.)
Set data link mode to Use Support Software Data link startup node 113
manual.
for the PLC or the Pro- only
gramming Console.
(See note b.)
The node that is used
to start the data links
is called the startup
node. It is necessary
to decide beforehand
which node will be the
startup node.
Set the data link status Use Support Software Data link startup node 160
storage format. (CS/
CJ Series only)
for the PLC or the Pro- only (See note c.)
gramming Console.
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Links Procedures
Section 2-1
Note a) When using fewer than 33 nodes, make sure that the Wired Net-
work 62 Node Enable Bit if the DM Parameter Area software
switch is turned OFF to restrict the network to 32 nodes maximum.
To construct a network containing more than 32 nodes, all nodes
must use the CS1W-CLK21-V1 or CJ1W-CLK21-V1.
b) Be sure that the data link mode in the data link parameters in the
DM Area is set to 00 when using manually set data links.
c) When using the 8-bit storage format, make sure that the relevant
locations in the DM Parameter Area are set to 0. The storage for-
mat used by all models other than CS1W-CLK21-V1, CS1W-
CLK21, CJ1W-CLK21-V1, and CJ1W-CLK21 is fixed at 8-bit, re-
gardless of the setting.
7. Set the parameters for automatic data link creation.
• Equality layout: Previous automatic creation method (Compatible with
CS1W-CLK21-V1, CJ1W-CLK21-V1, CS1W-CLK21, CJ1W-CLK21,
C200HW-CLK21, CVM1-CLK21, and CQM1H-CLK21)
Contents
Method
Nodes
Page
Use the Support
Software or Pro-
gramming Console.
Data link startup node 113
only
a. Set the data link mode
to automatic.
The node that is used
to start the data link is
called the startup
node. It is necessary
to decide beforehand
which node will be
the startup node.
Area
1
Data link startup node 130
only
b. Set the area
c. Set the data
link start word
Only when Area 1 is
used
d. Set the num-
ber of data link
words
Area
2
Data link startup node
only
e. Set the area
f. Set the data
link start word
Only when Area 2 is
used
g. Set the num-
ber of data link
words
Data link startup node
only
h. Set the first data link
status word
(This setting may be
omitted.)
Data link startup node
only
i. Set the nodes to par-
ticipate in the data
links.
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Links Procedures
Section 2-1
• 1:N allocation (Compatible with CS1W-CLK21-V1 and CJ1W-CLK21-
V1)
Common Type
Contents
Method
Nodes
Page
Use Support Soft- Data link startup node 113
a. Set the data link mode
to automatic.
ware for the PLC
including Program-
ming Console (see
note).
only
The node that is used
to start the data link is
called the startup
node. It is necessary
to decide beforehand
which node will be
the startup node.
b. 1:N setting
Data link startup node 134
only
Area
1
Data link startup node
only
c. Set the area
d. Set the data
link start word
Only when Area 1 is
used
e. Set the num-
ber of send
words per mas-
ter node
f. Set the num-
ber of send
words per slave
node
Area
2
Data link startup node
only
g. Set the area
h. Set the data
link start word
Only when Area 2 is
used
i. Set the num-
ber of send
words per mas-
ter node
j. Set the num-
ber of send
words per slave
node
Data link startup node
only
k. Set the first data link
status word
Data link startup node
only
l. Set the nodes to par-
ticipate in the data
links.
Note For automatic data link creation with 1:N allocations, use the CX-Net
in CX-Programmer version 3.2 or higher.
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Links Procedures
Section 2-1
1 to 1 Type
Contents
Method
Nodes
Page
Use Support Soft- Data link startup node 113
a. Set the data link mode
to automatic.
ware for the PLC
including Program-
ming Console (see
note).
only
The node that is used
to start the data link is
called the startup
node. It is necessary
to decide beforehand
which node will be
the startup node.
b. 1:N creation
c. Set the area
Data link startup node 138
only
d. Set the data link start
word
e. Set the number of
common send words
per master node
f. Se the number of indi-
vidual send words per
master node
g. Set the number of
send words per slave
node
h. Set the first data link
status word
i. Set the nodes to par-
ticipate in the data
links.
Note For automatic data link creation with 1:N allocation, use CX-Net in
CX-Programmer version 3.2 or higher.
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Links Procedures
Section 2-1
Chain Type
Contents
Method
Nodes
Page
Use Support Soft- Data link startup node 113
a. Set the data link mode
to automatic.
ware for the PLC
including Program-
ming Console (see
note).
only
The node that is used
to start the data link is
called the startup
node. It is necessary
to decide beforehand
which node will be
the startup node.
b. 1:N creation
c. Set the area
Data link startup node 141
only
d. Set the data link start
word
e. Set the number of
common send words
per master node
f. Set the number of
send and receive
words per node
g. Set the first data link
status word
h. Set the nodes to par-
ticipate in the data
links.
Note For automatic data link creation with 1:N allocations, use the CX-Net
in CX-Programmer version 3.2 or higher.
8. Start the data links.
Contents
Method
Nodes
Page
Start the data links.
Switch the Data link
Start/Stop Bit (listed
below) from OFF to
ON using either the
Programming Device,
or the user program.
Data link startup node 153
(The Start Bit can be
turned ON in more
then one node to
make sure the data
links start even when
the startup node is
down.)
Note Data link Start/Stop Bit (N= unit number):
CS/CJ Series:
C200HX/HG/HE:
Word 0 of DM30000 + 100 × N
AR 0700 (operating level #0),
AR 0704 (operating level #1)
CVM1/CV Series: Word 0 of DM 2000 + 100 × N
CQM1H Series:
AR 0700
9. Stop the data links.
Contents
Method
Nodes
Page
Stop the data links.
Switch the Data link
Start/Stop Bit (listed
below) from OFF to
ON using either the
Programming Device,
or the user program.
Any node that is active 153
in the data link
Note Data link Start/Stop Bit (N= unit number):
CS/CJ Series:
Word 0 of DM30000 + 100 × N
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Message Service Procedure
Section 2-2
C200HX/HG/HE:
AR 0700 (operating level #0),
AR 0704 (operating level #1)
CVM1/CV Series: Word 0 of DM 2000 + 100 × N
CQM1H Series: AR 0700
Note The data links will not start if there is an error in the data link tables
in the startup node. Data links can be started and stopped using the
Controller Link Support Software.
2-2 Message Service Procedure
The following steps outline the basic procedure for using the message ser-
vice.
1,2,3...
1. Install and wire the Units.
Contents
Remarks
Remarks
Page
59
66
---
---
a. Mount the Units to the PLCs.
b. Wire the Network.
2. Prepare for communications.
Contents
Page
CS/CJ-series, CVM1, and CV-
series PLCs only
a. Set the unit number.
---
94, 98
95, 99
95
b. Set the node address.
c. Set the baud rate.
---
C200HX/HG/HE PLCs only
---
d. Set the operating level.
e. Set the terminal resistance.
96, 99
3. Turn ON the power to the PLC.
Contents
Remarks
Page
Turn ON the power to the PLC.
---
---
4. Create the I/O tables.
Contents
Remarks
Page
Create the I/O tables.
CS/CJ-series, CVM1, and CV-
series PLCs only
---
5. Register routing tables if using inter-network connections.
Contents
Remarks
Page
---
---
237
a. Set the local network table
b. Set the relay network table
Note Routing tables are required if any of the CVM1 and CV-series CPU Units
in the Network has been manufactured on or before April 1996.
Lot No.: @
@
4
6 . . . . . Manufactured in April 1996
Indicates the last digit of the manufacturing
year. In this example, the year is 1996.
Indicates the month of manufacture. October,
November, and December are indicated by x, y,
and z respectively. In this example, the month is
April.
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Message Service Procedure
Section 2-2
6. Set the data link mode.
Contents
Method
Nodes
Page
Enable 62 nodes for a Use Support Software All nodes
78
wired network.
for the PLC or a Pro-
gramming Console.
This setting must be
made when construct-
ing a network that
uses a node address
higher than 32 (See
note.)
Note When using fewer than 33 nodes, make sure that the Wired Network
62 Node Enable Bit in the DM Parameter Area software switches is
turned OFF to restrict the network to 32 nodes maximum. To con-
struct a network containing more than 32 nodes, all nodes must use
the CS1W-CLK21-V1 or CJ1W-CLK21-V1.
7. Create the user program.
Contents
Remarks
Page
Stored in the memory areas of the 166
source node
a. Prepare the send and receive
data in memory.
b. Prepare the control data for the
communications instruction.
The standard input conditions are 189
the Active Node Flags for the
source and destination nodes, and
the Port Enabled Flag.
c. Check the conditions for exe-
cuting the SEND/RECV or
CMND instruction.
---
d. Execute the SEND/RECV or
CMND instruction.
The standard input condition is the
Port Error Flags.
e. Execute other instructions are
required for the results of the
communications instruction,
(e.g., retry or error processing
if an error occurs).
C200HX/HG/HE PLCs have 1
communications port for each
operating level. When 2 or more
communications instructions are
executed at the same time, exclu-
sive control is necessary.
CS-series, CJ-series, CVM1, and
CV-series PLCs have 8 communi-
cations ports. When 9 or more
communications instructions are
executed at the same time, exclu-
sive control is necessary.
CQM1H-series PLCs have only 1
communications port. When 2 or
more communications instructions
are executed at the same time,
exclusive control is necessary.
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Message Service Procedure
Section 2-2
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECTION 3
Installation and Wiring
This section describes how to install a Controller Link Unit and how to wire the Controller Link Network.
3-1 Component Names and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-1 CS-series Controller Link Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-2 CJ-series Controller Link Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-3 C200HX/HG/HE Controller Link Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-4 CVM1 and CV-series Controller Link Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-5 CQM1H-series Controller Link Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-6 Wire-to-Wire Repeater Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-7 Wire-to-Optical (H-PCF) Repeater Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-8 Wire-to-Optical (GI) Repeater Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2 Unit Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-1 Mounting Controller Link Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-2 Mounting a Repeater Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-1 Communications Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-2 Repeater Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4 Constructing Networks with Repeater Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-1 Segments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-2 Number of Repeater Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-3 Terminating Resistance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
44
44
46
49
51
53
54
56
57
58
59
64
66
66
71
78
79
80
82
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Component Names and Functions
Section 3-1
3-1 Component Names and Functions
This section describes the names and functions of the Controller Link Unit
components. This section also describes the operation of the indicators.
3-1-1 CS-series Controller Link Units
(Refer to p.45 and 276)
Indicators
LED indicators that display the Unit and network status.
CLK21-V1
(Refer to p.86)
Unit number switch
One rotary switch. The unit number is set in single-digit
hexadecimal for the network to which the PLC is connected.
(Refer to p.87)
Node address switches
Two rotary switches. The node address of the Unit on the
Controller Link Network is set in 2-digit decimal.
(Refer to p.88)
Baud rate switch
A four-pin DIP switch. The following setting is made.
Pins 1, 2: Baud rate
Pins 3, 4: Not used (always OFF)
Terminating resistance switch
(Refer to p.89)
A slide switch. Use this switch to set the terminating resistance to ON for
nodes at both ends of the Controller Link Network.
(Refer to p.66)
Terminal block for the communications cable
Terminals to connect to the Controller Link Network communications
cable (twisted-pair cable).
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Component Names and Functions
Section 3-1
Wired Unit Indicators
Name
Color
Status
Lit
Meaning
Unit operating normally.
Unit error.
RUN
Green
(operating)
Not lit
Lit
ERC (communica- Red
tions error)
Communications error, node address
setting error (same address set twice), or
hardware error.
Not lit
Lit
Normal operation
ERH
(PLC error)
Red
PLC error, PLC interface error, EEPROM
error, unit number error, or I/O table not
set
Not lit
Lit
No error.
INS
Yellow
Unit is participating (inserted) in the net-
work.
(network participa-
tion)
Not lit
Unit is not participating (inserted) in the
network.
SD
(send)
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Lit
Data transmission.
No data transmission.
Data reception.
Not lit
Lit
RD
(receive)
Not lit
Lit
No data reception.
M/A
Manual
Note:
(data link mode)
(see note)
M/A is always not lit
when data links are not
active in the network.
Not lit
Lit
Automatic
LNK
(data link)
Yellow
Yellow
Data links participating.
Flashing Error in data link table.
Not lit
Lit
Not in a data link or data link inactive.
TER
Terminating resistance switch ON.
Terminating resistance switch OFF.
(terminating resis-
tance)
Not lit
Note Even when the local node does not participate in the data link, the
network.
For details refer to 9-1 Troubleshooting Using Indicators.
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Component Names and Functions
Section 3-1
Dimensions (Unit: mm)
CLK21-V1
35
101
3-1-2 CJ-series Controller Link Units
CLK21-V1
RUN ERC
INS SD
Indicators (Refer to pages 45, 276)
TER ERH M/A LNK RD
4
UNIT
No.
C A
Unit Number Switch (Refer to page 86)
One rotary switch. The unit number is set in single-digit hexa-
decimal for the network to which the PLC is connected.
NODE
No.
x101
Node address switches (Refer to page 87)
Two rotary switches. The node address of the Unit on the
Controller Link Network is set in 2-digit hexadecimal.
x100
ON
1
2
BAUD
RATE
SW1
Baud rate switch (Refer to page 88)
A 2-pin DIP switch used to set the baud rate.
TER SW
ON
BD
BD
H
L
Terminating resistance switch (Refer to page 89)
A slide switch. Use this switch to set the terminating resistance
to ON for nodes at both ends of the Controller Link Network.
SHLD
Terminal block for the communications cable (Refer to
page 64)
Terminals to connect the Controller Link Network communica-
tions cable (twisted-pair cable).
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Component Names and Functions
Section 3-1
Wired Unit Indicators
Name
Color
Status
Lit
Meaning
Unit operating normally.
Unit error.
RUN
Green
(operating)
Not lit
Lit
TER
Yellow
Terminating resistance switch is ON.
Terminating resistance switch is OFF.
(terminating resis-
tance)
Not lit
ERC (communica- Red
tions error)
Lit
Communications error, node address
setting error (same address set twice), or
hardware error.
Not lit
Lit
Normal operation
ERH
(PLC error)
Red
PLC error, PLC interface error, EEPROM
error, unit number error, or I/O table not
set
Not lit
Lit
No error.
INS
Yellow
Unit is participating (inserted) in the net-
work.
(network participa-
tion)
Not lit
Unit is not participating (inserted) in the
network.
SD
(send)
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Lit
Data transmission.
No data transmission.
Data reception.
Not lit
Lit
RD
(receive)
Not lit
Lit
No data reception.
M/A
Manual
Note:
(data link mode)
(see note)
M/A is always not lit
when data links are not
active in the network.
Not lit
Lit
Automatic
LNK
Yellow
Data links participating.
(data link)
Flashing Error in data link table.
Not lit Not in a data link or data link inactive.
Note Even when the local node does not participate in the data link, the M/
network.
For details, refer to 9-1 Troubleshooting Using Indicators.
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Component Names and Functions
Section 3-1
3-1-3 C200HX/HG/HE Controller Link Unit
CLK21
RUN
ERC
INS
SD
TER
ERH
M/A
(Refer to p. 49 and 276)
Indicators
LNK
RD
LED indicators that display the Unit and network status.
(Refer to p. 94)
NODE NO.
X101
X100
Node address switches
0
1
4
3
2
1
#0, #1
ON
Two rotary switches. The node address of the Unit on the
Controller Link Network is set in 2-digit decimal.
RSV
BAUD
RATE
SW1
ON
(Refer to p. 95)
Baud rate and operating level settings
A four-pin DIP switch. The following settings are made.
Pins 1, 2: Baud rate
Pin 3:
Pin 4:
Not used (leave set to OFF)
Operating level
(Refer to p. 59)
Bus Connection Unit Connector
BD
BD
SHLD
H
L
Connector used for connection to the CPU Unit.
(Refer to p. 66)
Terminal block for the communications cable
TER
SW
cable (twisted-pair cable).
(Refer to p. 96)
Terminating resistance switch (underneath the Unit)
A slide switch. Use this switch to set the terminating resistance to ON for
nodes at both ends of the Controller Link Network.
Wired Unit Indicators
Name
Color
Status
Lit
Meaning
Unit operating normally.
Unit error.
RUN
Green
(operating)
Not lit
Lit
TER
Yellow
Terminating resistance switch ON.
Terminating resistance switch OFF.
(terminating
resistance)
Not lit
ERC (communica- Red
tions error)
Lit
Communications error, node address
setting error (same address set twice), or
hardware error.
Not lit
Lit
Normal operation
ERH
(PLC error)
Red
PLC error, PLC interface error, EEPROM
error, or PLC model setting error.
Not lit
Lit
No error.
INS
(network
participation)
Yellow
Unit is participating (inserted) in the net-
work.
Not lit
Lit
Unit is not participating (inserted) in the
network.
M/A
Yellow
Manual
Note:
(data link mode)
(see note)
M/A is always not lit
when data links are not
active in the network.
Not lit
Lit
Automatic
LNK
(data link)
Yellow
Yellow
Data links participating.
Flashing Error in data link table.
Not lit
Lit
Not in a data link or data link inactive.
SD
Data transmission.
(send)
Not lit
No data transmission.
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Component Names and Functions
Section 3-1
Name
Color
Status
Lit
Not lit
Meaning
RD
Yellow
Data reception.
No data reception.
(receive)
Note Even when the local node does not participate in the data link, the
network.
For details refer to 9-1 Troubleshooting Using Indicators.
Dimensions (Unit: mm)
34.5
125
CLK21
RUN
ERC
INS
SD
TER
ERH
M/A
LNK
RD
NODE NO.
X101
X100
0
1
ON
4
3
2
1
#0, #1
RSV
BAUD
RATE
SW1
ON
BD
H
L
BD
SHLD
TER
SW
15
50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Component Names and Functions
Section 3-1
CLK21
(Refer to p. 51 and 287)
Indicators
LED indicators that display the Unit and network status.
RUN
ERC
TER
ERH
M/A
LNK
RD
(Refer to p. 98)
Unit number switches
INS
SD
X101
Two rotary switches. The unit number is set in 2-digit decimal
for the Network to which the PLC is connected.
UNIT
NO.
X101
0
0
1
X100
X100
NODE
NO.
(Refer to p. 98)
Node address switches
X101
0
ON
1
2
3
4
Two rotary switches. The node address of the Unit on the
Controller Link Network is set in 2-digit decimal.
BAUD
RATE
SW1
RSV
RSV
BAUD RATE
BIT2 BIT1 RATE
OFF OFF 2MBP
OFF ON
1MBP
ON OFF 500KBP
(Refer to p. 99)
Baud rate switch
A four-pin DIP switch. The following setting is made.
Pins 1, 2: Baud rate
Pins 3, 4: Not used (always OFF)
(Refer to p. 99)
Terminating resistance switch
A slide switch. Use this switch to set the terminating resistance to ON for
nodes at both ends of the Controller Link Network.
TER SW
BDH
BDL
(Refer to p. 66)
Terminal block for the communications cable
SHLD
Terminals to connect to the Controller Link Network communications
cable (twisted-pair cable).
Wired Unit Indicators
Name
Color
Status
Lit
Meaning
Unit operating normally.
Unit error.
RUN
Green
(operating)
Not lit
Lit
TER
Yellow
Terminating resistance switch ON.
Terminating resistance switch OFF.
(terminating
resistance)
Not lit
ERC (communica- Red
tions error)
Lit
Communications error, node address
setting error (same address set twice), or
hardware error.
Not lit
Lit
Normal operation
ERH
(PLC error)
Red
PLC error, PLC interface error, EEPROM
error, unit number error, or I/O table not
set
Not lit
Lit
No error.
INS
(network
participation)
Yellow
Unit is participating (inserted) in the net-
work.
Not lit
Lit
Unit is not participating (inserted) in the
network.
M/A
Yellow
Yellow
Manual
(see note)
Note:
(data link mode)
M/A is always not lit
when data links are not
active in the network.
Not lit
Lit
Automatic
LNK
Data links participating.
(data link)
Flashing Error in data link table.
Not lit Not in a data link or data link inactive.
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Component Names and Functions
Section 3-1
Name
Color
Status
Lit
Meaning
Data transmission.
SD
Yellow
(send)
Not lit
Lit
No data transmission.
Data reception.
RD
Yellow
(receive)
Not lit
No data reception.
Note Even when the local node does not participate in the data link, the
network.
For details refer to 9-1 Troubleshooting Using Indicators.
Dimensions (Unit: mm)
34.5
95
CLK21
RUN
ERC
TER
ERH
M/A
LNK
RD
INS
SD
UNIT
NO.
0
0
1
X101
X100
X100
NODE
NO.
X101
0
ON
1
2
3
4
BAUD
RATE
RSV
RSV
SW1
BAUD RATE
BIT2 BIT1 RATE
OFF OFF 2MBP
OFF ON
1MBP
ON OFF 500KBP
TER SW
BD H
BD L
SHLD
15
52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Component Names and Functions
Section 3-1
3-1-5 CQM1H-series Controller Link Unit
(Refer to p. 53 and 276)
Indicators
LED indicators that display the Unit and network status.
(Refer to p. 101)
Node address switches
Two rotary switches. The node address of the Unit on the
Controller Link Network is set in 2-digit decimal.
(Refer to p. 101)
Baud rate switch
bit/s
k
(Refer to p. 102)
Terminating resistance switch
A slide switch. Use this switch to set the terminating resistance to ON for
the nodes at both ends of the Controller Link Network.
(Refer to p. 66)
Terminal block for the communications cable
Terminals to connect to the Controller Link Network communications
cable (twisted-pair cable).
Wired Unit Indicators
Name
Color
Status
Lit
Meaning
Unit operating normally.
Unit error.
RUN
Green
(operating)
Not lit
Lit
TER
Yellow
Terminating resistance switch ON.
Terminating resistance switch OFF.
(terminating
resistance)
Not lit
ERC (communica- Red
tions error)
Lit
Communications error, node address
setting error (same address set twice), or
hardware error.
Not lit
Lit
Normal operation
ERH
(PLC error)
Red
PLC error, PLC interface error, or
EEPROM error
Not lit
Lit
No error.
INS
(network
Yellow
Unit is participating (inserted) in the net-
work.
participation)
Not lit
Lit
Unit is not participating (inserted) in the
network.
M/A
Yellow
Yellow
Manual
(see note)
Note:
(data link mode)
M/A is always not lit
when data links are not
active in the network.
Not lit
Lit
Automatic
LNK
Participating in data links.
(data link)
Flashing Error in data link tables.
Not lit
Lit
Not in a data link or data link inactive.
SD
(send)
Yellow
Yellow
Data transmission.
No data transmission.
Data reception.
Not lit
Lit
RD
(receive)
Not lit
No data reception.
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Component Names and Functions
Section 3-1
Note Even when the local node does not participate in the data link, the
network.
For details refer to 9-1 Troubleshooting Using Indicators.
Dimensions (Unit: mm)
122.8
32
110
bit/s
k
15.8
3-1-6 Wire-to-Wire Repeater Unit
CS1W-RPT01
Indicators
PWR
T/R1
T/R2
LED indicators that display the status of the
Unit and communications.
BD H
Terminating Resistance Switch for SL1
Turn ON this switch when the Repeater Unit is
connected to the SL1 communications cable
terminal block at either end of the Controller
Link Network.
BD L
SL1
SL1 Terminal Block for Communications
Cable
Terminals to connect to the Controller
Link Network communications cable
SHLD
TER SW
ON
ON
SW1
Terminating Resistance Switch for SL2
Turn ON this switch when the Repeater Unit is
connected to the SL2 communications cable
terminal block at either end of the Controller
Link Network.
TER SW
(twisted-pair cable).
1
2
BAUD
RATE
BD H
Baud rate switch
BD L
SL2
SHLD
SL2 Terminal Block for Communications
Cable
Terminals to connect to the Controller
Link Network communications cable
(twisted-pair cable).
+
DC24V
INPUT
Power Terminal Block
Terminals to connect to the
power supply (24 V DC) that
drives the Repeater Unit.
−
54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Component Names and Functions
Section 3-1
Repeater Unit Indicators
Name
Color
Status
Lit
Meaning
Power supply is ON.
Power supply is OFF.
PWR
Green
(Power supply)
Not lit
Lit
T/R1
Yellow
Yellow
Transmission signal is being sent or
received.
(SL1 communicat-
ing)
Not lit
Lit
No transmission signal.
TR2
Transmission signal is being sent or
received.
(SL2 2 communicat-
ing
Not lit
No transmission signal.
Dimensions (Unit: mm)
30
Two, 4.5 dia.
21
8
59
(Unit: mm)
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Component Names and Functions
Section 3-1
3-1-7 Wire-to-Optical (H-PCF) Repeater Unit
CS1W-RPT02
Indicators
LED indicators that display the status of the
PWR
T/R1
T/R2
Unit and communications.
BD H
BD L
SHLD
Terminating Resistance Switch for SL1
Turn ON this switch when the Repeater Unit is
connected to the SL1 communications cable
terminal block at either end of the Controller Link
Network.
SL1
SL1 Terminal Block for Communications
Cable
Terminals to connect to the Controller
Link Network communications cable
(twisted-pair cable).
TER SW
ON
ON
SW1
1
2
BAUD
RATE
Baud rate switch
SL2
Optical Connector SL2
Connects to communications cable
(H-PCF optical fiber cable) of the
Controller Link Network.
+
Power Terminal Block
DC24V
INPUT
Terminals to connect to the
power supply (24 V DC) that
drives the Repeater Unit.
−
Repeater Unit Indicators
Name
Color
Status
Meaning
Power supply is ON.
PWR
Green
Lit
(Power supply)
Not lit
Lit
Power supply is OFF.
T/R1
(SL1 communicat-
ing)
Yellow
Yellow
Transmission signal is being sent or
received.
Not lit
Lit
No transmission signal.
TR2
Transmission signal is being sent or
received.
(SL2 2 communicat-
ing)
Not lit
No transmission signal.
56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Component Names and Functions
Section 3-1
Dimensions (Unit: mm)
30
21
Two, 4.5 dia.
8
59
(Unit: mm)
3-1-8 Wire-to-Optical (GI) Repeater Unit
CS1W-RPT03
Indicators
PWR
T/R1
T/R2
LED indicators that display the status of the
Unit and communications.
BD H
Terminating Resistance Switch for SL1
Turn ON this switch when the Repeater Unit is
connected to the SL1 communications cable
terminal block at either end of the Controller Link
Network.
BD L
SL1
SL1 Terminal Block for Communications
Cable
SHLD
TER SW
ON
Terminals to connect to the Controller
Link Network communications cable
(twisted-pair cable).
ON
SW1
1
2
BAUD
RATE
Baud rate switch
SL2
Optical Connector SL2
Connects to communications cable
(GI optical fiber cable) of Controller
Link Network.
+
DC24V
INPUT
Power Terminal Block
Terminals to connect to the
power supply (24 V DC) that
drives the Repeater Unit.
−
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Unit Installation
Section 3-2
Repeater Unit Indicators
Name
Color
Status
Lit
Meaning
Power supply is ON.
Power supply is OFF.
PWR
Green
(Power supply)
Not lit
Lit
T/R1
Yellow
Yellow
Transmission signal is being sent or
received.
(SL1 communicat-
ing)
Not lit
Lit
No transmission signal.
TR2
Transmission signal is being sent or
received.
(SL2 2 communicat-
ing)
Not lit
No transmission signal.
Dimensions (Unit: mm)
(30)
21
Two, 4.5 dia.
8
59
(Unit: mm)
3-2 Unit Installation
• The Controller Link Unit is mounted onto a CPU Backplane or Expansion
CPU Backplane for use. For detailed information on into a PLC installation
procedures, refer to the PLC Installation Guide.
• Repeater Units are not mounted to the PLC. They are mounted sepa-
rately with screws or onto a DIN Track.
• A Repeater Unit is not mounted to a PLC Rack, but rather is mounted to
DIN Track or screw-mounted.
Note
1. Always turn off power to the PLC before mounting the Controller Link Unit
into the Backplane or connecting the Bus Connection Unit.
58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Unit Installation
Section 3-2
2. Be sure that all screws on the Backplane, the Bus Connection Unit, the ter-
minal block, and cables are tightened firmly. If screws work loose, a mal-
function may occur as a result of vibration.
3. A label has been placed over the upper surface of the Controller Link Unit
to prevent scraps of wire from entering the Unit. Conduct wiring and instal-
lation with this label in place. If wire scraps get into the Unit, it will malfunc-
tion.
4. Remove the label after wiring and installing the Controller Link Unit to pre-
vent overheating. Overheating will cause the Unit to malfunction.
3-2-1 Mounting Controller Link Units
C200HX/HG/HE PLCs
Up to two C200HX/HG/HE Controller Link Units can be mounted on the CPU
Rack. Controller Link Units cannot be mounted to an Expansion I/O Rack or a
Slave Rack.
Note Tighten the screws on the Backplane to a torque of 1.2 N • m.
Tighten the screws on the Bus Connection Unit to a torque of 0.4 N • m.
Installing One Controller Link Unit
Mount the Unit in the slot on the left of the CPU Unit.
C200HW-CLK21
Controller Link Unit
Controller Link Unit
CPU Unit
CPU Backplane
CPU Unit
(C200HE-CPU32/42-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU33/43/53/63-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU34/44/54/64-(Z)E
C200HW-COM01/04
Communications Board
C200HW-CE001 Bus Connection Unit
(For one Unit)
Installing Two Controller Link Units
Mount the Units in the two slots on the left of the CPU Unit.
Controller Link Unit
C200HW-CLK21
Controller Link Unit
Controller Link Unit
CPU Unit
CPU Backplane
CPU Unit
(C200HE-CPU32/42-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU33/43/53/63-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU34/44/54/64-(Z)E
C200HW-COM01/04
Communications Board
C200HW-CE002 Bus Connection Unit
(For two Units)
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Unit Installation
Section 3-2
Installing with Another Communications Unit
When installing a Controller Link Unit along with another Communications
Unit, such as a SYSMAC LINK Unit or a SYSMAC NET LINK Unit mount both
Units in the 2 slots on the left of the CPU Unit.
Install the Controller Link
Other Communications Unit
Unit in one slot and the
other Unit in the other slot.
C200HW-CLK21
Controller Link Unit
CPU Unit
CPU Backplane
CPU Unit
(C200HE-CPU32/42-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU33/43/53/63-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU34/44/54/64-(Z)E
C200HW-COM01/04
Communications Board
C200HW-CE002 Bus Connection Unit
(For two Units)
Installing with a PC Card Unit
When installing a Controller Link Unit along with a PC Card Unit, mount the
Controller Link Unit in the first slot on the left of the CPU Unit. Use the
C200HW-CE012 Bus Connection Unit.
C200HW-PCU01
PC Card Unit
PC Card Unit
C200HW-CLK21
Controller Link Unit
Controller Link Unit
CPU Unit
CPU Unit
(C200HE-CPU32/42-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU33/43/53/63-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU34/44/54/64-(Z)E
C200HW-COM01/04
Communications Board
C200HW-CE012 Bus Connection Unit
CVM1 and CV-series PLCs
Up to four Controller Link Units for CVM1 and CV-series PLCs can be
installed in a CPU Backplane or a Expansion CPU Rack (including both Opti-
cal and Wired Units). Controller Link Units cannot be installed on an Expan-
sion I/O Rack, a SYSMAC BUS Slave Rack, or a SYSMAC BUS/2 Slave
Rack.
The CVM1 and CV-series Controller Link Unit is classified as a CPU Bus Unit
and must be mounted in a CPU bus slot.
Note Tighten the screws on the Backplane to a torque of 1.2 N • m.
Tighten the fixed screws on the CPU Unit to a torque of 0.9 N • m.
60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Unit Installation
Section 3-2
CPU Backplane
CV500-BC101, CVM1-BC103/CV500-BC051, CVM1-BC053/CV500-BC031
CPU Rack (CV500/CV1000/CV2000/CVM1)
The Unit can be mounted to the 3/5/10 slots
shown in the diagram on the right. (It cannot
be mounted to the leftmost slot even if an
Expansion CPU Rack is not used.)
I
O
C
C
P
U
P
S
3/5/10 slots
Install in four of
these 14, 16, or
21 slots.
Expansion CPU Rack
CV500/BI111
Expansion CPU Rack
I
Any of the 11 slots shown in the illustration
can be used. The leftmost slot cannot be
used.
P
S
O
I
F
11 slots
Expansion I/O Rack
Controller Link Units cannot be mounted to
Expansion I/O Racks.
I
O
P
S
I
F
PS:
Power Supply Unit
CPU Unit
CPU:
IOC:
IOIF:
I/O Control Unit
I/O Interface Unit
CS-series PLCs
Up to a total of eight Controller Link Units with unit version 1.2 or later (wired,
optical, and optical ring) for CS-series PLCs (or up to four pre-Ver. 1.2 Con-
troller Link Units) can be installed in a CPU Backplane or a CS Expansion
Rack. Controller Link Units cannot be installed on an C200H Expansion I/O
Rack or a SYSMAC BUS Slave Rack.
Note Tighten the screws on the Backplane to a torque of 0.9 N • m.
Tighten the fixed screws on the CPU Unit to a torque of 0.4 N • m.
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Unit Installation
Section 3-2
CPU Backplane
CS1W-BC103, CS1W-BC083, CS1W-BC053, CS1W-BC033, CS1W-BC023
CPU Rack
The Unit can be mounted to the 2/3/5/8/10
slots shown in the diagram on the right.
Of these slots, installation
is possible in up to 8 slots
(unit Ver. 1.2 or later).
Installation in up to 4 slots
is possible for pre-Ver. 1.2
Units.
2/3/5/8/10 slots
CS Expansion Backplane
CS1W-BI103, CS1W-BI083, CS1W-BI053, CS1W-BI033
CS Expansion Backplane
Slots 3/5/8/10 shown in the illustration can be
used.
3/5/8/10 slots
C200H Expansion I/O Backplane
C200H Expansion I/O Backplane
Controller Link Units cannot be mounted to
Expansion I/O slots.
PS:
Power Supply Unit
CPU Unit
CPU:
Note When installing several CS-series CPU Bus Units at the same time, a total of
16 CS-series CPU Bus Units maximum may be installed.
Up to eight CS/CJ-series Controller Link Units with unit version 1.2 or later
can be connected to a single CPU Unit. When connecting multiple Controller
Link Units to the CPU Unit, consider the current consumption of the CPU Unit
and each CPU Bus Unit before selecting the Power Supply Unit. For details on
Controller Link Unit current consumption, refer to Controller Link Unit Models
and PLCs on page 16. For details on current consumption of each Unit, refer
to the SYSMAC CS Series Programmable Controllers Operation Manual
(W339).
The following table provides an example of current consumption
Example: Using the C200HW-PA204 Power Supply Unit supplying a maxi-
mum current of 4.6 A (5 V) and maximum power of 30 W.
Name
Model
Current consumption
per Unit (A)
Number of
Units
Current consumption
(A)
CPU Backplane (8 slots)
CPU Unit
CS1W-BC083
0.11 A
0.82 A
1
1
8
0.11 A
0.82 A
2.64 A
CS1H-CPU67H
Controller Link Unit (Optical) CS1W-CLK21-V1 0.33 A
Total
3.57 (power consump-
tion: 17.85 W)
62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Unit Installation
Section 3-2
CJ-series PLCs
Up to a total of four Controller Link Units for CJ-series PLCs can be connected
in a CPU Rack or a Expansion Rack. (Be sure to secure the Units with the top
and bottom sliders.)
CPU Rack
P
S
C
P
U
I
C
End Cover
10 Unit max.
CJ-series Expansion
Rack
P
S
I
I
End Cover
Of these slots, installation
10 Unit max.
is possible in up to 8 slots
(unit Ver. 1.2 or later).
Installation in up to 4 slots
is possible for pre-Ver. 1.2
Units.
CJ-series Expansion
Rack
P
S
I
I
End Cover
10 Unit max.
CJ-series Expansion
Rack
P
S
I
I
End Cover
10 Unit max.
PS: Power Supply Unit
CPU: CPU Unit
IC: I/O Control Unit
II: I/O Interface Unit
Note When installing several CJ-series CPU Bus Units at the same time, a total of
16 CJ-series CPU Bus Units maximum may be installed.
Up to eight CS/CJ-series Controller Link Units with unit version 1.2 or later
can be connected to a single CPU Unit. When connecting multiple Controller
Link Units to the CPU Unit, consider the current consumption of the CPU Unit
and each CPU Bus Unit before selecting the Power Supply Unit. For details on
Controller Link Unit current consumption, refer to Controller Link Unit Models
and PLCs on page 16. For details on current consumption of each Unit, refer
to the SYSMAC CJ Series Programmable Controllers Operation Manual
(W393).
The following table provides an example of current consumption
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Unit Installation
Section 3-2
Example: Using the C200HW-PA204 Power Supply Unit supplying a maxi-
mum current of 4.6 A (5 V) and maximum power of 30 W.
Name
Model
Current consumption
per Unit (A)
Number of
Units
Current consumption
(A)
CPU Backplane (8 slots)
CPU Unit
CS1W-BC083
0.11 A
0.82 A
1
1
8
0.11 A
0.82 A
2.64 A
CS1H-CPU67H
Controller Link Unit (Optical) CS1W-CLK21-V1 0.33 A
Total
3.57 (power consump-
tion: 17.85 W)
CQM1H-series PLCs
Only one Controller Link Unit can be connected in a CQM1H-series PLC.
Connect the Controller Link Unit to the left side of the CPU Unit and then con-
nect the Power Supply Unit to the left of the Controller Link Unit.
After the Units have been connected, secure them with the slide locks on the
top and bottom of the Units.
CQM1H-CLK21
Controller Link Unit
CQM1H-CPU51/61
CPU Unit
Power Supply Unit
Note The CQM1H-CLK21 Controller Link Unit can be connected only to the
CQM1H-CPU51/61 CPU Unit. It cannot be connected to the CQM1H-CPU11/
21 CPU Unit.
3-2-2 Mounting a Repeater Unit
Repeater Units can be either mounted on a DIN Track or screw-mounted.
64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Unit Installation
Section 3-2
Screw-mounting a Repeater Unit
Use M4 × 15 screws to mount the Unit as shown in the following diagram.
Two, M4
81 mm
21 mm
8 mm
Mounting a Repeater Unit on DIN Track
1,2,3...
1. Unlock the DIN Track mounting pins located on the rear of the Repeater
Unit.
2. Attach the Repeater Unit by hooking it onto the DIN Track from above (1)
and then pressing it into place (2).
3. Lock all DIN Track mounting pins.
DIN Track mounting pin
4. Secure the Repeater Unit by mounting one End Plate on each side of the
Unit. End Plates are attached by hooking first the bottom (1) then the top
of the Plate onto the DIN Track and pulling down (2). Use the screw on the
each End Plate to fasten it in place.
DIN Track
Mount the Repeater Unit to DIN Track. Use at least three screws to attach the
DIN Track to the control panel.
DIN Track: PFP-50N (50 cm), PFP-100N (100 cm), PFP-100N2 (100 cm)
The DIN Track should be attached within the control panel using M4 screws
spaced not more than 210 mm (not more than 6 holes) apart. Attach a DIN
Track in at least 3 points for the longest DIN Track length. Tightening torque
should be 1.2 N·m.
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wiring
Section 3-3
PFP-100N2
PFP-100N/50N
End Plate: PFP-M (2 Plates required per Repeater Unit)
3-3 Wiring
3-3-1 Communications Cables
Using the specified twisted-pair cable, connect all nodes using the multidrop
method.
Controller Link Unit
g
BD H
#
BD L
SHLD
Terminating resistance
switch (OFF)
Terminating resistance
switch (OFF)
Terminating resistance
switch (ON)
Terminating resistance
switch (ON)
Communications Cables
The following shielded twisted-pair cables should be used for Controller Link
Network connections.
Model
Manufacturer
Kromberg & Schubert,
Li2Y-FCY2 x 0.56 qmm
Komtec Department
Draka Cables Industrial
Belden
1 x 2 x AWG – 20PE + Tr.CUSN + PVC
#9207
ESVC 0.5 x 2 C
Bando Densen Co.
Japan Electric Wire & Cable Co.
ESNC0.5X2C-99-087B
Note
1. Use the specified cable only.
2. Keep communications cables separated from power lines or a high-tension
lines to prevent influences from electronic noise.
66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wiring
Section 3-3
3. Do not connect the shield cable of the communications cable to a ground
that is also being used for power-system devices, such as inverters.
4. Ground the shield line of the communications cable at one end of the net-
work. Do not ground the shield at both ends.
5. Do not run wiring outdoors. If outdoor wiring is necessary, take protective
measures against lightning, such as underground wiring or wiring inside
pipes.
6. The minimum length of the communications cable between nodes is 1 m.
Prepare the communications cables at a length of 1 m or more.
7. Use the multidrop method for connecting nodes. Normal communications
will not be possible with T branches.
8. Turn ON the terminating resistance switch at the nodes at both ends of the
network to connect terminating resistance. Turn OFF the terminating resis-
tance switch at all other nodes.
9. A label has been placed over the upper surface of the Controller Link Unit
to prevent scraps of wire from entering the Unit. Conduct wiring and instal-
lation with this label in place. If wire scraps get into the Unit, it will malfunc-
tion (C200HW-CLK21, CS1W-CLK21-V1, CJ1W-CLK21-V1, and CQM1H-
CLK21 only).
10. Remove the label after wiring to avoid overheating. Overheating will cause
the Unit to malfunction (C200HW-CLK21, CS1W-CLK21-V1, CJ1W-
CLK21-V1, and CQM1H-CLK21 only).
Connecting the Shield Line
Connect both ends of the shield line to the terminal blocks and earth the ter-
minal block at the one end of the network.
g
BD H
#
BD L
SHLD
Terminal Block Connections
Not Unit a Relay Terminal Block
CVM1-CLK21
CS1W-CLK21-V1
CJ1W-CLK21-V1
(End node)
C200HW-CLK21
(End node)
Terminating
resistance
(OFF)
Terminating
resistance
(ON)
↓
ON
TER SW
↓
TER SW
ON
BD
BD
H
L
BD
BD
H
L
BD
BD
H
L
TER
SW
SHLD
SHLD
SHLD
Terminating
resistance
(ON)
↓
ON
Ground
Note Use the recommended crimp terminals when connecting the cable’s signal
lines or shield line to the terminal blocks. Short circuits can damage the Units.
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wiring
Section 3-3
Using a Relay Terminal Block
CVM1-CLK21
CS1W-CLK21-V1
CJ1W-CLK21-V1
(End node)
C200HW-CLK21
(End node)
Terminating
resistance
(OFF)
Terminating
resistance
(ON)
Relay
Terminal
Block (see
note 1.)
↓
TER SW
↓
TER SW
ON
ON
BD
BD
H
L
BD
BD
H
L
BD
BD
H
L
TER
SW
SHLD
SHLD
SHLD
Terminating
resistance
(ON)
↓
ON
Ground
Note
1. Mounting and dismounting during communications is not possible for Re-
lay Terminal Blocks connected to the nodes at the ends of the network (i.e.:
the nodes with terminating resistance).
2. Use the recommended crimp terminals when connecting the cable’s signal
lines or shield line to the terminal blocks. Short circuits can damage the
Units.
Connecting the Communications Cables
Use crimp terminals when connecting communications cables to a Controller
Link Unit. Use the following procedure to connect communications cables to a
terminal block.
1,2,3...
1. Peel back the cover of the cable for about 50 mm without scratching the
mesh of the shield. Do not peel too much because it may cause a short-
circuit.
Approx. 50 mm
2. Twist the mesh of the shield to form a line.
3. Leave the tip of the wire created by twisting the shield exposed and cover
the remaining section with a heat-shrinking tube.
Wire created by
twisting the shield
Cover with a
heat-shrinking
tube
Exposed portion for
crimp terminal
connection
4. Remove enough of the cover from the signal lines to allow the crimp termi-
nals to be connected, taking care not to damage the signal lines. Damage
to the signal lines could cause the cable to break.
68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wiring
Section 3-3
5. Twist firmly the portion of the signal lines that are exposed.
6. Apply vinyl tape or heat-shrinking tube to the end of the cover that was
peeled in step 1.
Apply vinyl tape or a
heat-shrinking tube.
7. Mount the crimp terminal onto the signal lines and the shield line. Use M3
crimp terminals.
8. Connect the signal lines and the shield line to the terminal block using the
markings on the terminal block.
Shield line
Communications cable
from the previous node
Communications cable
to the next node
Communications data
High signal
Communications data
Low signal
Note a) You can change the length of the signal lines as shown in the fol-
lowing diagrams to make wiring a lot easier.
Approx. 30 mm
Approx. 40 mm
Approx. 50 mm
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wiring
Section 3-3
b) The approximate dimension for when the cable has been wired
from the terminal block along the front of the Unit is shown in the
following diagram.
25 mm max.
Note
1. Always turn OFF the power to the PLC before connecting the communica-
tions cables.
2. Always use a crimp terminal for wiring. If a wire that has only been twisted
is connected directly to a terminal block, short circuit, malfunction and
product damage will result.
3. Use the recommended crimp terminals.
4. When mounting the crimp terminal, always use the appropriate tools for
each crimp terminal and follow the appropriate installation procedures.
Contact the crimp terminal manufacturer for details on the appropriate
tools and procedures. Failure to use the appropriate tools and procedures
could cause cables to break.
5. Measure the length of peeled cable during installation according to the
crimp terminal used and make sure that the peeled length is not too long.
Cover the compressed section of the crimp terminal and cable with vinyl
tape or heat-shrinking tube.
6. Be sure not to confuse the signal lines and shield line connections.
7. Tighten the screws on the terminal block firmly. The correct tightening
torque is 0.5 N·m.
8. If a signal line disconnects from the terminal, either the Unit will be unable
to communicate with other nodes on the network or that section of the net-
work will be isolated from other nodes. Be sure not to pull on the signal
lines.
Controller Link Unit
Transmission
not possible
Isolated
(Transmission not possible)
9. Do not pull on a communication cable.
70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wiring
Section 3-3
10. When bending a communications cable, allow 60 mm or more for the bend-
ing radius (R).
11. Do not place any object on the communications cable.
12. Supply power only after checking the wiring thoroughly.
13. Connect the terminal block only after checking it thoroughly.
14. Marks are provided on the terminal block for the signal lines. Connect the
signal lines according to the marks. The marks correspond to signal lines
as listed below.
Mark
Signal name
BDH (communications data high)
BDL (communications data low)
SHLD (shield)
Line color
Black
g
White
---
@
None
3-3-2 Repeater Units
Power Supply Wiring
Repeater Units must be supplied with DC power. The procedure for wiring the
power supply is the same for all Repeater Units (CS1W-RPT01/02/03).
Use the following procedure to wire the power supply to Repeater Units.
1,2,3...
1. Attach the following crimp terminal to each of the two power lines.
Crimp terminal: AI Series manufactured by Phoenix Contact
Crimp terminal
Cable
Insert the cable and then crimp the terminal.
The following specialized tool is available for this purpose:
ZA3 manufactured by Phoenix Contact
2. Insert the crimp terminals on the positive and negative power lines into the
orange power connectors located near the bottom of the front panel of the
Repeater Unit. Insert the positive line in the top and the negative line in the
bottom.
3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to fasten the crimp terminals in place.
Note
1. Supply power to the Repeater Unit using a power supply installed specifi-
cally for the Repeater Unit. Do not supply power to the Repeater Unit from
an I/O power supply, motor power supply, or control power supply.
2. To prevent the power supply from being affected by noise, wire and install
the power supply away from power lines and high-voltage lines.
3. Attach special-purpose crimp terminals to the power cables.
4. Do not connect the positive and negative lines to the wrong connectors.
5. The power cable screws should be fastened to a tightening torque of
0.2 N·m.
6. Do not pull on the power cable.
7. Do not bend the power cable past its natural bending radius.
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wiring
Section 3-3
8. Do not place any object on the power cable.
9. Check that connectors are correctly attached before using the Unit.
Power Supply Specifications
The power supply to the Repeater Unit must meet the following specifications.
Item
CS1W-RPT01
Wire-to-Wire
Repeater Unit
CS1W-RPT02
Wire-to-Optical (H- Wire-to-Optical (GI)
PCF) Repeater Unit
CS1W-RPT03
Repeater Unit
Power supply volt- 24 V DC
age
Allowable power 20.4 to 26.4 V DC (24 V DC, −15% to 10%)
supply voltage
range
Current consump- 24 V DC at 60 mA 24 V DC at 60 mA
24 V DC at 70 mA
max.
tion
max.
max.
Inrush current
2.5 A max. (24 V DC with rise time 5 ms)
The following Power Supply Unit is recommended:
OMRON S82K Series
Laying Optical Cable (CS1W-RPT02/03 Only)
Optical fiber cable (H-PCF or GI) can be used to create an optical connection
in part of a wired network.
CS1W-RPT02 (H-PCF)
SL1
SL2
SL1
SL2
Wired Controller
Link Unit
Wired Controller
Link Unit
H-PCF cable
CS1W-RPT02
Repeater Unit
CS1W-RPT02
Repeater Unit
Note
1. Always use the specified Optical Fiber Cables.
2. The maximum distance between nodes depends on how the cable is con-
nected. For details, refer to the applicable Optical Fiber Cable (H-PCF)
manual.
Connection Procedure
1,2,3...
Use the following procedure to connect Optical Fiber Cables to a Unit.
1. Tighten screws in the mounting brackets so that the through-holes on the
terminal are on the top and bottom and then affix hexagonal nuts from the
opposite side of the terminal.
2. Insert bushing to the mounting bracket and secure the Unit with screws.
3. Pass the tension member through the through-holes, and tighten the ter-
minal screws to affix the tension member.
4. Affix the cable to the mounting bracket so that it is clamped by the bracket.
72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wiring
Section 3-3
5. Move the cable connector so that the loose ends are on the left-hand side,
and insert the Unit’s optical connector as far as it will reach.
Example: Connections for Duplex Operation of Communications Units
Mounting bracket
Tension member
Terminal
CS1W-RPT02
PW
R
T/R
1
T/R
2
BD
BD
SH
SL
1
L
TE
R
S
W
ON
SW
ON
1
1
2
BAU
RAT
D
E
SL
2
+
DC
24V
INP
UT
−
• Insert the connectors completely and always check that the connectors
are locked before starting operation.
Even in token-ring mode, the network will be broken and communications may
be disrupted if disconnections occur at two or more places. Be sure not to
allow connectors to be disconnected during communications.
• Do not pull on the Optical Fiber Cable too forcefully.
The maximum tension that can be applied to the cord is 10 kg and the
maximum tension that can be applied to the cable is 50 kg.
Cord
Cable
• Do not bend the cable too sharply. The minimum radius for bends is
10 cm.
• To prevent the Optical Fiber Cable from being pulled too forcefully, always
use the cable securing bracket and provide space below the Unit as
shown in the following diagram. Do not exceed the maximum tension for
the cord and cable:
Cord: 0 kg (Do not apply any tension.)
Cable: 5 kg
Cord
Cable
• Do not place objects on top of the Optical Fiber Cable. The maximum
pressure that can be placed on the cord and cable is as follows:
Cord: 30 kg/10 cm
Cable: 50 kg/10 cm
• Inspect the connector before installing it.
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wiring
Section 3-3
Communications Cables
Optical Bus or Optical
Ring System (H-PCF
Cable)
The following devices are required for the Optical Bus or Optical Ring (H-PCF)
Controller Link Network. The cable and connectors are the same as those
used for Optical SYSMAC LINK Networks.
Optical Fiber Cables (Indoor Use Only)
Use the following Optical Fiber Cables (Hard Plastic-clad Fiber: H-PCF).
Name
Specifications
10 m
Model
H-PCF cables
Black
S3200-HCCB101
S3200-HCCB501
S3200-HCCB102
S3200-HCCB502
S3200-HCCB103
S3200-HCCO101
S3200-HCCO501
S3200-HCCO102
S3200-HCCO502
S3200-HCCO103
50 m
100 m
500 m
1,000 m
10 m
Orange
50 m
100 m
500 m
1,000 m
Note The Optical Fiber Cable model numbers are as follows.
S3200-H@@@@@@@
Tensioner option
None: Standard (with tension member)
N:
Without tension member
Cable length
@@@
A B
(A/10) x 10B m
Cable color
B: Black
O: Orange
Cable specification
L: With power supply line
C: Without power supply line
Type
B: Cord
C: Cable
Name
Model
Specifications
Connector
S3200-COCF2071 Use to connect a cable to a node.
(Full-lock connector for crimp-cut cable.)
S3200-COCF2571 Use to connect a cable to a node.
(Half-lock connector for crimp-cut cable.)
Inline Adapter S3200-COIAT2000 Use to connect or extend cables.
(Use one adapter for each connection.)
Note
1. Either full-lock or half-lock connectors can be used in a Controller Link Net-
work, but we recommend full-lock connectors to prevent accidental discon-
nections during operation.
2. The maximum distance between nodes is slightly shorter for connectors
with crimp-cut cables compared to connectors assembled with adhesive.
Also, the maximum distance is reduced due to extension loss when Inline
Adapters are used to extend cables.
74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wiring
Section 3-3
Optical Fiber Cables with Connectors (Indoor Use Only)
The following Optical Fiber Cables are available with Connectors already
attached.
Specifications
Length
Model
S3200-CN201-20-20
S3200-CN501-20-20
S3200-CN102-20-20
S3200-CN152-20-20
S3200-CN202-20-20
Optical Fiber Cable Connectors: 2 m
S3200-COCF2071
⇓
S3200-COCF2071
5 m
10 m
15 m
20 m
Over 20 m S3200-CN-20-20
(Specify length (m) when ordering.)
Optical Fiber Cable Connectors: 2 m
S3200-CN201-20-25
S3200-COCF2071
⇓
S3200-COCF2571
5 m
S3200-CN501-20-25
S3200-CN102-20-25
S3200-CN152-20-25
S3200-CN202-20-25
10 m
15 m
20 m
Over 20 m S3200-CN-20-25
(Specify length (m) when ordering.)
Optical Fiber Cable Connectors: 2 m
S3200-CN201-25-25
S3200-COCF2571
⇓
S3200-COCF2571
5 m
S3200-CN501-25-25
S3200-CN102-25-25
S3200-CN152-25-25
S3200-CN202-25-25
10 m
15 m
20 m
Over 20 m S3200-CN-25-25
(Specify length (m) when ordering.)
Note
1. Consult a specialist tradesman if cables with outdoor specifications are re-
quired.
2. The cables listed above are black and have power supply lines and tension
members, although the power supply lines aren’t used in the Controller
Link Network.
3. All of the cables listed above are attached to the connectors with adhesive.
4. Special training is required to assemble Optical Fiber Cables and connec-
tors with adhesive.
Optical Fiber Cable Accessories
Use the following accessories to assemble and test Optical Fiber Cables.
Name
Model
Specifications
Manufacturer
Optical Fiber Assembly
Tool
CAK-0057
CAT-2700
CAT-2001H
Crimp-cut tool for the S3200-COCF2071/2571 Con- Sumitomo Electric
nectors
Industries, Ltd.
Optical Power Tester
With CAT-2702 Head Unit and adapter for the S3200-
COCF2071/2571 Connectors
Master Fiber Set
One meter cable for use with the CAT-2702 Head
Unit
This manual does not provide details on Optical Fiber Cable preparation. For
details, refer to the instructions provided with the CAK-0057 or the S3200-
CAK1062 Assembly Tool.
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wiring
Section 3-3
CS1W-RPT03 (GI)
SL1
SL1
SL2
GI cable
Receive
Receive
Send
Wired Controller
Link Unit
Wired Controller
Link Unit
Send
SL2
CS1W-RPT03
Repeater Unit
CS1W-RPT03
Repeater Unit
Note
1. Always use the specified Optical Fiber Cables.
2. Although the Optical Fiber Cables can be distinguished by the markings or
color, in order to prevent incorrect connection it is recommended that tags
are attached to the cables.
3. The maximum distance between nodes depends on the type of GI cable
(core diameter) that is being used.
62.5/125 µm cable: Max. distance between nodes = 2 km
50/125 µm cable: Max. distance between nodes = 1 km
Connection Procedure
1,2,3...
Use the following procedure to connect Optical Fiber Cables to a Unit.
1. Attach the mounting bracket to the Unit with the provided screws.
2. Attach the clamp to the mounting bracket so that it clamps the cable(s).
1. Screw the mounting
bracket to the Unit.
Mounting bracket
2. Attach the clamp to the
mounting bracket so that
the cable(s) are clamped.
Clamp
3. Remove the Optical Connector Covers from the Unit’s connectors shown
in the following diagram if there are covers protecting the connectors.
76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wiring
Section 3-3
Remove the covers from the tips of the cables’ ST connectors if there are
covers protecting the ST connectors.
Optical Connector Cover
Pull off the cover.
Rotate the cover 90°
counterclockwise.
Note To replace the Optical Connector Cover, just reverse the steps shown
in the diagram above.
4. Turn the cable connector so that the tab in the connector faces left and
aligns with the slot in the Unit’s connector. Insert the cable connector fully
into the Unit’s optical connector. Press and turn the cable’s connector
clockwise to lock the connector in place.
Unit's optical
connector
Cable
connector
Slot
Press and turn the metal fitting on
the cable connector until it locks.
Tab
Align the tab in the cable connector with
the slot in the Unit's connector and fully
insert the cable connector.
Note To remove the connector, just reverse the steps shown in the diagram
above. (Press and turn the cable connector’s metal fitting counter-
clockwise to unlock the connector.)
5. After installing the Optical Fiber Cable, fix the tension member of the Opti-
cal Fiber Cable.
Insert the connectors completely and always check that the connectors are
locked before starting operation.
When installing Optical Fiber Cables, be sure to stay within the specifications
(e.g., tensile strength, bending, lateral pressure) for the cables used.
Optical Fiber Cables
Use Optical Fiber Cables (Graded Index: GI) with the following optical specifi-
cations.
50/125 µm AGF Cable
Item
Minimum
Standard
0.21
Maximum
---
Unit
Conditions
Theoretical value
Numerical Aper- ---
ture (N.A.)
---
Transmission
loss
---
---
3.0 Lf
dB
0.5 km ≤ Lf
0.2 km ≤ Lf < 0.5 km
Lf < 0.2 km
λ = 0.8 µm
Ta = 25°C
3.0 Lf + 0.2
3.0 Lf + 0.4
1.0
Connection loss ---
---
---
λ = 0.8 µm, one location
λ = 0.85 µm (LD)
Transmission
bandwidth
500
---
MHz⋅km
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Constructing Networks with Repeater Units
Section 3-4
Note Lf is fiber length in km, Ta is ambient temperature, and λ is the peak wave-
length of the test light source.
62.5/125 µm AGF Cable
Item
Minimum
Standard
0.28
Maximum
---
Unit
Conditions
Theoretical value
Numerical Aper- ---
ture (N.A.)
---
Transmission
loss
---
---
3.5 Lf
dB
0.5 km ≤ Lf
0.2 km ≤ Lf < 0.5 km
Lf < 0.2 km
λ = 0.8 µm
Ta = 25°C
3.5 Lf + 0.2
3.5 Lf + 0.4
1.0
Connection loss ---
---
---
λ = 0.8 µm, one location
λ = 0.85 µm (LD)
Transmission
bandwidth
200
MHz⋅km
Note Lf is fiber length in km, Ta is ambient temperature, and λ is the peak wave-
length of the test light source.
Connectors
ST Connector
3-4 Constructing Networks with Repeater Units
Repeater Units can be used to construct flexible networks such as those
shown below.
Long-distance Wiring
T-Branch Wiring
500 m max.
(at 2 Mbit/s)
CS1W-RPT01
Repeater Unit
CS1W-RPT01
Repeater Unit
500 m max.
(at 2 Mbit/s)
62-node Configuration
Partial Conversion to Optical Cable
31 nodes max.
Wire cable
Wire cable
CS1W-RPT01
Repeater Unit
CS1W-RPT02/03
Optical cable
CS1W-RPT02/03
Repeater Unit
31 nodes max.
Repeater Unit
Note
1. Repeater Units must be supplied with 24-V DC power.
2. Wire-to-Optical Repeater Units (CS1W-RPT02 and CS1W-RPT03) are
used to convert a section of a wired network to optical fiber. Two Units are
always used as a single set.
Wire-to-Optical Repeater Units cannot be connected to Optical Ring/Opti-
cal Controller Link Units or Support Boards. If these types of Controller
Link Units or Support Boards are connected by mistake, communications
errors will occur throughout the network.
3. Repeater Units have a baud rate switch and a terminating resistance
switch. The same baud rate must be set for all nodes on the network.
In addition, the terminating resistance switch of Units (Controller Link
78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Constructing Networks with Repeater Units
Section 3-4
Units/Support Boards or Repeater Units) at both ends of each network
segment created by installing Repeaters must also be turned ON.
To construct a 62-node configuration in a wired network, all network nodes
must consist of one of the following models:
CS1W-CLK21-V1, CJ1W-CLK21-V1, 3G8F7-CLK21-V1
The following Wired Network 62 Node Enable Bit in the DM Parameter
Area software switch on each node must be turned ON to enable using 62
nodes maximum:
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
−
8
−
7
−
6
−
5
−
4
−
3
−
2
−
1
−
0
−
Software switch
(D30000+100 ×
unit number)
−
−
−
−
−
Wired Network 62 Nodes Enable Bit
0: 32 nodes max.
1: 62 nodes max.
4. Repeater Units can be connected in a network in advance if new nodes are
to be added to the network after the system has been constructed. When
it becomes necessary to add a node, cabling can be accomplished easily
by simply wiring a T-Branch to the Repeater Unit. This method also allows
nodes to be added without stopping communications over the existing net-
work.
3-4-1 Segments
Repeater Units divide a wired Controller Link network into segments. Seg-
ments are comprised of nodes connected in a multi-drop configuration using
wire cables. The specifications of the network within a segment are identical
to the wired Controller Link network itself. The specifications within a single
segment are shown in the following table.
Item
Specifications within
each segment
Remarks
Transmission line
type
Multi-drop
---
Baud rate and maxi- 2 Mbps: 500 m
Because Repeater Units enable
up to 2 stages to be connected,
the maximum transmission dis-
tance of a network (i.e., the total
length of the longest path connect-
ing any two nodes) is as follows:
2 Mbps: 1.5 km
mum transmission
distance
1 Mbps: 800 m
500 Kbps: 1 km
1 Mbps: 2.4 km
500 Kbps: 3 km
Maximum number of 32, including Controller
Repeater Units do not use a node
address.
nodes (Units)
Link Units, Support
Boards, and Repeater
Units
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Constructing Networks with Repeater Units
Section 3-4
: Controller Link Unit/Support
Board
Wire
: Wire-to-wire Repeater Unit
Optical
fiber
cable
: Wire-to-optical Repeater Unit
(two Units used in a pair)
: Range of a single segment
Note: The Repeater Unit will be
counted in the number of
nodes for each segment that
it is connected to.
3-4-2 Number of Repeater Units
The number of Repeater Units that can be connected in a Wired Controller
Link Network depends on the mode of connection.
When Repeater Units are used, a maximum of 32 Units, including Controller
Link Units/Support Boards and Repeater Units, can be connected within a
single segment.
Moreover, if Repeater Units are used for T-Branch wiring, long-distance wiring
or partial conversion to optical fiber, up to two repeater stages (see note
below) can be connected. Connect Repeater Units so that they do not exceed
these ranges.
Note The maximum number of repeater stages refers to the maximum number of
Repeater Units that can be inserted into the path connecting any two nodes.
In other words, it is necessary to connect Repeater Units so that no more than
two Repeater Units (two stages) need to be passed for any node within a net-
work to reach any other node. With Wire-to-Optical Repeater Units, two Units
make up a single set, which is counted as a single stage.
Examples of Correct Repeater Unit Connections
T-Branch Wiring: 2-stage Repeater Unit Connection
Stage 2
Stage 1
CS1W-RPT01
Repeater Unit
Not more than 2 Repeater Units (2 stages) must be passed for any node to
reach any other node
80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Constructing Networks with Repeater Units
Section 3-4
Long-distance Wiring: 2-stage Repeater Unit Connection
Stage 2
CS1W-RPT01
Repeater Unit
Not more than 2 Repeater Units (2 stages) must be passed for any node to
reach any other node
Partial Optical Conversion: 2-stage Repeater Unit Connection
Optical
fiber cable
CS1W-RPT02 or
CS1W-RPT03
Repeater Unit
Stage 1
Stage 2
Two Wire-to-Optical Repeater Units make up a single set counted as a single
stage. Therefore, not more than 4 Repeater Units (2 stages) must be passed
for any node to reach any other node.
Examples of Incorrect Repeater Unit Connections
More than 2 Stages of Repeater Units
PLC A
PLC B
CS1W-RPT01
Repeater Unit
The path from PLC A to PLC B travels via 3 Repeater Units (3 stages). This
kind of network is NOT allowed.
More than 2 Stages of Repeater Units
CS1W-RPT01
Repeater Unit
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Constructing Networks with Repeater Units
Section 3-4
The path from one node to another travels via three Repeater Units
(3 stages). This kind of network is NOT allowed.
Note If the Repeater Units are used incorrectly, communications errors may occur,
or nodes may not be able to participate in the network.
3-4-3 Terminating Resistance
In a Wired Controller Link Network, turn ON the terminating resistance
switches only at the nodes at both ends of the network.
When Repeater Units are used to divide the network into multiple segments,
turn ON the terminating resistance switches of the nodes at both ends of each
segment. When a Repeater Unit is connected to the end of a segment, turn
ON the built-in terminating resistance switch of the Repeater Unit itself.
Connection examples are shown below.
T-Branch Wiring
Segment 1
Terminating
Terminating
resistance: ON
resistance: ON
Terminating
resistance: ON
Terminating
resistance: ON
Terminating
resistance: ON
Terminating
resistance: ON
Segment 2
Segment 3
CS1W-RPT01
Repeater Unit
Terminating resistance is turned ON at both ends of
each segment. (Repeater Units are also equipped
with a built-in terminating resistance switch.)
Long-distance Wiring
Terminating
resistance: ON
Terminating
resistance: ON
Terminating
resistance: ON
Segment 1
Segment 2
Segment 3
Terminating
resistance: ON
Terminating
resistance: ON
Terminating
resistance: ON
CS1W-RPT01
Repeater Unit
82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Constructing Networks with Repeater Units
Section 3-4
Partial Conversion to Optical Fiber
Terminating
Resistance: ON
Terminating
Resistance: ON
Terminating
Resistance: ON
(Optical fiber cable)
Segment 1
Segment 2
Repeater Unit
CS1W-RPT02 or
CS1W-RPT03
Terminating
Resistance: ON
Combining T-Branch Wiring (2-stage Repeater) and Partial Optical Fiber
Terminating
resistance: ON
CS1W-RPT01
Repeater Unit
Terminating
resistance: ON
CS1W-RPT02 or
CS1W-RPT03
Repeater Unit
Segment 1
Terminating
resistance: ON
Segment 3
Terminating
resistance: ON
Terminating
resistance: ON
Terminating
resistance: ON
Segment 4
Segment 2
Terminating
resistance: ON
Terminating
resistance: ON
Note When constructing a network using Repeater Units, each segment must sat-
isfy all of the following requirements:
• The total number of Controller Link Units, Support Boards, and Repeater
Units within a single segment must not exceed 32.
• The total cable length of a single segment must not exceed the specified
value. (500 m at 2 Mbps; 800 m at 1 Mbps; and 1 km at 500 Kbps.)
• The maximum number of repeater stages that can be inserted into the
path connecting any two nodes is two.
• The node at each end of a segment (including Repeater Units) must have
terminating resistance turned ON.
• The baud rates within each segment must be set to the same value.
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Constructing Networks with Repeater Units
Section 3-4
84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECTION 4
Preparations for Communications
This section describes the settings required for starting communications. These basic settings are required for both data
links function and the message service. Carry out the settings described here before turning on power to the Controller Link
Unit.
4-1 CS-series Controller Link Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1-2 Unit Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1-3 Node Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1-4 Baud Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1-5 Terminating Resistance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2 CJ-series Controller Link Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-2 Unit Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-3 Node Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-4 Baud Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-5 Terminating Resistance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3 C200HX/HG/HE Controller Link Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-2 Node Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-3 Baud Rates and Operating Levels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-4 Terminating Resistance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4 CVM1 and CV-series Controller Link Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4-2 Unit Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4-3 Node Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4-4 Baud Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4-5 Terminating Resistance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5 CQM1H-series Controller Link Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5-2 Node Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5-3 Baud Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5-4 Terminating Resistance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-6 Repeater Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-6-1 Wire-to-Wire Repeater Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-6-2 Baud Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-6-3 Terminating Resistance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
86
86
86
87
88
89
89
90
90
91
92
92
93
94
94
95
96
97
97
98
98
99
99
100
100
101
101
102
102
103
103
104
85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CS-series Controller Link Units
Section 4-1
4-1 CS-series Controller Link Units
The following settings are required for a Controller Link Unit used with a CS-
series PLC.
Item
Unit number
Switch
Unit number setting switch
Node address switches
Baud rate, pins 1 and 2
Page
88
89
Node address
Baud rate
Terminating resistance Terminating resistance switch
4-1-1 Overview
Unit Number
Setting range
CLK21-V1
Nodes
01 to F (default is 0)
All nodes in the Network
Node Address
Setting range
Nodes
01 to 32 (default is 01)
All nodes in the Network
Baud Rate
Pins
Baud rate
Maximum
transmission
distance
Nodes
Pin 1
Pin 2
OFF
OFF
2 Mbps
1 Mbps
500 Kbps
500 m
800 m
1 km
Set same
rate for all
nodes in the
Network.
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
Cannot be set.
Note Factory default setting is in bold.
Always leave pins 3 and 4 OFF.
Terminating Resistance
Front switch Terminating
resistance
Nodes
OFF
(factory default)
Not connected All nodes in the Network
Turn ON the terminating resis-
tance at the nodes at both
ends of the Network and turn it
OFF at all other nodes.
ON
Connected
4-1-2 Unit Number
Set the unit number for each Unit using the rotary switches on the front of the
Unit. The unit number is used to identify a CPU Bus Unit within the PLC. Any
unit number can be set between 0 and F in hexadecimal (00 to 15 in decimal)
Note: The factory default settings are shown above.
.
86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CS-series Controller Link Units
Section 4-1
Item
Setting method
Specifications
Single-digit hexadecimal
Setting range
Node
0 to F (decimal 00 to 15, default is 0)
All nodes in the Network
Set the node address using a small flat-blade screwdriver, being careful not to
damage the rotary switches.
Note
1. Always turn OFF the PLC’s power before setting the unit number.
2. When setting a Unit for the first time or changing the existing setting, create
a I/O table in the PLC’s CPU Unit.
3. Do not set the same unit number twice within the same PLC. An error will
occur if the same unit number is set for two different Unit, and the CPU Unit
will not be able to recognize the Units.
4. When the Unit is recognized by the PLC’s CPU Unit, “NS” will be shown in
the I/O table displayed for the CX-Programmer programming device.
5. The default setting is “0.”
6. The unit number determines the words used by the Controller Link Unit in
PLC memory.
4-1-3 Node Addresses
Set the node addresses of each Unit on the Network using the rotary switches
on the front of the Unit. The node address is used to identify each node in the
Network can be set to any number between 01 and 32.
1's digit
10's digit
Note: The factory default settings are shown above.
Item
Setting method
Specifications
2-digit decimal
Setting range
Node
01 to 32 (default is 01) (See note 1.)
All nodes in the Network
Set the node address using a small flat-blade screwdriver, being careful not to
damage the rotary switches.
Note
1. When all of the following conditions are satisfied, node addresses can be
set between 01 and 62, and the network can contain up to 62 nodes.
a) All nodes in the Controller Link Network use CS1W-CLK21-V1 or
CJ1W-CLK21-V1 Units.
b) The Wired Network 62 Node Enable Bit in the DM Parameter Area
software switches (bit 11 of D30000 + 100 × Unit No.) of all nodes is
turned ON.
c) At least one CS1W-RPT01 Repeater Unit is connected and the num-
ber of nodes in a single segment does not exceed 31.
2. Always turn OFF the PLC’s power before setting the node addresses.
3. Do not set the same node address twice within the same network. An error
will occur if the same address is set for two different nodes. The ERC indi-
cator on the front of the Unit will light (Communications Error Flag) and ei-
87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CS-series Controller Link Units
Section 4-1
ther communications will stop, or the INS indicator will not light and you will
be unable to participate in the Network.
4. When CS1W-CLK21-V1 and CJ1W-CLK21-V1 Units are used with other
models in the same network, set the node addresses of all nodes between
1 and 32. In a network containing pre-version-1 models, it is not possible
to construct a network that uses a node address higher than 32.
Turn ON the Wired Network 62 Node Enable Bit (bit 11 of D30000 + 100 ×
Unit No.) in the DM Parameter Area software switch of all CS1W-CLK21-
V1 and CJ1W-CLK21-V1 Units to restrict the network to 32 nodes maxi-
mum. If a different value is specified, the network will be incorrectly config-
ured.
5. To construct a network that uses a node address higher than 32, it is nec-
essary for all nodes to be CS1W-CLK21-V1 or CJ1W-CLK21-V1 Units.
In addition, the Wired Network 62 Node Enable Bit in the DM Parameter
Area software switch of all nodes must be turned ON to enable using 62
nodes maximum. If a different value is specified, the network will not be
correctly configured.
6. Only node addresses 1 through 32 can be used on networks for which 62
nodes have not been enabled.
7. The Wired Network 62 Node Enable Bit in the DM Parameter Area soft-
ware switches of CS1W-CLK21-V1 and CJ1W-CLK21-V1 Units is read
when the Unit is restarted.
8. The send sequence for the data link areas is determined according to the
sequence of node addresses for automatically set data links.
9. Assign node addresses consecutively beginning from 01 whenever possi-
ble to minimize Network construction time.
4-1-4 Baud Rates
Set the following pins for the baud rate settings (DIP switch).
Pins 1, 2: Baud rate
Pins 3, 4: Not used (must be OFF)
Note: The factory default settings are shown above.
Note
1. Always turn OFF the PLC’s power before setting the baud rate.
2. Keep pins 3 and 4 set to OFF.
Baud Rate (Pins 1 and 2)
Set the same baud rate for all the nodes on the Network using DIP switch pins
1 and 2 on the front of the Unit. The baud rate is set as shown below.
The maximum transmission distance will also change according to the setting.
Pins
Baud rate
Maximum
transmission distance
Pin 1
Pin 2
OFF
ON
OFF
2 Mbps
500 m
800 m
1 km
OFF
ON
1 Mbps
OFF
ON
500 Kbps
Do not set.
ON
Note The factory default setting is shown in bold.
Note
1. Set the same baud rate for all the nodes on the Network. Normal commu-
nication cannot be performed unless the same baud rate is set for all the
nodes.
88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CJ-series Controller Link Units
Section 4-2
2. The default setting is 2 Mbps, 500 m.
4-1-5 Terminating Resistance
Turn ON the terminating resistance using the switch on the bottom of the Unit
for the Units of both ends of the Network. The terminating resistance is
required at both ends of a Network to absorb unnecessary signals and reduce
noise.
The Controller Link Unit has built-in terminating resistance, which can be con-
nected simply by turning ON the slide switch.
ON
Bottom switch
OFF (factory default)
ON
Terminating resistance
Not connected.
Connected.
Note
1. Always turn OFF the PLC’s power before setting the terminating resistance
switch.
2. Turn ON the switch to connect terminating resistance at the nodes at both
ends of the Network and turn OFF the switch at all other nodes. Normal
communication cannot be performed in the Network unless all the nodes
are set properly.
3. The TER LED indicator will light when the terminating resistance switch is
set to ON.
4. The default setting is OFF (not connected).
4-2 CJ-series Controller Link Units
The following settings are required for a Controller Link Unit used with a CJ-
series PLC.
Item
Switch
Unit number setting switch
Node address switches
Baud rate, pins 1 and 2
Page
Unit number
Node address
Baud rate
92
92
Terminating resistance Terminating resistance switch
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CJ-series Controller Link Units
Section 4-2
4-2-1 Overview
Unit Number
Setting range
CLK21-V1
RUN ERC
INS SD
Nodes
TER ERH M/A LNK RD
4
UNIT
No.
C A
01 to F (default is 0)
All nodes in the Network
4
UNIT
C A
No.
Node Address
Setting range
NODE
No.
NODE
No.
x101
Nodes
x101
01 to 32 (default is 01)
All nodes in the Network
x100
ON
1
2
BAUD
RATE
SW1
x100
Baud Rate
Pins
ON
Baud rate
Maximum
transmission
distance
Nodes
1
2
TER SW
BAUD
RATE
ON
SW1
Pin 1
Pin 2
BD
BD
H
L
OFF
OFF
2 Mbps
1 Mbps
500 Kbps
500 m
800 m
1 km
Set same
rate for all
nodes in the
Network.
ON
OFF
ON
SHLD
OFF
ON
ON
Cannot be set.
Note Factory default setting is in bold.
Terminating Resistance
Front switch Terminating
Nodes
resistance
OFF
(factory default)
Not connected All nodes in the Network
Turn ON the terminating resis-
tance at the nodes at both
ends of the Network and turn it
OFF at all other nodes.
ON
Connected
4-2-2 Unit Number
Set the unit number for each Unit using the rotary switches on the front of the
Unit. The unit number is used to identify a CPU Bus Unit within the PLC. Any
unit number can be set between 0 and F in hexadecimal (00 to 15 in decimal).
4
UNIT
No.
Note: The factory default settings are shown.
C A
Item
Setting method
Specifications
Single-digit hexadecimal
Setting range
Node
0 to F (decimal 00 to 15, default is 0)
All nodes in the Network
Set the node address using a small flat-blade screwdriver, being careful not to
damage the rotary switches.
Note
1. Always turn OFF the PLC’s power before setting the unit number.
2. When setting a Unit for the first time or changing the existing setting, create
a I/O table in the PLC’s CPU Unit.
3. Do not set the same unit number twice within the same PLC. An error will
occur if the same unit number is set for two different Unit, and the CPU Unit
will not be able to recognize the Units.
4. When the Unit is recognized by the PLC’s CPU Unit, “NS” will be shown in
the I/O table displayed for the CX-Programmer programming device.
90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CJ-series Controller Link Units
Section 4-2
5. The default setting is “0.”
6. The unit number determines the words used by the Controller Link Unit in
PLC memory.
4-2-3 Node Addresses
Set the node addresses of each Unit on the Network using the rotary switches
on the front of the Unit. The node address is used to identify each node in the
Network can be set to any number between 01 and 32.
NODE
No.
x101
Note: The factory default settings are shown.
x100
Item
Setting method
Specifications
2-digit decimal
Setting range
Node
01 to 32 (default is 01) (See note 1.)
All nodes in the Network
Set the node address using a small flat-blade screwdriver, being careful not to
damage the rotary switches.
Note
1. When all of the following conditions are satisfied, node addresses can be
set between 01 and 62, and the network can contain up to 62 nodes.
a) All nodes in the Controller Link network use CS1W-CLK21-V1 or
CJ1W-CLK21-V1 Units.
b) The Wired Network 62 Node Enable Bit in the DM Parameter Area
software switches (bit 11 of D30000 + 100 × Unit No.) of all nodes is
turned ON.
c) At least one CS1W-RPT01 Repeater Unit is connected and the num-
ber of nodes in a single segment does not exceed 31.
2. Always turn OFF the PLC’s power before setting the node addresses.
3. Do not set the same node address twice within the same Network. An error
will occur if the same address is set for two different nodes. The ERC indi-
cator on the front of the Unit will light (Communications Error Flag) and ei-
ther communications will stop, or the INS indicator will not light and you will
be unable to participate in the Network.
4. When CS1W-CLK21-V1 and CJ1W-CLK21-V1 Units are used with other
models in the same Network, set the node addresses of all nodes between
1 and 32. In a network containing pre-version-1 models, it is not possible
to construct a network that uses a node address higher than 32.
Turn ON the Wired Network 62 Node Enable Bit (bit 11 of D30000 + 100 ×
Unit No.) in the DM Parameter Area software switch of all CS1W-CLK21-
V1 and CJ1W-CLK21-V1 Units to restrict the network to 32 nodes maxi-
mum. If a different value is specified, the network will be incorrectly config-
ured.
5. To construct a network that uses a node address higher than 32, it is nec-
essary for all nodes to be CS1W-CLK21-V1 or CJ1W-CLK21-V1 Units.
In addition, the Wired Network 62 Node Enable Bit of the DM Parameter
Area software switch of all nodes must be turned ON to enable 62 nodes
maximum. If a different value is specified, the network will not be correctly
configured.
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CJ-series Controller Link Units
Section 4-2
6. Only node addresses 1 through 32 can be used on networks for which 62
nodes have not been enabled.
7. The Wired Network 62 Node Enable Bit in the DM Parameter Area soft-
ware switches of CS1W-CLK21-V1 and CJ1W-CLK21-V1 Units is read
when the Unit is restarted.
8. The send sequence for the data link areas is determined according to the
sequence of node addresses for automatically set data links.
9. Assign node addresses consecutively beginning from 01 whenever possi-
ble to minimize Network construction time.
4-2-4 Baud Rates
Set the following pins for the baud rate settings (DIP switch).
ON
Pins 1, 2: Baud rate
Note: The factory default settings are shown.
Note Always turn OFF the PLC’s power before setting the baud rate.
Baud Rate (Pins 1 and 2)
Set the same baud rate for all the nodes on the Network using DIP switch pins
1 and 2 on the front of the Unit. The baud rate is set as shown below.
The maximum transmission distance will also change according to the setting.
Pins
Baud rate
Maximum
transmission distance
Pin 1
Pin 2
OFF
ON
OFF
2 Mbps
500 m
800 m
1 km
OFF
ON
1 Mbps
OFF
ON
500 Kbps
Do not set.
ON
Note The factory default setting is shown in bold.
Note
1. Set the same baud rate for all the nodes on the Network. Normal commu-
nication cannot be performed unless the same baud rate is set for all the
nodes.
2. The default setting is 2 Mbps, 500 m.
4-2-5 Terminating Resistance
Turn ON the terminating resistance using the switch on the bottom of the Unit
for the Units of both ends of the Network. The terminating resistance is
required at both ends of a Network to absorb unnecessary signals and reduce
noise.
The Controller Link Unit has built-in terminating resistance, which can be con-
nected simply by turning ON the slide switch.
↓
ON
Bottom switch
OFF (factory default)
ON
Terminating resistance
Not connected.
Connected.
92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C200HX/HG/HE Controller Link Units
Section 4-3
Note
1. Always turn OFF the PLC’s power before setting the terminating resistance
switch.
2. Turn ON the switch to connect terminating resistance at the nodes at both
ends of the Network and turn OFF the switch at all other nodes. Normal
communication cannot be performed in the Network unless all the nodes
are set properly.
3. The TER LED indicator will light when the terminating resistance switch is
set to ON.
4. The default setting is OFF (not connected).
4-3 C200HX/HG/HE Controller Link Units
The following settings are required for a Controller Link Unit used with a
C200HX/HG/HE PLC.
Item
Node address
Baud rate
Switch
Node address switches
Page
94
Baud rate and operating level switch, pins 1
and 2
Operating level
Baud rate and operating level switch, pin 4)
95
96
Terminating resistance Terminating resistance switch
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C200HX/HG/HE Controller Link Units
Section 4-3
4-3-1 Overview
Node Address
CLK21
Setting range
01 to 32 (default is 01)
Nodes
All nodes in the Network
RUN
ERC
INS
SD
TER
ERH
M/A
LNK
RD
X101
X100
NODE NO.
0
1
Baud Rate and Operating Level
X101
X100
0
1
#0, #1
RSV
4
3
2
4
3
2
1
#0, #1
•Baud Rate
RSV
BAUD
RATE
SW1
SW1
BAUD
RATE
ON
Pins
Baud rate Maximum
Nodes
1
ON
transmis-
sion dis-
tance
Pin 1
Pin 2
OFF
OFF
2 Mbps
1 Mbps
500 Kbps
500 m
800 m
1 km
Set same
rate for all
nodes in the
Network.
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
Cannot be set.
BD
BD
H
L
Note Factory default setting is in bold.
TER
SW
SHLD
Always leave pin 3 OFF.
•Operating Level
Pin 4
Operating
level
Nodes
OFF
Level 1
All nodes in the Network
(factory
default)
Set so that only one Communi-
cations Unit is set to the same
level in the same PLC.
ON
Level 0
Terminating Resistance
Bottom
switch
Terminating
resistance
Nodes
OFF
Not connected All nodes in the Network
(factory
default)
Turn ON the terminating resis-
tance at the nodes at both
ends of the Network and turn it
OFF at all other nodes.
ON
Connected
4-3-2 Node Addresses
Set the node addresses of each Unit on the Network using the rotary switches
on the front of the Unit. The node address is used to identify each node in the
Network can be set to any number between 01 and 32.
NODE NO.
X101
X100
0
1
1's digit
10's digit
94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C200HX/HG/HE Controller Link Units
Section 4-3
Item
Specifications
Setting method
Setting range
Node
2-digit decimal
01 to 32 (default is 01)
All nodes in the Network
Set the node address using a small flat-blade screwdriver, being careful not to
damage the rotary switches.
Note
1. Always turn OFF the PLC’s power before setting the node address.
2. Do not set the same node address twice within the same Network. An error
will occur if the same address is set for two different nodes. The ERC indi-
cator on the front of the Unit will light and either communications will stop,
or the INS indicator will not light and you will be unable to participate in the
Network.
3. The send sequence for the data link areas is determined according to the
sequence of node addresses for automatically set data links.
4. Assign node addresses consecutively beginning from 01 whenever possi-
ble to minimize Network construction time.
4-3-3 Baud Rates and Operating Levels
Set the following pins for the baud rate and operating level settings (DIP
switch).
Pin 4:
Pin 3:
Operating level
Not used (must be OFF)
SW1
Pins 1, 2: Baud rate
ON
Note: The factory default settings are shown above.
Note
1. Always turn OFF the PLC’s power before setting the baud rate or operating
level.
2. Keep pin 3 set to OFF. If it is turned ON, internal data may be erased.
Baud Rate (Pins 1 and 2)
Set the same baud rate for all the nodes on the Network using DIP switch pins
1 and 2 on the front of the Unit. The baud rate is set as shown below.
The maximum transmission distance will also change according to the setting.
Pins
Baud rate
Maximum transmission
distance
Pin 1
Pin 2
OFF
OFF
2 Mbps
500 m
800 m
ON
OFF
ON
1 Mbps
OFF
ON
500 Kbps
Do not set.
1 km
ON
Note The factory default setting is shown in bold.
Note Set the same baud rate for all the nodes on the Network. Normal communica-
tion cannot be performed unless the same baud rate is set for all the nodes.
Setting the Operating
Level (Pin 4)
With C200HX/HG/HE PLCs, Networks can be constructed by mounting up to
two Communications Units, such as Controller Link Units, SYSMAC LINK
Units and SYSMAC NET Link Units for the same PLC Each of these Units
must run on a different operating level.
Set the Controller Link Unit to operating level 1 or 0 using DIP switch pin 4 on
the front of the Unit.
95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C200HX/HG/HE Controller Link Units
Section 4-3
Operating level 0
Operating level 1
Operating level 0
Operating level 1
Note
It is not necessary to use the same operating
level for all nodes in the same Network.
Pin 4
OFF (factory default)
ON
Operating level
Node
Operating level 1
Operating level 0
Set all the nodes on the
Network to either Operat-
ing level.
Note
1. Do not use the same operating level for more than one Unit mounted to the
same PLC. An error will occur is the same operating level is set twice.
2. Operating levels are used by the CPU Unit to distinguish different Commu-
nications Units. Each node can have a different operating level, i.e., it is
not necessary to use the same operating level for all nodes in the same
Network.
4-3-4 Terminating Resistance
Turn ON the terminating resistance using the switch on the bottom of the Unit
for the Units of both ends of the Network. The terminating resistance is
required at both ends of a Network to absorb unnecessary signals and reduce
noise.
The Controller Link Unit has built-in terminating resistance, which can be con-
nected simply by turning ON the slide switch.
ON
Bottom switch
OFF (factory default)
ON
Terminating resistance
Not connected.
Connected.
Note
1. Always turn OFF the PLC’s power before setting the terminating resistance
switch.
2. Turn ON the switch to connect terminating resistance at the nodes at both
ends of the Network and turn OFF the switch at all other nodes. Normal
communication cannot be performed in the Network unless all the nodes
are set properly.
3. The TER LED indicator will light when the terminating resistance switch is
set to ON.
96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CVM1 and CV-series Controller Link Units
Section 4-4
4-4 CVM1 and CV-series Controller Link Units
The following settings are required for a Controller Link Unit when used with a
CVM1 or CV-series PLC.
Item
Unit number
Switch
Page
Unit number switch
99
99
Node address
Baud rate
Node address switch
Baud rate switch, pins 1 and 2
Terminating resistance Terminating resistance switch
4-4-1 Overview
CLK21
Unit Number
Setting range
Nodes
RUN
ERC
M/A
LNK
00 to 15 (default is 00)
All nodes in the Network
M/A
LNK
RD
INS
SD
Node Addresses
X101
UNIT
NO.
X101
Setting range
Nodes
X100
X100
0
0
0
1
UNIT
NO.
01 to 32 (default is 01)
All nodes in the Network
X101
0
0
0
X100
NODE
NO.
X101
NODE
NO.
0
Setting Baud Rates
Switch
X101
0
X10
ON
ON
1
Baud rate
Maximum
transmis-
sion dis-
tance
Nodes
BAUD
RATE
RSV
RSV
2
3
4
1
2
BAUD
RATE
SW1
Pin 1
Pin 2
3
4
RSV
RSV
BAUD RATE
BIT2 BIT1 RATE
OFF OFF 2MBP
OFF ON
ON OFF 500KBP
1MBP
OFF
OFF
2 Mbps
1 Mbps
500 Kbps
500 m
800 m
1 km
Set same
rate for all
nodes in
Network.
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
Do not set.
Note The factory default setting is in bold.
Always keep pins 3 and 4 set to OFF.
Terminating Resistance
Bottom switch
Terminating
resistance
Nodes
TER SW
OFF
(factory default)
Not connected All the nodes
BD
BD
H
L
Turn ON the terminating resis-
tance at the nodes at both
ends of the Network and turn it
OFF at all other nodes.
ON
Connected
SHLD
97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CVM1 and CV-series Controller Link Units
Section 4-4
4-4-2 Unit Number
Set the unit number for each Unit using the rotary switches on the front of the
Unit. The unit number is used to identify a CPU Bus Unit within the PLC. Any
unit number can be set between 00 and 15.
UNIT
NO.
X101
0
0
X100
1's digit
10's digit
Item
Setting method
Specifications
2-digit decimal
Setting range
Node
00 to 15 (default is 00)
All nodes in the Network
Set the node address using a small flat-blade screwdriver, being careful not to
damage the rotary switches.
Note
1. Always turn OFF the PLC’s power before setting the unit number.
2. When setting a Unit for the first time or changing the existing setting, create
a I/O table in the PLC’s CPU Unit.
3. Do not set the same unit number twice within the same PLC. An error will
occur if the same unit number is set for two different Unit, and the CPU Unit
will not be able to recognize the Units.
4. When the Unit is recognized by the PLC’s CPU Unit, “NS” will be shown in
the I/O table displayed for the CX-Programmer (Windows-based Support
Software).
5. The default setting is “0.”
6. The unit number determines the words used by the Controller Link Unit in
PLC memory.
4-4-3 Node Addresses
Set the node address of each Unit in the Network using the rotary switch on
the front of the Unit. The node address is used to identify each node in the
Network.
The node address can be set to any value between 01 and 32.
NODE
NO.
X101
0
1
X100
1's digit
10's digit
Item
Setting method
Specifications
2-digit decimal
Setting range
Node
01 to 32 (default is 01)
All nodes in the Network
Set the node address using a small flat-blade screwdriver, being careful not to
damage the rotary switches.
Note
1. Always turn OFF the PLC’s power before setting the node address.
98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CVM1 and CV-series Controller Link Units
Section 4-4
2. Do not set the same node address twice within the same Network. An error
will occur if the same address is set for two different nodes. The ERC indi-
cator on the front of the Unit will light and either communications will stop,
or the INS indicator will not light and you will be unable to participate in the
Network.
3. The send sequence for the data link areas is determined according to the
sequence of node addresses for automatically set data links.
4. Assign node addresses consecutively beginning from 01 whenever possi-
ble to minimize Network construction time.
4-4-4 Baud Rates
Set the following pins for the baud rate setting (DIP switch).
ON
Pin 1, 2: Baud rate
Pin 3, 4: Not used (must be OFF)
The factory default setting is shown above.
Note
1. Always turn OFF the PLC’s power before setting the baud rate.
2. Keep pins 3 and 4 set to OFF. If they are turned ON, internal data may be
erased.
Set the same baud rate for all the nodes on the Network using DIP switch pins
1 and 2 on the front of the Unit. The baud rate is set as shown below.
The maximum transmission distance will also change according to the setting.
Switch
Baud rate
Maximum
transmission distance
Pin 1
Pin 2
OFF
ON
OFF
2 Mbps
500 m
800 m
1 km
OFF
ON
1 Mbps
OFF
ON
500 Kbps
Do not set.
ON
Note The factory default setting is shown in bold.
Note Set the same baud rate for all the nodes on the Network. Normal communica-
tion cannot be performed unless the same baud rate is set for all the nodes.
4-4-5 Terminating Resistance
Turn ON the terminating resistance using the switch on the bottom of the Unit
for the Units of both ends of the Network. The terminating resistance is
required at both ends of a Network to absorb unnecessary signals and reduce
noise.
The Controller Link Unit has built-in terminating resistance, which can be con-
nected simply by turning ON the slide switch.
ON
Switch at the front
OFF (factory default)
ON
Terminating resistance
Not connected.
connected
99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CQM1H-series Controller Link Units
Section 4-5
Note
1. Always turn OFF the PLC’s power before setting the terminating resistance
switch.
2. Turn ON the switch to connect terminating resistance at the nodes at both
ends of the Network and turn OFF the switch at all other nodes. Normal
communication cannot be performed in the Network unless all the nodes
are set properly.
3. The TER indicator will light when the terminating resistance switch is set
to ON.
4-5 CQM1H-series Controller Link Units
The following settings are required for a Controller Link Unit when used with a
CQM1H-series PLC.
Item
Node address
Baud rate
Switch
Node address switch
Baud rate switch, pins 1 and 2
Page
101
102
Terminating resistance Terminating resistance switch
4-5-1 Overview
Node Addresses
Setting range
Nodes
All nodes in the Network
01 to 32 (default is 01)
Setting Baud Rate
Switch
Baud rate
Maximum
transmis-
sion dis-
tance
Nodes
Pin 1
Pin 2
OFF
OFF
2 Mbps
1 Mbps
500 Kbps
500 m
800 m
1 km
Set same
rate for all
nodes in Net-
work.
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
Do not set.
Note The factory default setting is in bold.
Terminating Resistance
Switch
Terminating
resistance
Nodes
OFF
Not connected All the nodes
(default)
ON
Turn ON the terminating resis-
tance at the nodes at both
ends of the Network and turn it
OFF at all other nodes.
Connected
100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CQM1H-series Controller Link Units
Section 4-5
4-5-2 Node Addresses
Set the node address of each Unit in the Network using the rotary switch on
the front of the Unit. The node address is used to identify each node in the
Network.
The node address can be set to any value between 01 and 32.
NODE NO.
X101
X100
Item
Setting method
Specifications
2-digit decimal
Setting range
Node
01 to 32 (default is 01)
All nodes in the Network
Set the node address using a small flat-blade screwdriver, being careful not to
damage the rotary switches.
Note
1. Always turn OFF the PLC’s power before setting the node address.
2. Do not set the same node address twice within the same Network. An error
will occur if the same address is set for two different nodes. The ERC indi-
cator on the front of the Unit will light and either communications will stop,
or the INS indicator will not light and you will be unable to participate in the
Network.
3. The send sequence for the data link areas is determined according to the
sequence of node addresses for automatically set data links.
4. Assign node addresses consecutively beginning from 01 whenever possi-
ble to minimize Network construction time.
4-5-3 Baud Rates
Set the following pins for the baud rate setting (DIP switch).
ON
BAUD RATE
SW1
Note Always turn OFF the PLC’s power before setting the baud rate.
Set the same baud rate for all the nodes on the Network using DIP switch pins
1 and 2 on the front of the Unit. The baud rate is set as shown below.
The maximum transmission distance will also change according to the setting.
Switch
Baud rate
Maximum
transmission distance
Pin 1
Pin 2
OFF
ON
OFF
2 Mbps
500 m
800 m
1 km
OFF
ON
1 Mbps
OFF
ON
500 Kbps
Do not set.
ON
Note The factory default setting is shown in bold.
101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Repeater Units
Section 4-6
Note Set the same baud rate for all the nodes on the Network. Normal communica-
tion cannot be performed unless the same baud rate is set for all the nodes.
4-5-4 Terminating Resistance
Turn ON the terminating resistance using the switch on the bottom of the Unit
for the Units of both ends of the Network. The terminating resistance is
required at both ends of a Network to absorb unnecessary signals and reduce
noise.
The Controller Link Unit has built-in terminating resistance, which can be con-
nected simply by turning ON the slide switch.
(The diagram shows the factory setting.)
Switch at the front
OFF (default)
ON
Terminating resistance
Not connected.
connected
Note
1. Always turn OFF the PLC’s power before setting the terminating resistance
switch.
2. Turn ON the switch to connect terminating resistance at the nodes at both
ends of the Network and turn OFF the switch at all other nodes. Normal
communication cannot be performed in the Network unless all the nodes
are set properly.
3. The TER indicator will light when the terminating resistance switch is set
to ON.
4. The switch is factory-set to OFF (terminating resistance not connected).
4-6 Repeater Units
Repeater Units must be set as shown in the following table before starting
communications.
Item
Switch
Baud rate switch, pin 1
Page
103
104
Baud rate
Terminating resistance Terminating resistance switch
102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Repeater Units
Section 4-6
4-6-1 Wire-to-Wire Repeater Unit
Terminating Resistance Switch for SL1
Wire-to-Wire
Repeater Unit
Wire-to-Optical
Repeater Unit
Switch
Terminating
resistance
Applicable unit
CS1W-RPT01
CS1W-RPT02
OFF
Not connected Turn ON when the Repeater
PWR
T/R1
T/R2
PWR
T/R1
T/R2
Unit is connected to the end of
ON
Connected
the Network or a segment.
BD H
BD H
Note The factory default setting is in bold.
BD L
SL1
BD L
SL1
SHLD
SHLD
TER SW
ON
TER SW
ON
ON
SW1
ON
SW1
TER SW
1
2
BAUD
RATE
1
2
BAUD
RATE
Terminating Resistance Switch for SL2
BD H
Switch
Terminating
resistance
Applicable unit
BD L
SL2
SL2
SHLD
OFF
Not connected Turn ON when the Repeater
Unit is connected to the end of
the Network or a segment.
ON
Connected
+
+
DC24V
INPUT
DC24V
INPUT
Note The factory default setting is in bold.
−
−
Baud Rate Switch
Switch
Baud rate
Maximum transmission
distance
Pin 1
OFF
Pin 2
OFF
1 segment
500 m
Network
1.5 km
2 Mbps
ON
OFF
ON
1 Mbps
800 m
2.4 km
3.0 km
OFF
ON
500 Kbps
Do not set.
1 km
ON
Note The factory default setting is in bold.
4-6-2 Baud Rates
Set the same baud rates for all nodes on the network using pins 1 and 2 of
DIP switch 1 on the front of the Unit.
ON
SW1
1
2
BAUD
RATE
The baud rate is set as shown below. The maximum transmission distance
will change according to the baud rate setting.
Switch
Baud rate
Maximum transmission dis-
tance
Pin 1
Pin 2
OFF
1 segment
500 m
Network
1.5 km
OFF
ON
2 Mbps
OFF
ON
1 Mbps
800 m
1 km
---
2.4 km
3.0 km
---
OFF
ON
500 Kbps
Do not set.
ON
103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Repeater Units
Section 4-6
See pages 15 and 79 for details on the maximum transmission distance.
Note
1. Always turn OFF power to the Repeater Unit before setting the baud rate.
2. Set the same baud rate for all nodes on the network.
Normal communications throughout the entire network will not be per-
formed if the baud rate of even a single node differs from the others.
3. The factory default setting is 2 Mbps.
4-6-3 Terminating Resistance
Turn ON the terminating resistance at the Unit located at each end of the net-
work. The terminating resistance switch is located on the front of the Unit. The
terminating resistance is required at both ends of a network, or both ends of a
segment, to absorb unnecessary signals and reduce noise.
When a Repeater Unit is located at either end of the Network, turn ON the ter-
minating resistance switch of the Repeater Unit.
Terminating Resistance Switch for Communications Cable Terminal Block SL1 and SL2
SL1 (See note.)
TER SW
ON
TER SW
SL2 (See note.)
Note The numbers 1 and 2 on the switch are in reverse order, so make sure the
switch is set correctly.
Switch
OFF (default)
ON
Terminating resistance
Not connected
Connected
Note
1. Always turn OFF power to the Repeater Unit before setting the baud rate.
2. Turn ON the switch at the node located at each end of the network to con-
nect terminating resistance and turn OFF the switches at all other nodes
to disconnect terminating resistance. Normal communications throughout
the entire network will not be performed if the terminating resistance of
even one node differs from the others.
3. The factory default setting is OFF (terminating resistance not connected).
104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECTION 5
Data Links
This section describes how to use data links in a Controller Link Network. Refer to SECTION 2 Basic Procedures for an
outline of data link application.
5-1 What Are Data Links?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-1 Data Link Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-2 Differences between Manual and Automatic Setting . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2 Setting Data Links. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-1 Selecting Manual or Automatic Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-2 Manual Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-3 Manual Setting Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-4 Automatic Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-5 Automatic Setting Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3 Starting and Stopping Data Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-1 Using a Programming Device or the User Program . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-2 Using the Controller Link Support Software and CX-Programmer .
5-3-3 Using FINS Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4 Checking Data Link Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-1 LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-2 Data Link Status Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-3 Data Link Status Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-4 Checking by Manipulating Bit/Word Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-5 Error Detection Program Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-6 Programming Examples for Processing Data when Errors Occur . .
106
111
112
113
113
114
123
129
151
153
154
155
155
156
156
156
161
161
162
162
105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What Are Data Links?
Section 5-1
5-1 What Are Data Links?
Data links automatically exchange data in the preset areas between nodes
(PLCs and/or computers) on one network. Data links can be freely created for
CS/CJ-series PLCs, C200HX/HG/HE PLCs, CVM1, CV-series PLCs,
CQM1H-series PLCs, and IBM PC/AT or compatible computers.
Two data link areas, area 1 and area 2, can be set for each node. Data links
can be set in either of the following ways.
CS/CJ-series Controller Link Unit Functions by Unit Version
Functions
Earlier version
(Pre-Ver. 1.2)
Unit version 1.2
CS1W-CLK21-V1
CJ1W-CLK21-V1
CS1W-CLK21-V1
CJ1W-CLK21-V1
Maximum number of data link 12,000 max.
20,000 max.
words (data link area for send-
ing/receiving that is created
for a single node in a single
CPU Unit)
Data Link Area
The same area cannot be The same area can be
allocated for both Area 1
and Area 2.
allocated for both Area 1
and Area 2.
Note
Use the CX-Net in CX-Programmer version 5.0 or higher to set a data link
area in which the number of send and receive words exceeds 12,000 words,
or to set data link tables that allocate the same area for Area 1 and Area 2.
• Data link areas can be manually set by inputting data link tables using
Support Software. Data link tables are created to define the data links.
These tables enable free allocation of data link areas.
• Data links can be set automatically from a Programming Device. With
automatically set data links, all link areas are the same size.
Both automatic setting and manual setting cannot be used together in the
same network. The following rules apply to these two methods of setting data
links.
• Data links are enabled concurrently for area 1 and area 2.
• Separate settings (data link start words and send area size) are made in
area 1 and area 2. The sequences of send and receive words are the
same in area 1 and area 2.
• Not all nodes must participate in the data links.
Manually Setting Data Links
Example 1: The order of send and receive
Example 2: Some nodes can send data
without receiving data.
nodes is free.
# 1
# 1
# 2
# 2
# 1
# 1
# 1
# 2
Area 1
Area 2
Area 1
# 1
# 2
# 2
Send only
# 1
# 1
# 2
# 2
# 2
# 1
# 1
# 2
# 1
# 2
Area 2
# 1
106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What Are Data Links?
Section 5-1
Example 3: Some nodes can receive
data without sending data.
Example 4: A node can receive only a
specified number of words from
the beginning of an area.
# 1
# 2
# 1
# 2
# 1
# 2
Area 1
Area 1
Area 2
# 2
# 2
# 1
Several
words from
the begin-
ning of
Receive only
# 1
# 2
# 2
# 1
# 1
# 2
# 1
# 2
Area 2
area
# 2
Receive only
Manually set data links are used to create flexible data links that meet the
needs of the individual system.
• Data links are set in the Controller Link Unit or Board of each node using
the Support Software.
• Area 1 and area 2 can be selected from PLC memory areas, including the
DM Area and EM Area.
• A send area and its size can be allocated freely for each node.
• The sequence of receive nodes can be changed.
• Nodes can be set that only send or only receive data.
• Only part of send data can be received and an offset can be used to spec-
ify the beginning of the desired part.
Manual Setting Options
The following options can be set when manually setting data links.
Offsets
Data of the only the specified number of words can be received starting from
the specified word position. The starting word is set as an offset from the
beginning of the send data. The following is an example.
Specified position in relation to the leading word
# 1
# 1
# 2
# 1
Area 1
# 2
Specified number of words
Specified position in relation to the leading word
# 1
# 1
Area 2
# 1
#2
Specified number of words
Easy Setting
The send data areas of all nodes can be set to the same size (same as for
automatic setting described next).
107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What Are Data Links?
Section 5-1
Automatically Setting Data Links with Equality Layout
Example
Node#1
Node#2
Node#3
Area 1
(Bit areas)
# 1
# 2
# 3
# 1
# 2
# 3
# 1
# 2
# 3
Area 2
(Data Memory)
# 1
# 2
# 3
# 1
# 2
# 3
# 1
# 2
# 3
Automatic setting can be used to create simple data links.
• Using a Programming Device (such as a Programming Console), set the
automatic data link mode in the DM Parameter Area of the startup node.
• Area 1 can be selected from bit-access areas (i.e., IR, CIO, and LR areas)
and area 2 can be selected from DM Area.
• In areas 1 and 2 send areas for each node are of the same size.
• Send nodes are in the same ascending order as node numbers.
• It is not possible to receive only a part of send data.
• All nodes can be specified to either participate or not participate in the
data link.
• The data link areas are exactly the same and common to all nodes partic-
ipating in the data links.
Note The Controller Link Support Software contains a function called
“Easy Setting” that can be used within the manual data link mode to
register the same data links as automatic setting. The “Easy Setting”
can be used first, and then the send size of each node and other set-
tings can be changed as required.
Automatic Setting Data Links with 1:N Allocations
This method is used to simplify setting of 1:N allocation data links between
master and slave nodes.
108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What Are Data Links?
Section 5-1
Node 1
Node 2
Node 3
Node 4
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
Area 1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
1
3
1
4
Area 2
3
4
• There are three types of 1:N allocations.
• Programming Devices (including Programming Consoles) are used to set
the automatic data link mode in the DM Parameter Area of the PLC used
as the startup node.
• Node 1 is the master node.
• Areas 1 and 2 can be selected from bit-access areas or the DM Area.
• The send area sizes of the master and slave nodes are the same for each
area.
• Send nodes are in the same ascending order as node numbers.
• All nodes can be specified to either participate or not participate in the
data link.
• The data link areas (data link start words) are common to all nodes partic-
ipating in the data links.
Note
1. Automatic data link creation with 1:N allocations can only be used with the
following Controller Link Units and Support Boards:
Type
Model
Wired networks
CS1W-CLK21-V1 (for CS Series)
CJ1W-CLK21-V1 (for CJ Series)
3G8F7-CLK21-V1 (for PCI bus)
2. Controller Link Units and Support Boards other than those listed above
cannot participate in 1:N allocation data links. They can, however, join the
network if a parameter in the DM Parameter Area is set so that they do not
participate in the data links.
3. The Controller Link Support Board (3G8F7-CLK21-V1) can be used in au-
tomatic data link creation with 1:N allocations, but it cannot be the startup
node. Use a Controller Link Unit (CS1W-CLK21-V1 or CJ1W-CLK21-V1)
on the same network as the startup node.
4. For automatic data link creation with 1:N allocations, use the CX-Net in CX-
Programmer version 3.2 or higher.
109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What Are Data Links?
Section 5-1
Using Offsets
For automatically set data links, all of the send words transmitted by a node
are received by other nodes with no change in size. For manually set data
links, the size of a receive area can be restricted by specifying a number of
words from the beginning word of the words sent by another node.
# 1
# 1
# 2
# 1
# 3
# 1
Automatically set
data links
# 2
# 3
# 2
# 3
# 2
# 3
# 1
# 1
# 2
# 1
# 3
# 1
Manually set
data links
# 2
# 3
# 2
# 3
# 2
# 3
A node can specify the num
ber of words to receive from
the beginning send word.
However, the above system does not guarantee that only the desired words
will be received and therefore the receive node may receive unnecessary
data.
Offsetting enables specification of a more specific range of receive data by
indicating both the number of words and the starting word position from the
beginning of the area. The offset refers to the starting word position counted
from the beginning of the area.
# 1
# 1
# 2
# 1
# 3
# 3
# 2
# 2
# 3
Offset from the beginning
Number of words to be received
# 1
# 2
# 3
Restricted reception
from node 1 by
specifying an offset
Restricted reception
from node 2 by
specifying an offset
Offsetting Image
#1 Data
#1 Data
I only need this.
I need all of it.
Application Example of
Using Offsets
In the following example, the send data from node 1 is split into three parts
and each part is received by a different node, i.e., each of the other nodes
receives only part of the send data from node 1. This enables effective use of
data link memory areas without wasting space. In this way, a type of message
service (i.e., specific data to a specific node) can be achieved through data
links.
110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What Are Data Links?
Section 5-1
# 1
# 2
# 3
# 4
Send data of node 1
Note The following table shows the status of the data link refresh area when a node
registered in the data link table generates a communications error.
Communications error type
Data link area
A node separates from the network while Data received immediately prior to the
a data link is running.
error continues to be refreshed in the
data link areas of the relevant nodes.
A node does not join the network after the Zero (0) data continues to be refreshed in
data links start.
the data link areas of the relevant nodes.
5-1-1 Data Link Specifications
Item
Description
No. of data link
nodes
32 max., 2 min.
Number of data
link words
Number of send/receive words per node (total of area 1 and
area 2):
CS/CJ Series:
12,000 max. (pre-Ver. 1.2)
20,000 max. (unit Ver. 1.2 or later)
C200HX/HG/HE, CVM1, CV, CQM1H:
Up to 8,000
IBM PC/AT or compatible: Manual setting: Up to 32,000
Automatic setting: Up to 8,000
Number of send words per node
(total of area 1 and area 2): Up to 1,000
Allocation of data
link areas
Manual setting Area 1, 2: Bit-access area (IR, CIO, and LR
Areas)
DM Area (DM and EM Areas)
Unit Ver. 1.2 or later: Area 1 and Area 2 can be
set in the same memory area.
Pre-Ver. 1.2: Area 1 and Area 2 cannot be set
in the same memory area.
Automatic set- Area 1: IR, CIO, or LR Area
ting equality
layout
Area 2: DM Area (DM and EM Areas)
Automatic set- Area 1, 2: Bit-access area (IR, CIO, and LR
ting
Areas)
1:N allocations
DM Area (DM and EM Areas)
111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What Are Data Links?
Section 5-1
5-1-2 Differences between Manual and Automatic Setting
Item
Manual setting
Automatic setting
Determination of Determined by setting data link Determined by the data link
nodes to be in a
data link
tables.
parameters set in the data link
startup node (the node used to
start the data links).
Data link settings Set in data link tables that are
Determined by the data link
set in the nodes to participate in parameters set in the data link
data links.
startup node (the node used to
start the data links).
Data link areas 1 In each node, area 1 and area Area 1 is selected from bit-
and 2
2 are selected from bit-access access areas (IR, CIO, and LR
areas (IR, CIO, and LR Areas) Areas) and area 2 is selected
and DM Area (DM and EM
Areas).
from DM Area (DM and EM
Areas).
However, areas 1 and 2 cannot
be set in the same memory
area.
Refresh starting
word
Can be set freely in each node. Can be set freely. (See note a))
(See note a))
Data link status
area
Selected from bit-access areas Selected from bit-access areas
(IR, CIO, and LR Areas) and
DM Area (DM and EM Areas) in
each node.
(IR or CIO Areas).
Refresh sequence Can be set in each node freely. Node addresses are in ascend-
ing order.
Data reception
It is possible to set in each
node whether the entire data or node that is participating in the
The entire data sent from each
a part of the data sent from
another node is received. It is
also possible to not receive the
data sent from a specific node.
(See note b))
data link is received.
Data transmission The send sizes can be set
freely in each node. It is also
In area 1 and area 2, data send
sizes are the same in each
possible for certain node not to node.
send data. (See note b))
Note a) The following are true for computer nodes (i.e., computers with a
Controller Link Support Board mounted).
• The data link starting position is fixed.
• Because areas such as bit-access areas and the DM Area are not sup-
ported, areas must be made available on the computer for linking.
• Automatically set data links cannot be started from the Controller Link
Support Board.
• The Controller Link Support Board can participate in automatically set
data links.
b) If data links are manually set, send/receive area can be selected
in each node, allowing send/receive groups to be created within
the network in area 1 and area 2, as shown below.
Area 1
#1
#1
#2
#1
#3
#3
#4
#3
#2
#2
#4
#4
Group
Group
112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Data Links
Section 5-2
5-2 Setting Data Links
5-2-1 Selecting Manual or Automatic Setting
Specify either the manual or automatic data link mode in the following DM
Parameter Area of the PLC’s CPU Unit of the startup node, using a PLC Pro-
gramming Device.
CPU Unit
Startup node
Programming Console
Or
Controller Link
IBM PC/AT or
compatible
CX-Net in CX-
Programmer
Software switches
(DM area)
CS/CJ-series Startup Nodes
N: DM 30000 + 100 x Unit number of Controller Link Unit
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
0
8
0
7
–
6
5
4
3
0
2
0
1
0
0
–
–
–
0
0
–
0
Word N
0: Always 0.
–: Other setting
Data link mode
000: Manual setting
001: Automatic setting, equality layout
101: Automatic setting, 1:N allocation
C200HX/HG/HE Startup Nodes
N: Level 0 = DM 6400
Level 1 = DM 6420
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
0
6
0
5
4
3
0
2
0
1
0
0
0
–
–
–
0
0
0
0
0
Word N
0: Always 0.
–: Other settings
Data link mode
00: Manual setting
01: Automatic setting
CVM1 and CV-series Startup Nodes
N: DM 2000 + 100 x unit number of Controller Link Unit
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
0
8
0
7
0
6
0
5
4
3
0
2
0
1
0
0
–
–
–
0
0
0
0
Word N
0: Always 0.
–: Other setting
Data link mode
00: Manual setting
01: Automatic setting
CQM1H-series Startup Nodes
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
0
8
0
7
0
6
0
5
4
3
0
2
0
1
0
0
0
–
–
–
0
0
0
DM 6400
0: Always 0.
– : Other setting
Data link mode
00: Manual setting
01: Automatic setting
113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Data Links
Section 5-2
Note
1. Be sure to set the bit in the DM Area’s (CPU Bus Unit Area’s) software
switches (DM30000 + 100 × unit number) described as “always set to 0” to
0. Not doing so may result in the data link not starting properly.
2. The default data link mode is for manual setting (00), but check the setting
from the Programming Device.
3. A data link mode can be set in a data link startup node only. The data link
mode setting is determined by the data link mode of the startup node even
if the data link mode settings of the nodes participating in the data links are
different from the settings in the startup node.
4. In manual setting, a data link table must be set in the data link startup node
and in automatic setting, automatic data link setting parameters must be
set in the data link startup node. Data links will not be started unless the
settings are correct.
5. Always check whether the data link settings for all startup nodes in the cor-
responding network are correct to prevent starting up using with incorrect
data link modes and parameters. Make sure that both automatic setting
and manual setting modes are not used together in the same network and
that automatic settings with different parameters are not used.
5-2-2 Manual Setting
Transfer the data link tables that were created on the Controller Link Support
Software or CX-Net (in CX-Programmer) to the Controller Link Unit or the
Controller Link Support Board (for IBM PC/AT or compatible computers).
The data link tables are transferred from a computer running the Controller
Link Support Software. The computer can either be a node in the network or a
computer attached as a Programming Device.
Transferring from a Programming Device
+
Controller
Link Unit
Nodes
Controller Link
IBM PC/AT or
Support Soft
compatible
CPU Unit
RS-232C
Transmissions
ware or CX-
Net (in CX-
Programmer)
Setting data link tables
Note
1. When transferring data link tables to a CS/CJ-series PLC, turn OFF pin 1
of the DIP switch on the CPU Unit. Otherwise, data link tables cannot be
written normally.
2. When transferring the data link tables to a CVM1 or CV-series PLC, set the
System Protect Keyswitch on the CPU Unit to “NORMAL.” Otherwise, data
link tables cannot be written normally.
3. Use the CX-Net in CX-Programmer version 1.20 or higher for CQM1H
Controller Link Units. The Controller Link Support Software can also be
used. (Refer to the Controller Link Support Software Operation Manual
(W308) for details.)
114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Data Links
Section 5-2
4. When using the Controller Link Support Software to set a CJ-series Con-
troller Link Unit, use one of the following methods to set the type of PLC.
• Set the type of PLC to “Others.”
• Add the following information to the device information setting file
(CLKTYPE.TXT) in the Controller Link Support Software to add the
CJ-series PLC and then set the CJ-series PLC.
CJ1G-CPU44: Same settings as the CS1G-CPU44-E
CJ1G-CPU45: Same settings as the CS1G-CPU45-E
For details on editing device information setting files, refer to the Con-
troller Link Support Software Operation Manual (W308).
Transferring from a Computer Node
IBM PC/AT or com
patible computer
Controller Link
Support Software
Controller Link
Support Board
Setting data link tables
A data link table is created for each node using the Controller Link Support
Software. The data link tables contain all the settings required to create the
data links.
Note
1. The following three methods can be used to start data links. (See p. 153.)
• Using a software switch
• Using the Controller Link Support Software or CX-Net (in CX-Program-
mer)
• Using an FINS command
network must have been constructed correctly. Set routing tables at each
node as required. See Applications Precautions on page xxii. for details.
Data Link Table Specifications
CS/CJ-series PLCs
Setting item
PLC model
Nodes
Setting range
Set the model of the PLC’s CPU Unit.
1 to 32
Set the address of the refresh nodes.
It cannot be set to a parameter exceeding the “maximum node
address” of the network parameter.
115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Data Links
Section 5-2
Setting item
Setting range
First data link sta- Set the first word to store data link status. An area of 16 words is
tus word
used.
CIO Area: CIO 001 to CIO 6128 (*1)
LR Area: LR 00 to LR 184 (*2)
DM Area: DM 0000 to DM 32752
EM Area: Banks 00 to 12, EM 0000 to EM 32752
is left unchanged, the default first status word will be used.
Refer to 5-4 Checking Data Link Status for details.
*2: When a word between LR 000 and LR 184 is specified, the
data link area will be allocated between CIO 1000 and
CIO 1184.
Area 1 Data link
start word
CIO Area: CIO 000 to CIO 6143
LR Area: LR 00 to LR 199 (*)
DM Area: DM 0000 to DM 32767
EM Area: Banks 00 to 12, EM 0000 to EM 32767
Unit Ver. 1.2 or later: The same memory areas can be set for
both Area 1 and Area 2.
*: When a word between LR 000 and LR 199 is specified, the
data link area will be allocated between CIO 1000 and
CIO 1199.
Number of Remote nodes: 0 to the number of source words
words
Set the number of words to be received.
Local node:
0 to 1,000
Set the number of words to be transmitted.
The total number of words in area 1 and area 2 in each node
must not exceed 1,000.
The numbers of words in both area 1 and area 2 in each node
must not be set to 0.
Offset
Remote nodes: 0 to one less than number of source words
Set the offset for the data to be received.
Local node: Cannot be set.
This setting is not required if an offset is not used.
CIO Area: CIO 000 to CIO 6143
LR Area: LR 00 to LR 199 (*)
Area 2 Data link
start word
DM Area: DM 0000 to DM 32767
EM Area: Banks 00 to 15, EM 0000 to EM 32767
(EM must be installed)
Unit Ver. 1.2 or later: The same memory areas can be set for
both Area 1 and Area 2.
*: When a word between LR 000 and LR 199 is specified, the
data link area will be allocated between CIO 1000 and
CIO 1199.
Number of Remote nodes: 0 to the number of source words
words
Set the number of words to be received.
Local node:
0 to 1,000
Set the number of words to be transmitted.
The total number of words in area 1 and area 2 in each node
must not exceed 1,000.
The numbers of words in both area 1 and area 2 in each node
must not be set to 0.
Remote nodes: 0 to one less than number of source words
Set the offset for the data to be received.
Offset
Local node:
Cannot be set.
This setting is not required if an offset is not used.
116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Data Links
Section 5-2
Note a) The total number of words in data link send and receive areas
must not exceed 20,000 per node when using Controller Link
Units with unit Ver. 1.2 or later, or 12,000 words per node if using
pre-Ver. 1.2 Controller Link Units.
b) The following values must be satisfied for each node for the data
link area 1 and area 2 so that the final word in the data link does
not go beyond the last word in the PLC memory area.
(Data link start word – 1) + (Total number of send/receive
words in area 1 or area 2)
≤
6143 (CIO Area)
199 (LR Area)
32767 (DM Area, EM Area)
c) Refer to the Controller Link Support Boards Operation Manual
bleshoot the error referring to 9-4 Troubleshooting Error Mes-
sages in CX-Net Data Link Table Check.
C200HX/HG/HE PLCs
Setting item
Setting range
Set the model of the PLC’s CPU Unit.
1 to 32
PLC model
Nodes
Set the address of the refresh nodes.
It cannot be set to a parameter exceeding the “maximum node
address” of the network parameter.
First data link sta- Set the first word to store data link status. An area of 16 words
tus word
is used.
IR Area:
IR 001 to IR 220, IR 300 to IR 496 (*)
LR Area: LR 00 to LR 48
DM Area: DM 0000 to DM 5984
EM Area: Banks 00 to 15, EM 0000 to EM 6128
(EM must be installed)
is left unchanged, the default first status word will be used.
Refer to 5-4 Checking Data Link Status for details.
Area 1 Data link
start word
IR Area:
IR 000 to IR 235, IR 300 to IR 511
LR Area: LR 00 to LR 63
DM Area: DM 0000 to DM 5999
EM Area: Banks 00 to 15, EM 0000 to EM 6143
(EM must be installed)
The same area cannot be set for both area 1 and area 2. Set
different areas.
Number of Remote nodes: 0 to the number of source words
words
Set the number of words to be received.
Local node:
0 to 1,000
Set the number of words to be transmitted.
The total number of words in area 1 and area 2 in each node
must not exceed 1,000.
The numbers of words in both area 1 and area 2 in each node
must not be set to 0.
Offset
Remote nodes: 0 to one less than number of source words
Set the offset for the data to be received.
Local node:
Cannot be set.
This setting is not required if an offset is not used.
117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Data Links
Section 5-2
Setting item
Setting range
Area 2 Data link
start word
IR Area:
IR 000 to IR 235, IR 300 to IR 511
LR Area: LR 00 to LR 63
DM Area: DM 0000 to DM 5999
EM Area: Banks 00 to 15, EM 0000 to EM 6143
(EM must be installed)
The same area cannot be set for both area 1 and area 2. Set
different areas.
Number of Remote nodes: 0 to the number of source words
words
Set the number of words to be received.
Local node:
0 to 1,000
Set the number of words to be transmitted.
The total number of words in area 1 and area 2 in each node
must not exceed 1,000.
The numbers of words in both area 1 and area 2 in each node
must not be set to 0.
Offset
Remote nodes: 0 to one less than number of source words
Set the offset for the data to be received.
Local node:
Cannot be set.
This setting is not required if an offset is not used.
Note a) The total number of words in data link send and receive areas
must not exceed 8,000 per node.
b) The following values must be satisfied for each node for the data
link area 1 and area 2 so that the final word in the data link does
not go beyond the last word in the PLC memory area.
(Data link start word – 1) + Total number of send/receive
words in area ≤235 (First word IR 000 to IR 235)
511 (First word IR 300 to IR 511)
63 (LR Area)
5999 (DM Area)
6143 (EM Area)
c) Refer to the Controller Link Support Boards Operation Manual
bleshoot the error referring to 9-4 Troubleshooting Error Mes-
sages in CX-Net Data Link Table Check.
118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Data Links
Section 5-2
CVM1 and CV-series PLCs
Setting item
PLC model
Nodes
Setting range
Set the model of the PLC’s CPU Unit.
1 to 32
Set the address of the refresh nodes.
It cannot be set to a parameter exceeding the “maximum node
address” of the network parameter.
First data link sta- Set the first word to store data link status. An area of 16 words is
tus word
used.
CIO Area: CIO 0001 to CIO 2540 (*1)
LR Area: LR 000 to LR 184 (*2)
DM Area: DM 0000 to DM 8176 (CV500/CVM1-CPU01-EV@)
DM 0000 to DM 24560 (Other CPU Units)
EM Area: Banks 00 to 07, EM 0000 to EM 32750
(EM must be installed)
– –) is left unchanged, the default first status word will be
used. Refer to 5-4 Checking Data Link Status for details.
*2: When a word between LR 000 and LR 184 is specified, the
data link area will be allocated between CIO 1000 and
CIO 1184.
Area 1 Data link
start word
CIO Area: CIO 0000 to CIO 2555
LR Area: LR 000 to LR 199 (*)
DM Area: DM 0000 to DM 8191 (CV500/CVM1-CPU01-EV@)
DM 0000 to DM 24575 (Other CPU Units)
EM Area: Banks 00 to 07, EM 0000 to EM 32765
(EM must be installed)
The same area cannot be set for both area 1 and area 2. Set dif-
ferent areas.
*: When a word between LR 000 and LR 199 is specified, the
data link area will be allocated between CIO 1000 and
CIO 1199.
Number of Remote nodes: 0 to the number of source words
words
Set the number of words to be received.
Local node:
0 to 1,000
Set the number of words to be transmitted.
The total number of words in area 1 and area 2 in each node
must not exceed 1,000.
The numbers of words in both area 1 and area 2 in each node
must not be set to 0.
Remote nodes: 0 to one less than number of source words
Set the offset for the data to be received.
Offset
Local node:
Cannot be set.
This setting is not required if an offset is not used.
119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Data Links
Section 5-2
Setting item
Setting range
CIO Area: CIO 0000 to CIO 2555
Data link
Area 2
start word
LR Area: LR 000 to LR 199 (*)
DM Area: DM 0000 to DM 8191 (CV500/CVM1-CPU01-EV@)
DM 0000 to DM 24575 (Other CPU Units)
EM Area: Banks 00 to 07, EM 0000 to EM 32765
(EM must be installed)
The same area cannot be set for both area 1 and area 2. Set dif-
ferent areas.
*: When a word between LR 000 and LR 199 is specified, the
data link area will be allocated between CIO 1000 and
CIO 1199.
Number of Remote nodes: 0 to the number of source words
words
Set the number of words to be received.
Local node:
0 to 1,000
Set the number of words to be transmitted.
The total number of words in area 1 and area 2 in each node
must not exceed 1,000.
The numbers of words in both area 1 and area 2 in each node
must not be set to 0.
Offset
Remote nodes: 0 to one less than number of source words
Set the offset for the data to be received.
Local node:
Cannot be set.
This setting is not required if an offset is not used.
Note a) The total number of words in data link send and receive areas
must not exceed 8,000 per node.
b) The following values must be satisfied for each node for the data
link area 1 and area 2 so that the final word in the data link does
not go beyond the last word in the PLC memory area.
(Data link start word – 1) + Total number of send/receive
words in area ≤2555 (CIO Area)
199 (LR Area)
8191 (DM Area for CV500/CVM1-CPU01-EV@)
24575 (DM Area for other CPU Units)
32765 (EM Area)
c) Refer to the Controller Link Support Boards Operation Manual
bleshoot the error referring to 9-4 Troubleshooting Error Mes-
sages in CX-Net Data Link Table Check.
CQM1H-series PLCs
Setting item
PLC model
Nodes
Setting range
Set the model of the PLC’s CPU Unit.
1 to 32
Set the address of the refresh nodes.
It cannot be set to a parameter exceeding the “maximum node
address” of the network parameters.
120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Data Links
Section 5-2
Setting item
Setting range
First data link sta- Set the first word to store data link status. An area of 16 words is
tus word
used.
IR Area:
IR 001 to IR 232
LR Area: LR 00 to LR 48
DM Area: DM 0000 to DM 5984
EM Area: EM 0000 to EM 6128 (EM must be installed)
left unchanged, the default first status word will be used. Refer
to 5-4 Checking Data Link Status for details.
Area 1 Data link
start word
IR Area:
IR 000 to IR 247
LR Area: LR 00 to LR 63
DM Area: DM 0000 to DM 5999
EM Area: EM 0000 to EM 6143 (EM must be installed)
The same memory area cannot be set for both area 1 and area
2. Set different memory areas.
Number of Remote nodes: 0 to the number of source words
words
Set the number of words to be received.
Local node:
0 to 1,000
Set the number of words to be transmitted.
The total number of words in area 1 and area 2 in each node
must not exceed 1,000.
The numbers of words in both area 1 and area 2 in each node
must not be set to 0.
Offset
Remote nodes: 0 to one less than number of source words
Set the offset for the data to be received.
Local node:
This setting is not required if an offset is not used.
IR Area: IR 000 to IR 247
Cannot be set.
Area 2 Data link
start word
LR Area: LR 00 to LR 63
DM Area: DM 0000 to DM 5999
EM Area: EM 0000 to EM 6143 (EM must be installed)
The same memory area cannot be set for both area 1 and area
2. Set different memory areas.
Number of Remote nodes: 0 to the number of source words
words
Set the number of words to be received.
Local node:
0 to 1,000
Set the number of words to be transmitted.
The total number of words in area 1 and area 2 in each node
must not exceed 1,000.
The numbers of words in both area 1 and area 2 in each node
must not be set to 0.
Offset
Remote nodes: 0 to one less than number of source words
Set the offset for the data to be received.
Local node:
Cannot be set.
This setting is not required if an offset is not used.
Note a) The total number of words in data link send and receive areas
must not exceed 8,000 per node.
b) The following values must be satisfied for each node for the data
link area 1 and area 2 so that the final word in the data link does
not go beyond the last word in the PLC memory area.
121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Data Links
Section 5-2
(Data link start word – 1) + Total number of send/receive
words in area ≤247 (IR Area)
63 (LR Area)
5999 (DM Area)
6143 (EM Area)
c) Refer to the Controller Link Support Boards Operation Manual
bleshoot the error referring to 9-4 Troubleshooting Error Mes-
sages in CX-Net Data Link Table Check.
Precautions
C200HX/HG/HE, CS/CJ-series, CVM1, CV-series, and CQM1H-series PLCs
have different-sized memory areas. When data links are manually set, pro-
vided the PLCs are set so as not to receive data in the areas indicated in the
following diagram, the data link setting area is not limited by the small area
size of the PLC.
Example:
CVM1 and
CV-series PLCs
C200HX/HG/HE and
CQM1H-series PLCs
CS/CJ-series PLCs
200
0
100
to
235
335
336
435
436
If the LR Area in the C200HX/HG/HE or CQM1H Series is manually set for a
data link with a CVM1, CV-series or CS/CJ-series PLC, the LR words will be
linked to CIO 1000 to CIO 1063 in the CVM1, CV-series or CS/CJ-series PLC.
CIO 1064 to CIO 1199 cannot be linked with C200HX/HG/HE or CQM1H-
series PLCs in this way.
CVM1, CV-series or
CS/CJ-series PLCs
C200HX/HG/HE and
CQM1H-series PLCs
LR00
to
1000
to
1063
LR63
1064
to
Cannot be directly linked
with C200HX/HG/HE or
CQM1H words.
1199
122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Data Links
Section 5-2
5-2-3 Manual Setting Examples
This section shows examples of manually creating data link tables on the
Controller Link Support Software. Sample files containing the data link tables
are provided on the installation disk for the Software.
SAMPLE1.CLK: Same Allocation to All Nodes
Data Link Area Structure
C200HX
C200HX
Node 2
C200HX
Node 3
C200HX
Node 4
Node 1
Data Link Areas
Area 1
LR000
#1
#2
#3
#1
#2
#3
#1
#2
#3
#1
#2
#3
LR010
LR020
LR030
#4
#4
#4
#4
LR049
Area 2
D00000
#1
#1
#1
#1
D00200
D00300
D00400
#2
#3
#2
#3
#2
#3
#2
#3
#4
#4
#4
#4
D00599
Device Information Settings
Data Link Tables
Set exactly the same table for nodes 2, 3, and 4. To do this, the copy function
can be used to copy the data link table for node 1 to nodes 2, 3, and 4.
123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Data Links
Section 5-2
Checking the Data Link Tables
Transferring the Data Link Tables
Saving the Data Link Tables
124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Data Links
Section 5-2
SAMPLE2.CLK: Different Allocations to Each Node
Data links can be created so that one node does not receive from all other
nodes or so that some nodes do not send or receive any data at all. In the fol-
lowing example, node 2 does not receive data from node 3 and node 3 does
not receive data from node 1. Node 4 does not send any add; it only receives
data from other nodes.
Data Link Area Structure
C200HX
Node 1
C200HX
Node 2
CVM1-
CPU21
CVM1-
CPU21
Node 3
Node 4
Data Link Areas
Area 1
LR000
LR010
LR020
01000
01005
01015
#1
#2
#1
#2
#1
#3
#2
#3
LR010
LR030
LR049
01020
01039
LR039
01035
01054
#3
#2
Area 2
D00000
E0_00020
E0_00030
D00000
D00020
D00039
E1_00000
E1_00010
#1
#2
#1
#2
#1
#3
#2
#3
D00010
D00030
D00049
E0_00049
E1_00030
E1_00049
#3
#2
Only nodes in which a data link table has been created can participate in the
data links.
In the data link table, the node sequence can be changed freely; however, the
data link areas must be created consecutively.
Device Information Setting
125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Data Links
Section 5-2
Data Link Tables
SAMPLE3.CLK: Creating Data Link Groups within a Network
A data links consisting of multiple groups within a single network can be cre-
ated by setting data link tables. Send and receive areas are created for only
the nodes in each group, as shown below.
Data Link Area Structure
C200HX
C200HX
CVM1-
CPU21
CVM1-
CPU21
Group 1
Group 2
Node 1
Node 2
Node 3
Node 4
Data Link Areas
Area 1
L00000
L00000
L00010
01000
01020
01039
01000
#1
#2
#1
#2
#3
#4
#3
#4
L00010
01020
01039
L00029
L00029
Area 2
D00000
D01000
D01100
E0_00000
E0_00300
E0_00599
E1_00000
E1_00300
E1_00599
#1
#2
#1
#2
#3
#4
#3
#4
D00100
D00299
D01299
126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Data Links
Section 5-2
Device Information Setting
Data Link Tables
127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Data Links
Section 5-2
SAMPLE4.CLK: Receiving Only Part of Send Data and Offsets
Only area 2 is used in this example.
Note A Controller Link Support Board is used in this example. The Support Board
does not have memory areas. The area settings are ignored and byte
addresses are used. Refer to the Controller Link Support Boards Operation
Manual (W307) for details on using a Controller Link Support Board.
Data Link Area Structure
IBM PC/AT or
compatible
C200HX
Node 2
C200HX
Node 3
C200HX
Node 4
Node 1
Data Link Areas
Area 2
00000
D00000
D00010
D00019
D00000
D00000
D00010
D00019
#1A
00020
#1B
#1C
#2
#1B
#3
#1A
#4
D00010
D00019
00040
#1C
00060
#2
00080
#3
00100
#4
00119
(Byte addresses)
Device Information Setting
128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Data Links
Section 5-2
Data Link Tables
5-2-4 Automatic Setting
Data links can be automatically created by setting values in the DM Parameter
Area of the PLC’s CPU Unit of the startup node. The settings are made using
a Programming Console or the CX-Net in the CX-Programmer.
The startup node is the node from which the data links are activated. When
automatically setting data links, data link operation is based on the values set
in the startup node.
Note Automatic setting appears as “Select All” on the Controller Link Support Soft-
ware message screens.
CPU Unit
Startup node
Programming Console
Or
Controller Link
IBM PC/AT or
compatible
Software switch
(DM area)
CX-Net
(in CX-Programmer)
Note Data links can be started using one of the following (See p 153.)
• Using a software switch
• Using Controller Link Support Software or CX-Net (in CX-Program-
mer)
• Using FINS commands.
129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Data Links
Section 5-2
CS/CJ-series Startup Node
Automatic setting for the CS/CJ Series can be performed using either equality
layout (previous method), where each node is allocated the same link area
size, or 1:N allocations, which allows individually set exchange of data
between the master node and slave nodes. There are 3 types of 1:N alloca-
tions, which use different allocation methods.
Equality layout
Automatic setting
Common type
1 to 1 type
1:N allocations
Chain type
Automatic Setting, Equality Layout
Area 1
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
3
4
Area 2
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
3
4
Features of Equality Layout:
• The send areas for each node are of the same size.
• Area 1 can be selected from bit-access areas (i.e., CIO and LR Areas)
and area 2 can be selected from DM Area.
• Data link area allocation is performed in ascending order of node address.
• Each node can be specified to either participate or not participate in the
data links.
• The data link areas are the same for all nodes participating in the data
links.
130
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Data Links
Section 5-2
Automatic Setting, 1:N
Allocations
This method is used to simplify the establishment of 1:N allocation data links
between master and slave nodes.
Node 1
Node 2
Node 3
Node 4
Area 1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
2
3
4
Area 2
1
2
1
2
1
3
1
4
3
4
• There are three types of 1:N allocations.
• Programming Devices (including Programming Consoles) are used to set
the automatic data link mode in the DM Parameter Area of the PLC used
as the startup node.
• Node 1 is the master node.
• Area 1 can be set in the bit-access areas and area 2 can be set in the DM
Area.
• The send area sizes of the master and slave nodes are the same for each
area.
• Send nodes are in the same ascending order as node numbers.
• All nodes can be specified to either participate or not participate in the
data link.
• The data link areas (data link start words) are common to all nodes partic-
ipating in the data links.
Note
1. Automatic data link creation with 1:N allocations can only be used with the
following Controller Link Units and Support Boards:
Type
Model
Wired networks
CS1W-CLK21-V1 (for CS Series)
CJ1W-CLK21-V1 (for CJ Series)
3G8F7-CLK21-V1 (for PCI bus)
2. Controller Link Units and Support Boards other than those listed above
cannot participate in 1:N allocation data links. They can, however, join the
network if a parameter in the DM Parameter Area is set so that they do not
participate in the data links.
3. For automatic data link creation with 1:N allocations, use the CX-Net in CX-
Programmer version 3.2 or higher.
131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Data Links
Section 5-2
Set the following parameter in the DM Parameter Area of the PLC at the star-
tup node.
N: DM 30000 + 100 × Controller Link Unit number
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
0
8
0
7
–
6
5
4
3
0
2
0
1
0
0
–
–
–
0
0
–
0
Word N
0: Always specify 0.
– : By other setting
Data link mode
001: Automatic setting, equality layout
101: Automatic setting, 1:N allocation
(000 is for manual setting. Settings other
than 000, 001, or 101 are invalid.)
Automatic Setting, Equality Layout
15
8
7
0
Start word for area 1 (BCD)
N+1
00
N+2 Area for area 1
Send size per node for area 1 (BCD)
N+3
N+4
N+5
N+6
N+7
Rightmost 4 digits of start word for area 2 (DM area) (BCD)
Leftmost digit of start word for
Area for area 2
area 2 (BCD)
Send size per node for area 2 (BCD)
First word to store link status (BCD)
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
9
7
8
6
7
5
6
4
5
3
4
2
3
1
2
0
1
N+8
16 15 14 13 12 11 10
Nodes to participate in the data links
N+9
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
--- --- 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49
The numbers indicate node numbers.
The status that is set determines whether the
node will participate in the data links.
N+10
N+11
Participate:
ON
Not participate: OFF
BCD: Set the value as binary-coded decimal.
Setting Range for
Automatic Setting,
Equality Layout
Item
Setting range
Data link mode
Specify automatic (01).
Start word for area 1
Set the word address in BCD.
CIO Area: CIO 000 to CIO 6143
LR Area: LR 00 to 199 (*)
*: When a word between LR 000 and LR 199 is speci-
fied, the data link area will be allocated between
CIO 1000 and CIO 1199.
Area for area 1
Set the area for area 1 in BCD.
CIO Area: 80
LR Area: 86
Area 1 not used: 00
Send size per node for
area 1
Set the number of words in BCD between 0 and 1,000.
The total number of send words for area 1 and area 2
must not exceed 1,000.
When area 1 is not used, set to 0.
Set the word address in BCD.
Start word for area 2
DM Area: DM 0000 to DM 32767
EM Area: Banks 00 to 12, EM 0000 to EM 32767
132
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Data Links
Section 5-2
Item
Setting range
Set the area for area 2 in BCD.
Area for area 2
DM Area: 82
EM Area: Banks 00 to 07: 90 to 97
Banks 08 to 12: A8 to AC
Area 2 not used: 00
Send size per node for
area 2
Set the number of words in BCD between 0 and 1,000.
The total number of send words of area 1 and area 2
must not exceed 1,000.
When area 2 is not used, set to 0.
First word to store link
status
Set in BCD the first word used for storing data link status.
An area of 16 words is used for storing status.
0 (*), IR 000 to IR 6128
Status is stored in the IR or CIO Area only.
*: When 0 is set, the status is saved in IR 1500 + unit
number x 25 (+ 7 to + 22).
Nodes to participate in
the data links
Turn ON the bits corresponding to the nodes participating
in the data links.
The data link will not start unless the startup node itself is
set as a participating node.
The data link will not start if the node is set to a parameter
exceeding the maximum node address of the network
parameter.
Note a) The total number of words in data link send and receive areas
must not exceed 20,000 per node when using Controller Link
Units with unit Ver. 1.2 or later, or 12,000 words per node if using
pre-Ver. 1.2 Controller Link Units.
b) The following values must be satisfied for each node for the data
link area 1 and area 2 so that the final word in the data link does
not go beyond the last word in the PLC memory area.
(Data link start word – 1) + Total number of send/receive
words in area ≤ 6143 (CIO Area)
199 (LR Area)
32767 (DM Area, EM Area)
c) When using area 1 only, set the data link start word, type, and
the number of send words of area 2 to 0.
d) When using area 2 only, set the data link start word, type, and
the number of send words of area 1 to 0.
e) The startup node must be set as a participating node of the data
links. If not, the data links will not start.
133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Data Links
Section 5-2
1:N Allocation, Common Type
(7) Participating nodes
Master node
Slave nodes
Area 1
(1) Area and start word
(2) Size for master
node
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
(3) Size for slave node
2
3
4
(Same as (3))
(Same as (3))
Area 2
(4) Type and start word
(5) Size for master
node
1
2
1
2
1
3
1
4
(6) Size for slave
node
3
4
(Same as (6))
(Same as (6))
Features of Common Type 1:N Allocation
• Data communications are 1:1 between the master node and slave nodes.
• All slave nodes receive the data sent by the master node.
• The master node receives all data sent by the slaves. The reception size
for the master node is thus the node send data size times the number of
slave nodes.
• Slaves do not send or receive data with other slaves.
• Area 1 is selected from the bit-access areas (e.g., CIO Area) and area 2
is selected from word-access areas (e.g., DM Area).
• Data link areas are allocated in ascending order of node addresses.
• Data link participation can be specified for each node.
Address N: D30000 + (100 × Controller Link Unit number)
15
---
14
---
13
0
12
0
11
---
10
0
9
0
8
0
7
6
1
5
0
4
1
3
0
2
0
1
0
0
---
---
Word N
When bits 6, 5 and 4 are set to 1, 0, and 1 respectively, automatic setting with
1:N allocations is specified.
134
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Data Links
Section 5-2
15
N+12
8
7
0
1:N allocation type (Set value 0001 = Common type)
---
Start word for area 1 (bit-access area, BCD)
N+13
(1)
Area for area 1
00
N+14
Area 1 send size (number of words) for master node (BCD)
Area 1 send size (number of words) for slave nodes (BCD)
Rightmost 4 digits of start word for area 2 (DM Area) (BCD)
(2)
(3)
N+15
N+16
N+17
(4)
Area for area 2
Leftmost digit of start word for area 2 (BCD)
N+18
Area 2 send size (number of words) for master node (BCD)
Area 2 send size (number of words) for slave nodes (BCD)
(5)
N+19
(6)
N+20
First word to store data link status (bit-access area) (BCD)
---
N+21
N+22
N+23
N+24
N+25
16
32
48
---
15
31
47
---
14
30
46
62
13
29
45
61
12
28
44
60
11
27
43
59
10
26
42
58
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
17
25
41
57
24
40
56
23
39
55
22
38
54
21
37
53
20
36
52
19
35
51
18
34
50
(7)
33
49
Words N+22 through N+25 register nodes that will participate in the data
links. The numbers shown in the table are the node addresses. The bit status
for each node address indicates whether the node is to participate in the data
links.
Participate: ON
Not participate: OFF
Note When using automatic data link creation with 1:N allocations, set DM Parame-
ter Areas words N+2 to N+11 (which were previously used for automatic set-
ting with equality layout) to 0.
Setting Range for
Automatic Setting, 1:N
Allocations, Common
Type
Item
Data link mode
1:N allocation
Setting range
Specify automatic data link creation with 1:N allocations.
Specify Common type.
Start word for area 1
Set the word address in BCD.
CIO Area: 0000 to 6143
LR Area: LR 000 to LR 199 (CIO 1000 to CIO 1199) (See
note.)
DM Area: DM 00000 to DM 32767
EM Area: Banks 0 to 12: EM 00000 to EM 32767
Note: When a word between LR 000 and LR 199 is spec-
ified, the data link area will be allocated between words
CIO 1000 and CIO 1199 in the CIO Area.
Area for area 1
Set the area for data link area 1 as a hexadecimal num-
ber.
CIO Area: 80 hex
LR Area: 86 hex
DM Area: 82 hex
EM Area Banks 0 to 7: 90 to 97 hex
Banks 8 to 12: A8 to AC hex
When area 1 is not used: 00 hex
135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Data Links
Section 5-2
Item
Setting range
Send size (number of
words) for master node
for area 1
Set the number of words in BCD between 0 and 1,000.
The total number of send words for master node of area 1
and area 2 must not exceed 1,000.
Set to 0 when area 1 is not to be used or when the master
node will transmit no data.
Send size (number of
words) for slave nodes for
area 1
Set the number of words in BCD between 0 and 1,000.
The total number of send words per slave node of area 1
and area 2 must not exceed 1,000.
Set to 0 when area 1 is not to be used or when the slave
node will transmit no data.
Start word for area 2
Set the word address in BCD.
CIO Area: 0000 to 6143
LR Area: LR 000 to LR 199 (CIO 1000 to CIO 1199) (See
note.)
DM Area: DM 00000 to DM 32767
EM Area: Banks 0 to 12: EM 00000 to EM 32767
Note: When a word between LR 000 and LR 199 is spec-
ified, the data link area will be allocated between words
CIO 1000 and CIO 1199 in the CIO Area.
Area for area 2
Set the area type of area 2 as a hexadecimal number.
IR Area: 80 Hex
LR Area: 86 Hex
DM Area: 82 Hex
EM Area Banks 0 to 7: 90 to 97 Hex
Banks 8 to 12: A8 to AC Hex
When area 2 is not used: 00 Hex
Send size (number of
words) for master node
for area 2
Set the number of words in BCD between 0 and 1,000.
The total number of send words per master node of area
1 and area 2 must not exceed 1,000.
Set to 0 when area 2 is not to be used, or when the mas-
ter node will transmit no data.
Send size (number of
words) for slave nodes for
area 2
Set the number of words in BCD between 0 and 1,000.
The total number of send words per slave node of area 1
and area 2 must not exceed 1,000.
Set to 0 when area 2 is not to be used, or when the slave
node will transmit no data.
First word to store data
link status
Set in BCD the first word used for storing data link status.
When automatic setup is used, status can be stored in
the IR or CIO Area only. The number of words used to
store status depends on the data link status storage for-
mat specification as below.
0 (*)
1 to 6128 (32 nodes max., 8-bit format: 16 words used)
*: When 0 is set, the status is saved in IR 1500 + unit
number x 25 (+ 7 to + 22).
Nodes to participate in
the data links
Turn ON the bits corresponding to the nodes participating
in the data links.
The data links will not start unless the startup node itself
is set as a participating node.
Note
1. Node 1 is the master node. Node 1 must be registered as a participating
node.
2. The startup node (the node that sets the above DM Area parameters and
starts the data links) must be set as a participating node of the data links.
If not, the data links will not start.
136
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Data Links
Section 5-2
3. When using area 2 only, set the area for area 1 and the number of send
words for area 1 to 0.
4. When using area 1 only, set the area for area 2 and the number of send
words for area 2 to 0.
5. The total number of words in data link send and receive areas must not ex-
ceed 20,000 per node when using Controller Link Units with unit Ver. 1.2
or later, or 12,000 words per node if using pre-Ver. 1.2 Controller Link
Units. The total number of words in data link send and receive areas of a
master node must satisfy the following values. The number of master node
words is greatest when 1:N allocation is used, so the value can be estimat-
ed from the number of master node words.
Total number of words in data link send and receive areas of master
node = Send size for master node for area 1 + Send size for slave
nodes for area 1 × Number of slave nodes participating in data links +
Send size for master node for area 2 + Send size for slave nodes for
area 1 × Number of slave nodes participating in data links
6. The following values must be satisfied to ensure that data link areas 1 and
area 2 are fully contained within the specified area.
• For area 1:
(Area 1 start word − 1) + (Total of send and receive sizes for master
node for area 1 (See note.))
≤ 6143 (when using the IR or CIO Area)
≤ 199 (when using the LR Area)
Note (Total of send and receive sizes for master node for area 1 =
Send size for master node for area 1 + Send size for slave nodes for
area 1 × Number of slave nodes participating in data links
• For area 2:
(Area 2 start word − 1) + (Total of send and receive sizes for master
node for area 2 (See note.))
≤ 32767 (when using DM or EM Area)
Note (Total of send and receive sizes for master node for area 2 =
Send size for master node for area 2 + Send size for slave nodes for
area 2 × Number of slave nodes participating in data links
7. If a node that does not actually exist (e.g., a node that is scheduled to be
added in the future) is registered as a node that will participate in the data
links, a data link area for that node will be allocated in the master node, and
the send and receive areas will be refreshed with 0 data.
8. Automatic data link creation with 1:N allocations can be performed only
with CS1W-CLK21-V1, CJ1W-CLK21-V1, 3G8F7-CLK21-V1 Controller
Link Units. If any other model is used, the LNK indicator will flash and it will
not be possible to automatic create 1:N allocations.
9. If automatic data link creation with 1:N allocations is to be set up using CX-
Net operations in the CX-Programmer, use CX-Programmer version 3.2 or
higher. Setup cannot be performed using CX-Programmer version 3.1 or
lower.
10. The startup node (the node that sets the above DM Area Parameters and
starts the data links) can be set as either a master node or a slave node.
137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Data Links
Section 5-2
1:N Allocations, 1 to 1 Type
(5) Participating nodes
Master node
Slave nodes
1a
(1) Area and start word
1a
1a
1a
(2) Number of master common
send words
(3) Number of master individual
send words
1b
2
1c
3
1d
4
1b
1c
(Same as (3))
(Same as (3))
1d
(4) Number of slave
send words
2
3
4
(Same as (4))
(Same as (4))
Features of 1 to 1 Type 1:N Allocation
• Data communications are 1:1 between the master node and slave nodes.
• All slave nodes receive part of the data sent by the master node. In addi-
tion, each slave node receives unique data from the master node (see a
to d in figure).
• The master node receives all data sent by the slaves. The data sizes are
fixed for all nodes.
• Slaves do not send or receive data with other slaves.
• One area is selected from the bit-access areas (e.g., CIO Area) or word-
access areas (e.g., DM Area).
• Data link areas are allocated in ascending order of node addresses.
• Data link participation can be specified for each node.
Address N: D30000 + (100 × Controller Link Unit number)
15
---
14
---
13
0
12
0
11
---
10
0
9
0
8
0
7
6
1
5
0
4
1
3
0
2
0
1
0
0
---
---
Word N
When bits 6, 5 and 4 are set to 1, 0 and 1 respectively, automatic setting with
1:N allocations is specified.
138
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Data Links
Section 5-2
15
N+12
8
7
0
1:N allocation type setting (Set value 0002 = 1 to 1 type)
---
Rightmost 4 digits of start word (BCD)
N+13
(1)
Area
Leftmost digit of area start word (BCD)
N+14
Number of common send words for master node (BCD)
Number of individual send words for master node (BCD)
Number of send words for slave nodes (BCD)
0000 (Reserved)
(2)
(3)
(4)
N+15
N+16
N+17
---
N+18
0000 (Reserved)
---
N+19
0000 (Reserved)
---
N+20
First word to store data link status (bit-access area) (BCD)
---
N+21
N+22
N+23
N+24
N+25
16
32
48
---
15
31
47
---
14
30
46
62
13
29
45
61
12
28
44
60
11
27
43
59
10
26
42
58
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
25
41
57
24
40
56
23
39
55
22
38
54
21
37
53
20
36
52
19
35
51
18
34
50
17
(5)
33
49
Words N+22 through N+25 register nodes that will participate in the data
links. The numbers in the table are the node addresses. The bit status given
for each node address indicates whether the node is to participate in the data
links.
Participate: ON
Not participate: OFF
Note
1. Leave the reserved words set to 0 (N+18 to N+20).
2. When using automatic data link creation with 1:N allocations, set DM Pa-
rameter Area words N+2 to N+11 (which were previously used for automat-
ic setting with equality layout) to 0.
Setting Ranges for
Automatic Creation with
1:N allocations, 1 to 1
Type
Item
Data link mode
1:N allocation
Area start word
Setting range
Specify automatic data link creation with 1:N allocations.
Specify 1 to 1 type.
Set the word address in BCD.
IR or CIO Area: 0 to 6143
LR Area: LR 000 to LR 199 (1000 to 1199) (See note.)
DM Area: D00000 to D32767
EM Area: Banks 0 to 12 E00000 to E32767
Note: When a word between LR 000 and LR 199 is spec-
ified, the data link area will be allocated between words
1000 and 1199 in the IR or CIO Area.
Area type
Set the area type of area 1 as a hexadecimal number.
IR Area: 80 Hex
LR Area: 86 Hex
DM Area: 82 Hex
EM Area Banks 0 to 7: 90 to 97 Hex
Banks 8 to 12: A8 to AC Hex
139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Data Links
Section 5-2
Item
Setting range
Number of common send Set the number of words in BCD between 0 and 1,000.
words per master node
The number of common send words per master node
added to the number of individual send words per master
node multiplied by the number of slave nodes participat-
ing in the data links must not exceed 1,000.
Set to 0 if common data is not to be sent from a master
node to a slave node.
Number of individual
send words per master
node
Set the number of words in BCD between 0 and 1,000.
The number of common send words per master node
added to the number of individual send words per master
node multiplied by the number of slave nodes participat-
ing in the data links must not exceed 1,000.
Set to 0 if individual data is not to be sent from a master
node to a slave node.
Send size (number of
words) for slave node
Set the number of words in BCD between 0 and 1,000.
Set to 0 if the slave node will transmit no data.
First data link status word Set in BCD the first word used for storing data link status.
When automatic setup is used, status can be stored in
the IR or CIO Area only. The number of words used to
store status depends on the data link status storage for-
mat specification as below.
0 (*)
1 to 6128 (32 nodes max., 8-bit format: 16 words used)
*: When 0 is set, the status is saved in IR 1500 + unit
number x 25 (+ 7 to + 22).
Nodes to participate in
the data links
Set to ON (1) the bits corresponding to the nodes partici-
pating in the data links.
The data link will not start unless the startup node itself is
set as a participating node.
Note
1. Node 1 becomes the master node. Node 1 must be registered as a partic-
ipating node.
2. Only one area can be specified when using the 1 to 1 type of 1:N alloca-
tion.
3. The startup node (the node that sets the above DM parameter and starts
the data link) must be set as a participating node of the data link. If not, the
data links will not start.
4. The total number of words in data link send and receive areas must not ex-
ceed 20,000 per node when using Controller Link Units with unit Ver. 1.2
or later, or 12,000 words per node if using pre-Ver. 1.2 Controller Link
Units. The total number of words in data link send and receive areas of a
master node must satisfy the following values. Since the number of master
node words is greatest when 1:N allocation is used, the value can be esti-
mated from the number of master node words.
Total number of words in data link send and receive areas of master
node =
Number of common send words in master node +
Number of individual send words in master node × Number of slave
nodes participating in data links +
Number of send words in slave node × Number of slave nodes partic-
ipating in data links
5. The following values must be satisfied to ensure that the data link area is
fully contained within the specified area.
140
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Data Links
Section 5-2
(Area start word − 1) + (Total number of send and receive words of
master node *)
≤ 6143 (when using the IR or CIO Area)
199 (when using LR Area)
32767 (when using DM or EM Area)
* Total number of send and receive words in master node =
Number of common send words in master node +
Number of individual send words in master node × Number of slave
nodes participating in data links +
Number of send words in slave node × Number of slave nodes partic-
ipating in data links
6. If a node that does not actually exist (e.g., a node that is scheduled to be
added in the future) is registered as a node that will participate in the data
links, a data link area for that node will be allocated in the master node, and
the send/receive area will be refreshed with “0” data.
7. Automatic data link creation with 1:N allocation can only be performed with
CS1W-CLK21-V1, CJ1W-CLK21-V1, 3G8F7-CLK21-V1 Controller Link
Units. If any other model is used, the LNK LED will flash and it will not be
possible to participate in the automatic creation with 1:N allocation.
8. If automatic data link creation with 1:N allocation is to be set up using CX-
Net operations in the CX-Programmer, use CX-Programmer Version 3.2 or
higher. Setup cannot be performed using CX-Programmer Version 3.2 or
lower.
9. The startup node (the node that sets the above DM parameter and starts
the data link) can be set at either a master node or a slave node.
1:N Allocation, Chain Type
(4) Participating nodes
Master node
1a
Slave nodes
1a
(1) Area and start word
1a
1a
(2) No. of master common send
words
(3) No. of receive and send
words per node
1b
2
1b
2
2
3
3
4
(Same as (3))
(Same as (3))
(Same as (3))
3
4
Features of Chain Type 1:N Allocation
• Data communications are 1:1 between the master node and slave nodes.
• All slave nodes receive part of the data sent by the master node. (1a in
figure).
• The master node receives all data sent by the slaves. The data sizes are
fixed for all nodes.
141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Data Links
Section 5-2
• Each slave nodes receives data from the previous node and then sends
data to the next node. Data is thus passed in ascending order of the
nodes participating in the data link.
• One area is selected from the bit-access areas (e.g., CIO Area) or word-
access areas (e.g., DM Area).
• Data link areas are allocated in ascending order of node addresses.
• Data link participation can be specified for each node.
Address N: D30000 + (100 × Controller Link Unit number)
15
14
---
13
0
12
11
---
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
---
---
---
Word N
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
When bits 6, 5 and 4 are set to 1, 0 and 1 respectively, automatic setting with
1:N allocation is specified.
15
8
7
0
1:N allocation type setting (Set value 0003=Delivery type)
---
N+12
Rightmost 4 digits of area start word (BCD)
N+13
N+14
N+15
N+16
N+17
N+18
N+19
N+20
N+21
N+22
N+23
N+24
N+25
(1)
Area
Leftmost digit of area start word (BCD)
Number of master common send words (BCD)
Number of receive and send words per node (BCD)
0000 (Reserved area)
(2)
(3)
---
---
---
---
---
0000 (Reserved area)
0000 (Reserved area)
0000 (Reserved area)
First word to store data link status (bit-access area) (BCD)
16
32
48
---
15
14
13
29
45
61
12
28
44
60
11
27
43
59
10
26
42
58
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
31
47
---
30
46
62
25
41
57
24
40
56
23
39
55
22
38
54
21
37
53
20
36
52
19
35
51
18
34
50
17
33
49
(4)
Words N+22 through N+25 register nodes that will participate in the data
links. The numbers in the table are the node addresses. The bit status given
for each node address indicates whether the node is to participate in the data
links.
Participate: ON
Not participate: OFF
Note
1. Set 0 as the values of the reserved areas (N+17 to N+20).
2. When using automatic data link creation with 1:N allocation, set DM Pa-
rameter Areas N+2 to N+11 (which were previously used for automatic set-
ting with equality layout) to 0.
Setting Range for
Automatic Creation with
1:N Allocation, Chain Type
Item
Data link mode
1:N allocation
Setting range
Specify automatic data link creation with 1:N allocations.
Specify Chain Type.
142
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Data Links
Section 5-2
Item
Setting range
Set the word address in BCD.
IR or CIO Area: 0 to 6143
Area start word
LR Area: LR 000 to LR 199 (1000 to 1199) (*)
DM Area: DM 0 to 32767
EM Area: Banks 0 to 12 EM 0 to 32767
*: When a word between LR 000 and LR 199 is speci-
fied, the data link area will be allocated between
words 1000 and 1199 in the IR or CIO Area.
Area
Set the area type of area 1 as a hexadecimal number.
IR Area: 80 Hex
LR Area: 86 Hex
DM Area: 82 Hex
EM Area Banks 0 to 7: 90 to 97 Hex
Banks 8 to 12: A8 to AC Hex
Number of master com-
mon send words
Set the number of words in BCD between 0 and 1,000.
The number of common send words per master node
added to the number of delivery send words per node
must not exceed 1,000.
Set to 0 if common data is not to be sent from a master
node to a slave node.
No. of receive and send
words per node
Set the number of words in BCD between 0 and 1,000.
The number of common send words per master node
added to the number of delivery send words per node
must not exceed 1,000.
Set to 0 if delivery data is not to be sent.
First word to store data
link status
Set in BCD the first word used for storing data link status.
When automatic setup is used, status can be stored in
the IR or CIO Area only. The number of words used to
store status depends on the data link status storage for-
mat specification as below.
0 (*)
1 to 6128 (32 nodes max., 8-bit format: 16 words used)
*: When 0 is set, the status is saved in IR 1500 + unit
number x 25 (+ 7 to + 22).
Nodes to participate in
the data links
Set to ON (1) the bits corresponding to the nodes partici-
pating in the data links.
The data link will not start unless the startup node itself is
set as a participating node.
Note
1. Node 1 becomes the master node. Node 1 must be registered as a partic-
ipating node.
2. Only one area can be specified when using the chain type of 1:N alloca-
tion.
3. The startup node (the node that sets the above DM parameter and starts
the data link) must be set as a participating node of the data link. If not, the
data links will not start.
4. The total number of words in data link send and receive areas must not ex-
ceed 20,000 per node when using Controller Link Units with unit Ver. 1.2
or later, or 12,000 words per node if using pre-Ver. 1.2 Controller Link
Units. The total number of words in data link send and receive areas of a
master node must satisfy the following values. Since the number of master
node words is greatest when 1:N allocation is used, the value can be esti-
mated from the number of master node words.
143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Data Links
Section 5-2
Total number of words in data link send and receive areas of master
node =
Number of common send words in master node +
Number of individual send words in each node × Number of nodes par-
ticipating in data links (including both master nodes and slave nodes)
5. The following values must be satisfied to ensure that the data link area is
fully contained within the specified area.
(Area start word − 1) + (Total number of send and receive words of
master node *)
≤ 6143 (when using the IR or CIO Area)
199 (when using LR Area)
32767 (when using DM or EM Area)
* Total number of send and receive words in master node =
Number of common send words in master node +
Number of delivery send words in master node × Number of nodes
participating in data links (including both master nodes and slave
nodes)
6. If a node that does not actually exist (e.g., a node that is scheduled to be
added in the future) is registered as a node that will participate in the data
links, a data link area for that node will be allocated in the master node, and
the send/receive area will be refreshed with “0” data.
7. Automatic data link creation with 1:N allocation can only be performed with
CS1W-CLK21-V1, CJ1W-CLK21-V1, 3G8F7-CLK21-V1 Controller Link
Units. If any other model is used, the LNK LED will flash and it will not be
possible to participate in the automatic creation with 1:N allocation.
8. If automatic data link creation with 1:N allocation is to be set up using CX-
Net operations in the CX-Programmer, use CX-Programmer Version 3.2 or
higher. Setup cannot be performed using CX-Programmer Version 3.2 or
lower.
9. The startup node (the node that sets the above DM parameter and starts
the data link) can be set at either a master node or a slave node.
10. When data links are automatically created for networks containing
C200HX/HG/HE PLCs, CS/CJ-series PLCs, CVM1, CV-series, and
CQM1H-series PLCs, the linkable area is restricted to the area of the
CVM1, CV-series, C200HX/HG/HE, or CQM1H-series PLC because it is
smaller than that of CS/CJ-series PLCs.
C200HX/HG/HE or
CQM1H-series PLCs
Example: IR/CIO Area
CS/CJ-series PLCs
0
0
to
to
Available for the data links
235
to
235
Not available for the data links
6655
CVM1 or
CV-series PLCs
CS/CJ-series PLCs
Example: DM Area
DM000
to
DM000
to
Available for the data links
DM24575
to
DM24575
Not available for the data links
DM32767
144
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Data Links
Section 5-2
11. If the LR Area in the C200HX/HG/HE or CQM1H-series PLC is automati-
cally set for a data link with a CVM1, CV-series PLC or CS/CJ-series PLC,
the LR words will be linked to CIO 1000 to CIO 1063 in the CVM1, CV-se-
ries or CS/CJ-series PLC. CIO 1064 to CIO 1199 cannot be linked with
C200HX/HG/HE or CQM1H-series PLCs in this way.
C200HX/HG/HE or
CQM1H-series PLCs
CS/CJ-series PLCs
LR00
to
1000
to
IR words of CS/CJ-series PLCs
= (LR words of C200HX/HG/HE or
CQM1H-series PLC) + 1000
1063
LR63
1064
to
Cannot be directly linked
with C200HX/HG/HE words.
1199
C200HX/HG/HE Startup Node
Set the following DM Parameter Area of the PLC of the startup node.
N: Level 0 = DM 6400
Level 1 = DM 6420
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
0
8
0
7
0
6
0
5
4
3
0
2
0
1
0
0
0
–
–
–
0
0
0
Word N
0: Always specify 0.
– : By other setting
Data link mode
Set to 01 for automatic setting.
(00 is for manual setting. Other values are invalid.)
15
8
7
0
Area 1 data link start word (BCD)
N+1
00
Number of send words per node of area 1 (BCD)
N+2 Area 1 type
N+3
N+4
N+5
Rightmost 4 digits of data link start word of area 2 (DM area) (BCD)
Leftmost digit of data link start word of
Area 2 type
area 2 (BCD)
N+6 Number of send words per node of area 2 (BCD)
First data link status word (BCD)
N+7
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
9
7
8
6
7
5
6
4
5
3
4
2
3
1
2
0
N+8
N+9
16 15 14 13 12 11 10
1
Nodes to participate in the data links
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
BCD: Set the value as binary-coded decimal.
The numbers indicate node numbers.
The value assigned indicates whether the
node is to participate in the data links.
Participate:
Not participate:
1
0
Settings
Item
Setting range
Specify automatic (01).
Set the word address in BCD.
Data link mode
Area 1 data link start
word
IR Area: IR 000 to IR 235, IR 300 to IR 511
LR Area: LR 00 to 63
Set the area for area 1 in BCD.
IR Area: 80
Area 1 type
LR Area: 86
Area 1 not used: 00
145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Data Links
Section 5-2
Item
Setting range
Send size (number of
Set the number of words in BCD between 0 and 1,000.
words) for node of area 1
The total number of send words for area 1 and area 2
must not exceed 1,000.
When area 1 is not used, set to 0.
Set the word address in BCD.
Area 2 data link start
word
DM Area: DM 0000 to DM 5999
EM Area: Banks 00 to 15, EM 0000 to EM 6143
Set the area type for area 2 in BCD.
DM Area: 82
Area 2 type
EM Area: Banks 00 to 07: 90 to 97
Banks 08 to 15: A8 to AF
Area 2 not used: 00
Send size (number of
Set the number of words in BCD between 0 and 1,000.
words) for node of area 2
The total number of send words of area 1 and area 2
must not exceed 1,000.
When area 2 is not used, set to 0.
First data link status word Set in BCD the first word used for storing data link status.
An area of 16 words is used for storing status.
0 (*), IR 001 to IR 220, IR 300 to IR 496
Status is stored in the IR or CIO Area only.
*: When 0 is set, status of nodes 1 to 6 is stored in
CIO 239 to CIO 241 for level 0 and in CIO 243 to CIO
245 for level 1.
Nodes to participate in
the data links
Set to ON (1) the bits corresponding to the nodes partici-
pating in the data links.
The data link will not start unless the startup node itself is
set as a participating node.
The data link will not start if the node is set to a parameter
exceeding the “maximum node address” of the network
parameter.
Note a) The total number of words in data link send and receive areas
must not exceed 8,000 per node.
b) The following values must be satisfied for each node for the data
link area 1 and area 2 so that the final word in the data link does
not go beyond the last word in the PLC memory area.
(Data link start word – 1) + Total number of send/receive
words in area ≤ 235 (First word IR 000 to IR 235)
511 (First word IR 300 to IR 511)
63 (LR Area)
5999 (DM Area)
6143 (EM Area)
c) When using area 1 only, set the data link start word, type, and
the number of send words of area 2 to 0.
d) When using area 2 only, set the data link start word, type, and
the number of send words of area 1 to 0.
e) The startup node must be set as a participating node of the data
links. If not, the data links will not start.
146
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Data Links
Section 5-2
CVM1 or CV-series Startup Node
Set the following DM Parameter Area of the PLC of the startup node.
N: DM 2000 + 100 × (Unit number of Controller Link Unit)
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
0
8
0
7
0
6
0
5
4
3
0
2
0
1
0
0
–
–
–
0
0
0
0
Word N
0: Always 0.
– : Other settings
Data link mode
Set to 01 for automatic setting.
(00 is for manual setting. Other values are invalid.)
15
8
7
0
Area 1 data link start word (BCD)
Area 1 type
N+1
N+2
N+3 Number of send words per node of area 1 (BCD)
N+4
N+5
N+6
Rightmost 4 digits of data link start word of area 2 (BCD)
Leftmost digit of data link start word
of area 2 (BCD)
Area 2 type
Number of send words per node of area 2 (BCD)
N+7 First data link status word (BCD)
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
9
7
8
6
7
5
6
4
5
3
4
2
3
1
2
0
N+8
N+9
16 15 14 13 12 11 10
1
Nodes to participate in the data links
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
BCD: Set the value as binary-coded decimal.
The numbers indicate node numbers.
The value assigned indicates whether the
node is to participate in the data links.
Participate:
1
Not participate: 0
Settings
Item
Setting range
Specify automatic (01).
Data link mode
Area 1 data link start
word
Set the word address in BCD.
CIO Area: CIO 0000 to CIO 2555
LR Area: LR 000 to LR 199 (*)
*: When a word between LR 000 and LR 199 is speci-
fied, the data link area will be allocated between CIO
1000 and CIO 1199.
Area 1 type
Set the area for area 1 in BCD.
CIO Area: 80
LR Area: 86
Area 1 not used: 00
Send size (number of
Set the number of words in BCD between 0 and 1,000.
words) for node of area 1
The total number of send words of area 1 and area 2
must not exceed 1,000.
When area 1 is not used, set to 0.
Set the word address in BCD.
Area 2 data link start
word
DM Area: DM 0000 to DM 8191
(CV500/CVM1-CPU01)
DM 0000 to DM 24575 (Other CPU Units)
EM Area: Banks 00 to 07, EM 0000 to EM 32765
(EM must be installed)
Area 2 type
Set the area for area 2 in BCD.
DM Area: 82
EM Area: Banks 00 to 07: 90 to 97
Area 2 not used: 00
147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Data Links
Section 5-2
Item
Setting range
Send size (number of
Set the number of words in BCD between 0 and 1,000.
words) for node of area 2
The total number of send words of area 1 and area 2
must not exceed 1,000.
When area 2 is not used, set to 0.
First data link status word Set in BCD the first word used for storing data link status.
An area of 16 words is used for storing status.
0 (*) or CIO 0001 to CIO 2540
Status is stored in the CIO area only.
*: When 0 is set, the status is saved in CIO 1500 + unit
number x 25 (+ 7 to + 22).
Nodes participating in the Set to ON (1) the bits corresponding to the nodes partici-
data links
pating in the data links.
The data link will not start unless the startup node itself is
set as participating node.
The data link will not start if the node is set to a parameter
exceeding the “maximum node address” of the network
parameter.
Note a) The total number of words in data link send and receive areas
must not exceed 8,000 per node.
b) The following values must be satisfied for each node for the data
link area 1 and area 2 so that the final word in the data link does
not go beyond the last word in the PLC memory area.
(Data link start word – 1) + Total number of send/receive
words in area ≤ 2555 (CIO Area)
199 (LR Area)
8191 (DM Area for CV500/CVM1-CPU01)
24575 (DM Area for other CPU Units)
32765 (EM Area)
c) When using area 1 only, set the data link start word, type, and
the number of send words of area 2 to 0.
d) When using area 2 only, set the data link start word, type, and
the number of send words of area 1 to 0.
e) The startup node must be registered as a participating node of
the data links. If not, the data links will not start.
Note
1. When data links are automatically created for networks containing
C200HX/HG/HE, CS/CJ-series, CVM1, CV-series, and CQM1H-series
PLCs, the linkable area is restricted to the area of the C200HX/HG/HE or
CQM1H-series PLC because it is smaller than that of CVM1, CV-series or
CS/CJ-series PLCs.
148
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Data Links
Section 5-2
C200HX/HG/HE or
Example: IR/CIO Area
CVM1, CS/CJ, or CV-series PLCs
0
CQM1H-series PLCs
0
to
to
Available for the data links
235
to
235
Not available for the data links
2555
C200HX/HG/HE or
CQM1H-series PLCs
CVM1, CS/CJ, or CV-series PLCs
Example: DM Area
DM000
DM000
to
to
Available for the data links
DM5999
to
DM5999
Not available for the data links
DM24575
2. If the LR Area in a C200HX/HG/HE or CQM1H-series PLC is manually set
for a data link with a CVM1, CV-series, or CS/CJ-series PLC, the LR words
will be linked to CIO 1000 to CIO 1063 in the CVM1, CV-series or CS/CJ-
series PLC. CIO 1064 to CIO 1199 cannot be linked with C200HX/HG/HE
or CQM1H-series PLCs in this way.
C200HX/HG/HE or
CQM1H-series PLCs
CVM1, CS/CJ, or CV-series PLCs
LR00
to
1000
to
CIO words of CVM1, CS/CJ, or CV-series PLCs
= (LR words of C200HX/HG/HE or
CQM1H-series PLCs) + 1000
LR63
1063
1064
to
Cannot be directly linked
with C200HX/HG/HE words.
1199
149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Data Links
Section 5-2
CQM1H-series Startup Node
Set the following DM Parameter Area of the PLC of the startup node.
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
0
8
0
7
0
6
0
5
4
3
0
2
0
1
0
0
0
–
–
–
0
0
0
DM 6400
0: Always 0.
– : Other settings
Data link mode
Set to 01 for automatic setting.
(00 is for manual setting. Other values are invalid.)
15
8
7
0
Area 1 data link start word (BCD)
Area 1 type
DM 6401
DM 6402
00
DM 6403 Number of send words per node of area 1 (BCD)
DM 6404
DM 6405
DM 6406
Rightmost 4 digits of data link start word of area 2 (BCD)
Leftmost digit of data link start word
of area 2 (BCD)
Area 2 type
Number of send words per node of area 2 (BCD)
DM 6407 First data link status word (BCD)
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
9
7
8
6
7
5
6
4
5
3
4
2
3
1
2
0
DM 6408
DM 6409
16 15 14 13 12 11 10
1
Nodes to participate in the data links
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
BCD: Set the value as binary-coded decimal.
The numbers indicate node numbers.
The value assigned indicates whether the
node is to participate in the data links.
Participate:
1
Not participate: 0
Settings
Item
Setting range
Specify automatic (01).
Data link mode
Area 1 data link start
word
Set the word address in BCD.
IR Area: IR 0000 to IR 247
LR Area: LR 00 to LR 63
Area 1 type
Set the area for area 1 in BCD.
IR Area:
80
LR Area: 86
Area 1 not used: 00
Send size (number of
Set the number of words in BCD between 0 and 1,000.
words) for node of area 1
The total number of send words of area 1 and area 2
must not exceed 1,000.
When area 1 is not used, set to 0.
Set the word address in BCD.
DM Area: DM 0000 to DM 5999
EM Area: EM 0000 to EM 6143 (EM must be installed)
Set the area for area 2 in BCD.
DM Area: 82
Area 2 data link start
word
Area 2 type
EM Area: 90
Area 2 not used: 00
Send size (number of
Set the number of words in BCD between 0 and 1,000.
words) for node of area 2
The total number of send words of area 1 and area 2
must not exceed 1,000.
When area 2 is not used, set to 0.
150
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Data Links
Section 5-2
Item
Setting range
First data link status word Set in BCD the first word used for storing data link status.
An area of 16 words is used for storing status.
0 (*) or IR 001 to IR 232
Status is stored in the IR or CIO Area only.
*: When 0 is set, the status for nodes 1 to 6 is stored in
IR 91 to IR 93.
Nodes participating in the Set to ON (1) the bits corresponding to the nodes partici-
data links
pating in the data links.
The data link will not start unless the startup node itself is
set as participating node.
The data link will not start if the node is set to a parameter
exceeding the “maximum node address” of the network
parameter.
Note a) The total number of words in data link send and receive areas
must not exceed 8,000 per node.
b) The following values must be satisfied for each node for the data
link area 1 and area 2 so that the final word in the data link does
not go beyond the last word in the PLC memory area.
(Data link start word – 1) + Total number of send/receive
words in area ≤ 247 (IR Area)
63 (LR Area)
5999 (DM Area)
6143(EM Area)
c) When using area 1 only, set the data link start word, type, and
the number of send words of area 2 to 0.
d) When using area 2 only, set the data link start word, type, and
the number of send words of area 1 to 0.
e) The startup node must be registered as a participating node of
the data links. If not, the data links will not start.
5-2-5 Automatic Setting Example
This section shows an example of DM Parameter Area settings and the data
link areas that are created as a result.
DM Parameter Area
Settings for Equality
Layout
Set the parameters in the startup node as follows:
Data link mode: Automatic
Area 1 data link start word: LR 00
Number of words: 10
Area 2 data link start word: DM 1000
Number of words: 200
First data link status word: IR 310
Participating nodes: #1, #2, and #3
151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Data Links
Section 5-2
Data Link Areas Created
Node #1
#1
Node #2
#1
Node #3
#1
LR 0
LR 10
LR 20
Area 1
#2
#3
#2
#3
#2
#3
D1000
#1
#2
#3
#1
#2
#3
#1
#2
#3
D1200
D1400
Area 2
DM Parameter Setting
Example for 1:N
When automatic data link creation with common type1:N allocations is used,
the DM Parameter Area of the startup node is set as follows:
Allocation, Common Type
Word
Setting
Data link mode: Automatic 1:N allocation
N
0050
0000
0001
0100
N+1 to N+11
"0" because equality layout allocations are not used.
Common type
N+12
N+13
N+14
N+15
N+16
N+17
N+18
N+19
N+20
N+21
N+22
N+23
N+24
N+25
Area for area 1: CIO Area
Start word: 100
80
82
00
00
Area 1 send size for master node: 30
0030
0020
1000
Area 1 send size for slave nodes: 20
Area for area 2: DM Area
Start word: D1000
Area 2 send size for master node: 400 words
Area 2 send size for slave nodes: 200 words
Data link status stored in default area (*)
0400
0200
0000
000F
0000
0000
0000
Data link participating nodes: #1, #2, #3, and #4
*: The default area for storing data link status is the Special I/O Unit Area
(CIO 1500 + (25 × Controller Link Unit number) +7 to +22).
152
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and Stopping Data Links
Section 5-3
Data Link Areas
Node 1
1
Node 2 Node 3
Node 4
1
Area 1 CIO 100
1
1
CIO 130
CIO 150
CIO 170
2
3
4
2
3
4
Area 2
D1000
D1400
1
1
2
1
1
4
2
3
4
3
D1600
D1800
Note
1. Node 1 is the master node.
2. The startup node (the node that sets the above DM parameter and starts
the data link) can be set at either a master node or a slave node.
5-3 Starting and Stopping Data Links
Data link must be started after data link areas have been created. Use any of
the methods described below for the startup node to start and stop data links.
(The procedure for stopping data links is performed on participating nodes.)
These methods are the same for both manually and automatically set data
links.
Note The data link mode (manual setting or automatic setting) and data link method
are determined according to the data link setting in the startup node. In the
startup node, set a data link table in the case of manual setting and data link
automatic setting parameters in the case of automatic setting. If the settings
are incorrect, the data link will not start.
!Caution Check the following items before starting data links. If incorrect data link
tables or parameters are set, injury may result due to unexpected operation of
the system. Even if the correct data link tables and parameters have been set,
do not start or stop data links before verifying that there will be no adverse
influence on the system.
•Manually Set Data Links
Check the data link tables in each node participating in the data link to see
that they are correct.
Be sure that data link tables are deleted from nodes that are not participating
in the data links.
•Automatically Set Data Links
Be sure that the correct DM parameters have been set in the data link startup
node.
153
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and Stopping Data Links
Section 5-3
5-3-1 Using a Programming Device or the User Program
Set the software switch (AR or DM Start Bit) in the PLC to ON using a Pro-
gramming Device or from the user program.
User program
Startup node
Programming Device
Controller Link
+
CS/CJ-series PLCs
Turn ON the Start Bit in DM 30000 + 100 × N.
(N: unit number)
CX-Net
(in CX-Programmer)
C200HX/HG/HE PLCs
Turn ON the Start Bit in AR 07
CVM1 and CV-series PLCs
Turn ON the Start Bit in DM 2000 + 100 × N.
(N: unit number)
CQM1H-series PLCs
Turn ON the Start Bit in AR 07.
The data links will start when the Start Bit changes from OFF to ON or is
already ON when power is turned on. The data links will stop when the Start
Bit changes from ON to OFF.
Note The data in the AR and DM Areas is retained when power is turned off. There-
fore, by setting in the AR and DM Areas can be made in advance to start data
links as soon as power is turned on.
It is recommended to set the Start Bit to ON in multiple nodes that are partici-
pating in the data link so that the data links will start even if the startup node is
down. The same data link settings must be set in these nodes for automati-
cally set data links.
CS/CJ-series Start Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Word N
Data link Start Bit
N: DM 30000 + 100 × (unit number)
Start: Changed from OFF to ON or set to ON
when power is turned on
Stop: Changed from ON to OFF
C200HX/HG/HE Start Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
AR 07
Data link Start Bit for level 0 (AR 0700)
Start: Changed from OFF to ON or set to ON
when power is turned on
Stop: Changed from ON to OFF
Data link Start Bit of level 1 (AR 0704)
Start: Changed from OFF to ON or set to ON
when power is turned on
Stop: Changed from ON to OFF
154
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and Stopping Data Links
Section 5-3
CVM1 and CV-series Start Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Word N
Data link Start Bit
N: DM 2000 + 100 × (unit number)
Start: Changed from OFF to ON or set to ON
when power is turned on
Stop: Changed from ON to OFF
CQM1H-series Start Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
AR 07
Data link Start Bit
Start: Changed from OFF to ON or set to ON
when power is turned on
Stop: Changed from ON to OFF
5-3-2 Using the Controller Link Support Software and CX-Programmer
Data links can be started or stopped using commands on the Data Link Menu
of the Controller Link Support Software. The node for which starting and stop-
ping is being specified must participate in the data links.
Using a Programming Device Connected to PLC Node
Controller Link Support Software or
CX-Net (in CX-Programmer)
IBM PC/AT or
compatible
Node in data links
Start/stop data links
Note The Controller Link Support Software cannot be connected to a CS-series PLC.
Use the CX-Net (in CX-Programmer).
Using a Computer Node
Controller Link
IBM PC/AT or
Support Software
compatible
Node in data links
Controller Link
Support Board
Start/stop data links
Data links can be started or stopped from the Controller Link Support Board
on the local node.
5-3-3 Using FINS Commands
Data links can be started and stopped by sending the RUN and STOP FINS
commands from a node on the Controller Link to a node that is in the data
links.
Issuing the FINS Command from a Computer Node
IBM PC/AT or
compatible
FINS command:
RUN/STOP
Node in data links
Controller Link
Support Board
155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Data Link Status
Section 5-4
Issuing the FINS Command from CVM1, CV-series, CS/CJ-series, and CQM1H-series PLCs
CVM1, CV,
CS/CJ, or
CQM1H
FINS command:
RUN/STOP
Node in data links
Data links can be stopped by sending the FINS command “STOP.” The node
to which the FINS command is issued must be participating in the data link.
5-4 Checking Data Link Status
There are two methods for checking the status of active data links:
• Check the LED indicators on the front of the Units.
• Check the data link status area.
5-4-1 LED Indicators
Check the LINK and M/A indicators on the front of the unit.
CQM1H-series PLCs
CS-series PLCs
CJ-series PLCs
C200HX/HG/HE PLCs CVM1 and CV-series PLCs
CLK21
CLK21-V1
RUN ERC
CLK21
CLK21-V1
INS SD
RUN
ERC
TER
ERH
TER ERH M/A LNK RD
INS
M/A
RUN TER
ERC ERH
SD RD LNK
M/A
LNK
RD
INS
SD
Name
Color
Yellow
Status
ON
Contents
Participating in data links.
Make sure that the LNK
indicator is ON at nodes
participating in the active data
links.
LNK
(data link)
Flashing
OFF
Data link table setting error
Not in data links or data links are inactive.
M/A
(data link
mode)
Yellow
ON
Manual
Note: This indicator will
always be OFF when the
data links are not active.
OFF
Automatic
as operation is normal. The data link mode (manual/automatic) can be
checked using the M/A indicator. See 9-1 Troubleshooting Using Indicators for
details.
5-4-2 Data Link Status Area
The data link status area can be used to check for errors when data link does
not operate normally even though no abnormality has been detected by the
PLC’s CPU Unit or the Controller Link Unit. The data link status area contains
the data link status information shown below.
The number of words used for data link status and the information that is
reflected depends on the setting (8-bit or 4-bit format) for the data link status
lowing diagram.
See 9-2 Status Area and Troubleshooting for troubleshooting procedures and
see Data Link Status Storage Format (CS/CJ Series Only) for details on set-
ting the data link status storage format in the DM Parameters Area when
using CS- and CJ-series PLCs.
156
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Data Link Status
Section 5-4
When 8-bit Format is Specified (i.e., when using a C200HX/HG/HE, CVM1, CV-series, or CQM1H-series
PLC or when using a CS/CJ-series PLC with the data link status storage format specification in the DM
Parameter Area set to 8-bit format)
(See note 1.)
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
1
8
0
15
Node 2
87
Node 1
0
First status word + 0
First status word + 1
Node 4
Node 6
Node 8
to
Node 3
Node 5
Node 7
to
7
6
5
4
3
2
First status word + 2
First status word + 3
PLC status (See note 2.)
0: Inactive (user program not running)
1: Active (user program running)
First status word + 14
First status word + 15
Node 30
Node 32
Node 34
Node 36
to
Node 29
Node 31
Node 33
Node 35
to
PLC's CPU Unit error (See note 3.)
0: Normal
1: Error
First status word + 16
First status word + 17
Communications error (data link reception)
0: Normal
1: Error
First status word + 27
First status word + 28
Node 56
Node 58
Node 60
Node 62
Node 55
Node 57
Node 59
Node 61
Data link participation
0: Not in data link or data link inactive
1: In data link
First status word + 29
First status word + 30
Offset error (See note 4.)
0: Normal
1: Error
Error: Offset exceeds number of
send words.
Insufficient (short) receive
area (See note 5.)
0: Sufficient
1: Insufficient
Insufficient: Receive area is smaller than
send area. Excess data is truncated; other
data is received.
Remaining receive area
(See note 6.)
0: Not remaining
1: Remaining
Remaining: Receive area is larger than
send area. Data is received and remaining
words are cleared.
Note
1. When the default setting is used for the data link status storage destination,
16 words are determined within the status area according to the unit num-
ber setting. When the 8-bit format is specified, therefore, the data that is
reflected will be limited to node addresses 1 to 32.
When data link status is required for node addresses 33 or larger, do not
use the default setting, i.e., specify the first word of the status storage area.
If this is done when an 8-bit format is specified, 31 words will be used as
the status storage area.
2. Always 1 for the Controller Link Support Board.
3. Always 0 for the Controller Link Support Board.
4. Even if an offset error occurs, the data link will operate and the node will
participate in the data links. In the node where the offset error occurred,
however, all receive area words will be cleared to 0.
157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Data Link Status
Section 5-4
5. The following shows an example of an insufficient (short) receive area.
Insufficient (short)
Sufficient
Node 1
Send
Node 1
Node 2
Node 2
Receive
area
Receive
area
Send
area
area
Data indicated by
cannot be received in node 2.
Data indicated by
is received in
node 2.
Data indicated by
is received
and the remaining data is truncated.
6. The following shows an example of a remaining receive area.
No remaining
Remaining
Node 1
Node 2
Node 1
Node 2
Data indicated by
Send
area
Receive
area
Send
area
Receive
area
Data indicated by
is received in node 2 and the
is received in
node 2.
remaining words are cleared.
When 4-bit Format is Specified (i.e., when using a CS/CJ-series PLC with the data link status storage
format specification in the DM Parameter Area set to 4-bit format)
Node 4
First status word + 0
First status word + 1 Node 8
Node 3
Node 7
Node 2
Node 6
Node 1
Node 5
First status word + 2 Node 12 Node 11 Node 10 Node 9
First status word + 3 Node 16 Node 15 Node 14 Node 13
First status word + 4
Node 20 Node 19 Node 18 Node 17
Node 24 Node 23 Node 22 Node 21
First status word + 5
First status word + 6 Node 30 Node 27 Node 26 Node 25
First status word + 7 Node 32 Node 31 Node 30 Node 29
Node 36 Node 35 Node 34 Node 33
First status word + 8
Node 40 Node 39 Node 38 Node 37
First status word + 9
PLC status
0: Inactive (user program
Node 44 Node 43 Node 42 Node 41
First status word + 10
not running)
1: Active (user program
running)
Node 48 Node 47 Node 46 Node 45
First status word + 11
Node 52 Node 51 Node 50 Node 49
First status word + 12
Node 58 Node 55 Node 54 Node 53
First status word + 13
PLC's CPU Unit error
0: Normal
Node 60 Node 59 Node 58 Node 57
First status word + 14
1: Error
0
0
Node 62 Node 61
First status word + 15
Communications error
(data link reception)
0: Normal
1: Error
Data link participation
0: Not in data link or data link inactive
1: In data link
Note
1. A communications error will occur in a node that is not participating in the
network.
2. When a communications error occurs, previous status is retained for other
nodes status.
3. Only the PLC status and the PLC’s CPU Unit error status are refreshed for
nodes that are participating in the network, but not participating in the data
links.
4. When the data link status area is set in the IR, CIO, or LR Area, the data
link status will be instantaneously set to 0 when the mode of the PLC’s
CPU Unit is changed.
158
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Data Link Status
Section 5-4
5. With CS/CJ-series PLCs, the status of the words from first status word +
16 to first status word + 30 when 8-bit format is specified and the status of
the words from first status word + 8 to first status word + 15 (i.e., the status
of nodes 33 to 62) is reflected when the Wired Network 62 Node Enable
Bit in the DM Parameter Area is turned ON.
The flags in the data link status operate as follows:
Name
Function
Data link participation The corresponding flag will turn ON if the node has never
participated in the data link normally. The flag will not turn
OFF once it has turned ON even if the node is no longer par-
ticipating in the data links.
Communications
error
The corresponding flag will turn ON if continuous data link
data cannot be received from the node, e.g., due to a cable
break. The flag will turn OFF again if normal data is received.
PLC’s CPU Unit error The corresponding flag will turn ON if the CPU Unit has a
fatal error, non-fatal error, or watchdog timer error. The flag
will turn OFF again if the node returns to normal.
The status of this flag is based on data sent from the node
and will not turn ON if data cannot received, e.g., due to a
Communications Error. Make sure that the Communications
Error Flag is OFF before checking this flag.
PLC status
The corresponding flag will turn ON if the user program is
being executed in the CPU Unit. It will turn OFF is the user
program is not being executed.
The status of this flag is based on data sent from the node
and will not turn ON if data cannot received, e.g., due to a
Communications Error. Make sure that the Communications
Error Flag is OFF before checking this flag.
The Data Link Participation Flag and the PLC Status Flag can be used to see
if the system has started normally. These flags, however, cannot be used to
detect communications errors. Use the Communications Error Flag and PLC’s
CPU Unit Error Flag to detect errors.
If the Local Node Data Link Participation Flag is OFF, the previous status will
be maintained as the data link status and may not be correct. Make sure that
the Local Node Data Link Participation Flag is ON before checking data link
status.
Note The following Local Node Data Link Participation Flags are available.
CS/CJ-series, CVM1, CV-series PLCs:
Bit 15 in 1500 + 25 × unit number + 6
C200HX/HG/HE PLCs: SR 25205
CQM1H-series PLCs: IR 9015
159
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Data Link Status
Section 5-4
The data link status storage area is set as follows:
Data link
mode
PLC and
operating level
First data link
status word
Setting range
Default status
Automatic CS/CJ-series PLC Specify in
Either 8, 16, or 31 words
CIO 1500 + 25 × N + 7 to 22
DM 30000 + 100 × between
N + 7
CIO 001 and CIO 6640
C200HX/HG/HE
Level 0
Specify in DM 6407 16 words between
IR 001 and IR 220 or
IR 239 to IR 241 (See note b.)
IR 243 to IR 245 (See note b.)
CIO 1500 + 25 × N + 7 to 22
IR 91 to IR 93 (See note b.)
IR 300 to IR 496
C200HX/HG/HE
Level 1
Specify in DM 6427
CVM1 or CV-
series PLC
Specify in DM 2000 16 words between
+ 100 × N + 7
CIO 000 and CIO 2540
CQM1H-series
PLC
Specify in DM 6407 16 words between
IR 000 and IR 232
Manual
CS/CJ-series PLC Specify in the data Either 8, 16, or 31 words in the CIO 1500 + 25 × N + 7 to 22
link tables
following ranges
CIO: 1 to 6640
LR: 0 to 184
DM: 0 to 32752
EM: 0 to 32752
C200HX/HG/HE
Level 0
16 words in the following
ranges
IR: 1 to 220
IR: 300 496
LR: 0 to 48
DM: 0 to 5984
EM: 0 to 6128
IR 239 to IR 241 (See note b.)
IR 243 to IR 245 (See note b.)
C200HX/HG/HE
Level 1
CVM1 or CV-
series PLC
16 words in the following
ranges
CIO 1500 + 25 × N + 7 to 22
CIO: 1 to 2540
LR: 0 to 184
DM: 0 to 24560
EM: 0 to 32750
CQM1H-series
PLC
16 words in the following
ranges
IR 91 to IR 93 (See note b.)
IR: 1 to 232
LR: 0 to 48
DM: 0 to 5984
EM: 0 to 6128
Note a) N: Unit number
b) Only status for nodes 1 to 6 are saved.
Data Link Status Storage Format (CS/CJ Series Only)
The setting for the data link status storage format when using CS- or CJ-
series PLCs is shown below. The setting is made using the software switch in
bit 7 of the DM Parameters Area. The address of the software switch is as fol-
lows:
DM 30000 + 100 x unit number
-
Address N
0: Always 0
-: Other settings
Data link status storage format
0: 8-bit format
1: 4-bit format
The user setting and automatic setting for the data link status storage format
are the same.
160
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Data Link Status
Section 5-4
Note The data link storage format setting is enabled with the data link startup node
setting. Therefore, if multiple nodes are set as startup nodes, ensure that they
all have the same settings. If there are different settings, the format setting will
depend on the startup node.
5-4-3 Data Link Status Area
The numbers of words used to store the data link status information are
shown in the following table. These numbers apply to both manual and auto-
matic settings.
Model
DM Parameter Area
No. of words used No. of status nodes
Wired network
62-node
specification
Data link status
storage format
specification
CS/CJ Series
62 nodes max.
32 nodes max.
8-bit format
4-bit format
8-bit format
4-bit format
No setting
31 (See note 1.)
For 62 nodes
For 62 nodes
For 32 nodes
For 32 nodes
For 32 nodes
16
16
8
C200HX/HG/HE
CVM1/CV series
CQM1H series
No setting
16
32 nodes max.
8-bit format fixed
Note
1. The default words area used when the CIO or IR Area is specified with 0
specified as the first word to store data link status. The default setting for
the CS/CJ-series Controller Link Units is 16 words in the Special I/O Unit
Area (1500 + (25 × Controller Link Unit number) +7 to +22). For this rea-
son, if using a 62-node wired network is specified in the DM Parameter
Area and the data link status storage format is set to the 8-bit format, the
resulting data link status will be limited to nodes 1 to 32.
If data link status information is required for more than 32 nodes, do not set
the storage start word to its default setting, but set another area as the data
link status storage area instead.
2. The setting for the data link status storage format specification in the DM
Parameter Area is valid in the data link startup node. Only the CS/CJ-se-
ries Controller Link Units support the 4-bit format for the data link status
storage format specification. Even if a data link is initiated from a CS/CJ-
series Controller Link Unit using the 4-bit data link status format, other
Controller Link Unit models on the same network (i.e., the C200HX/HG/
HE, CVM1/CV, or CQM1H) will save the data link status in 8-bit format.
Use the 8-bit format if it is desirable to standardize the data link status for-
mat of each node in a system containing other models.
5-4-4 Checking by Manipulating Bit/Word Status
After you have confirmed that the data link function is operating normally,
check to see whether or not the data link is operating as intended, i.e., check
to see if the desired bits/words data is being transferred to the intended words
at other nodes.
Although the data link function itself may be operating correctly, the data link
areas may have been input incorrectly.
Change the contents of a bit or word in a data link send area using a Program-
ming Device or the user program and check whether the change is reflected in
data link areas of other nodes as intended.
Note Do not restart the polling node of the Controller Link Network while data links
are active. Otherwise, the data links may stop.
161
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Data Link Status
Section 5-4
5-4-5 Error Detection Program Example
Local node
Node 1
Data Link Participating Flag
Node 1
Communications Error Flag
Data Link
Participation Flag
Node 1
Error output
Node 2
Data Link Participating Flag
Node 2
Communications Error Flag
Node 2
Error output
Node 32
Data Link Participating Flag
Node 32
Communications Error Flag
Node 32
Error output
When the source node's data link is participating, the AND condition of the
data link status for each node can be taken using the Data Link Participation
Flag and the Communications Error Flag, and the error output.
The following example shows an error output program for cases where the
local node data link stops.
The local node's Communications Error Flag (in the data link status area) will
be turned ON if the local node is isolated from the network while the data link
is active. In this case, the data link remains active, so the node's Data Link
Participation Flag will remain ON even though the node is isolated from the
network.
Local node
Data Link Participation Flag
DIFD 10000
Local node
Communications Error Flag
DIFD 10000
10000
Release Flag
Local node
Error output
Local node
Error output
5-4-6 Programming Examples for Processing Data when Errors Occur
If a communications error occurs in a data link and valid data link data cannot
be received, the previous data is stored in the data link area. To stop process-
ing using the data link data when an error occurs, refer to the following pro-
gram example.
Processing Data Only when Data Links Are Operating Normally
Perform processing only when the data links are operating normally by includ-
ing an AND condition for the Data Link Normal Operation Flag in the part of
the program that handles data link data for each node. This is an example of
programming locks in the appropriate places.
The parts of the ladder program
that use the data link area for
Normal Operation
the relevant node are processed
only when the corresponding
Normal Operation Flag is ON.
Additional part
Flag
Normal Operation
“Data Link Normal Operating Flags” can be created using the programming
described in 5-4-5 Error Detection Program Example.
162
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Data Link Status
Section 5-4
Processing Data Only when Operation Is Normal Using the IL-ILC and JMP-JME Instructions
Perform processing only when operation is normal by creating a program
based on program blocks that process data for each node with the IL-ILC and
JMP-JME programs.
Node A Data Link
Normal Operation Flag
IL
Node A data processing
ILC
Node B Data Link
Normal Operation Flag
IL
Node B data processing
ILC
Node C Data Link
Normal Operation Flag
IL
Node C data processing
ILC
“Data Link Normal Operating Flags” can be created using the programming
described in 5-4-5 Error Detection Program Example.
Writing 0000 in the Data Link Area when Errors Occur
When data links are not operating normally, write 0000 to the data link area of
the node with the error to stop other data being received.
As an example, the following example shows how to write 0000 in the data link
area of node 2 (D00100 to D00120) using the BSET (block set) instruction
when an error occurs at node 2.
■ Data Link Example: Communications Error at Node 2
Node 1
Node 1
Node 2
Node 2
Node 1
Node 2
Node 62
Node 1
Node 2
X
Node 62
Node 62
Node 62
■ Example of Programming for Node 1 to Handle Communications Errors at
Node 2
Node 2 Data Link
Normal Operation Flag
BSET
# 0 0 0 0
0000 is written continuously
in node 2's area (D00100 to
D00120) until node 2's flag
turns ON.
D00100
D00120
“Data Link Normal Operating Flags” can be created using the programming
described in 5-4-5 Error Detection Program Example.
Note
1. If an error occurs and 0000 is written to the Data Link Area occurs for an
unstable transmission path (i.e., one that repeatedly alternates between
communications errors and normal operation), the normal data will be fre-
163
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Data Link Status
Section 5-4
quently cleared to 0000. Data processing methods that will not process
data or arithmetic operations when errors occur are recommended (such
as shown in the example for processing data only when data links are op-
erating normally or the example for processing data only when operation
is normal using the IL-ILC and JMP-JME instructions).
2. The BSET(071) instruction is used to write 0000 to the corresponding area
in which the ladder program is executing, but the value in the data link table
will be read if the words are being monitored from Support Software. This
enables peripheral servicing (i.e., for Support Software) to be executed af-
ter the CPU Unit has performed I/O refreshing (Controller Link Unit data
link refresh).
3. With Controller Link data links, if there is an error at the source node, the
previous data (i.e., data received immediately before the error) continues
to be stored in the data link receive area of the node receiving the data. To
clear the data in the receive area to 0 when an error occurs, include the
appropriate programming for clearing to 0, with reference to the above ex-
ample.
4. Refresh processing for the data used in Controller Link data links is per-
formed between the Controller Link Unit and CPU Unit with every cycle and
so the above programming must be included at the start of the program.
This method (i.e., clearing to 0) can be used with C200HX/HG/HE, CS1,
and CS1-H CPU Units as long as the DLNK instruction is not used, and
can be used with CVM1/CV CPU Units as long as CPU execution process-
ing is set to synchronous processing. It cannot be used with C200HX/HG/
HE or CS1-H CPU Units if the DLNK instruction is used, or with CVM1/CV
CPU Units if CPU execution processing is set to asynchronous processing.
(This is because when the DLNK instruction is used with CS1-H CPU
Units, or when asynchronous processing is set for the CVM1/CV CPU
Units, the refreshing of data for data links is not synchronized with the in-
struction execution cycle.)
164
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECTION 6
Message Service
This section explains how to use the message service provided by a Controller Link Unit. It also explains the FINS
commands and responses supported by Controller Link Units and those supported by C200HX/HG/HE, CS/CJ-series,
6-1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-1 SEND and RECV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
166
167
226
227
6-6-8 RUN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6-9 STOP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7 Response Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7-1 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7-2 Network Relay Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7-3 Response Codes and Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
165
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Section 6-1
6-1 Introduction
A message service is a command/response system used for data transmis-
sion between nodes on a network, i.e., PLC to PLC, PLC to computer, and
computer to PLC). The message service can also be used to control opera-
tions, such as mode changes. The message service is implemented by send-
ing commands from the user program. The following communications
instructions are used:
SEND and RECV: Instructions for sending and receiving data.
CMND: An instruction for sending FINS commands. Some FINS commands
are supported by Controller Link Units, and other FINS commands supported
by the PLC’s CPU Unit.
Message service
SEND/RECV instructions
CMND instruction (FINS commands)
Source
node to
destination
node
PLC to PLC
CS/CJ-series, CVM1,
C200HX/HG/HE,
CS/CJ-series, CVM1,
CV-series, or
C200HX/HG/HE,
CS/CJ-series, CVM1,
CV-series, or
CV-series, or
C200HX/HG/HE,
CQM1H-series PLC
CS/CJ-series, CVM1,
CQM1H-series PLC
(Not supported by the CV-series, or
CQM1H-series PLC
C200HX/HG/HE.)
CQM1H-series PLC
(Com-
mand for
CPU Unit)
(Com-
mand for
Controller
Link Unit)
Command
SEND
CMND
(Com-
mand for
CPU Unit)
User program
Command
User program
A program is not required for receiving
responses when the PLC executes
SEND and RECV.
A program is not required for receiving
responses when the PLC executes
commands.
PLC to
computer
C200HX/HG/HE,
CS/CJ-series, CVM1,
Computer
CV-series, or CQM1H-
series PLC
Command
A program is required for sending and
receiving data with the computer.
SEND
A program is not required for receiving
responses when the PLC executes commands.
Computer
to PLC
C200HX/HG/HE,
Computer
CS/CJ-series, CVM1, CV-series
or CQM1H-series PLC
(The equivalent of SEND/
RECV and CMND are sent
from the computer pro
gram.)
(Command for
Controller Link
Unit or CPU
Unit)
Command
Programming is required to receive
responses at the computer.
166
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Section 6-1
Message service
Source node:Destination SEND:
SEND/RECV instructions
CMND instruction (FINS commands)
1:1 or 1:N (broadcast)
There are no responses for broadcasting.
node
1:1 or 1:N (broadcast)
There are no responses for broadcasting.
RECV: 1:1
Data length
1,980 bytes max. (990 words)
1,990 bytes max.
6-1-1 SEND and RECV
I/O memory data from other nodes can be read or written by simply using the
program in the CPU Unit of a C200HX/HG/HE, CS/CJ-series, CVM1, CV-
series, or CQM1H-series PLC to execute SEND and RECV.
CS/CJ-series PLCs
SEND
SEND transmits “n” words beginning with S (the beginning word for data
transmission at the source node) to “n” words beginning with D (the beginning
word for data reception at the destination node, N.)
Source node
0
Destination node N
15
15
0
D
S
"n" number
n
of send
words
n
@SEND(90)
S
user setting and the automatic setting
S: Source node beginning send word
D: Destination node beginning receive word
C: Source node first control data word
D
C
15
15
0
15
10 8 7
3
0
C
C+3
0
0
"n" number of send words
0000 to 03DE (Hex): 1 to 990 words
Number of retries
0 to F (Hex): 0 to 15 retries
11
8 7
0
Communication port No.
0 to 7 Hex
C+1
0
0
0: Response required
1: Response not required
Destination network address
00 (Hex): Local network
01 to 7F (Hex): 1 to 127
15
11
8 7
0
C+2
C+4
Response monitor time
Destination unit address
0000 (Hex): 2 s
00 (Hex):
PLC's CPU Unit
0001 to FFFF (Hex): 0.1 to 6,553.5 s
(Unit: 0.1 s)
01 to 0F (Hex): Computer (user program)
(02 to 0F (Hex) are used
when using a Controller Link
Support Board for PCI Bus
only.)
If the baud rate is slow, then setting a small
value may generate an error. The standard is
approximately 4 seconds at 1 Mbps or 8
seconds at 500 Kbps.
10 to 1F (Hex): Unit nos. 0 to 15
E1 (Hex):
FE (Hex):
Inner Board
Unit connected to network
Destination node N
01 to 20 (Hex): 1 to 32 (or 01 to 3E (Hex): 1 to 62)
The same data can be broadcast to all nodes
on the network by setting the destination node address to
FF (Hex).
The range of node addresses will vary for networks
other than Controller Link Networks.
Note
1. When communicating with a CVM1 or CV-series PLC manufactured prior
to April 1996 on the local network, the local network address cannot be set
to “00.” Set a number other than “00” as the local network address in the
routing tables, and then specify that number.
167
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Section 6-1
2. With the message service, there is no guarantee that a message to a des-
tination node will reach its destination. It is always possible that the mes-
sage may be lost in transit due to noise or some other condition. When
using the message service, it is advisable to prevent this situation from oc-
curring by performing resend processing at the node where instructions
are issued. With the SEND, RECV, and CMND instructions, resend pro-
cessing is performed automatically once the number of retries has been
set, so be sure to specify a number other than “0” for the number of retries.
RECV
RECV receives “m” words beginning with S (the beginning word for data
transmission at the destination node, M) to the words beginning with D (the
beginning word for data reception at the source node).
Source node
Destination node M
15
15
0
0
D
S
"m" num-
ber of
send
m
words
@RECV(98)
S
D
C
S: Source node beginning send word
D: Destination node beginning receive word
C: Source node first control data word
15
0
15
10 8 7
3
0
C
C+3
0
0
"m" number of send words
Number of retries
0000 to 03DE (Hex): 1 to 990 words
0 to F (Hex): 0 to 15 retries
15
11
8 7
0
Communication port No.
0 to 7
C+1
0
0
0: Response required
1: Response not required
Destination network address
00 (Hex): Local network
01 to 7F (Hex): 1 to 127
15
11
8 7
0
C+2
C+4
Response monitor time
Destination unit address
0000 (Hex): 2 s
00 (Hex):
PLC's CPU Unit
0001 to FFFF (Hex): 0.1 to 6,553.5 s
(Unit: 0.1 s)
01 to 0F (Hex): Computer (user program)
(02 to 0F (Hex) are used
when using Controller Link
Support Boards for PCI Bus
only.)
If the baud rate is slow, then setting a small
value may generate an error. The standard is
approximately 4 seconds at 1 Mbps or 8
seconds at 500 Kbps.
10 to 1F (Hex): Unit nos. 0 to 15
E1 (Hex):
FE (Hex):
Inner Board
Unit connected to network
Destination node M
01 to 20 (Hex): 1 to 32 (or 01 to 3E (Hex): 1 to 62)
The range of node addresses will vary for networks
other than Controller Link Networks.
Note
1. When communicating with a CVM1 or CV-series PLC manufactured prior
to April 1996 on the local network, the local network address cannot be set
to “00.” Set a number other than “00” as the local network address in the
routing tables, and then specify that number.
2. With the message service, there is no guarantee that a message to a des-
tination node will reach its destination. It is always possible that the mes-
sage may be lost in transit due to noise or some other condition. When
using the message service, it is advisable to prevent this situation from oc-
curring by performing resend processing at the node where instructions
are issued. With the SEND, RECV, and CMND instructions, resend pro-
cessing is performed automatically once the number of retries has been
set, so be sure to specify a number other than “0” for the number of retries.
168
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Section 6-1
C200HX/HG/HE PLCs
SEND
SEND transmits “n” words beginning with S (the beginning source word for
data transmission at the source node) to the “n” words beginning with D (the
beginning destination word for data reception at destination node N).
Source node
0
Destination node N
0
15
15
@SEND(90)
D
S
S: Source node beginning send word
D: Destination node beginning receive word
C: Source node first control data word
"n" number
n
of send
words
n
S
D
C
15 14
0
C
"n" number of send words
0000 to 03DE (Hex): 0 to 990 words
0: Destination network address not specified (local network)
1: Destination network address specified.
1514131211
1
8 7
0
C +1
Response monitor time
Number of retries
00 (Hex):
2 s (for 2 Mbps)
4 s (for 1 Mbps)
8 s (for 500 Kbps)
0 to F (Hex): 0 to 15 retries
Direct/Indirect
0: Direct; 1: Indirect
0: Response required
1: Response not required
01 to FE (Hex):
FF (Hex):
0.1 to 25.4 s (unit: 0.1 s)
No response monitoring
0: Operating level 1
1: Operating level 0
Always "1" for Controller Link Networks
15
8 7
0
C + 2
Destination node address (N)
01 to 20 (Hex): 1 to 32 (or 01 to 3E (Hex): 1 to 62)
Destination unit address
00 (Hex): PLC's CPU Unit
01 to 0F (Hex): Computer (user program)
(02 to 0F (Hex) are used when
using Controller Link Support
Boards for PCI Bus only.)
The same data can be broadcast to all nodes
on the network by setting the destination node
address to FF (Hex).
The range of node addresses will vary for networks
other than Controller Link Networks.
10 to 1F (Hex): Unit nos. 0 to 15
FE (Hex):
15
Unit connected to network
0
C + 3
0
0
Destination network address
00 (Hex): Local network
01 to 7F (Hex): 1 to 127
This setting is enabled only when Destination network address specified" is set in word C.
When specifying a destination network address, set all the nodes in the routing tables. For
Section 7 Network Interconnections.
details on routing tables, refer to
Note
1. When communicating in the same network with a CVM1 or CV-series PLC
manufactured prior to April 1996, the local network address cannot be set
to “00.” Set a number other than “00” as the local network address in the
routing tables, and then specify that number.
2. With the message service, there is no guarantee that a message to a des-
tination node will reach its destination. It is always possible that the mes-
sage may be lost in transit due to noise or some other condition. When
using the message service, it is advisable to prevent this situation from oc-
curring by performing resend processing at the node where instructions
are issued. With the SEND, RECV, and CMND instructions, resend pro-
cessing is performed automatically once the number of retries has been
set, so be sure to specify a number other than “0” for the number of retries.
169
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Section 6-1
RECV
RECV receives “m” words beginning with S (the beginning word for data
transmission at the destination node, M) to the words from D (the beginning
word for data reception at the source node) onwards.
Source node
Destination node M
15
15
0
0
D
S
"m" num-
ber of
send
m
words
@RECV(98)
S: Destination node beginning send word
D: Source node beginning receive word
C: Source node first control data word
S
D
C
15 14
0
C
"m" number of send words
0000 to 03DE (Hex): 0 to 990 words
0: Source network address not specified (local network)
1: Source network address specified.
1514131211
8 7
0
C + 1 1
Response monitor time
Number of retries
00 (Hex):
2 s (for 2 Mbps)
4 s (for 1 Mbps)
8 s (for 500 Kbps)
01 to FE (Hex): 0.1 to 25.4 s (unit: 0.1 s)
FF (Hex): No response monitoring
0 to F (Hex): 0 to 15 retries
Direct/Indirect
0: Direct; 1: Indirect
0: Response required
1: Response not required
0: Operating level 1
1: Operating level 0
Always " 1" for Controller Link Networks
15
8 7
0
C + 2
Destination (transmission source) node address (M)
01 to 20 (Hex): 1 to 32 (or 01 to 3E (Hex): 1 to 62)
Destination (transmission source) unit address
00 (Hex): PLC's CPU Unit
The range of node addresses will vary for networks
other than Controller Link Networks.
01 to 0F (Hex): Computer (user program)
(02 to 0F (Hex) are used when
using Controller Link Support
Boards for PCI Bus only.)
10 to 1F (Hex): Unit nos. 0 to 15
FE (Hex):
15
Unit onnected to network
0
C + 3
0
0
Destination network address
00 (Hex): Local network
01 to 7F (Hex): 1 to 127
This setting is enabled only when Destination network address specified" is set in word C.
When specifying the destination network address, set all the nodes in the routing tables. For
details on the routing tables, refer to Section 7 Network Interconnections.
Note
1. When communicating in the same network with a CVM1 or CV-series PLC
manufactured prior to April 1996, the local network address cannot be set
to “00.” Set a number other than “00” as the local network address in the
routing tables, and then specify that number.
2. With the message service, there is no guarantee that a message to a des-
tination node will reach its destination. It is always possible that the mes-
170
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Section 6-1
sage may be lost in transit due to noise or some other condition. When
using the message service, it is advisable to prevent this situation from oc-
curring by performing resend processing at the node where instructions
are issued. With the SEND, RECV, and CMND instructions, resend pro-
cessing is performed automatically once the number of retries has been
set, so be sure to specify a number other than “0” for the number of retries.
Indirect Designation of
Beginning Words
CVM1, CV-series, and CS/CJ-series PLCs have a larger area than C200HX/
HG/HE PLCs, so the beginning words for sending and receiving at destination
nodes cannot always be directly specified by means of SEND and RECV
operands. Moreover, depending on circumstances, it may be desirable to
change the beginning word at destination nodes.
In such cases, set the “Direct/Indirect” control data designation to “1” (Indi-
rect), and specify the beginning words for sending and receiving as described
below.
SEND
The beginning receive word is determined by the contents of the destination
node’s D and D+1 words.
@SEND(90)
S: Source node beginning send word
S
D
C
D: Destination node beginning receive word
C: Source node first control data word
1514131211109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Area code* 0 0 0 0
Word address (5th digit)
D
D+1
Word address (1st digit)
Word address (2nd digit)
Word address (3rd digit)
Word address (4th digit)
RECV
The beginning send word is determined by the contents of the destination
node’s S and S+1 words.
@RECV(98)
S: Source node beginning send word
S
D
C
D: Destination node beginning receive word
C: Source node first control data word
1514131211109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Area code*
0 0 0 0
Word address (5th digit)
S
S+1
Word address (1st digit)
Word address (2nd digit)
Word address (3rd digit)
Word address (4th digit)
171
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Section 6-1
Note Specify the area code according to the following table.
Destination node: CS/CJ-series PLC Destination node: C200HX/HG/HE or
CQM1H-series PLC
Destination node: CVM1 or CV-
series PLC
Area
Code
00
Area
IR (Internal Relay)
LR (Link Relay)
Code
00
Area
Code
00
CIO (IR etc.) (See note 1.)
CIO
TIM (Timer)
03
06
CPU Bus Link
01
(See note 2.)
CNT (Counter) (See note 2.)
DM (DM Area)
04
05
HR (Holding Relay)
AR (Auxiliary Relay)
TC (Timer/Counter)
DM (DM Area)
07
08
03
05
Auxiliary
Timer
02
03
04
05
EM (Expansion DM)
Banks 0 to 7
Banks 8 to 13
Current bank
10 to
17
A8 to
AC
Counter
DM (DM Area)
EM (Expansion DM)
Banks 0 to 7
Banks 8 to 15
10 to
17
28 to
2F
EM (Expansion DM)
Banks 0 to 7
Current bank
10 to
17
18
18
Current bank
(CQM1H: Bank 0 only)
18
Note
1. Words 0 to 2555 in the IR Area can send and receive data.
2. Timer/counters numbers 0 to 2047 can send and receive data.
172
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Section 6-1
CVM1 and CV-series PLCs
SEND
SEND transmits “n” words beginning with S (the beginning word for data
transmission at the source node) to “n” words beginning with D (the beginning
word for data reception at the destination node, N.)
Source node
0
Destination node N
15
15
0
D
S
"n" number
n
of send
words
n
(↑)SEND(192)
S
S: Source node beginning send word
D: Destination node beginning receive word
C: Source node first control data word
D
C
15
0
15
10 8 7
3
0
C
C+3
0
0
"n" number of send words
Number of retries
0 to F (Hex): 0 to 15 retries
0001 to 03DE (Hex): 1 to 990 words
15
11
8 7
0
Communication port No.
0 to 7
C+1
0
0
0: Response required
1: Response not required
Destination network address
00 (Hex): Local network
01 to 7F (Hex): 1 to 127
15
11
8 7
0
C+2
C+4
Response monitor time
Destination unit address
0000 (Hex): 2 s
00 (Hex):
PLC's CPU Unit
0001 to FFFF (Hex): 0.1 to 6,553.5 s
(Unit: 0.1 s)
01 to 0F (Hex): Computer (user program)
(02 to 0F (Hex) are used
when using Controller Link
Support Boards for PCI Bus
only.)
If the baud rate is slow, then setting a small
value may generate an error. The standard is
approximately 4 seconds at 1 Mbps or 8
seconds at 500 Kbps.
10 to 1F (Hex): Unit nos. 0 to 15
FE (Hex):
Unit connected to network
Destination node N
01 to 20 (Hex): 1 to 32 (or 01 to 3E (Hex): 1 to 62)
The same data can be broadcast to all nodes
on the network by setting the destination node address to
FF (Hex).
The range of node addresses will vary for networks
other than Controller Link Networks.
Note
1. When using CVM1 and CV-series PLCs manufactured prior to April 1996,
the local network address cannot be set to “00.” Set a number other than
“00” as the local network address in the routing tables, and then specify
that number.
2. With the message service, there is no guarantee that a message to a des-
tination node will reach its destination. It is always possible that the mes-
sage may be lost in transit due to noise or some other condition. When
using the message service, it is advisable to prevent this situation from oc-
curring by performing resend processing at the node where instructions
are issued. With the SEND, RECV, and CMND instructions, resend pro-
cessing is performed automatically once the number of retries has been
set, so be sure to specify a number other than “0” for the number of retries.
173
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Section 6-1
RECV
RECV receives “m” words beginning with S (the beginning word for data
transmission at the destination node, M) to the words beginning with D (the
beginning word for data reception at the source node).
Source node
Destination node M
15
15
0
0
D
S
"m" num-
ber of
send
m
words
(↑)RECV(193)
S
D
C
S: Source node beginning send word
D: Destination node beginning receive word
C: Source node first control data word
15
0
15
10 8 7
3
0
C
C+3
0
0
"m" number of send words
Number of retries
0001 to 03DE (Hex): 1 to 990 words
0 to F (Hex): 0 to 15 retries
15
11
8 7
0
Communication port No.
0 to 7
C+1
0
0
0: Response required
1: Response not required
Destination network address
00 (Hex): Local network
01 to 7F (Hex): 1 to 127
15
11
8 7
0
C+2
C+4
Response monitor time
Destination unit address
0000 (Hex): 2 s
00 (Hex):
PLC's CPU Unit
0001 to FFFF (Hex): 0.1 to 6,553.5 s
(Unit: 0.1 s)
01 to 0F (Hex): Computer (user program)
(02 to 0F (Hex) are used
when using Controller Link
Support Boards for PCI Bus
only.)
If the baud rate is slow, then setting a small
value may generate an error. The standard is
approximately 4 seconds at 1 Mbps or 8
seconds at 500 Kbps.
10 to 1F (Hex): Unit nos. 0 to 15
FE (Hex):
Unit connected to network
Destination node M
01 to 20 (Hex): 1 to 32 (or 01 to 3E (Hex): 1 to 62)
The range of node addresses will vary for networks
other than Controller Link Networks.
Note
1. When using CVM1 and CV-series PLCs manufactured prior to April 1996,
the local network address cannot be set to “00.” Set a number other than
“00” as the local network address in the routing tables, and then specify
that number.
2. With the message service, there is no guarantee that a message to a des-
tination node will reach its destination. It is always possible that the mes-
sage may be lost in transit due to noise or some other condition. When
using the message service, it is advisable to prevent this situation from oc-
curring by performing resend processing at the node where instructions
are issued. With the SEND, RECV, and CMND instructions, resend pro-
cessing is performed automatically once the number of retries has been
set, so be sure to specify a number other than “0” for the number of retries.
174
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Section 6-1
CQM1H-series PLCs
SEND
SEND transmits “n” words beginning with S (the beginning word for data
transmission at the source node) to “n” words beginning with D (the beginning
word for data reception at the destination node, N.)
Source node
0
Destination node N
15
15
0
S
@SEND(90)
D
S: Source node beginning send word
D: Destination node beginning receive word
C: Source node first control data word
"n" number
n
of send
words
n
S
D
C
15 14
0
C
"n" number of send words
0000 to 03DE (Hex): 0 to 990 words
0: Destination network address not specified (local network)
1: Destination network address specified.
1514131211
8 7
0
C +1 1 1
Response monitor time
Number of retries
00 (Hex):
2 s (for 2 Mbps)
4 s (for 1 Mbps)
8 s (for 500 Kbps)
0 to F (Hex): 0 to 15 retries
Direct/Indirect
0: Direct; 1: Indirect
0: Response required
1: Response not required
01 to FE (Hex): 0.1 to 25.4 s (unit: 0.1 s)
FF (Hex):
No response monitoring
Always "1" for Controller
Link Networks
Always "1" for Controller Link Networks
15
8 7
0
C + 2
Destination node address (N)
01 to 20 (Hex): 1 to 32 (or 01 to 3E (Hex): 1 to 62)
Destination unit address
The same data can be broadcast to all nodes
on the network by setting the destination node
address to FF (Hex).
00 (Hex):
PLC's CPU Unit
01 to 0F (Hex):
Computer (user program)
(02 to 0F (Hex) are used
when using Controller Link
Support Boards for PCI
Bus only.)
The range of node addresses will vary for networks
other than Controller Link Networks.
10 to 1F (Hex):
FE (Hex):
15
Unit Nos. 0 to 15
Unit connected to network
0
C + 3
0
0
Destination network address
00 (Hex):
01 to 7F (Hex):
Local network
1 to 127
This setting is enabled only when Destination network address specified" is set in word C.
When specifying a destination network address, set all the nodes in the routing tables. For de
Section 7 Network Interconnections.
tails on routing tables, refer to
Note
1. When communicating in the same network with CVM1 and CV-series
PLCs manufactured prior to April 1996, the local network address cannot
be set to “00.” Set a number other than “00” as the local network address
in the routing tables, and then specify that number.
2. With the message service, there is no guarantee that a message to a des-
tination node will reach its destination. It is always possible that the mes-
sage may be lost in transit due to noise or some other condition. When
using the message service, it is advisable to prevent this situation from oc-
curring by performing resend processing at the node where instructions
are executed. With the SEND, RECV, and CMND instructions, resend pro-
cessing is performed automatically once the number of retries has been
set, so be sure to specify a number other than “0” for the number of retries.
175
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Section 6-1
RECV
RECV receives “m” words beginning with S (the beginning word for data
transmission at the destination node, M) to the words from D (the beginning
word for data reception at the source node) onwards.
Source node
Destination node M
15
15
0
0
D
S
"m" num-
ber of
send
m
words
@RECV(98)
S: Destination node beginning send word
D: Source node beginning receive word
C: Source node first control data word
S
D
C
1514
0
C
"m" number of send words
0000 to 03DE (Hex): 0 to 990 words
0: Source network address not specified (local network)
1: Source network address specified.
1514131211
8 7
0
C + 1 1 1
Response monitor time
Number of retries
00 (Hex):
2 s (for 2 Mbps)
4 s (for 1 Mbps)
8 s (for 500 Kbps)
01 to FE (Hex): 0.1 to 25.4 s (unit: 0.1 s)
FF (Hex): No response monitoring
0 to F (Hex): 0 to 15 retries
Direct/Indirect
0: Direct; 1: Indirect
0: Response required
1: Response not required
Always "1" for Controller
Link Networks
Always "1" for Controller Link Networks
15
8 7
0
C + 2
Destination (transmission source) node address (M)
01 to 20 (Hex): 1 to 32 (or 01 to 3E (Hex): 1 to 62)
Destination (transmission source) unit address
The range of node addresses will vary for networks
other than Controller Link Networks.
00 (Hex):
PLC's CPU Unit
01 to 0F (Hex):
Computer (user program)
(02 to 0F (Hex) are used when
using Controller Link Support
Boards for PCI Bus only.)
Unit Nos. 0 to 15
10 to 1F (Hex):
FE (Hex):
Unit connected to network
15
0
C + 3
0
0
Destination network address
00 (Hex):
01 to 7F (Hex):
Local network
1 to 127
This setting is enabled only when "Destination network address specified" is set in word C.
When specifying the destination network address, set all the nodes in the routing tables. For
details on the routing tables, refer to Section 7 Network Interconnections.
Note
1. When communicating in the same network with CVM1 and CV-series
PLCs manufactured prior to April 1996, the local network address cannot
be set to “00.” Set a number other than “00” as the local network address
in the routing tables, and then specify that number.
2. With the message service, there is no guarantee that a message to a des-
tination node will reach its destination. It is always possible that the mes-
sage may be lost in transit due to noise or some other condition. When
176
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Section 6-1
using the message service, it is advisable to prevent this situation from oc-
curring by performing resend processing at the node where instructions
are issued. With the SEND, RECV, and CMND instructions, resend pro-
cessing is performed automatically once the number of retries has been
set, so be sure to specify a number other than “0” for the number of retries.
Indirect Designation of
Beginning Words
CVM1, CV-series, and CS/CJ-series PLCs have a larger area than CQM1H-
series PLCs, so the beginning words for sending and receiving at destination
nodes cannot always be directly specified by means of SEND and RECV
operands. Moreover, depending on circumstances, it may be desirable to
change the beginning word at destination nodes.
In such cases, set the “Direct/Indirect” control data designation to “1” (Indi-
rect), and specify the beginning words for sending and receiving as described
below.
SEND
The beginning receive word is determined by the contents of the destination
node’s D and D+1 words.
@SEND(90)
S: Source node beginning send word
S
D
C
D: Destination node beginning receive word
C: Source node first control data word
15141312 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Area code* 0 0 0 0
Word address (5th digit)
D
D+1
Word address (1st digit)
Word address (2nd digit)
Word address (3rd digit)
Word address (4th digit)
RECV
The beginning send word is determined by the contents of the destination
node’s S and S+1 words.
@RECV(98)
S: Source node beginning send word
S
D
C
D: Destination node beginning receive word
C: Source node first control data word
151413121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Area code* 0 0 0 0
Word address (5th digit)
S
S+1
Word address (1st digit)
Word address (2nd digit)
Word address (3rd digit)
Word address (4th digit)
177
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Section 6-1
Note Specify the area code according to the following table.
Destination node: CS/CJ-series PLC Destination node: C200HX/HG/HE or
CQM1H-series PLC
Destination node: CVM1 or
CV-series PLC
Area
Code
00
Area
IR (Internal Relay)
LR (Link Relay)
Code
00
Area
Code
00
CIO (IR, etc.) (See note 1.)
TIM (Timer) (See note 2.)
CNT (Counter) (See note 2.)
DM (DM Area)
CIO
03
04
05
06
07
08
03
05
CPU Bus Link
Auxiliary
01
02
03
04
05
HR (Holding Relay)
AR (Auxiliary Relay)
TC (Timer/Counter)
DM (DM Area)
Timer
EM (Expansion DM)
Banks 0 to 7
Banks 8 to 13
Current bank
10 to
17
A8 to
AC
Counter
DM (DM Area)
EM (Expansion DM)
Banks 0 to 7
Banks 8 to 15
10 to
17
28 to
2F
EM (Expansion DM)
Banks 0 to 7
Current bank
10 to
17
18
18
Current bank
(CQM1H: Bank 0 only)
18
Note
1. Words 0 to 2555 in the IR Area can send and receive data.
2. Timer/counters numbers 0 to 2047 can send and receive data.
178
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Section 6-1
6-1-2 CMND (CVM1, CV-series, CS/CJ-series, and CQM1H-series PLCs
Only)
The CMND instruction can be executed in the user program in a CVM1, CV-
series, CS/CJ-series, or CQM1H-series PLC to perform operations such as
reading and writing memory data from and to other nodes, reading status
information, and changing the operating mode.
CS/CJ-series PLCs
CMND sends “n” bytes of command data beginning with S (the beginning
send word for storing command data at the source node) to destination node
N. In return, “m” bytes of response data are stored at the source node begin-
ning with D (the beginning receive word for storing response data).
Destination node N
Source node
0
15
S
Command
"n" bytes
Analysis
of com-
mand
data
(S –1)
n
+
2
Response
Execution
CMND(490)
D
"m" bytes
of
response
data
S
D
C
S: Source node beginning send word
D: Destination node beginning receive word
C: Source node first control data word
(D –1)
m
+
2
15
0
C
C+1
C+2
"n" bytes of command data
0000 to 07C6 (Hex): 0 to 1,990 words
15
0
"m" bytes of response data
0000 to 07C6 (Hex): 0 to 1,990 words
15
15
11
8 7
0
15
11 8 7
3
0
0
0
C+4
0
0
Number of retries
0 to F (Hex): 0 to 15 retries
Destination network address
00 (Hex): Local network
01 to 7F (Hex): 1 to 127
Communications port number: 0 to 7 (Hex)
8 7
0
0: Response required
1: Response not required
C+3
Destination unit address
00 (Hex):
PLC's CPU Unit
15
10 8 7
3
0
01 to 0F (Hex): Computer (user program)
C+5
(02 to 0F (Hex) are used
when using Controller
Response monitor time
0000 (Hex): 2 s
0001 to FFFF (Hex): 0.1 to 6,553.5 s
(Unit: 0.1 s)
If the baud rate is slow, then setting a
small value may generate an error. The
standard is approximately 4 seconds at
1 Mbps or 8 seconds at 500 Kbps.
Link Support Boards for
PCI Bus only.)
10 to 1F (Hex): Unit nos. 0 to 15
E1 (Hex):
FE (Hex):
Inner Board
Unit connected to network
Destination node N
00 to 20 (Hex): 0 to 32 (or 00 to 3E (Hex): 0 to 62)
The same data can be broadcast to all nodes
on the network by setting the destination node address
to FF (Hex).
The range of node addresses will vary for networks
other than Controller Link Networks.
Note With the message service, there is no guarantee that a message to a destina-
tion node will reach its destination. It is always possible that the message may
be lost in transit due to noise or some other condition. When using the mes-
179
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Section 6-1
sage service, it is advisable to prevent this situation from occurring by per-
forming resend processing at the node where instructions are issued. With
the SEND, RECV, and CMND instructions, resend processing is performed
automatically once the number of retries has been set, so be sure to specify a
number other than “0” for the number of retries.
CVM1 and CV-series PLCs
CMND sends “n” bytes of command data beginning with S (the beginning
word for storing command data at the source node) to node N. In return, “m”
bytes of response data are stored at the source node beginning with D (the
beginning word for storing response data).
Destination node N
Source node
0
15
S
Command
"n" bytes
Analysis
of com-
mand
data
(S –1)
n
+
2
Response
Execution
D
"m" bytes
of
response
data
(D –1)
m
+
CMND(194)
2
S
D
C
S: Source node beginning send word
D: Destination node beginning receive word
C: Source node first control data word
15
0
C
C+1
C+2
"n" bytes of command data
0000 to 07C6 (Hex): 0 to 1,990 words
15
0
"m" bytes of response data
0000 to 07C6 (Hex): 0 to 1,990 words
15
15
11
8 7
0
15
0
11 8 7
3
0
0
0
C+4
0
Number of retries
0 to F (Hex): 0 to 15 retries
Destination network address
00 (Hex): Local network
01 to 7F (Hex): 1 to 127
Communications port number: 0 to 7 (Hex)
8 7
0
0: Response required
1: Response not required
C+3
Destination unit address
00 (Hex):
PLC's CPU Unit
15
10 8 7
3
0
01 to 0F (Hex): Computer (user program)
C+5
(02 to 0F (Hex) are used
when using Controller Link
Support Boards for PCI
Bus only.)
Response monitor time
0000 (Hex): 2 s
0001 to FFFF (Hex): 0.1 to 6,553.5 s
(Unit: 0.1 s)
10 to 1F (Hex): Unit nos. 0 to 15
FE (Hex):
Unit connected to network
If the baud rate is slow, then setting a
small value may generate an error. The
standard is approximately 4 seconds at
1 Mbps or 8 seconds at 500 kbps.
Destination node N
00 to 20 (Hex): 0 to 32 (or 00 to 3E (Hex): 0 to 62)
The same data can be broadcast to all nodes
on the network by setting the destination node address
to FF (Hex).
The range of node addresses will vary for networks
other than Controller Link Networks.
Note
1. When using CVM1 and CV-series PLCs manufactured prior to April 1996,
the local network address cannot be set to “00.” Set a number other than
180
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Section 6-1
“00” as the local network address in the routing tables, and then specify
that number.
2. With the message service, there is no guarantee that a message to a des-
tination node will reach its destination. It is always possible that the mes-
sage may be lost in transit due to noise or some other condition. When
using the message service, it is advisable to prevent this situation from oc-
curring by performing resend processing at the node where instructions
are issued. With the SEND, RECV, and CMND instructions, resend pro-
cessing is performed automatically once the number of retries has been
set, so be sure to specify a number other than “0” for the number of retries.
181
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Section 6-1
CQM1H-series PLCs
CMND sends “n” bytes of command data beginning with S (the beginning
word for storing command data at the source node) to node N. In return, “m”
bytes of response data are stored at the source node beginning with D (the
beginning word for storing response data).
Destination node N
Source node
0
15
S
Command
"n" bytes
Analysis
of com-
mand
data
(S –1)
n
+
2
Response
Execution
D
"m" bytes
of
response
data
(D –1)
m
+
CMND
2
S
D
C
S: Source node beginning send word
D: Destination node beginning receive word
C: Source node first control data word
15
0
C
C+1
C+2
"n" bytes of command data
0000 to 07C6 (Hex): 0 to 1,990 words
15
0
"m" bytes of response data
0000 to 07C6 (Hex): 0 to 1,990 words
15
15
11
8 7
0
15
10 8 7
0
3
0
0
0
C+4
0
0
Number of retries
0 to F (Hex): 0 to 15 retries
Destination network address
00 (Hex): Local network
01 to 7F (Hex): 1 to 127
8 7
0
0: Response required
1: Response not required
C+3
Destination unit address
00 (Hex):
PLC's CPU Unit
15
10 8 7
3
0
01 to 0F (Hex): Computer (user program)
C+5
(02 to 0F (Hex) are used
when using Controller Link
Support Boards for PCI Bus
only.)
Response monitor time
0000 (Hex):
2 s at 2 Mbits/s
10 to 1F (Hex): Unit nos. 0 to 15
FE (Hex):
4 s at 1 Mbit/s
Unit connected to network
8 s at 500 kbits/s
0001 to FFFF (Hex): 0.1 to 6,553.5 s
(Unit: 0.1 s)
Destination node N
00 to 20 (Hex): 0 to 32 (or 00 to 3E (Hex): 0 to 62)
The same data can be broadcast to all nodes
on the network by setting the destination node address
to FF (Hex).
The range of node addresses will vary for networks
other than Controller Link Networks.
Note
1. When using CVM1 and CV-series PLCs manufactured prior to April 1996,
the local network address cannot be set to “00.” Set a number other than
“00” as the local network address in the routing tables, and then specify
that number.
2. With the message service, there is no guarantee that a message to a des-
tination node will reach its destination. It is always possible that the mes-
sage may be lost in transit due to noise or some other condition. When
using the message service, it is advisable to prevent this situation from oc-
182
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Section 6-1
curring by performing resend processing at the node where instructions
are issued. With the SEND, RECV, and CMND instructions, resend pro-
cessing is performed automatically once the number of retries has been
set, so be sure to specify a number other than “0” for the number of retries.
Example: Commands for CVM1, CV-series and CS/CJ-series PLCs
Type of command
Code
CS/ CVM1/
CJ CV
Yes Yes
For memory areas (CIO,
DM, EM, TC, transition, step,
forced ON/OFF)
MEMORY AREA READ
0101
0102
0103
MEMORY AREA WRITE
MEMORY AREA FILL
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
MULTIPLE MEMORY AREA 0104
READ
MEMORY AREA TRANS-
FER
0105
Yes
Yes
For parameter areas (PLC
system setting, I/O table reg-
istration, routing table, etc.)
PARAMETER AREA READ 0201
PARAMETER AREA WRITE 0202
PARAMETER AREA CLEAR 0203
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
For program areas (UM)
PROGRAM AREA PRO-
TECT
0304
PROGRAM AREA PRO-
TECT CLEAR
0305
Yes
Yes
PROGRAM AREA READ
PROGRAM AREA WRITE
PROGRAM AREA CLEAR
RUN
0306
0307
0308
0401
0402
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
PLC mode
STOP
PLC model data
PLC status data
CONTROLLER DATA READ 0501
CONNECTION DATA READ 0502
CONTROLLER STATUS
READ
0601
CYCLE TIME READ
CLOCK READ
0620
0701
0702
0920
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
PLC internal clock
Messages
CLOCK WRITE
MESSAGE READ
MESSAGE CLEAR
FAL/FALS READ
Access rights
Error data
ACCESS RIGHT ACQUIRE 0C01
ACCESS RIGHT FORCED 0C02
ACQUIRE
ACCESS RIGHT RELEASE 0C03
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
ERROR CLEAR
2101
2102
2103
ERROR LOG READ
ERROR LOG CLEAR
183
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Section 6-1
Type of command
FILE NAME READ
Code
CS/ CVM1/
CJ
CV
File Memory
2201
2202
2203
Yes
Yes
SINGLE FILE READ
SINGLE FILE WRITE
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
MEMORY CARD FORMAT 2204
FILE DELETE 2205
VOLUME LABEL CREATE/ 2206
DELETE
FILE COPY
2207
2208
2209
220A
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
FILE NAME CHANGE
FILE DATA CHECK
MEMORY AREA FILE
TRANSFER
Yes
PARAMETER AREA FILE
TRANSFER
220B
220C
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
PROGRAM AREA FILE
TRANSFER
Forced set/reset
FORCED SET/RESET
2301
2302
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
FORCED SET/RESET
CANCEL
For details on commands for CS/CJ-series PLCs, refer to the CS/CJ-series
Programmable Controllers Instructions Reference Manual (W340). For details
CQM1H-series PLCs. For details on commands for Controller Link Units, refer
to 6-5 Commands and Responses for Controller Link Units.
6-1-3 Send/Receive Data Areas
The data areas that can be used as operands in the SEND and RECV instruc-
tions depend on the PLC, as shown in the following tables. Be sure to set the
operands so that the end of the data area is not exceeded.
CS/CJ-series PLCs
Area
Range
CIO 0000 to CIO 6143
W000 to W511
CIO (IR etc.)
Work Area (WR)
Holding Area
Auxiliary Area
Timer
HR000 to HR511
AR000 to AR959 (See note 1.)
T0000 to T4095
Counter
C0000 to C4095
DM Area
DM00000 to DM32767
EM00000 to EM32767 (See note 2.)
Extended DM Area
Note
1. Writing is not possible to words A000 through A447 in the Auxiliary Area.
2. A maximum of thirteen banks can be used for Expansion DM. For details
on extended DM Area and the number of banks, refer to the operation
manual for the PLC model that is being used.
184
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Section 6-1
C200HX/HG/HE PLCs
Area
Internal Relay Area 1
Range
IR 000 to IR 235 (See note 1.)
SR 236 to SR 255 (See note 1.)
SR 256 to SR 299 (See note 1.)
IR 300 to IR 511 (See note 1.)
LR 00 to LR 63
Special Relay Area 1
Special Relay Area 2
Internal Relay Area 2
Link Relay
Holding Relay
HR 00 to HR 99
Timer/Counter
T/C 000 to T/C 511
Auxiliary Relay
DM Area
AR 00 to AR 27
DM 0000 to DM 6655
Extended DM Area
EM 0000 to EM 6143 (See note 2.)
Note
1. Words in the Internal Relay Area 1 (IR 000 to IR 235) and Special Relay
Area 1 (SR 236 to SR 255) are continuous in memory, and any range of
words within these areas can be transferred in a single operation. The
same is true for Special Relay Area 2 (SR 256 to SR 299) and Internal Re-
lay Area 2 (IR 300 to IR 511). You cannot, however, transfer data in a range
that crosses the boundary between Special Relay Area 1 (SR 236 to SR
255) and Special Relay Area 2 (SR 256 to SR 299).
SR 253 to SR 255 cannot be written at the source node, even if they are
specified by the RECV instruction’s beginning receive word at the source
node.
2. For details on extended DM Area and the number of banks, refer to the op-
eration manual for the PLC model that is being used.
CVM1 and CV-series PLCs
Area
Range
CV500, CVM1-CPU01
CV1000/2000,
CVM1-CPU11/21
CIO Area
CIO 0000 to CIO 2555
CPU Bus Link Area
Auxiliary Area
Timer Area
G000 to G255 (See note 1.)
A000 to A511 (See note 2.)
T000 to T511
T000 T1023
Counter Area
DM Area
C000 to C511
C000 to C1023
DM0000 to DM8191
---
DM0000 to DM24575
Expansion DM Area
EM00000 to EM32765 (See
note 3.)
Note
1. Writing is not possible to words G000 through G007 in the CPU Bus Link
Area.
2. Writing is not possible to words A256 through A511 in the Auxiliary Area.
3. Expansion DM can be used by mounting an Expansion DM Unit to a
CV1000/2000 or CVM1-CPU11/21 PLC. A maximum of eight banks can be
used, depending on the type of Expansion DM. For details, refer to the
CVM1 and CV-series PLC operation manuals.
CQM1H-series PLCs
Area
Range
IR 000 to SR 255 (See note 1.)
LR 00 to LR 63
IR/SR Area
LR Area
HR Area
HR 00 to HR 99
Timer/Counter Area
AR Area
TIM/CNT 000 to TIM/CNT 511
AR 00 to AR 27
185
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting Communications Instructions
Section 6-2
Area
Range
DM 0000 to DM 6655
EM 0000 to EM 6143 (See note 2.)
DM Area
Extended DM Area
Note
1. SR 253 to SR 255 cannot be written at the source node, even if they are
specified by the RECV instruction’s beginning receive word at the source
node.
2. For details on extended DM Area, refer to the operation manual for the PLC
model that is being used.
6-2 Selecting Communications Instructions
YES
YES
Do you want to easily read from
or write to the I/O memory area?
Use SEND and RECV.
Do you want to intermittently read
from a memory area?
Use CMND. (See note.)
Aside from memory areas, do you
want to write the following kinds of
data?
PLC internal clock
File Memory
Do you want to read the following
kinds of data?
PLC model
YES
PLC status
Cycle time
Messages
Errors
Forced set/reset status
YES
YES
Do you want to change the PLC's
operating mode?
Do you want to force set/reset bit
status?
Note CMND cannot be used with C200HX/HG/HE PLCs.
186
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting Communications Instructions
Section 6-2
6-2-1 Message Service Operations
Instruc-
tion
Source node
C200HX/ CQM1H CS/CJ, C200HX CS/CJ, Com-
HG/HE CVM1, /HG/HE CVM1, puter
Destination node
Communica- Data
tions con-
Broad- Network con-
length casting
nections
tents
or CV
or
or CV
CQM1H
SEND
and
RECV
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
(See
note
2.)
Read to and
write from all words only (no
I/O memory
areas.
990
SEND
Yes (up to
three levels
max.
(1,980
bytes)
response) includinglocal
network), via
CS/CJ-series,
CVM1, or
CV-series
PLCs.
CMND No
(See
note 1.)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
(See
note
2.)
Data
read/write:
2,012 Yes (no
bytes
max.
response)
Read to and
write from all
I/O memory
areas.
Read PLC
model.
Read status
data.
Read time
data.
Read and
write File
Memory data.
Read PLC
mode.
PLC Control:
Change PLC
mode.
Forced set/
reset
Clear PLC
errors.
Note
1. CMND cannot be used with C200HX/HG/HE PLCs.
2. If a computer is receiving commands, a program is required at the comput-
er for sending back responses.
187
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting Communications Instructions
Section 6-2
6-2-2 Message Service Specifications
Item
Specifications
C200HX/HG/HE PLCs
Transmission format
1:1 SEND or RECV
1:N SEND (broadcast)
CS/CJ-series, CVM1,CV-series, or CQM1H-series PLCs
1:1 SEND, RECV, or CMND
1:N SEND or CMND; (broadcast)
Packet length
Data content
SEND: 990 words (1,980 bytes) max.
RECV: 990 words (1,980 bytes) max.
CMND: 1,990 bytes max.
SEND: Command and response for a request to send data
are transferred.
RECV: Command and response for a request to receive
data are transferred.
CMND: A wide range of command/response data can be
sent.
Number of simulta-
neous commands
C200HX/HG/HE PLCs:
One at a time for each of 2 operating level.
CS/CJ-series, CVM1, and CV-series PLCs:
One for each of eight ports (ports 0 to 7).
CQM1H-series
One
Response monitor time C200HX/HG/HE or CQM1H-series PLCs
00:
Default setting
2 seconds (2 Mbps)
4 seconds (1 Mbps)
8 seconds (500 Kbps)
No monitoring
FF:
01 to FE:
User settings (in increments of 100 ms,
100 to 25,400 ms)
CS/CJ-series, CVM1, and CV-series PLCs
0000:
Default setting (2 s)
0001 to FFFF:
User settings (in increments of 0.1 s,
0.1 to 6553.5 s)
Number of retries
0 to F: 0 to 15
188
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Message Service
Section 6-3
6-3 Using the Message Service
With SEND, RECV, and CMND, the Network Instruction Enabled Flag and
Network Instruction Error Flag are generally written into the program as input
conditions, as shown below. Only one instruction can be executed at a time for
any given communications port. Exclusive control thus must be incorporated
to execute two or more instructions per operating level with C200HX/HG/HE
PLCs, nine or more instructions with CS/CJ-series, CVM1, and CV-series
PLCs (because CVM1 and CV-series PLCs have eight ports), or two or more
instructions with CQM1H-series PLCs.
Execution
condition
Network Instruction
Enabled Flag
C
KEEP A
Keep instruction
Turns A ON from beginning to completion of
communications instruction.
Reset B
Active Node Flag for
destination node
A
Operand and
Creates operand and control data in a given area.
Executes communications instruction.
control data cre-
ation by @MOV
and @XFER
Active Node Flag for
source node
Communications
instruction
@SEND
@RECV
@CMND
Network Instruction
Enabled Flag
Startup differ-
ential
DIFU B
A
A
Creates reset input. (Turns reset B ON after execution of
communications instruction.)
Network Instruction Error Flag
In case of Send Error Flag, re-send processing
can be executed.
Exclusive control to prevent simultaneous execution:
Network Instruction
Enabled Flag
Execution
condition
KEEP C
Keep instruc-
tion
A
Establishes exclusive control so that no communications
instruction is started before the previous one has been
completed.
Reset D
(Continues in the same way.)
SEND/RECV Flags
CS/CJ-series PLCs
Name
Address
Bit
Port number corresponds 0: Execution not enabled (executing)
Contents
Word
A202
Network Instruc-
tion Enabled Flag
to bit number, i.e., port 0:
1: Execution enabled (not executing)
bit 00, port 1: bit 01, etc.
Network Instruc-
tion Error Flag
A219
Port number corresponds 0: Normal end
to bit number plus 8, i.e.,
port 0: bit 08, port 1: bit 09,
etc.
1: Abnormal end
Note With CS/CJ-series PLCs, ports 0 to 7 are also used for executing the PMCR
(Protocol Macro) instruction, therefore these flags are used for the 4 instruc-
tions, SEND/RECV/CMND/PMCR. When the PMCR command is being exe-
cuted, the same port cannot be used for SEND/RECV/CMND instructions.
189
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Message Service
Section 6-3
C200HX/HG/HE PLCs
Name
Operating Address
level
Contents
Network Instruction
Enabled Flag
1
0
SR 25204 0: Execution not possible (already
executing)
SR 25201
1: Execution possible (not executing)
SR 25203 0: Normal end
Network Instruction
Error Flag
1
0
1: Abnormal end
SR 25200
CVM1, and CV-series
PLCs
Name
Network
Instruction
Enabled Flag
Address
Bit
A502 Port number corresponds 0: Execution not enabled (executing)
Contents
Word
to bit number, i.e., port 0:
bit 00, port 1: bit 01, etc.
1: Execution enabled (not executing)
Network
Instruction
Error Flag
A502 Port number corresponds 0: Normal end
to bit number plus 8, i.e.,
port 0: bit 08, port 1: bit 09,
etc.
1: Abnormal end
CQM1H-series PLCs
Name
Address
Contents
Network Instruction AR 0209
Enabled Flag
0: Execution not possible (already executing)
1: Execution possible (not executing)
Network Instruction AR 0208
Error Flag
0: Normal end
1: Abnormal end
Network Status
The nodes on the network are shown in the following illustrations.
C200HX/HG/HE PLCs
Operating level 0
AR 08
AR 09
Operating level 1
AR 12
AR 13
The numbers in the squares indicate node addresses.
The corresponding node participation status is as follows:
0: Not part of network
1: Part of network
CS/CJ-series, CVM1, and
CV-series PLCs
CIO 1500 + 25 × N + 2
CIO 1500 + 25 × N + 3
The numbers in the squares indicate node addresses.
The corresponding node participation status is as follows:
0: Not part of the network
N: Unit number
1: Part of the network
CQM1H-series PLCs
IR 192
IR 193
The numbers in the squares indicate node addresses.
The corresponding node participation status is as follows:
0: Not part of network
1: Part of network
190
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Message Service
Section 6-3
SEND/RECV Flag Operations
• The Network Instruction Enabled Flag turns OFF during transmission or
reception, and ON after the data transmission or reception has been com-
pleted (regardless of whether an error occurs).
• The Network Instruction Error Flag retains its status until the next data
transmission or reception.
• Even when there is an abnormal end, the Network Instruction Error Flag
turns OFF when the next communications instruction is executed.
Example
1
0
Network Instruction Enabled Flag
Instruction 1
being executed
Instruction 2
being executed
Instruction 3
being executed
Communications instruction
(SEND/RECV/CMND)
1
0
Network Instruction Error Flag
(Normal
end)
(Normal
end)
(Busy)
00
00
00
00
04
00
Communications instruction response code
Previous
end
Communications Instruction Response Codes
The status after a communications instruction has been executed is reflected
in the words shown in the following table. During instruction execution, it
becomes “00” or “0000,” and it is reflected here after the execution has been
completed.
PLC
Word
A203
Bits
Contents
Port 0 response code
CS/CJ-series
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
A204
A205
A206
A207
A208
A209
A210
Port 1 response code
Port 2 response code
Port 3 response code
Port 4 response code
Port 5 response code
Port 6 response code
Port 7 response code
Operating level 1 response code
Operating level 0 response code
Port 0 response code
Port 1 response code
Port 2 response code
Port 3 response code
Port 4 response code
Port 5 response code
Port 6 response code
Port 7 response code
Response code
C200HX/HG/HE
SR 237 08 to 15
00 to 07
CVM1 and CV-
series
A503
A504
A505
A506
A507
A508
A509
A510
AR 02
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
CQM1H-series
00 to 07
191
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Message Service
Section 6-3
C200HX/HG/HE and
CQM1H-series PLC
Response Codes
The results of executing SEND and RECV instructions are reflected as shown
in the following table.
Code
00 (Hex)
01 (Hex)
Contents
Normal end
Parameter error
Meaning
Data transfer was completed successfully.
SEND/RECV instruction operands are not
within specified ranges.
02 (Hex)
Transmission impossible The source node is not in the network or
the Unit was reset during execution of the
instruction.
03 (Hex)
04 (Hex)
Destination node error
The destination node is not in the network.
Destination node busy
error
The destination node is busy and cannot
receive the command.
05 (Hex)
06 (Hex)
07 (Hex)
08 (Hex)
09 (Hex)
10 (Hex)
11 (Hex)
Response timeout
A response was not received within the
time limit.
Response error
The response received from the destina-
tion node was incorrect.
Communications control- An error occurred in the communications
ler error
controller.
Setting error
The destination node address was set
incorrectly.
CPU Unit error
Routing error
Relay error
A CPU Unit error occurred in the PLC of
the destination node.
Command could not be sent because of
incorrect routing.
Command did not reach the destination
node because of an error at the relay sta-
tion.
12 (Hex)
Source node busy error
The source node is busy and cannot send
the command.
CS/CJ-series, CVM1, and
CV-series Response
Codes
The results of executing SEND, RECV, and CMND instructions are reflected
as one word (two bytes) of data. Instruction response codes are the same as
FINS command response codes. Response code bits 08 to 15 correspond to
the first byte of the response code, and response code bits 00 to 07 corre-
spond to the second byte of the response code. For details, refer to 6-7
Response Codes.
192
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Message Service
Section 6-3
Simultaneous Execution of Communications Instructions
C200HX/HG/HE PLCs
CS/CJ-series, CVM1, and CV-series PLCs
Controller Link Unit
Controller Link Unit
CPU Unit
CPU Unit
Instruction 1
Port
Port
Instruction 2
Instruction 3
Instruction 4
Instruction 1
Instruction 2
Operating
level #0
Instruction 5
Instruction 6
Instruction 7
Instruction 8
Port
Operating
level #1
There is only one communications port per operat-
ing level, so no more than one communications in-
struction can be executed per operating level at
one time. When both operating levels are used, two
instructions can be executed simultaneously.
There are eight communications ports, so eight
communications can be executed simultane-
ously. Only one message is refreshed from the
CPU Unit to the Controller Link Unit and one
from the Controller Link Unit to the CPU Unit
for each CPU Bus Unit service time.
CQM1H-series PLCs
Controller Link Unit
CPU Unit
Instruction 1
Port
There is only one communications port, so no more
than one communications instruction can be
executed at one time.
193
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Message Service
Section 6-3
PLC Programming Examples
CS/CJ-series PLCs
Execution
condition
The transmission program will run when CIO 000000
turns ON, provided that the Network Instruction Ena-
bled Flag is ON and the RECV instruction has not
been executed.
000000 A20207
120002
KEEP
120000
S
(See note 1.)
120001
120000
R
CIO 120000 remains ON while the SEND instruction is
being executed, and it turns OFF when instruction
execution has been completed.
@MOV(21)
@MOV(21)
@MOV(21)
@MOV(21)
@MOV(21)
#000A
Control Data Preparation
D00000
Word
Content
Meaning
D00000
0 0
0 A 10 send words
#0002
D00001
D00002
0 0
0 2
0 0
Destination network
address= 2
D00001
0 4
Destination node
address = 4
#0400
Destination Unit
address = 0
D00002
D00003
D00004
0 7
0 0
0 5
6 4
Response required
Port No. 7 used
No. of resends = 5
Response monitoring
time = 10 s
#0705
D00003
#0064
D00004
Transfers the 10 words beginning at CIO 0000 to the
10 words beginning at DM 00010.
@XFER(70)
#000A
0000
D00010
Transfers the 10 words beginning at DM 00010 of
the source node to the words beginning with DM
00020 at network address 2, node address 4, and
Unit address 0 (PLC).
@SEND(90)
D00010
D00020
D00000
(See note 1.)
120000 A20207
DIFU(13) 120001
121000
Creates reset input.
Network Instruction Error Flag
120000 A21907
Turns ON to indicate transmission error.
(Continued on the next page)
194
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Message Service
Section 6-3
(Continued from the previous page)
Execution
condition
The reception program will run when CIO 00001
turns ON, provided that the Network Instruction En-
abled Flag is ON and the SEND instruction has not
been executed.
000001 A20207
120000
KEEP(11)
120002
S
(See note 1.)
120003
CIO 120002 remains ON while the RECV instruction
is being executed, and it turns OFF when instruction
execution has been completed.
R
120002
@MOV(21)
Control Data Preparation
Word
Content
Meaning
#0010
D00005
0 0
10
16 send words
D00005
D00006
D00007
0 0
0 3
0 0
Destination network
address= 3
@MOV(21)
@MOV(21)
@MOV(21)
#0003
2 0
Destination node
address = 32
Destination Unit
address = 0
Response required
Port No. 7 used
No. of resends = 5
Response monitoring
time = Default
D00006
#2000
D00008
D00009
0 7
0 0
0 5
0 0
D00007
#0705
D00008
@MOV(21)
#0000
D00009
Transfers the 16 words beginning at A100 of net
work address 3, node address 32, and Unit address
0 (PLC) to 2000.
@RECV(98)
A100
2000
D00005
(See note 1.)
120002 A20207
Creates reset input.
DIFU(13) 120003
Network Instruction Error Flag
120002 A21907
120002 120003
121001
Turns ON to indicate reception error.
A21907
Transmitted data (16 words from 2000) moved into
words beginning at D00040 for storage.
@XFER(70)
#0016
2000
D00040
Note
1. With CS/CJ-series PLCs, the Network Instruction Enabled Flag in A20200
to A20207 corresponding to communications ports will be OFF even when
PMCR (PROTOCOL MACRO) is being executed.
2. When using the sample program, make sure that the bits and words used
in the sample program are not the same as those in the user program or
by Special I/O Units.
195
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Message Service
Section 6-3
C200HX/HG/HE PLCs
Execution
condition
00000
25204
31002
The transmission program will run when IR 00000
KEEP(11)
31000
turns ON, provided that the Network Instruction En-
abled Flag is ON and the RECV instruction has not
been executed.
S
31001
31000
R
IR 31000 remains ON while the SEND instruction is
being executed, and it turns OFF when instruction
execution has been completed.
@MOV(21)
#000A
DM 0000
Control Data Preparation
@MOV(21)
DM 0000 0 0
DM 0001 9 5
DM 0002 0 0
0 A 10 send words*
#9500
0 0
0 3
Operating level 1**
Node 3, Unit 0 (a PLC)
DM 0001
* No destination network address specified
** Response required, 5 retries, direct designa-
tion, monitoring time: default
@MOV(21)
#0003
DM 0002
Beginning Word for Indirect Receiving by
Destination Node
@MOV(21)
#0500
Beginning word for
receiving (by destina-
tion node) = DM4000
(05: DM designation)
DM 0020 0 5
DM 0021 4 0
0 0
0 0
DM 0020
@MOV(21)
#4000
DM 0021
Transfers the 10 words beginning at IR 000 to the 10
words beginning at DM 0010.
@XFER(70)
#0010
000
DM 0010
Transfers the 10 words beginning at DM 0010 of the
source node to the words beginning with DM 4000
(specified by DM 0020 and DM0021) at node address 3.
@SEND(90)
DM 0010
DM 0020
DM 0000
31000
31000
25204
25203
DIFU(13) 31001
00200
Creates reset input.
Network Instruction Error Flag
Turns ON to indicate transmission error.
(Continued on the next page)
196
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Message Service
Section 6-3
(Continued from the previous page)
Execution
condition
The reception program will run when IR 000001
turns ON, provided that the Network Instruction En-
abled Flag is ON and the SEND instruction has not
been executed.
00001
25204
31000
KEEP(11)
31002
S
IR 31002 remains ON while the RECV instruction is
being executed, and it turns OFF when instruction
execution has been completed.
31003
31002
R
@MOV(21)
Control Data Preparation
#0010
DM 0003
DM 0003 0 0
DM 0004 9 5
DM 0005 0 0
1 0
0 0
0 4
16 receive words*
Operating level 1**
Node 4, Unit 0 (a PLC)
@MOV(21)
#9500
* No destination network address specified
** Response required, 5 retries, direct designa-
tion, monitoring time: default
DM 0004
@MOV(21)
#0004
DM 0005
Beginning Word for Indirect Sending by
Destination Node
@MOV(21)
#0500
HR 10
Beginning word for
sending (by destina-
tion node) = DM5000
(05: DM designation)
HR 10
HR 11
0 5
5 0
0 0
0 0
@MOV(21)
#5000
HR 11
Data for 16 words from DM 5000 (HR10, HR11) of
the node address 4 is received in LR 10 and after.
@RECV(98)
HR 10
LR 10
DM 0003
31002
25204
DIFU(13) 31003
Creates reset input.
Network Instruction Error Flag
31002
31002
25203
31003
0201
Turns ON to indicate reception error.
25203
@XFER(70)
#0016
Transmitted data (16 words from LR 10) moved into
words beginning at DM 0030 for storage.
LR 10
DM 0030
Note When using the sample program, make sure that the bits and words used in
the sample program are not the same as those in the user program or by Spe-
cial I/O Units.
197
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Message Service
Section 6-3
CVM1 and CV-series PLCs
The transmission program will run when I000000 is ON,
provided that the Network Instruction Enabled Flag for
port 7 is ON and the RECV instruction has not been
executed.
I0000 A502 1200
00
07
02H
(011)
KEEP 120000H
CIO 120000H remains ON while the SEND instruction
is being executed, and it turns OFF when the execution
of the instruction has been completed.
1200
01H
Word
Content
Meaning
1200
00H
D00000 00 0A
D00001 00 02
No. of send words: 10H
Destination network address: 2
(030)
↑MOV
#000A D00000
#0002 D00001
#0400 D00002
#0705 D00003
#0064 D00004
I0000 D00010
D00020 D00000
(030)
↑MOV
D00002 04 00
D00003 07 05
Destination node address: 4
Destination unit address: 0
(030)
↑MOV
Response required
Communications port no.: 7
Number of retries: 5
(030)
↑MOV
(030)
↑MOV
D00004 00 64
Response monitor time: 10 s
(040)
↑XFER #0010
The 10-word data starting from I0000 is stored in
D00010 and following words.
(192)
↑SEND D00010
Transfers 10 words of data from the source node (D00010)
to the PLC (from D00020 onwards) at network address 2,
node no. 4, unit address 0.
1200
00
A502
07
(013)
DIFU 120001H
Creates reset input.
1200
00
A502
15
1210
00H
Transmission error display
The reception program will run when I000001 is ON,
provided that the Network Instruction Enabled Flag for
port 7 is ON and the SEND instruction has not been
executed.
I0000 A502 1200
01
07
00H
(011)
KEEP 120002H
CIO 120002H remains ON while the RECV instruction
is being executed, and it turns OFF when the execution
of the instruction has been completed.
1200
03H
Word
Content
Meaning
1200
02H
D00005 00 10
D00006 00 03
D00007 20 00
Number of receive words: 16H
Destination network address: 3
(030)
↑MOV
#0010 D00005
#0003 D00006
#2000 D00007
#0705 D00008
#0000 D00009
(030)
↑MOV
Destination node address: 32
Destination Unit address: 0
(030)
↑MOV
D00008 07 05
D00009 00 00
Response required
Communications port no.: 7
Number of retries: 5
(030)
↑MOV
(030)
↑MOV
Response monitor time: Default
(193)
↑RECV
A100
2000
D00005
Transfers 16 words of data (from A100 onwards) from
the PLC at network address 3, node no. 32, unit address
0, to words 2000 onwards.
1200
02H
A502
07
(013)
DIFU 120003H
Creates reset input.
1200
02H
A502
15
1210
01H
Reception error display
Reception data processing
When the data is received without an error, the 16-word
data received at CIO 2000 and following words is
stored in D00040 and following words on the same PLC.
1200
02H
1200 A502
03H 15
(040)
↑XFER
#0016
2000
D00040
Note When using the sample program, make sure that the bits and words used in
the sample program are not the same as those in the user program or Special
I/O Units.
198
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS Commands and Responses
Section 6-4
6-4 FINS Commands and Responses
6-4-1 FINS Communications Service
The FINS communications service is a communications protocol developed
by OMRON for FA control devices. It can be used for reading from and writing
to PLC memory, or for controlling various operations, without having to create
a user’s program at the PLC. The FINS communications service has its own
independent address system which does not rely on the actual network
address system, so it can carry out communications in the same way regard-
less of whether the PLC at the local node is on a Controller Link Network or
some other FA network (e.g., SYSMAC NET or SYSMAC LINK). For details
on FINS commands, refer to the FINS Commands Reference Manual (W227).
6-4-2 Sending and Receiving FINS Commands and Responses
FINS commands can be sent by using the CMND instruction with a CVM1,
CV-series, CS/CJ-series, or CQM1H-series PLC. The following diagram
shows the data format for sending FINS commands and receiving responses.
The data that is sent and received is all hexadecimal unless otherwise noted.
1 byte
1 byte
Word
15
87
0
S
S+1
S+2
@CMND
Command
S
D
C
1 byte
1 byte
Word
15
87
0
Response
D
D+1
D+2
Automatically prepared and added.
2 bytes
2,000 bytes max.
FINS header
Controller
Link Unit
CPU Unit
Automatically pre- Command code
pared and added.
Text
Computer
CS/CJ, CVM1,
CV-series,
or CQM1H-
series PLC
Command
Controller Link
Support Board
Response
2 bytes 2 bytes
1,998 bytes max.
FINS header
Command Response
Text
Automatically
added.
code
code
199
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS Commands and Responses
Section 6-4
Command Codes
The command code consists of two bytes of data, and indicates the contents
of the command. A FINS command must begin with a 2-byte command code,
and any parameters must follow the command code.
Response Codes
The response code consists of two bytes of data, and indicates the result of
the command execution. The first byte is the MRES (main response code),
which indicates the broad classification of the execution result. The second
byte is the SRES (sub-response code), which gives the detailed classification.
For a more detailed listing of response codes, including the sub-response
codes, refer to 6-7 Response Codes.
MRES
00
Execution result
Normal completion
MRES
21
Execution result
Write not possible
01
02
03
04
Local node error
22
23
Not executable in current mode
No unit
Destination node error
Communications controller error 24
Start/stop not possible
Unit error
Not executable (service not sup- 25
ported)
05
10
11
20
Routing error
26
30
40
---
Command error
Access error
Command format error
Parameter error
Service interrupted by abort
---
Read not possible
6-4-3 Applicable Units for FINS Commands
The parameters used with FINS commands and responses depend on the
Unit to which the command is being sent. The FINS commands and
responses addressed to Controller Link Units, to C200HX/HG/HE PLCs, and
to CQM1H-series PLCs are explained in this manual. For explanations of
FINS commands for other Units, refer to the FINS Commands Reference
Manual (W227).
C200HX/HG/HE and CQM1H-series PLCs do not directly support FINS com-
mands, but the Controller Link Unit automatically converts the command for-
mat so that C200HX/HG/HE and CQM1H-series PLCs can process them. The
Unit also converts the response format so that the response can be returned
to the source of the command.
When FINS commands are sent via a Host Link System for CVM1, CV-series,
or CS/CJ-series PLCs, be sure to use the command format for relaying
between networks.
200
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Commands and Responses for Controller Link Units
Section 6-5
6-5 Commands and Responses for Controller Link Units
6-5-1 Command Codes
Command
code
Data link operation mode
Name
Page
Active
Not valid
Valid
Inactive
Valid
04
01
02
01
01
02
03
01
02
03
02
03
DATA LINK START
DATA LINK STOP
210
211
Not valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
05
06
Valid
CONTROLLER DATA READ
CONTROLLER STATUS READ
NETWORK STATUS READ
DATA LINK STATUS READ
ECHOBACK TEST
Valid
Valid
Valid
08
21
Valid
Valid
BROADCAST TEST RESULTS READ
BROADCAST TEST DATA SEND
ERROR LOG READ
Valid
Valid
Valid
ERROR LOG CLEAR
6-5-2 DATA LINK START
Starts the Controller Link Network data links.
Command Block
Response Block
04
01
Command
code
04
01
Command Response
code code
The DATA LINK START command can be received for either automatically or
manually set data links. An error will occur if manually set data links are spec-
ified and yet data link tables do not exist.
The node that receives this command and starts the data links will become
the data link startup node. For automatically set data links, the data links will
be executed according to the settings at the startup node.
6-5-3 DATA LINK STOP
Stops the Controller Link Network data links.
Command Block
04
02
Command
code
201
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Commands and Responses for Controller Link Units
Section 6-5
Response Block
04
02
Command Response
code code
The DATA LINK STOP command can be received only while the data links are
active. An error will occur if this command is sent at any other time.
This command can be received by any node that is participating in the data
link.
6-5-4 CONTROLLER DATA READ
Reads the Controller Link Unit’s model, version, and node address data.
Command Block
05
01
Command
code
Response Block
For C200HX/HG/HE, CVM1, and CV-series PLCs
05
01
20 bytes
Model
20 bytes
Version
00
Node address
Reserved for system
Command Response
code code
For CS/CJ-series and CQM1H-series PLCs
05
01
20 bytes
Model
20 bytes
Version
Command Response
code code
Network
address
Wired/ Node Unit
Optical addressaddress
Parameters
Model, Version (response): The Controller Link Unit’s model and version are
returned as shown below, each 20 characters in ASCII code. If fewer than 20
bytes of data are used, 20 (Hex) (i.e., spaces) will be returned for the remain-
ing bytes. In the version numbers shown below, the spaces are represented
by boxes (@).
Model
Unit for C200HX/HG/HE PLCs: C200HW-CLK21@@@@@@@@
Unit for CVM1/CV-series PLCs: CVM1-CLK21@@@@@@@@@@
Unit for CS-series PLCs:
Unit for CJ-series PLCs:
CS1W-CLK21-V1@@@@@@@@
CJ1W-CLK21-V1@@@@@@@@
Unit for CQM1H-series PLCs: CQM1H-CLK21@@@@@@@@@
Version
PLCs other than CJ-series PLCs: V1.00@V1.00@@@@@@@@@
The first version number represents the Communications Controller version
number, and the second represents the Unit version number.
CJ-series PLCs: V2.00@V2.00@V2.00@@@
The first version number represents the data link layer Communications Con-
troller version number, the second represents the network layer Communica-
202
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Commands and Responses for Controller Link Units
Section 6-5
tions Controller version number, and the third represents the Unit version
number.
Wired/Optical (response)
The connection method for the Controller Link Unit (wired or optical ring). The
configuration is as follows:
Bit
– : Not used
Connection type:
0: Wired
Maximum number of nodes
00: 32 nodes
1: Optical ring
01: 62 nodes
Node Address (response): The Controller Link Unit’s node address is
returned between 01 and 3E Hex (1 to 62).
Unit Address (response): The Unit address set for the Controller Link Unit
(10 Hex + Unit number), is returned in hexadecimal. Even when there is a Unit
number setting error, the Unit address is returned.
Network Address: The Controller Link Unit’s network address, as set in the
routing table, is returned in hexadecimal. When the routing table has not been
set, the address becomes 00 Hex.
6-5-5 CONTROLLER STATUS READ
Reads the Controller Link Unit’s controller status.
Command Block
06
01
Command
code
Response Block
06
01
00
00
00
00
00
00
8 bytes
Command Response code
code
Active node list
Status 1
Status 3
Status 4
Total 6 bytes
Status 5
Count 1
Count 8
Operating status
Status 2
Status 6
Total 8 bytes
Parameters
Operating status (response): The operating status of the data links as fol-
lows:
00 (Hex): Data links inactive.
01 (Hex): Data links active.
02 (Hex): Local data links not active. (The data links are active in the net-
work, but the local node is not participating.)
Status 1, Status 4, Status 6 (response): Not used by the Controller Link
Unit. Always set to 00 (Hex).
203
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Commands and Responses for Controller Link Units
Section 6-5
Status 2 (response): For C200HX/HG/HE, CVM1, and CV-series Controller
Link Units, always set to 00 (Hex). For CS/CJ-series and CQM1H-series
PLCs, the Unit’s setting status is returning in the following configuration.
Bit
Baud rate:
1 Hex: 2 Mbps
2 Hex: 1 Mbps
3 Hex: 500 Kbps
For Wired Units:
0: Terminating resistance OFF
1: Terminating resistance ON
Status 3 (response): Error information. The configuration is as follows:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
0
1: Node address setting error
1: Error log exists
1: Data link error stop
1: Controller transmitter error
1: Duplicate node address setting error
1: Network parameter error (See note.)
1: Controller hardware error
Note With CS/CJ-series Optical Controller Link Units, this bit will be 1, even if the
Unit is mistakenly connected to an Optical SYSMAC LINK Network.
Status 5 (response): Error information related to the Unit and the PLC. The
configuration is as follows:
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0 0
1: EEPROM error
1: PLC model error
(C200HX/HG/HE only)
1: PLC system setting error
(CS/CJ-series, CVM1, and CV-series PLCs only)
1: Network parameter error
1: Data link table error
1: Routing table error
A network parameter error, data link table error, or routing table error occurs if
an error is discovered when the parameters and tables are checked at power
up.
A PLC system setting errors occurs if the Controller Link Unit is not properly
recognized by a CS/CJ-series, CVM1, or CV-series PLC.
A PLC model error occurs if a C200HX/HG/HE Controller Link Unit is
mounted to another type of PLC.
Count 1 to Count 8 (response): The total number of times for each of the
items listed below is returned as 1 byte of hexadecimal data.
Count 1: Number of CRC errors
Count 2: Number of token re-sends
Count 3: Number of token returns
Count 4: Number of token timeouts
Count 5: Number of polling timeouts
Count 6: Number of controller changes
Count 7: Number of active node changes
Count 8: Reserved for system use.
204
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Commands and Responses for Controller Link Units
Section 6-5
Network participation status (response): The following diagram shows the
bits corresponding to node addresses in the Controller Link Network. When a
bit is returned as “1,” it means that the corresponding node is participating in
the network.
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Byte 1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
The numbers in the boxes indicate the node
addresses. The bit status of a particular
node address shows whether or not that
node participates in the network.
Byte 2 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Byte 3 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
Byte 4 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25
0: Not part of network
1: Part of network
40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41
Byte 5
Byte 6
Byte 7
Byte 8
56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49
(All boxes marked by "–" are reserved
for system use and fixed at "0.")
–
– 62 61 60 59 58 57
Reserved for system use.
When CS1W-CLK21-V1 and CJ1W-CLK21-V1 Units are used and the Wired
Network 62 Node Enable Bit in the DM Parameter Area software switches is
ON, the network participation status of nodes 33 to 62 is returned in bytes 5
through 8. In other models, bytes 5 through 8 are reserved for system use.
6-5-6 NETWORK STATUS READ
Reads the operating status of the entire Controller Link Network.
Command Block
06
02
Command
code
Response Block
8 bytes
62 bytes
06
02
32 bytes
Command Response Participation
code code data
Actual
communications
cycle time
Data link
Data link data
recurring error status error counter
Data link type
Polling node address
Data link operation
Parameters
Participation data (response): This parameter indicates the active status of
individual nodes with respect to the network (i.e. their participation in the net-
work). As shown in the following diagram, that status is expressed in four bits
corresponding to the node address.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Participation Status of Individual Nodes
0
Byte 1
Node #1
Node #3
Node #5
Reserved
Node #2
Node #4
Byte 2
Byte 3
0: Not part of network
1: Part of network
0: Normal disconnection
(Applicable only for
Byte 17
Byte 18
Node #33
Node #35
Node #32
Node #34
1: Abnormal disconnection inactive nodes.)
0: Normal node
1: Non-responding node
(No response to polling)
Byte 32
Reserved
Node #62
When CS1W-CLK21-V1 and CJ1W-CLK21-V1 Units are used and the Wired
Network 62 Node Enable Bit in the DM Parameter Area software switches is
205
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Commands and Responses for Controller Link Units
Section 6-5
ON, the network participation status of nodes 33 to 62 is returned in the upper
four bits of bytes 17 through to the lower four bits of byte 32. In other models,
the areas corresponding to nodes 33 to 62 are reserved for system use.
Actual communications cycle time (response): The actual communica-
tions cycle time is returned in units of 100 µs in hexadecimal.
Polling node address: The current polling node address is returned in hexa-
decimal.
Data link operation (response): Indicates the status of data link operation in
the network.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Data link operational status
0: Inactive
1: Active
Data link type (response): Indicates the data transmission status of the local
node’s data links. It is configured as shown in the following diagram. This
parameter is valid only during data link operation. While data link operation is
inactive, the value from the previous operation is retained.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Local node data transmission status
0: Transmission
1: No transmission
Data link recurring error status (response): Indicates whether an error con-
tinues to occur at a node when data link data is received. If an error continues
to occur at the same node when the data is received, the bit corresponding to
that node turns to “1” (i.e., turns ON). The configuration is shown in the follow-
ing diagram.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte 1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
The numbers in the boxes indicate the node
addresses. The bit status of a particular
node address shows whether or not there is
a recurring data link error at that node.
Byte 2 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Byte 3 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
Byte 4 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25
Byte 5 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
0: No recurring error
1: Recurring error
Byte 6 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41
Byte 7 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49
Byte 8
–
– 62 61 60 59 58 57
Reserved for system use.
When CS1W-CLK21-V1 and CJ1W-CLK21-V1 Units are used and the Wired
Network 62 Node Enable Bit of the DM Parameter Area software switch is ON,
the continuous data link error status of nodes 33 to 62 is returned in bytes 5
through 8. In other models, bytes 5 through 8 are reserved for system use.
206
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Commands and Responses for Controller Link Units
Section 6-5
Data link data error counter (response): The total number of data link data
reception errors occurring at all nodes is returned as a total count from the
time the power was turned on. It is expressed, in hexadecimal, as one byte
per node. The count can range from 0 to 255 (i.e., 0 to FF in hexadecimal).
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Number of error occurrences for node #1
Number of error occurrences for node #2
Number of error occurrences for node #3
Byte 32 Number of error occurrences for node #32
Byte 33
Number of error occurrences for node #33
Number of error occurrences for node #62
Byte 62
When CS1W-CLK21-V1 and CJ1W-CLK21-V1 Units are used and the Wired
Network 62 Node Enable Bit in the DM Parameter Area software switches is
ON, the data link error counter of nodes 33 to 62 is returned in bytes 33
through 62. In other models, the areas corresponding to nodes 33 to 62 are
reserved for system use.
6-5-7 DATA LINK STATUS READ
Reads the data link operational status.
Command Block
06
03
Command
code
Type
Response Block
62 bytes
(See note.)
06
03
Refresh
Refresh
Status
Response
code
Command
code
cycle time cycle time
present
value
maximum
value
Status flag
Data link mode
Note If the type is set to 0000 Hex (or is omitted), only 32 bytes will be returned.
Parameters
Type (Command): The number of nodes reading the data link status is spec-
ified as a 2-byte (4-digit) hexadecimal number as follows:
0000 Hex: 32 nodes
0001 Hex: 62 nodes
Default value: 32 nodes
Reading of the data link status for 62 nodes is enabled only when the Wired
Network 62 Node Enable Bit in the DM Parameter Area software switches of
CS1W-CLK21-V1 and CJ1W-CLK21-V1 Units is ON.
207
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Commands and Responses for Controller Link Units
Section 6-5
Status flag (response): The overall data link status is returned in one byte of
data, as shown in the following diagram.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0 0
1: Data link setting error
1: No data link table
Allocation for automatic setting
00: Equality layout
01: 1:N allocation, common type
10: 1:N allocation, 1 to 1 type
11: 1:N allocation, delivery type
Data link mode during operation
0: Manual setting
1: Automatic setting
Data link operational status
0: Not active
1: Active
Data link mode (response): The data link mode during operation is returned
in one byte of data, as follows:
01 (Hex): Automatic (Equality Layout)
81 (Hex): Automatic (1:N allocation)
03 (Hex): Manual
Refresh cycle time present value, refresh cycle time maximum value
(response): The present value and the maximum value of the cycle time for
refreshing the data link area are both returned in units of 1 ms, in hexadeci-
mal, within a range of 0000 to 00FF (decimal: 0 to 255).
in the following diagram. It is the same as the data link status in the PLC.
(Refer to page 156.)
Data link status for each node
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
–
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte 1
Node #1
Node #2
Node #3
Byte 2
Byte 3
PLC status
0: Inactive (user program not running)
1: Active (user program running)
Byte 62
Node #62
PLC's CPU Unit error
0: Normal
1: Error
Communications error (data link reception)
0: Normal
1: Error
Data link participation
0: Not in data link or data link inactive
1: In data link
Offset error
0: Normal
1: Error
Error: Offset exceeds number of send words.
Insufficient (short) receive area Insufficient: Receive area is smaller than send area.
0: Sufficient
1: Insufficient
Excess data is truncated; other data is received.
Remaining receive area
0: Not remaining
1: Remaining
Remaining: Receive area is larger than send area.
Data is received and remaining words are cleared.
Note
1. If the type is set to 0000 Hex (or is omitted), only the 32 bytes for nodes 1
to 32 will be returned.
2. The data link status is not refreshed while the data links are inactive.
3. Nodes which are not active in the network or participating in the data links
will generate communications errors.
208
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Commands and Responses for Controller Link Units
Section 6-5
4. Any node which is not active in the network retains the status that existed
immediately prior to the generation of the communications error.
5. Only the PLC operation status and PLC error status will be refreshed for
nodes that are not participating in a data link that is active in the network.
6-5-8 ECHOBACK TEST
Executes an echoback communications test between specified nodes.
Command Block
1,998 bytes
max.
08
01
Command
code
Test data
Response Block
1,998 bytes
max.
08
01
Command Response
code code
Test data
Parameters
Test data (command, response): For the command, up to 1,998 bytes of
data can be specified to be sent to a specified node. For the response, the
test data that was sent by the command is returned unchanged.
An error is generated if the data returned by the response is different from the
data that was sent by the command.
6-5-9 BROADCAST TEST RESULTS READ
Reads for each node the results (number of receptions) of a BROADCAST
network. (For details on the BROADCAST TEST RESULTS SEND command,
refer to 6-5-10 BROADCAST TEST DATA SEND.
Command Block
08
02
Command
code
Response Block
Parameters
08
02
Command Response
code code
Number of
receptions
Number of receptions (response): The number of times that broadcast test
data has been received at the command destination node from the time that
the last BROADCAST TEST RESULTS READ command was sent until this
one was sent is returned.
An error will be generated if that number of receptions differs from the number
of times that the BROADCAST TEST DATA SEND command was issued dur-
ing that same period.
The number of receptions value being retained at the destination node is
cleared when the BROADCAST TEST RESULTS READ command is exe-
cuted.
209
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Commands and Responses for Controller Link Units
Section 6-5
6-5-10 BROADCAST TEST DATA SEND
Broadcasts test data to all nodes in a specified network.
Command Block
2,000 bytes
max.
08
03
Test data
Command
code
There is no response to this command.
The control data must be set as follows when this command is issued:
Destination node address:
Destination unit address:
FF (Hex) (for broadcasting the data)
FE (Hex) (for the Controller Link Unit)
Response required/not required: 1 (response not required)
The transmission and reception status is checked by comparing the number
the BROADCAST TEST RESULTS READ command. (For details, refer to 6-5-
9 BROADCAST TEST RESULTS READ.
6-5-11 ERROR LOG READ
Reads the PLC’s error log.
Command Block
21
02
Command Beginning
No. of
records
code
record no.
Response Block
21
02
10 bytes
10 bytes
Command Response Max. no. of
code
No. of
No. of
records
Error log
data
Error log
data
code stored records stored
records
Parameters
Beginning record no. (command): Specifies the first record to be read, in
two bytes (four digits) in hexadecimal. (The first record number is 0000 in
hexadecimal. Designate the record number within a range of 0000 to 0026 in
hexadecimal (decimal: 0 to 38)).
No. of records (command and response): Specifies the number of records
to be read, within a range of 0001 to 0027 in hexadecimal (decimal: 1 to 39).
The response gives the number of records actually read.
Max. no. of stored records (response): Specifies the maximum number of
records that can be recorded, within a range of 0001 to 0027 in hexadecimal
(decimal: 1 to 39).
No. of stored records (response): The number of records that have been
recorded by the time the command is executed. The response will be given
within a range of 0001 to 0027 hexadecimal (decimal: 1 to 39).
Error log data (response): The specified error log records are returned in
sequence starting from the beginning record number. The total number of
bytes required is calculated as follows:
No. of records x 10 bytes
210
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Commands and Responses for Controller Link Units
Section 6-5
The configuration of each error record is as follows:
1st byte
10th byte
Error code
Details
Minute Day Hour Year Month
Second
Error code, details: These parameters show the contents of errors. For
details, refer to 9-3-2 Error Codes.
Date and time: These parameters show the seconds, minutes, hour (0 to
23), date, month, and year (the rightmost two digits) in BCD specifying the
time that the error occurred.
Note
1. If the PLC does not have the specified number of records, all the records
that have been stored in the PLC up to the point that the command is exe-
cuted will be returned.
2. If there is no error log registered, a response code of 1103 (Hex) will be
returned.
6-5-12 ERROR LOG CLEAR
Clears all error log records and sets the error log pointer to 0.
Command Block
21
03
Command
format
Response Block
21
03
Command Response
format code
211
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Commands and Responses for C200HX/HG/HE and CQM1H-series PLCs
Section 6-6
6-6 Commands and Responses for C200HX/HG/HE and
CQM1H-series PLCs
6-6-1 Command Codes
Command
code
PLC mode
MONITOR
Name
MEMORY AREA READ
Page
RUN
Valid
PROGRAM
Valid
01
01
02
04
06
07
01
02
01
01
01
02
01
01
02
0A
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Not valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
MEMORY AREA WRITE
MULTIPLE MEMORY AREA READ
PROGRAM AREA READ
PROGRAM AREA WRITE
RUN
223
224
Valid
Valid
03
04
Valid
Valid
Not valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
STOP
05
06
07
Valid
Valid
CONTROLLER DATA READ
CONTROLLER STATUS READ
CLOCK READ
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Not valid
Valid
Valid
CLOCK WRITE
21
23
Valid
ERROR CLEAR
Not valid
Not valid
Valid
Valid
FORCED SET/RESET
FORCED SET/RESET CANCEL
MULTIPLE FORCED STATUS READ
Valid
Valid
6-6-2 Memory Area Designations
The following table gives the addresses to use when reading or writing PLC
data. The Data area address column gives the normal addresses used in the
PLC program. The Address used in communications column are the
addresses used in CV-mode commands and responses. These addresses
are combined with the memory area codes to specify PLC memory locations.
These addresses are not the same as the actual memory addresses of the
data.
The No. of bytes column specifies the number of bytes to read or write data for
that area. The number of bytes varies for the same area depending on the
memory area code. Actual data area sizes vary with the PLC being used.
Refer to your PLC’s operation manual for specific limits.
Memory area
Data
Data area address
Address used in
communications
Memory
area code bytes
No. of
1st and 2nd
3rd byte
bytes
IR Area 1, 2
SR Area 1, 2
Bit status
00000 to 51115
000 to 511
0000 to 01FF
00 to 0F
00
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
Word contents
Bit status
00 to 00
00 to 0F
00 to 00
00 to 0F
00 to 00
00 to 0F
00 to 00
00 to 00
80
00
80
00
80
00
80
01
81
LR Area
HR Area
AR Area
LR 0000 to LR 6315
LR 00 to LR 63
03E8 to 0427
0428 to 048B
048C to 04A7
0000 to 01FF
Word contents
Bit status
HR 0000 to HR 9915
HR 00 to HR 99
AR 0000 to AR 2715
AR 000 to AR 27
Word contents
Bit status
Word contents
Status
Timer/
Counter Area
T/C 000
to T/C 511
PV
212
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Commands and Responses for C200HX/HG/HE and CQM1H-series PLCs
Section 6-6
Memory area
Data
Data area address
Address used in
communications
Memory
area code bytes
No. of
1st and 2nd
3rd byte
bytes
DM Area
Word contents
Word contents
DM 0000 to DM 6655
EM 0000 to EM 6143
0000 to 19FF
0000 to 17FF
00 to 00
00 to 00
82
2
2
Expansion DM
90 to 97, 98,
and A8 to
AF (See
note.)
Note The meanings of the memory area codes for the Expansion DM area are
shown in the following table. Only the current bank (98) or bank 0 (90) can be
specified for CQM1H-series PLCs.
Memory area code
Meaning
90 to 97
98
Banks 0 to 7
Current bank
Banks 8 to 15
A8 to AF
Memory area size varies depending on the PLC model. For details, refer to
the operation manual of the specific PLC that is being used.
Word/Bit Addresses
Each word/bit address specifies a specific bit or word.
Specify the the bit between 00 and 0F (Hex) (decimal: 00 to
15). Set to 00 (Hex) to specify word or flag data.
Specify the address of the word or flag.
To obtain the corresponding address of the desired word or bit, add the data
area word address (hexadecimal) to the first address of the range of
addresses used for that data area in communications. For example, the
address for word AR 13 is computed as follows:
First address for AR area;
048C + 0D (13 in BCD);
048C (Hex)
0499 (Hex)
The word address for AR 13 would be 04990C (Hex) (the memory area code
would specify this as a word) and the address of bit 12 (C Hex) in AR 13
would be 04990C (Hex).
Memory Area Code
The unit of access (bit or word) and the data code are specified as shown in
the following illustration.
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Access unit
Data code
00: Bit
10: Word
00: CIO, LR, HR, or AR area
01: Timer or Counter area
02: Data Memory area
10 to 17, 18, and 27 to F: Expansion DM
Number of Bytes/Element
The number of bytes of read or write data per element is as follows depending
on the access unit.
1 Byte/element for bit access
2 Bytes/element for word access
213
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Commands and Responses for C200HX/HG/HE and CQM1H-series PLCs
Section 6-6
Data Configuration
The configuration of the various types of data that can be read or written is
shown below. The number of bytes required for each type of data is also
given.
Flag or Bit Status (One Byte)
00: Bit is OFF (0)
01: Bit is ON (1)
Word Contents or PV (Two Bytes)
Bits 0 to 7 (second byte)
Bits 8 to 15 (first byte)
6-6-3 MEMORY AREA READ
Reads the contents of the specified number of consecutive memory area
words starting from the specified word. All words must be in the same mem-
ory area. (Here, all memory areas with the same memory area code are con-
sidered as one area).
Command Block
01
01
00
Command
code
Beginning address No. of items
Memory area code
Response Block
Parameters
01
01
Command Response
code code
Data
Memory area code (command): The data area to read.
Beginning address (command): The address of the first word/bit/flag to
read from memory. Specify 00 (Hex) for the 3rd byte.
No. of items (command): The number of items to be read. Specify 0000 to
03E7 (Hex) (0 to 999 decimal). The command can be completed normally
even if zero items are specified.
Data (response): The data from the specified words is returned in sequence
starting from the beginning address. PVs for timers and counters are returned
as BCD. The required number of bytes in total is calculated as follows:
No. of bytes required by each item × No. of items
214
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Commands and Responses for C200HX/HG/HE and CQM1H-series PLCs
Section 6-6
Memory Areas
The following areas can be read. (Refer to 6-6-2 Memory Area Designations
for PLC word/bit address designations):
Memory area
Data
Memory area No. of
code bytes
IR, SR, LR, HR, or
AR
Word contents
80
2
Timer/Counter
Completion Flag status
PV
01
81
82
1
2
2
2
DM
Word contents
Word contents
Expansion DM
90 to 97, 98,
and A8 to AF
6-6-4 MEMORY AREA WRITE
Writes data to the specified number of consecutive words starting from the
specified word. All words must be in the same memory area. (Here, all mem-
ory areas with the same memory area code are considered as one area).
Note When data is written to the Timer/Counter PV area, the Completion Flags will
be turned OFF (0).
Command Block
01
02
00
Command
code
Beginning address No. of items
Status
Memory area code
Response Block
Parameters
01
02
Command Response
code code
Memory area code (command): The data area to write.
Beginning address (command): The first word/value to write. Specify 00
(Hex) for the 3rd byte.
No. of items (command): The number of items to be written. Specify 0000 to
03E5 (Hex) (0 to 997 decimal). The command can be completed normally
even if zero items are specified.
Data (command): The data to be written. PVs for timers and counters are
written as BCD. The required number of bytes in total is calculated as follows:
2 bytes × No. of items
The following data can be written. (Refer to 6-6-2 Memory Area Designations-
for the word/bit address designations):
Memory area
Data
Memory area No. of
code bytes
IR, SR, LR, HR, or
AR
Word contents
80
2
Timer/Counter
DM
PV
81
82
2
2
2
Word contents
Word contents
Expansion DM
90 to 97, 98,
and A8 to AF
215
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Commands and Responses for C200HX/HG/HE and CQM1H-series PLCs
Section 6-6
6-6-5 MULTIPLE MEMORY AREA READ
Reads the contents of the specified number of non-consecutive memory area
words, starting from the specified word.
Note If there is an error in the command code or an address, no data will be read.
Command Block
01
04
Command
code
Address
Address
Memory area code
128 addresses maximum
Memory area code
Response Block
01
04
Command Response
code code
Memory area code
Data
Data
Memory area code
Parameters
Memory area code (command): The data area to read.
Address (command): The word/bit/flag to read. The content of up to 128
words can be read. If one or more EM Area words is included in the data to be
read, the maximum number of words that can be read will be limited to 100.
Data (response): The data in the specified memory area(s) will be returned
in sequence starting from the beginning address.
Memory Areas
The following data can be written. (Refer 6-6-2 Memory Area Designations for
memory area designations):
Memory area
Data
Memory area No. of
code bytes
IR, SR, LR, HR, or
AR
Bit status
00
80
01
81
82
1
Word contents
Status
2
1
2
2
2
Timer/Counter
PV
DM
Word contents
Word contents
Expansion DM
90 to 97, 98,
and A8 to AF
6-6-6 PROGRAM AREA READ
Reads the contents of the specified number of consecutive program area
words starting from the specified word. The program is read a machine lan-
guage (object code). A maximum of 1,990 bytes can be read with each com-
mand.
Command Block
03
06
00
00
Command Program
code no.
Beginning address
No. of
bytes
216
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Commands and Responses for C200HX/HG/HE and CQM1H-series PLCs
Section 6-6
Response Block
03
06
00
00
1,990 bytes maximum
Command Response Program
code code no.
Beginning address
No. of
bytes
Data
Parameters
Program no. (command and response): Set to 0000 (Hex).
Beginning address (command and response): Set an relative byte address
with 00000000 (Hex) as the starting address. The beginning word must be an
even number. The address set in the command will be returned in the
response.
No. of bytes (command and response): The number of bytes in an even
number 07C6 (Hex) (1990 in decimal) or smaller. The number of bytes actu-
ally read will be returned in the response. Bit 15 will be ON (1) in the response
block when the last word data of the program area is returned.
Bit 15 OFF (0): Without last word data
Bit 15 ON (1): With last word data
Bits 0 to 14: No. of bytes read
Bits 0 to 7 (second byte)
Bits 8 to 15 (first byte)
Data (response): The data in the specified program area will be returned in
sequence starting from the beginning word.
Note If the designated number of bytes is larger than the program area, the pro-
gram will be read through the final address and a response code indicating an
address range error or response length error will be returned.
6-6-7 PROGRAM AREA WRITE
Writes data to the specified number of consecutive program area words start-
ing from the specified word. A maximum of 1,990 bytes can be written with
each command. To write larger amounts of data, use multiple commands and
specify the beginning word and number of words for each. The data is written
to the program area at the machine language (object code) level.
Command Block
1,990 bytes maximum
03
07
00
00
Command Program
code no.
Beginning word
No. of
bytes
Data
Response Block
03
07
00
00
Command Response Program
code code no.
Beginning word
No. of
bytes
Parameters
Program no. (command and response): Set to 0000 (Hex).
Beginning word (command and response): Set a relative byte address with
00000000 (Hex) as the starting address. The beginning word must be an even
number. The address set in the command will be returned in the response.
217
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Commands and Responses for C200HX/HG/HE and CQM1H-series PLCs
Section 6-6
No. of bytes (command and response): The command specifies the num-
ber of bytes of data to write. This must be an even number of 07C6 (Hex) or
smaller (1990 or smaller in decimal). The number of bytes actually written will
be returned in the response. The leftmost bit (bit 15) is used to indicate the
completion of the command. It must be turned ON (1) when writing data to the
last address in the program area so that the PLC can generate an index*. To
write only an index marker, specify 8000 (Hex) for the number of bytes.
*Generating an index is a process that enables a program to be used by the
PLC after it has been written. A program will not run properly if the index has
not been generated.
Bit 15 OFF (0): Without last word data
Bit 15 ON (1): With last word data
Bits 0 to 14: No. of bytes written
Bits 0 to 7 (second byte)
Bits 8 to 15 (first byte)
Data (command): The data to be written.
6-6-8 RUN
Changes the PLC to MONITOR or RUN mode, enabling the PLC to execute
its program.
Command Block
04
01
00
00
Command Program Mode
code no.
Response Block
Parameters
04
01
Command Response
code code
Program no. (command and response): Set to 0000 (Hex).
Mode (command): As follows:
02 (Hex):
04 (Hex):
MONITOR mode
RUN mode
Note If the mode is not specified, the PLC will go to MONITOR mode.
6-6-9 STOP
Changes the PLC to PROGRAM mode, stopping program execution.
Command Block
04
02
Command
code
218
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Commands and Responses for C200HX/HG/HE and CQM1H-series PLCs
Section 6-6
Response Block
04
02
Command Response
code code
6-6-10 CONTROLLER DATA READ
Reads the following data:
• Controller model and version
• Area data
• PLC status
Command Block
Response Block
05
01
Command
code
05
01
00
00
20 bytes
20 bytes
16 bytes
10 bytes
65 bytes
Command Response Program
Controller
model
Controller
version
Dummy 1
Area data
Dummy 2 PLC status
code
code
number
Parameters
Controller model and Controller version (response): Both are returned in
ASCII, within 20 bytes (i.e., within 20 ASCII characters). If the model or ver-
sion information does not require 20 bytes of data, the remainder of the bytes
will be filled with spaces (20 hexadecimal).
Dummy 1 and Dummy 2 (response): All zeros (Hex) will be returned.
Area data (response): As follows:
1st byte
10th byte
00
00
00
00
00
00
Program
area size
No. of DM words
Meaning
Number of Expansion DM banks
Unit (Hex)
Item
Program area size
The size of PLC Setup and program area
K words (1K words = 1,024 words;
1 word = 2 bytes))
No. of DM words
Total words in the DM area
Words (1 word = 2 bytes)
Banks
Number of Expansion
DM banks
Number of banks in the Expansion DM area
PLC status (response): The status of connected tools is returned:
00 (Hex):
80 (Hex):
No recognized tool connected
Recognized tool connected
219
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Commands and Responses for C200HX/HG/HE and CQM1H-series PLCs
Section 6-6
6-6-11 CONTROLLER STATUS READ
Reads the status of the Controller.
Command Block
06
01
Command
code
Response Block
06
01
16 bytes
Command Response
code code
Fatal error
data
FAL/
FALS no.
Error
message
Status Mode
Parameters
Status (response): The operating status of the PLC as follows:
00 (Hex): Stop (program not being executed)
01 (Hex): Run (program being executed)
80 (Hex): CPU Unit on standby
Mode (response): One of the following PLC modes:
00 (Hex): PROGRAM
02 (Hex): MONITOR
04 (Hex): RUN
Fatal error data (response): The contents of fatal error information from the
PLC. (For details refer to the operation manual of the PLC that is being used.)
First byte
Second byte
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1: System error (FALS)
1: No END instruction
1: I/O setting error
1: I/O point overflow
1: CPU bus error
1: Memory error
Non-fatal error data (response): The contents of non-fatal error information
from the PLC. (For details refer to the operation manual of the PLC that is
being used.)
First byte
15 14 13 12 11 10
Second byte
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1: PLC link error
1: Host link error
1: Battery error
1: Remote I/O error
1: Special I/O Unit error
1: I/O verification error
1: System error (FAL)
220
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Commands and Responses for C200HX/HG/HE and CQM1H-series PLCs
Section 6-6
FAL/FALS No. (response): The number of the highest priority FAL/FALS
error is returned as BCD between 00 and 99 (decimal) to the second byte.
The first byte is always 00 (Hex). If no error has occurred, 0000 (Hex) is
returned.
Error message (response): The error message of the present FAL/FALS
number is returned as 16 or fewer ASCII characters (16 or fewer bytes). If
there is no error, nothing will be returned.
6-6-12 CLOCK READ
Reads the clock.
With CQM1H-series PLCs, all zeros will be returned if the CPU Unit does not
contain a Memory Cassette with a clock.
Command Block
07
01
Command
code
Response Block
Parameters
07
01
Command Response
code code
Year Month Date Hour Minute Second Day
Year, month, date, hour, minute, second, day (response): Each value is
expressed in BCD.
Year: The rightmost two digits of the year.
Hour: 00 to 23.
Day: As follows:
Value
Day
00
Sun
01
Mon
02
03
04
05
06
Sat
Tues
Wed
Thur
Fri
6-6-13 CLOCK WRITE
Sets the clock.
With CQM1H-series PLCs, the time will not be written unless the CPU Unit
contains a Memory Cassette with a clock.
Note Be sure to specify all data.
Command Block
Response Block
07
02
Command
code
Year Month Date Hour Minute Second Day
07
02
Command Response
code code
221
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Commands and Responses for C200HX/HG/HE and CQM1H-series PLCs
Section 6-6
Parameters
Year, month, date, hour, minute, second, day (command): Each specified
value is expressed in BCD.
The ranges for setting these items are shown in the following table.
Parameters
Year
Range
00 to 99 (rightmost 2 digits)
01 to 12
Month
Date
00 to 31
Hour
00 to 23
Minute
Second
00 to 59
00 to 59
Day: As follows:
Value
Day
00
Sun
01
Mon
02
03
04
05
06
Sat
Tues
Wed
Thur
Fri
6-6-14 ERROR CLEAR
Clears errors from the PLC. A normal response will be returned even if an
error has not occurred.
Note The cause of the error must be removed before executing the ERROR CLEAR
command or the same error will occur again after the ERROR CLEAR com-
mand is executed.
Command Block
Response Block
Parameters
21
01
FF
FF
Command Error reset
code code
21
01
Command Response
code code
Error reset code (command): Set to FFFF (Hex).
6-6-15 FORCED SET/RESET
Forcibly sets (ON) or resets (OFF) bits/flags or releases forced set/reset sta-
tus. Bits/flags that are forced ON or OFF will remain ON or OFF and cannot
be written to until the forced status is released.
Note This command cannot be used to release the status of Completion Flags for
timers or counters. If forced status is released and the Completion Flag is
turned ON, it will be force-set; if forced status is released and the Completion
Flag is turned OFF, it will be force-reset.
222
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Commands and Responses for C200HX/HG/HE and CQM1H-series PLCs
Section 6-6
Command Block
23
01
Command
code
No. of
Set/Reset
Bit/flag
Set/reset
specification
Bit/flag
bits/flags specification
Memory area code
Memory area code
Forced set/reset data
Forced set/reset data
Response Block
Parameters
23
01
Command Response
code
code
No. of bits/flags (command): The number of bits/flags to be processed.
Note Multiple bits/flags can be forced set/reset, and the status will be retained until
the forced set/reset is cleared.
Set/Reset specification (command): The action to be taken for each bit/flag:
Value
0000 (Hex)
0001 (Hex)
8000 (Hex)
8001 (Hex)
FFFF (Hex)
Function
Force-reset (OFF)
Force-set (ON)
Forced status released and bit/flag turned OFF (0).
Forced status released and bit/flag turned ON (1).
Forced status released.
Note “Forced status” is the ON/OFF status of bits/flags which is forcibly retained as
write protected.
Memory area code (command): The memory area of the bit or flag to be
controlled.
Memory Areas
Refer to 6-6-2 Memory Area Designations for memory area designations.
Memory area
Data
IR, SR, LR, HR, and AR areas Bits status
00
01
Timer/Counter
Completion Flag status
6-6-16 FORCED SET/RESET CANCEL
Cancels the forced status of all bits/flags that have been forced ON or forced
OFF. (“Forced status” is the ON/OFF status of bits/flags which has been forc-
ibly retained as write protected.)
Command Block
23
02
Command
code
223
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Commands and Responses for C200HX/HG/HE and CQM1H-series PLCs
Section 6-6
Response Block
23
02
Command Response
code code
Note The bits (flags) in the following memory areas can be force-set or force-reset.
Memory area
Data
IR, SR, LR, HR, and AR Bit status
areas
Timer/Counter
Completion Flag status
6-6-17 MULTIPLE FORCED STATUS READ
Reads the forced status of the specified range of words or timers/counters.
Command Block
23
0A
Command
code
Beginning
address
Number of
units
Memory
area code
Response Block
23
0A
Command Response
Beginning
address
Number of
units
Data
Memory
area code
code
code
Parameters
Memory area code, Beginning address, Number of units (command,
response): Specify the memory area code, the beginning address in that
area, and the number of words or timers/counters to read. The number of
units can be set from 0001 to 0040 (Hex) (1 to 64 in decimal). The total of 64
continuous bits (for 4 words) for the number of bits or words and the total of 64
units (for 32 words) for the timers/counters can be read at one time.
The actual area, beginning address, and number of units read will be returned
in the response.
Forced status can be read in the following areas. Refer to 6-6-2 Memory Area
Designations for memory area designations.
Area
Data type
Memory area
code
Number of
bytes
IR, SR, LR, HR, and PV of word
AR areas
80
2
1
Timer/counter area Completion Flag status
01
Note Forced status is read by words for the IR, SR, LR, HR, or AR area and by bits/
flags for the Timer/Counter area.
Data (response): Forced status is returned beginning from the specified word
or timer/counter. The number of bytes returned will be (the number of units) x
(the number of bytes/unit).
224
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Response Codes
Section 6-7
IR, SR, LR, HR, and AR Areas:
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Bit 14
Bit 12
Bit 10
Bit 9
Bit 8
Bit 6
Bit 4
Bit 2
Bit 0
Bit 5
Bit 3
Bit 1
Bit 15 Bit 13
Bit 11
Bit 7
The status for each bit is as follows:
OFF (0): No forced status in effect
ON (1): Forced ON or forced OFF
Timers/Counters: Status of the Completion Flag will be returned as fol-
lows:
00 (Hex): No forced status in effect
01 (Hex): Forced ON or forced OFF
6-7 Response Codes
This section describes the response codes returned with responses to FINS
commands. Response codes can be used to confirm normal completion of
command execution or to troubleshoot problems when commands fail. For fur-
ther troubleshooting information, refer to SECTION 9 Troubleshooting and
Maintenance of this manual and to the operation manuals for specific Units or
Systems.
6-7-1 Configuration
Response codes for FINS commands consist of two bytes that indicate the
result of executing a command. The structure of the response codes is shown
in the following diagram.
First byte
Second byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Main response code (MRES)
Sub-response code (SRES)
1: Relay Error Flag
1: PLC Non-fatal Error Flag
1: PLC Fatal Error Flag
The main response code (MRES) in the first byte classifies the response and
the sub-response code (SRES) in the second byte indicates details under the
If bit 7 of the first byte is ON, a network relay error has occurred. Refer to 6-7-
2 Network Relay Errors for details on troubleshooting the error.
If bit 6 or 7 of the second byte is ON, an error has occurred in the PLC or com-
puter returning the response. Refer to the operation manual for the device
returning the response for details when troubleshooting the error.
225
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Response Codes
Section 6-7
6-7-2 Network Relay Errors
A network relay error will occur whenever a command cannot reach the desti-
nation. These errors can occur for several reasons: 1) Data was not success-
fully passed between two Link Units, 2) Data was not passed successfully
between a Link Unit and another Unit, such as the PLC’s CPU Unit, or 3) The
destination of a gateway does not exist. In any case, the Unit that was not able
to transfer data will return a response indicating a network relay error.
Bit 7 of the first byte of the response code will be ON if a network relay error
has occurred. When this happens, two more bytes of data will follow the
response code to indicate the location of the error. This information, along
with the response code, should enable you to track the error.
First byte
Second byte
7
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
First word
Command code
2
6
5
4
3
1
0
7
5
4
3
2
1
0
Main response code (MRES)
Sub response code (SRES)
Second word
1: Relay Error Flag
1: PLC Non-fatal Error Flag
1: PLC Fatal Error Flag
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Third word
Error network address
Error node address
Error network address: 00 to 7F (Hex) (0 to 127 in decimal)
Error node address: Controller Link: 01 to 3E (Hex) (1 to 62 in decimal)
Ethernet: 01 to 7E (Hex) (1 to 126 in decimal)
SYSMAC NET: 01 to 7E (Hex) (1 to 126 in decimal)
SYSMAC LINK: 01 to 3E (Hex) (1 to 62 in decimal)
Relay Errors
A relay error indicates that the command did not reach the Unit to which it was
sent. There are several types of situation in which this can occur. Example 1
(below) shows a situation in which a relay error occurs when data cannot be
transferred from one Communications Unit to another in an interconnected
network. Example 2 shows a similar situation, except that the destination Unit
is something other than a Communications Unit. In Example 3, the relay error
occurs because either the specified destination node or the next relay node
does not exist.
In the three diagrams, the numbers indicate the following:
(1)The transmitted data fails to be received.
(2)The relay error and response code are returned to the command
source.
226
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Response Codes
Section 6-7
Example 1
In this example, data cannot be transferred between Controller Link Units due
to some cause such as a routing table error.
– –
2 1
MRES
SRES
C C P
L P S
K U
S C P
N P S
T U
C S C P
N P S
L
K T U
1
PS: Power Supply Unit
CPU: CPU Unit
CLK: Controller Link Unit
SNT: SYSMAC NET Link Unit
Transmission
Response
Example 2
In this example, data cannot be transferred between a Controller Link Unit and
a CPU Unit.
– –
2
1 MRES
SRES
C C P
L P S
K U
C C P
L P S
U
K
1
PS: Power Supply Unit
CPU: CPU Unit
CLK: Controller Link Unit
Transmission
Response
Example 3
In this example, the specified destination node or the next relay node does not
exist.
1
– –
SRES
2
MRES
1
C C P
L P S
K U
C CC P
P S
C S C P
P S
L N
L L
K KU
K T U
PS: Power Supply Unit
CPU: CPU Unit
CLK: Controller Link Unit
Transmission
Response
SNT: SYSMAC NET Link Unit
If an error occurs, check the MRES and SRES codes for the node in question,
and correct the problem.
6-7-3 Response Codes and Troubleshooting
The table below lists response codes (main and sub-codes) returned after
execution of the FINS commands, the probable cause of errors, and recom-
mended remedies.
Upon receipt of some commands, the destination node will issue a request to
another node; the other node is referred to as the third node.
Main code
Sub-
code
Probable cause
Remedy
00: Normal completion
00
01
---
Service was interrupted
---
Check the contents of the destination trans-
mission area of third node.
Check the data link status.
227
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Response Codes
Section 6-7
Main code
Sub-
code
Probable cause
Remedy
01: Local node error
01
Local node not part of Network
Add to Network.
02
03
04
Token time-out, node address too large Set the local node’s node address below
the maximum node address.
Number of transmit retries exceeded
Check communications with ECHOBACK
TEST. If the test fails, check network.
Maximum number of frames exceeded Either check the execution of events in the
network and reduce the number of events
occurring in one cycle, or increase the max-
imum number of frames.
05
Node address setting error (range)
Correctly set the Controller Link BIOS /N
option. Make sure the node address is
within specified range and that there are no
node addresses that are set twice.
06
Node address duplication error
Make sure that there are no node
addresses that are set twice.
02: Destination node
error
01
02
Destination node not part of Network
Add to Network.
No node with the specified node
address
Check the destination node’s node address.
03
04
Third node not part of Network
Broadcasting was specified.
Check the third node’s node address.
Check the control data and specify only one
node as the third node.
Busy error, destination node busy
Increase the number of transmit retry
attempts or re-evaluate the system so that
the destination node is not so busy receiv-
ing data.
05
Response time-out, message packet
was corrupted by noise
Increase the number of transmit retry
attempts.
Response time-out, response watch-
dog timer interval too short
Increase the value for the response watch-
dog timer interval in the control data.
Frame lost in transmission
Check the error log and correct the process.
03: Communications con- 01
troller error
Error occurred in the communications Take corrective action, referring to commu-
controller, ERC indicator is lit
nications controller errors and remedies
table at end of this section.
02
03
CPU Unit error occurred in the PLC at Clear the error in the CPU Unit (refer to the
the destination node PLC’s operation manuals).
A controller error has prevented a nor- Check network communications status and
mal response from being returned.
reset the controller board. If the error still
exists, replace the controller board.
04
Unit address setting error
Make sure the Unit address is within the
specified range and that there are no node
addresses that are set twice.
04: Not executable
01
02
An undefined command has been
used.
Check the command code and be sure that
the Unit supports it.
Cannot process command because the Check the unit model and version.
specified unit model or version is
wrong.
228
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Response Codes
Section 6-7
Main code
Sub-
code
Probable cause
Remedy
05: Routing error
01
Destination node address is not set in Set the destination node address in the
the routing table.
routing table.
02
Routing table isn’t registered.
Set the source nodes, destination nodes,
and relay nodes in the routing table.
03
04
Routing table error
Set the routing table correctly.
The maximum number of relay nodes
was exceeded in the command.
Redesign the network or reconsider the
routing table to reduce the number of relay
nodes in the command. Use a CS/CJ-series
CPU Unit with unit Ver. 2.0 or later with CX-
Programmer Ver. 4.0 or later to send com-
mands across three or more network levels.
10: Command format
error
01
02
03
04
05
The command is longer than the max. Check the command format of the com-
permissible length. mand and set it correctly.
The command is shorter than min. per- Check the command format of the com-
missible length. mand and set it correctly.
The designated number of data items Check the number of items and the data,
differs from the actual number.
and make sure that they agree.
An incorrect command format has
been used.
Check the command format of the com-
mand and set it correctly.
An incorrect header has been used.
(The local node’s relay table or relay
node’s local network table is wrong.)
Set the routing table correctly.
11: Parameter error
01
02
A correct memory area code has not
been used or Extended DM Area is not and set the appropriate code.
available.
Check the command’s memory area code
The access size specified in the com- Set the correct access size for the com-
mand is wrong, or the first address is
mand.
an odd number.
03
04
The first address is in an inaccessible Set a first address that is in an accessible
area.
area.
The end of specified word range
exceeds the acceptable range.
Check the acceptable limits of the data area
and set the word range within the limits.
Check the data link tables to be sure the
limit to link words has not been exceeded.
06
09
A non-existent program no. has been
specified.
Check the program number and be sure
that it is set correctly.
The sizes of data items in the com-
mand block are wrong.
Check the command data and be sure that
the sixes of the data items are correct.
Check the data link tables to be sure all
nodes in the refresh parameters are in the
common link parameters.
0A
The IOM break function cannot be exe- Either abort the current IOM break function
cuted because it is already being exe- processing, or wait until it is completed and
cuted.
execute the command.
Check the data link tables for node
addresses that have been set twice.
0B
0C
The response block is longer than the Check the command format and set the
max. permissible length. number of items correctly.
An incorrect parameter code has been Check the command data and reenter it cor-
specified.
rectly.
Check the data link table file for corruption.
229
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Response Codes
Section 6-7
Main code
Sub-
code
Probable cause
The data is protected.
Remedy
20: Read not possible
02
Execute the instruction again after issuing
the PROGRAM AREA PROTECT CLEAR
command to the PLC.
An attempt was made to download a
file that is being uploaded.
Check the file name and either interrupt ser-
vicing or wait for servicing to complete
before re-executing the command.
03
The registered table does not exist or is Set or reset the registered table.
incorrect.
Too many files open.
Close open files and re-execute the com-
mand.
04
05
06
07
The corresponding search data does
not exist.
---
A non-existing program no. has been
specified.
Check the program number and be sure
that it is set correctly.
A non-existing file has been specified. Check whether the correct file name was
used.
A verification error has occurred.
Check whether the memory contents are
correct and replace if incorrect.
Check the contents of the file. A read error
may have occurred.
21: Write not possible
01
02
The specified area is read-only or is
write-protected.
If the specified area is read-only, the write
cannot be performed. If it is write-protected,
turn off the write-protect switch and execute
the instruction again.
The data is protected.
Execute the instruction again after issuing
the PROGRAM AREA PROTECT CLEAR
command to the PLC.
An attempt was made to simulta-
neously download and upload a file.
Check the file name and either interrupt ser-
vicing or wait for servicing to complete
before re-executing the command.
The data link tables cannot be written Change the data link mode to manual.
manual because the Unit is set for
automatic generation.
03
05
The number of files exceeds the maxi- Write the file(s) again after erasing
mum permissible.
unneeded files, or use different disk or
Memory Card that has free space.
Too many files open.
Close open files and re-execute the com-
mand.
A non-existing program no. has been
specified.
Check the program number and be sure
that it is set correctly.
06
07
A non-existent file has been specified. Check the file name and execute again.
The specified file already exists.
Change the name of the file and execute
the instruction again.
08
Data cannot be changed.
---
230
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Response Codes
Section 6-7
Main code
Sub-
code
Probable cause
Remedy
22: Not executable in cur- 01
rent mode
The mode is wrong (executing).
Data links are active.
Check the operating mode.
Check the data link status before execution.
Check the operating mode.
02
The mode is wrong (inactive).
Data links are active.
Check the data link status before execution.
Check the PLC’s mode.
03
04
05
06
07
The PLC is in the PROGRAM mode.
The PLC is in the DEBUG mode.
The PLC is in the MONITOR mode.
The PLC is in the RUN mode.
Check the PLC’s mode.
Check the PLC’s mode.
Check the PLC’s mode.
The specified node is not the control
node.
Check which node is the control node.
08
The mode is wrong and the step can-
not be executed.
Check whether the step has active status or
not.
23: No Unit
01
02
03
A file device does not exist where spec- Mount the Memory Card or disk
ified.
The specified memory does not exist. Check the specifications of the installed file
memory.
No clock exists.
Check the model number.
24: Start/stop not possi- 01
ble
The data link tables either have not
been created or are incorrect.
Set the data link tables correctly.
25: Unit error
02
Parity/checksum error occurred
because of incorrect data.
Transfer correct data into memory.
03
I/O setting error (The registered I/O
configuration differs from the actual.)
Either change the actual configuration to
match the registered one, or generate the I/
O table again.
04
05
Too many I/O points
Redesign the system to remain within per-
missible limits.
CPU bus error (An error occurred dur- Check the Unit, Service Boards, and cable
ing data transfer between the CPU Unit connections and issue the ERROR CLEAR
and a CPU Bus Unit.)
command.
06
07
09
0A
I/O duplication error (A rack number,
unit number, or I/O word allocation has any settings that occur twice.
been duplicated.)
Check the system’s settings and eliminate
I/O bus error (An error occurred during Check the Unit, Service Boards, and cable
data transfer between the CPU Unit
and an I/O Unit.)
connections and issue the ERROR CLEAR
command.
SYSMAC BUS/2 error (An error
occurred during SYSMAC BUS/2 data connections and issue the ERROR CLEAR
transfer.)
Check the Unit, Service Boards, and cable
command.
Special I/O Unit error (An error
occurred during CPU Bus Unit data
transfer.)
Check the Unit, Service Boards, and cable
connections and issue the ERROR CLEAR
command.
0D
0F
Duplication in SYSMAC BUS word allo- Check and regenerate the I/O table.
cation.
A memory error has occurred in inter- If the error occurred in internal memory or
nal memory, in the Memory Card, or in the EM Unit, correct the data in the com-
Expansion DM during the error check. mand an execute it again.
If the error occurred in a Memory Card or
EM used for file memory, the file data has
been corrupted. Execute the MEMORY
CARD FORMAT command for the PLC.
If the above remedies do not eliminate the
error, replace the faulty memory.
10
Terminator not connected in SYSMAC Connect the terminator correctly.
BUS System.
231
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Response Codes
Section 6-7
Main code
Sub-
code
Probable cause
Remedy
The program area is not protected, so it isn’t
26: Command error
01
The specified area is not protected.
This response code will be returned if necessary to clear protection.
an attempt is made to clear protection
on an area that is not protected.
02
04
An incorrect password has been speci- Specify a password that is registered.
fied.
The specified area is protected.
Execute the command again after executing
the PROGRAM AREA PROTECT CLEAR
command for the PLC.
To many commands at destination.
The destination has received more than 5
commands. Either interrupt servicing or wait
for servicing to complete before re-execut-
ing the command.
05
The service is being executed.
Execute the command again after the ser-
vice has been completed or aborted.
06
07
The service is not being executed.
Execute the service if necessary.
Service cannot be executed from local Execute the service from a node that is part
node because the local node is not part of the data links.
of the data links.
A buffer error has prevented returning a Reset the board. If the error persists,
normal response.
replace the board.
08
09
Service cannot be executed because
necessary settings haven’t been made.
Make the necessary settings.
Service cannot be executed because
necessary settings haven’t been made the necessary settings.
in the command data.
Check the command format of and make
0A
The specified action or transition num- Execute the command again using an
ber has already been registered.
action or transition number that hasn’t been
registered.
0B
01
Cannot clear error because the cause Eliminate the cause of the error and exe-
of the error still exists.
cute the ERROR CLEAR command.
30: Access right error
The access right is held by another
node.
Execute the command again after the
access right has been released.
(Either a Programming Device at the
(The command can be executed after the
other node is executing an SFC online ACCESS RIGHT FORCED ACQUIRE or
edit, or the other node is executing an ACCESS RIGHT RELEASE command is
ACCESS RIGHT ACQUIRE or
completed. Releasing the access right
ACCESS RIGHT FORCED ACQUIRE might affect processes in progress at the
command.)
node that held the access right.)
---
40: Abort
01
Command was aborted with ABORT
command.
232
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECTION 7
Network Interconnections
This section describes the method used to connect multiple networks through CS/CJ-series, CVM1, and CV-series PLCs.
7-1 What is Network Interconnection? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1-1 Interconnecting Controller Link Networks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1-2 Interconnecting Different Types of Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2 Remote Programming and Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-1 Local Networks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-2 Remote Controller Link Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-3 Other Remote Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3 Routing Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4 Setting Routing Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4-1 Routing Table Setting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4-2 Editing Local Network Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4-3 Editing Relay Network Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4-4 Saving Routing Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4-5 Connecting to the PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
234
234
234
236
236
237
238
239
240
241
241
242
242
243
7-4-6 Routing Table Enable Bit (C200HX/HG/HE and CQM1H-series Only) 243
7-4-7 Transferring Routing Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4-8 Example Routing Table Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
243
244
233
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What is Network Interconnection?
Section 7-1
7-1 What is Network Interconnection?
Network interconnection enables commands and responses for the message
service to be sent and received across multiple networks. The four networks
listed below can be interconnected to achieve this.
FA Networks
• SYSMAC NET Link Networks
• SYSMAC LINK Networks
• Controller Link Networks
OA Network
• Ethernet Networks
7-1-1 Interconnecting Controller Link Networks
Controller Link Networks can be connected through a CS/CJ-series, CVM1,
or CV-series PLC.
Controller Link Network
Controller Link Network
CS/CJ-series,
C200HX/HG/HE, CVM1,
CV-series, or CQM1H PLC
CS/CJ-series, CVM1, or
CV-series PLC (see note)
Note A data bridge is created between Controller Link Units mounted
on the same CS/CJ-series, CVM1, or CV-series PLC.
7-1-2 Interconnecting Different Types of Networks
A CS/CJ-series, CVM1, or CV-series PLC can be used to connect a Controller
Link Network with an Ethernet, SYSMAC NET, or SYSMAC LINK Network.
Controller Link Network
Ethernet Network
CS/CJ-series,
C200HX/HG/HE, CVM1,
CV-series, or CQM1H PLC
CS/CJ-series, CVM1, or
CV-series PLC (see note)
Note A data and communications protocol gateway is created between
a Controller Link Unit and an Ethernet, SYSMAC NET, or SYSMAC
LINK Unit mounted to the same CS/CJ-series, CVM1, or CV-series PLC.
Note
1. A bridge is used between Communications Units to connect the same type
of networks.
2. A gateway is used between Communications Units to connect different
types of networks.
234
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What is Network Interconnection?
Section 7-1
Bridge
Data
Gateway
Controller Link
PLC
Controller Link
Controller Link
PLC
SYSMAC NET
Data
Data and communications
protocol gateway
• Although a C200HX/HG/HE PLC supports multiple (maximum of 2) Com-
munications Units, it cannot function as a data bridge or a data and com-
munications protocol gateway.
C200HX/HG/HE
CVM1 or CV-series PLC
• A CQM1H-series PLC supports only one Communications Unit. It cannot
function as a data bridge or a data and communications protocol gateway.
• Communications across up to eight networks, including the local network
are possible when using a CS/CJ-series CPU Unit with unit version 2.0 or
later. The following conditions and restrictions apply.
• The CPU Unit for all nodes must be a CS/CJ-series CPU Unit with unit
version 2.0 or later.
• Routing tables can be set using the CX-Net in the CX-Programmer
version 4.0 or higher.
• Communications across up to eight networks away are supported by
Controller Link and Ethernet networks only.
• DeviceNet and SYSMAC LINK networks support communications
across up to three networks, the same as previous versions.
Network 1 (local network)
Network 2
Network 3
Although 2,012 bytes of data (including the header) can be sent and received
with a Controller Link, the maximum amount of data is limited by any network
the data passes through, i.e., the network with the smallest capacity will deter-
mine the limit.
If, for example, data passes through a SYSMAC LINK network as shown in
the figure on the preceding page, the amount of data sent and received from
the Controller Link is limited to 552 bytes (including the header) because the
SYSMAC LINK Network can only handle that many bytes.
See the manual for the network you are using in order to determine the maxi-
mum amount of data for each network.
235
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Programming and Monitoring
Section 7-2
7-2 Remote Programming and Monitoring
A remote PLC can be programmed and monitored across a network from a
Programming Device connected to a PLC.
7-2-1 Local Networks
SYSMAC Support Software and CV Support Software
A Programming Device connected to a C200HX/HG/HE, CVM1, or CV-series
CPU Unit can program and monitor a C200HX/HG/HE, CVM1, or CV-series
PLC on the same network. Programming and monitoring are possible, how-
ever, only for the same type of CPU Unit as the one to which the Programming
Device is connected. For example, if the Programming Device is connected to
a CVM1 or CV-series PLC, you can only program and monitor CVM1 or CV-
series PLCs on the network.
Programming Device
SYSMAC Support
Software
Controller Link Network
Programming
and monitoring
C200HX/HG/HE
Programming Device
C200HX/HG/HE
SYSMAC Support
Software (CVM1 only)
or
Controller Link Network
CV Support Software
Programming
and monitoring
CVM1, or CV-series PLC
CVM1, or CV-series PLC
Note A factory automation node computer cannot remotely program or
monitor. The node can only monitor Controller Link Network status.
Controller Link
Support Software
236
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Programming and Monitoring
Section 7-2
CX-Programmer
A CX-Programmer connected to a CS/CJ-series, C200HX/HG/HE, CVM1,
CV-series, or CQM1H CPU Unit can program and monitor a CPU Unit on the
same network. Programming and monitoring are possible, including CPU
Units that are different to the one to which the Programming Device is con-
nected.
Programming Device
CX-Programmer
Controller Link Network
Programming
and monitoring
CS/CJ-series,
CS/CJ-series,
C200HX/HG/HE,
CVM1, CV-series,
or CQM1H PLC
C200HX/HG/HE,
CVM1, CV-series,
or CQM1H PLC
Controller Link Network
Programming
and monitoring
CS/CJ-series PLC
Note Remote programming and monitoring are possible from a factory automation
node computer using the CX-Programmer.
7-2-2 Remote Controller Link Networks
SYSMAC Support Software or CV Support Software
A Programming Device connected to a CVM1 or CV-series CPU Unit can pro-
gram and monitor a CVM1 or CV-series PLC on another Controller Link Net-
work through a CVM1 or CV-series PLC. Other types of PLC cannot be
programmed or monitored on remote networks.
Programming Device
SYSMAC Support
Software (CVM1 Only)
or
Controller Link Network
Controller Link Network
CV Support Software
Programming
and monitoring
CVM1 or
CV-series PLC
CVM1 or
CV-series PLC
CS/CJ-series, CVM1,
or CV-series PLC
Controller Link Network
Controller Link Network
Controller Link
Support Software
CS/CJ-series, CVM1,
or CV-series PLC
Note Remote programming and monitoring is not possible from computer nodes. Computer
nodes can only monitor Controller Link Network status. A Programming Device connected
to a C200HX/HG/HE PLC cannot remotely program or monitor a node on a remote network.
237
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Programming and Monitoring
Section 7-2
CX-Programmer
A CX-Programmer connected to a CS/CJ-series, C200HX/HG/HE, CVM1,
CV-series, or CQM1H-series CPU Unit can program and monitor any other
PLC on another Controller Link Network. Other types of PLC, different to the
one to which the CX-Programmer is connected can also be programmed or
monitored on remote networks.
Programming Device
CX-Programmer
Controller Link Network
Controller Link Network
Programming
and monitoring
CS/CJ-series, C200HX/HG/
HE, CVM1, CV-series, or
CQM1H-series PLC
CS/CJ-series, C200HX/HG/
HE, CVM1, CV-series, or
CQM1H-series PLC
CVM1 or
CV-series PLC
Controller Link Network
Controller Link Network
CX-Programmer
Controller Link
Support Software
CS1-series PLC
CS/CJ-series,
CVM1, or CV-
series PLC
Note Remote programming and monitoring is possible from computer nodes.
Note
1. Version 1.20 of CX-Programmer must be used for the CQM1H-series Con-
troller Link Unit.
2. Use CX-Programmer version 2.04 or higher for a CJ-series Controller Link
Unit.
7-2-3 Other Remote Networks
SYSMAC Support Software or CV Support Software
A Programming Device connected to a CVM1 or CV-series CPU Unit can pro-
gram and monitor a CVM1 or CV-series PLC on a different type of network
(SYSMAC NET or SYSMAC LINK) through a CVM1 or CV-series PLC. Other
types of PLC cannot be programmed or monitored on remote networks.
Programming Device
SYSMAC Support
Software (CVM1 Only)
or
Controller Link Network
Controller Link Network
CV Support Software
Programming
and monitoring
CVM1 or CV-series PLC
CVM1 or CV-series PLC
CVM1 or CV-series PLC
SYSMAC NET
Controller Link Network
Controller Link
Support Software
CVM1 or CV-
series PLC
Note
Remote programming and monitoring is not possible from computer nodes.
Computer nodes can only monitor Controller Link Network status.
A Programming Device connected to a C200HX/HG/HE PLC cannot remotely
program or monitor a node on a remote network.
238
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Routing Tables
Section 7-3
CX-Programmer
A CX-Programmer connected to a CS/CJ-series, C200HX/HG/HE, CVM1,
CV-series, or CQM1H-series CPU Unit can program and monitor any other
PLC on a different type of network (Ethernet, SYSMAC NET, or SYSMAC
LINK) through a CS/CJ-series, CVM1, or CV-series PLC.
Programming Device
CX-Programmer
Controller Link Network
Controller Link Network
Programming
and monitoring
CS/CJ-series,
CVM1, or CV-
series PLC
CS/CJ-series, C200HX/HG/
HE, CVM1, CV-series, or
CQM1H-series PLC
CS/CJ-series PLC
Controller Link Network
Ethernet Network
CX-Programmer
Controller Link
Support Software
C200HX/
HG/HE PLC
CS/CJ-series, CVM1,
or CV-series PLC
CS/CJ-series PLC
Note Remote programming and monitoring is possible from computer nodes.
Note
1. Version 1.20 of CX-Programmer must be used for the CQM1H-series Con-
troller Link Unit.
2. Use CX-Programmer version 2.04 or higher for a CJ-series Controller Link
Unit.
7-3 Routing Tables
Routing tables that define the communications path from the Controller Link
Unit on the local PLC to the network connected to the destination PLC must
be created in order to send and receive data across networks. Each CPU Unit
implements the message service or remote programming/monitoring to the
appropriate Unit according to the routing tables.
Creating Routing Tables
Routing tables consists of a local network table and a relay network table.
Local Network Table
A local network table provides unit numbers and network addresses corre-
sponding to the Units mounted to the PLC.
Unit number 04
Unit number 05
Unit number 06
Unit number 07
Example
Local network table
Local network
address
Unit number
1
04
05
2
Network address 1
Network address 2
Network address 3
Network address 4
3
4
06
07
Note
1. The unit number is set between 0 and 15 using the rotary switch on the
front panel of Controller Link Units for CS/CJ-series, CVM1, and CV-series
PLCs, and is the same as the operating level for C200HX/HG/HE PLCs.
Set operating level 0 for CQM1H-series Control Link Units.
239
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Routing Tables
Section 7-4
2. The network address is the address of the network connected to the Unit
(between 1 and 127). The address is set when the local network table is
created.
Relay Network Table
A relay network table provides the node and network addresses correspond-
ing to the initial relay point (first point the data must go to) en route to a target
network (end network) not directly connected to the local PLC.
The table traces the route from the relay point to the end network.
The example below shows the routing tables for the route from local node
PLC1 (network address 1, node address 1) to PLC4 (network address 3, node
address 2).
Node address 2
Unit number 0
Destination
node PLC4
Node address 1
Unit number 1
Relay node
PLC3
Relay node PLC2
Destination
Local node PLC1
Node
Node
address
3
Node
Node address 2
address
1
address
2
Node
address 1
Network
address 2
Network
address 3
Network address 1
End network
PLC1 relay network table
PLC2 relay network table
PLC3 local network table
Local
network
address
End
Relay
Relay
End
Relay
Relay
Unit number
network network node
network network node
1
1
2
2
3
3
3
3
2
2
3
0
1
Data first goes to
Data then goes to
node address 2 at
network address 2
to reach network
address 3.
We know from the
local network table
that the data goes
through local unit
number 1 to reach
network address 3.
Data goes to
node address 3 at
network address 1 to
reach network
node address 2
at network
address 3, i.e.,
the local
network.
address 3.
7-4 Setting Routing Tables
This section describes routing table settings.
Routing tables are set through the CX-Net (in CX-Programmer), SYSMAC
LINK, or Controller Link Support Software. This section describes setting pro-
cedures and setting details.
See the operating manual of the Programming Device you are using for the
specific setting procedure.
Note
1. Routing tables cannot be set through Programming Consoles.
2. Networks cannot be crossed by a Programming Device without setting
routing tables. Routing tables can therefore be set only for nodes connect-
ed to the Programming Device and other nodes in the same network. Dis-
connect and reconnect the Programming Device to each network when
setting routing tables in multiple networks.
3. Make sure that the routing tables are properly set at all nodes on the net-
work. If a message is sent to a node without correct routing tables, trans-
mission will not work properly and a response may not be returned.
240
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Routing Tables
Section 7-4
4. When using a CVM1 or CV-series CPU Unit manufactured prior to April
1996, be sure to register routing tables whether or not the PLC is connect-
ing multiple networks. The date of production can be checked on the lot
number as explained below. (The lot number is a four-digit number written
on the side panel of the CPU Unit.)
Note Routing tables are required if any of the CVM1 or CV-series CPU Units in
the network have been manufactured on or before April 1996.
Lot No.: @
@
4
6 ..... Manufactured in April 1996
Indicates the last digit of the manufacturing
year. In this example, the year is 1996.
Indicates the month of manufacture. October,
November, and December are indicated by x, y,
and z respectively. In this example, the month is
April.
5. Routing tables are handled differently with C200HX/HG/HE PLCs depend-
ing on whether they are used in a Controller Link or SYSMAC NET Net-
work. Be sure to register both Controller Link and SYSMAC NET routing
tables when SYSMAC NET Link Units are installed at the same time. See
the SYSMAC NET Link Unit Operation Manual (W114) for further details.
7-4-1 Routing Table Setting Procedure
The procedure for setting routing tables is described below.
1,2,3...
1. Edit the local network table.
Repeat the editing and
saving steps for all
nodes set with the rout-
ing tables.
2. Edit the relay network table.
3. Save the routing tables.
4. Connect the Programming Device to a PLC.
5. Turn ON the Routing Table Enable Bit for C200HX/HG/HE and CQM1H-se-
ries PLCs only.
6. Transfer the routing tables.
7-4-2 Editing Local Network Tables
Use the routing table editing function on the Programming Device to edit the
local network table as shown on the screen given below.
Local network:
Address 1 through 127 for the network connected to the Communications Unit
241
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Routing Tables
Section 7-4
SIOU Unit No.:
Unit number of the Communications Unit (operating level for C200HX/HG/HE
PLCs; always 0 for CQM1H-series Units). (CS/CJ-series, CVM1, or CV-
series: 0 to 15, C200HX/HG/HE: 0, 1, CQM1H-series: 0) Set the unit number
of all Communications Units (SYSMAC NET Link Units, SYSMAC Link Units
and Controller Link Units) as well as the address of network connected to it.
Be sure to set the same address for each network when setting routing tables
(local and relay network tables) in multiple PLCs.
7-4-3 Editing Relay Network Tables
Use the routing table editing function on the Programming Device to edit the
local network table as shown on the screen given below.
End network:
Network address of the end network (1 through 127)
Relay network:
Network address of the first relay point on the way to the end network (1
through 127)
Relay node:
Node address of the first relay point on the way to the end network
(SYSMAC NET: 1 through 126, SYSMAC LINK: 1 through 62, and Controller
Link: 1 through 32 (1 through 62 when using a CS/CJ-series Unit (CS1W-
CLK21-V1 or CJ1W-CLK21-V1) with the Wired Network 62 Node Enable Bit
turned ON, or with an optical ring network), Ethernet: 1 through 126)
Set all networks not directly connected to the PLC.
Be sure to set the same address for each network when setting routing tables
(local and relay network tables) in multiple PLCs.
Note
1. Do not set the same end network more than once with the C200HX/HG/
HE or CQM1H-series PLCs. Routing may fail.
2. The PC ID is any unique name given to a specific node.
When setting the PC ID, simply input the ID. Network and node addresses
will be input for you automatically. See the operation manual for SYSMAC,
CV, or Controller Link Support Software for further details.
7-4-4 Saving Routing Tables
After editing local and relay network tables on the Programming Device, save
the tables.
Note When setting routing tables in multiple PLCs, edit and save all routing tables
and then transfer them together to work more efficiently.
242
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Routing Tables
Section 7-4
7-4-5 Connecting to the PLC
Connect the Programming Device to a PLC in the network to transfer the rout-
ing tables. All PLCs receiving the routing table settings must have power
turned ON for the transfer.
Note The Programming Device must be disconnected and then reconnected to a
PLC on each network.
7-4-6 Routing Table Enable Bit (C200HX/HG/HE and CQM1H-series
Only)
Routing tables are written to DM 6450 through DM 6499 with C200HX/HG/HE
and CQM1H-series PLCs. Do not write any other data in these words when
using routing tables.
Make sure that bit 12 of the DM word shown below is set at 1 (ON) to allow
you to set and use routing tables.
C200HX/HG/HE
Operating level 0: DM 6400
Operating level 1: DM 6420
CQM1H
DM 6400
15
12
0
Routing Table Enable Bit
1: Enabled
0: Disabled
DM 6450 through DM 6499 can be used as desired if the Routing Table
Enable Bit is set at 0 to disabled routing tables.
7-4-7 Transferring Routing Tables
Routing tables saved on a Programming Device can be read from memory
and transferred to the PLCs on the network. First load and transfer routing
tables to the PLC connected to the Programming Device. This enables net-
works to be distinguished even when multiple Communications Units are con-
nected, and it enables routing tables to be transferred to other nodes on the
network.
Once routing tables are transferred to the PLC connected to the Programming
Device as well as all nodes on the same network, disconnect the Program-
ming Device, reconnect it to a PLC on another network, and repeat the proce-
dure.
!Caution CPU Bus Units are reset when routing tables are transferred from a Program-
ming Device to a PLC to allow set routing tables to be read. Make sure that
resetting CPU Bus Units will not cause equipment damage or dangerous sys-
tem behavior before transferring tables.
243
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Routing Tables
Section 7-4
7-4-8 Example Routing Table Settings
This section shows examples of routing table settings.
Example 1
The example below shows local network table settings when multiple CPU
Bus Units are mounted in a single CVM1 or CV-series PLC.
SYSMAC NET Link System
Network address B
Controller Link System
Network address A
SYSMAC BUS/2 System
PS: Power Supply Unit
CPU: CPU Unit
SNT: SYSMAC NET Link Unit
PLC
acting as
bridge
CLK SNT RM BSC CPU PS
CLK: Controller Link Unit
RM: SYSMAC BUS/2 Remote I/O Master
BSC: BASIC Unit
Unit number d
Unit number c
Unit number b
Unit number a
Local Network Table
Loc
SIOU
unit #
No.
Netwk
1
2
A
B
(d)
(c)
Do not register SYSMAC BUS/2 Master Units and BASIC Units in local net-
work tables because these Units do not connect to networks.
Example 2
The following example show the settings for a relay network table connecting
three networks.
Relay Network Tables
Relay
End
Netwk
PLC 1
No.
PC ID Netwk Node
1
2
B
C
A
A
b
b
Node address a
PLC 2
Network
address A
End
Relay
No.
Netwk PC ID Netwk Node
1
C
B
e
Node address b
Node address c
End
Relay
PLC 3
No.
Netwk PC ID Netwk Node
1
2
A
C
B
B
c
e
Network
address B
Node address d
End
Relay
PLC 4
No.
Netwk PC ID Netwk Node
1
A
B
c
Node address e
Node address f
End
Netwk
Relay
PLC 5
No.
Network
address C
PC ID Netwk Node
1
2
A
B
C
C
f
f
Node address g
On closer examination of the relay network table for PLC#, we see that the
relay network is B and the relay node is c when network A is the destination,
and that the relay network is B and the relay node is e when network C is the
destination.
244
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Routing Tables
Section 7-4
Example 3
The network structure example in the figure below shows routing tables for all
nodes.
Unit 5
Node 6
PLC
(1)
SNT
Network 10
Unit 3
Node 4
Unit 4
Node 5
Unit 2
Node 3
Unit 7
Node 15
PLC
(2)
PLC
(3)
CLK SNT
SNT CLK
Network 20
Network 30
PLC
(4)
PLC
(5)
PLC
(6)
PLC
(7)
CLK
CLK
CLK
CLK
Unit 0
Node 1
Unit 1
Node 2
Unit 5
Node 5
Unit 6
Node 10
Routing Tables on PLC 1
Local Network Table
Relay Network Table
Loc
Netwk
SIOU
unit#
End
No.
Relay
PC ID Netwk Node
No.
Netwk
1
2
3
010
05
1
2
3
020
030
010
010
004
005
Routing Tables on PLC 2
Local Network Table
Relay Network Table
Loc
Netwk
SIOU
unit#
End
No.
Relay
PC ID Netwk Node
No.
Netwk
1
2
3
010
020
03
02
1
2
3
030
010
005
Routing Tables on PLC 3
Local Network Table
Relay Network Table
Loc
Netwk
SIOU
unit#
End
No.
Relay
PC ID Netwk Node
No.
Netwk
1
2
3
010
030
04
07
1
2
3
020
010
004
Routing Tables on PLC 4
Local Network Table
Relay Network Table
Loc
Netwk
SIOU
unit#
End
No.
Relay
PC ID Netwk Node
No.
Netwk
1
2
3
020
00
1
2
3
010
030
020
020
003
003
245
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Routing Tables
Section 7-4
Routing Tables on PLC 5
Local Network Table
Relay Network Table
Loc
Netwk
SIOU
unit#
End
No.
Relay
PC ID Netwk Node
No.
Netwk
1
2
3
020
01
1
2
3
010
030
020
020
003
003
Routing Tables on PLC 6
Local Network Table
Relay Network Table
Loc
Netwk
SIOU
unit#
End
No.
Relay
PC ID Netwk Node
No.
Netwk
1
2
3
030
05
1
2
3
010
020
030
030
015
015
Routing Tables on PLC 7
Local Network Table
Relay Network Table
Loc
Netwk
SIOU
unit#
End
No.
Relay
PC ID Netwk Node
No.
Netwk
1
2
3
030
06
1
2
3
010
020
030
030
015
015
246
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECTION 8
Communications Timing
This section explains details on Controller Link Network communications. Refer to this section for network
8-1 Communications Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1-1 Data Transmissions over the Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1-2 Setting the Polling and Polled Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1-3 Network Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1-4 Specifying Network Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2 Communications Cycle Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2-1 Active Data Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2-2 Inactive Data Links. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-3 Data Link I/O Response Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-3-1 Data Exchange Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-3-2 Data Processing Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-3-3 Calculation Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-4 Message Delay Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-4-1 CS/CJ-series, CVM1, and CV-series PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-4-2 C200HX/HG/HE and CQM1H-series PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
248
248
249
250
251
251
251
252
253
253
254
255
265
265
270
247
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Communications Mechanism
Section 8-1
8-1 Communications Mechanism
8-1-1 Data Transmissions over the Network
Controller Link
Token
(right to send)
In a Controller Link Network, token passing is used to control network access.
The right to send, called a “token,” circulates around the network. A node that
receives the token is allowed to send data. If the node has data to send, it will
attach the data to the token and send them together. If the node has no data
to send, it will pass the token to the next node.
Data
When there is
data to send
Receive the token
Attaches data to the token and send them together
Where there is
no data to send
Passes the token to the next node
A token can be thought of as a circulating envelope. This envelope is circu-
lated through the network and the person who receives the envelope will put a
destination and a memo into the envelope to send his or her message to
somebody else. This method is called “token passing.” The Controller Link
Network is a bus network that uses token passing.
The overall network communications procedure is explained below.
1,2,3...
1. The Unit at the node that manages the network, called the “polling node,”
transfers the token. The token is circulated through the network in ascend-
ing order of node addresses. One cycle in which the token is circulated
among all nodes on the network is called a “token circulation cycle.”
2. After one token circulation cycle is complete, the polling node checks the
network connection status. One cycle in which the connection status of all
nodes on the network is checked is called a “polling cycle.”
3. After one polling cycle is complete, the polling node transfers the token
again.
The procedure is then repeated. In a Controller Link Network, the total time
required for a token circulation cycle and a polling cycle is called the “commu-
nications cycle time.” Communications processing is executed by repeating
the communications cycle.
248
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Communications Mechanism
Section 8-1
Check
Check
Token circulation
cycle
Polling cycle
Token circulation
cycle
Polling cycle
Communications cycle time
Communications cycle time
Polling Node
Each Controller Link Network always has a Unit that controls communications
within the network. This Unit is called the “polling node.” Normally, the node
that has the smallest node address in the network is the polling node (see
note). All Units at nodes other than the polling node are called “polled nodes”
(or polled units). The polling node controls the token, checks the network, and
performs other relevant tasks. Should the polling node break down, the node
with the next smallest node address is automatically selected as the polling
node to prevent the entire network from shutting down.
Note The node with the smallest node address is not always the polling node,
depending on the Unit start-up sequence, models, settings, and Unit status.
When the polling node breaks down, the next polling node is temporarily dis-
connected from the network, reconstructs the network, and then reconnects
to the network. Polling nodes remain connected to the network.
8-1-2 Setting the Polling and Polled Nodes
Use the Programming Device for the PLC to set Units as polling node or
polled node in the DM Parameter Area.
CS/CJ-series Controller Link Units
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
–: Other settings
DM 30000 + 100 × N
N: Unit number
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
–
–
0
0
0
–
Polling node/polled node bit
0: Polling node
1: Polled node
C200HX/HG/HE Controller Link Units
Operating level 0
DM 6400
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
–
0
–
0
0
0
0
0
0
–
–
0
0
0
0
–: Other settings
–: Other settings
–: Other settings
Polling node/polled node bit
0: Polling node
1: Polled node
Operating level 1
DM 6420
CVM1 and CV-series Controller Link Units
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
DM 2000 + 100 × N
N: Unit number
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
–
–
0
0
0
–
Polling node/polled node bit
0: Polling node
1: Polled node
CQM1H-series Controller Link Units
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
DM 6400
0
–
0
–
0
0
0
0
0
0
–
–
0
0
0
0
Polling node/polled node bit
0: Polling node
1: Polled node
249
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Communications Mechanism
Section 8-1
If the node is always to be connected as a polled node when the power is
turned on, set it as a polled node. If the node can become a polling node
a polling node will serve as the actual polling node. Except for maintenance
after Unit replacement (see 9-6 Handling Precautions), set the Units all nodes
as polling nodes (set the polling node/polled node bit to “0”).
8-1-3 Network Parameters
Network parameters are also used to control network operations. Network
parameters are read from the polling node and distributed to all other nodes
when the Controller Link Network is started. In this way, all nodes on the net-
work always have the same network parameter settings. If nodes are con-
nected to the network halfway during network operation, the network
parameter settings will also be distributed to these nodes when they are con-
nected. The following three network parameters can be specified.
Maximum Node Address
This parameter specifies the maximum node address of nodes to be checked
by the polling node. The default is 32. (See note.) Reducing the setting of this
parameter reduces the number of nodes checked by the polling node and can
thus avoids unnecessary check operations. However, if the network contains
nodes with node addresses greater than the setting of the parameter, these
nodes will not be connected to the network.
Note The default maximum node address will be set to 62 when the Wired Network
62 Node Enable Bit in the DM Parameter Area software switches of the
CS1W-CLK21-V1 or CJ1W-CLK21-V1 Unit is ON and the Unit is restarted.
No. of Polled Nodes per
Communications Cycle
This parameter specifies the number of nodes to be checked (polled) by the
polling node during each polling cycle. The default is 4. Setting this parameter
to a high value increases the communications cycle time, but reduces the time
required to recognize that nodes have been removed from or added to the
network. Reducing the setting of this parameter shortens the communications
cycle time but delays a network response when a node is disconnected from
or connected to the network.
No. of Event-frames per
Communications Cycle
This parameter specifies the maximum number of event frames (communica-
tions other than data links, such as message service transmissions) that can
be transferred during a communications cycle. Specify a value in units of 128
bytes. The default is 35 (128 × 35 = 4,480 bytes).
Increasing the setting of this parameter increases the communications cycle
Too small a parameter value restricts event communications, resulting in an
error. See 8-2 Communications Cycle Time (on page 251) for the effects of
network parameters on communication cycle times.
250
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Communications Cycle Time
Section 8-2
8-1-4 Specifying Network Parameters
The network parameters can be specified from the Controller Link Support
Software. This section describes only the allowable setting range for each net-
work parameter. Refer to the Controller Link Support Software Operation
Manual (W308) for setting procedures.
The following table shows the setting range and default for network parame-
ters.
Network parameter
Setting
range
Default
value
Maximum node address
2 to 32
(See note 1.) (See note
1.)
32
Number of polled nodes per communications cycle
1 to 31
4
Maximum no. of event-frames per communications
cycle
6 to 238
35
The network parameters become valid immediately after being set.
Note
1. The setting range will be 2 to 62 and the default value will be 62 when the
Wired Network 62 Node Enable Bit in the DM Parameter Area software
switches of the CS1W-CLK21-V1 or CJ1W-CLK21-V1 Unit is ON and the
Unit is restarted.
2. Always stop the data link before changing network parameters.
3. Specify a value for the maximum node address that is equal to or greater
than the maximum node address in the Controller Link Network.
4. For the CVM1 and CV-series PLCs, always set the System Protect Key
Switch on the CPU Unit to NORMAL. Otherwise, the network parameter
settings will not be stored normally.
5. The maximum node address cannot be changed to 32 when the Wired
Network 62 Node Enable Bit is ON in the DM Parameter Area software
switches of a CS1W-CLK21-V1 or CJ1W-CLK21-V1 Unit with unit version
1.2 or later.
8-2 Communications Cycle Time
This section describes how to calculate the communications cycle time.
8-2-1 Active Data Links
The following equations are used to calculate the communications cycle time
when data links are operating.
Wired Systems
Baud rate
Equation
2 Mbps
1 Mbps
500 Kbps
10 × A + 600 × B + 290 × C + 320 × D + 4 × E + 3,290 (µs)
18 × A + 1,150 × B + 370 × C + 360 × D + 8 × E + 3,770 (µs)
34 × A + 2,260 × B + 530 × C + 440 × D + 16 × E + 4,730 (µs)
Note A: Total number of data link words within the network
(total number of words in send areas of all nodes)
B: Number of polled nodes per comm cycle
(value specified in the network parameters)
C: Number of nodes connected to the network
D: Number of nodes that send messages during the
communications cycle
251
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Communications Cycle Time
Section 8-2
E: Total number of bytes in messages transmitted during the
communications cycle
The number of bytes in each message differs according to the instruction
being issued.
Instruction
When sent
When received
SEND
Number of words to be sent × 2 + 14
18
RECV
CMND
18
Number of words to be received
× 2 + 14
Number of bytes in response
data
Number of bytes in command
data + 10
Calculation Example
Communications conditions are as follows:
Transmission medium:
Baud rate:
Twisted-pair cable
2 Mbps
Network parameters:
Defaults
32
Max node address:
Polled nodes per comm cycle:
Event-frames per comm cycle:
Network configuration:
Total number of data link words:
Nodes that send messages:
Bytes in all messages sent:
4
35
8 nodes
8,000 words
2 nodes
2,012 × 2 bytes
In this example, A to E in the equation have the following values.
A: 8,000
B:
C:
D:
4
8
2
E: 4,024
The communications cycle time is thus as follows:
10 × 8,000 + 600 × 4 + 290 × 8 + 320 × 2 + 4 × 4,024 + 3,290 = 104,746 (µs)
≅ 105 (ms)
8-2-2 Inactive Data Links
The following equations are used to calculate a communications cycle time
when the data link is inactive.
Wired Systems
Baud rate
Equation
2 Mbps
1 Mbps
600 × B + 110 × C + 320 × D + 4 × E + 2,290 (µs)
1,150 × B + 150 × C + 360 × D + 8 × E + 2,690 (µs)
500 Kbps 2,260 × B + 230 × C + 440 × D + 16 × E + 3,490 (µs)
Note B: Number of polled nodes per communications cycle
(value specified in the network parameter)
C: Number of nodes connected to network
D: Number of nodes that send messages during the
communications cycle
E: Total number of bytes in messages transmitted during the
communications cycle
252
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Link I/O Response Time
Section 8-3
The number of bytes in each message differs according to the instruction
being issued.
Instruction
SEND
When sent
When received
Number of words to be sent × 2 14
+ 18
RECV
CMND
18
Number of words to be
received × 2 + 14
Number of bytes in response
data
Number of bytes in command
data + 10
Calculation Example
Communications conditions are as follows:
Transmission medium:
Baud rate:
Twisted-pair cables
2 Mbps
Network parameters:
Defaults
Max node address:
32
Polled nodes per comm cycle:
Event-frames per comm cycle:
Network configuration:
Nodes that send messages:
Bytes in all messages sent:
4
35
8 nodes
2 nodes
2,012 × 2 bytes
In this example, B to E in the equation have the following values.
B:
C:
D:
4
8
2
E: 4,024
The communications cycle time is thus as follows:
600 × 4 + 110 × 8 + 320 × 2 + 4 × 4,024 + 2,290 = 22,306 (µs)
≅ 22 (ms)
8-3 Data Link I/O Response Time
When accurate communications timing is required, you need to understand
data exchange timing and the time required for data transmission and recep-
tion via data links. Use the information described in this section as reference
information for system construction.
8-3-1 Data Exchange Timing
This section describes data exchange timing for data links between the Con-
troller Link Unit and the PLC’s CPU Unit. Data exchange is executed as inter-
rupt processing during CPU Bus Unit or Programming Device/Host Link
servicing performed by the CPU Unit. This interrupt processing is executed
each time data exchange between the local node and each node connected
via a data link is completed.
Data exchange timing differs depending on the CPU Unit model and the CPU
Unit the Execute Process (asynchronous or synchronous) specified in PLC
Setup, as described below.
253
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Link I/O Response Time
Section 8-3
CVM1 and CV-series PLCs
Under Asynchronous
Operation
When a CVM1 or CV-series CPU Unit is operating in asynchronous mode,
data exchange with the Controller Link Unit is executed as interrupt process-
ing during peripheral processing, regardless of the cycle time of PLC instruc-
tion execution. Data exchange timing is as follows:
PLC cycle time
Execution
Execution
Execution
Instruction execution
PLC processing
I/O refreshing
I/O refreshing
I/O refreshing
Peripheral servicing interval
Programming
Programming
Device/Host Link
service
Programming
Device/Host Link
service
CPU Bus
Unit service
CPU Bus
Unit service
CPU Bus
Unit service
Device/Host Link
Peripheral processing
service
Basic processing
Interrupt processing
for data exchange
Interrupt processing
for data exchange
Interrupt processing
for data exchange
Basic processing
Basic processing
More than one data exchange can be executed during a PLC cycle, depend-
required for the interrupt processing (see 8-3-2 Data Processing Time on
page 254).
CS/CJ-series PLCs, CVM1
and CV-series PLCs in
Synchronous Mode,
CQM1H-series PLCs, and
C200HX/HG/HE PLCs
When a CS/CJ-series, CQM1H-series, CVM1, or CV-series PLC is operating
in synchronous mode, a CQM1H-series, or a C200HX/HG/HE PLC is operat-
ing, data exchange with the Controller Link Unit is executed as processing
during peripheral processing for the PLC cycle. Data exchange timing is as
follows:
PLC cycle time
Peripheral
service
PLC processing
Execution
I/O refreshing
Execution
Processing for
data exchange
Basic processing
Basic processing
If processing for data exchange is executed, the PLC cycle time will be length-
ened by the time required for the interrupt processing (see 8-3-2 Data Pro-
cessing Time below).
8-3-2 Data Processing Time
The time required to process data exchange (data processing time) can be
roughly estimated as shown in the following table.
CPU Unit
CS1-H, CJ1-H, CJ1M CPU Unit
CS1, CJ1 CPU Unit
Equation estimating data processing time
0.1 ms + Number of transfer words × 0.7 µs
1.5 ms + Number of transfer words × 1 µs
1.7 ms + Number of transfer words × 1 µs
CVM1-series CPU Unit
The number of words processed in a single data exchange is shown in the fol-
lowing table for each series of PLC. If the number of data link words exceeds
the value shown in the table, data exchange will be executed as several sepa-
rate processes.
254
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Link I/O Response Time
Section 8-3
PLCs
Words per data exchange
Approx. 7,800 words
Approx. 3,700 words
Approx. 4,000 words
Approx. 1,200 words
CS/CJ-series PLCs
CVM1 and CV-series PLCs
C200HX/HG/HE PLCs
CQM1H-series PLCs
Note
1. Use the above equations only if only one Controller Link Unit is mounted
on the PLC. If other CPU Bus Units are mounted on the PLC, obtain the
refresh times for each CPU Bus Unit and add to the above equations.
2. The execution of some items takes precedence over data link area refresh-
ing. For example, data link area refreshing will not take place during exe-
cution of the SEND(192), RECV(193), or FAL(006) instruction.
8-3-3 Calculation Example
The data links of the Controller Link Unit require a slight time delay from the
time the data link area of one node is changed until this change is reflected in
the data link area at another node. This time delay is called the data link I/O
response time. The following is a calculation example of the maximum and
minimum I/O response times for the system configuration shown below.
CLK: Controller Link Unit
PLC
C
PLC
C
L
System configuration
L
Baud rate:
2 Mbps
32
K
K
#1
Maximum node address:
Number of polled nodes per comm cycle: 4
Number of event-frames per comm cycle: 35
#1
Nodes in network:
Nodes in data links:
Words sent in area 1:
Words in area 2:
8 nodes
8 nodes
8 words per node
16 words per node
Input
Input
LRXXXX
LRXXXX
Output
No messages communications are performed.
A single Controller Link Unit is mounted to each
CPU Rack.
The data link I/O response time depends on the communications cycle time,
input ON delay, output ON delay, and the cycle times of the PLCs involved.
The values are detailed below.
Communications Cycles
Time
Communications cycle time =
10 × (8 + 16) × 8 + 600 × 4 + 290 × 8 + 320 × 0 + 4 × 0 + 3,290
= 9,930 µs ≅ 9.9 ms
Input ON Delay
Output ON Delay
Cycle Times
The input ON delay is the time it takes for an input device to turn ON an input
to the PLC after receiving an input signal. In this system the input ON delay is
1.5 ms.
The output ON delay is the time it takes for an output device to turn ON an
output signal after receiving an output from the PLC. In this system the output
ON delay is 15 ms.
The cycle time of the PLC at node #1 is 25 ms.
The cycle time of the PLC at node #7 is 10 ms.
255
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Link I/O Response Time
Section 8-3
CVM1, CV-series, CS/CJ-series PLCs Under Synchronous Operation or C200HX/HG/
HE and CQM1H-series PLCs
Maximum I/O Response
Time
The maximum data link I/O response time is calculated for four cases.
Case 1
The following diagram illustrates the data flow that will produce the maximum
data link I/O response time when the cycle time of the PLC at nodes #1 and 7
are greater than the communications cycle time.
Input
I/O refresh
Input device
Data exchange
Input ON delay
1 cycle
X
(1)
Program
PLC at node #1
X
(2)
Controller Link Unit
transmission processing
Data link transmission
X
X
(3)
Controller Link Unit
transmission processing
Communications
cycle time
Previous communica
tions cycle data
X
(4)
Program
PLC at node #7
1 cycle
Output device
Output ON delay
Output
Data link I/O response time
There are four points shown in the diagram above where processing is
delayed, increasing the data link I/O response time.
1,2,3...
1. The input arrives in the PLC just after I/O refreshing, causing a delay of up
to one cycle before the input is read into the PLC.
2. Data exchange occurs just after the PLC at node #1 passes the token that
makes it the polling node, causing a delay of up to one communications cy-
cle time before the data is transferred in data link processing.
3. At node #7, data from the previous data exchange is still being transferred,
causing a delay of up to one cycle before the input is read into the PLC.
4. The data transferred in data link processing arrives at the PLC at node #7
after data exchange, so the data will not be read into the PLC until the next
data exchange, causing a delay of up to 1 to 2 cycle.
The maximum number of words that can be exchanged in a single data ex-
change is approx. 7,800 words for CS/CJ-series PLCs, approx. 3,700
words for CVM1 and CV-series PLCs, approx. 4,000 for C200HX/HG/HE
PLCs, and approx. 1,200 words for CQM1H-series PLCs.
256
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Link I/O Response Time
Section 8-3
The equation for maximum data link I/O response time is as follows:
Input ON delay
1.5 ms
Cycle time of PLC at node #1 × 2
Communications cycle time × 3
PLC cycle time at node #7 × 3 (See note.)
Output ON delay
15 ms × 2
9.9 ms × 3
20 ms × 3 (See note.)
15 ms
Total (data link I/O response time)
136.2 ms
Note If the total number of data link words is greater than the maximum number of
words that can be exchanged per data exchange, the maximum data link I/O
response time will be cycle time of PLC at node #7 × 4.
In case of the CQM1H, however, the cycle time will be incremented by the
value obtained from dividing the total number of data link words by the maxi-
mum number of words (1,200 words) per time.
For example, if the total number of data link words is 5,000, the result will be
as shown below.
5,000/1,200 = 2.5 (approx. 3)
Cycle time of PLC at node #7 × (3+3)
The PLC cycle time when data link words exceed 12,000 using a CS/CJ-
series Controller Link Unit with unit version 1.2 or later is calculated as fol-
lows.
12,000 to 15,600 (approx.) words: × 3
15,600 (approx.) to 20,000 words: × 4
Noise may increase I/O delays.
Case 2
The following diagram illustrates the data flow that will produce the maximum
data link I/O response time when the cycle time of the PLC at node #1 ≥ the
communications cycle time and the cycle time of the PLC at node #7 < the
communications cycle time.
257
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Link I/O Response Time
Section 8-3
Input
I/O refresh
Data exchange
Input device
Input ON delay
1 cycle
X
(1)
Program
PLC at node #1
X
(2)
Controller Link Unit
transmission processing
Data link transmission
Controller Link Unit
transmission processing
Communications
cycle time
(3)
X
Program
PLC at node #7
1 cycle
Output device
Output ON
delay
Data link I/O response time
Output
There are three points shown in the diagram above where processing is
delayed, increasing the data link I/O response time.
1,2,3...
1. The input arrives in the PLC just after I/O refreshing, causing a delay of up
to one cycle before the input is read into the PLC.
2. Data exchange occurs just after the PLC at node #1 passes the token that
makes it the polling node, causing a delay of up to one communications cy-
cle time before the data is transferred in data link processing.
3. The data transferred in data link processing arrives at the PLC at node #7
after data exchange, so the data will not be read into the PLC until the next
data exchange, causing a delay of up to 1 to 2 cycle.
The maximum number of words that can be exchanged in a single data ex-
change is approx. 7,800 words for CS/CJ-series PLCs, approx. 3,700
words for CVM1 and CV-series PLCs, approx. 4,000 for C200HX/HG/HE
PLCs, and approx. 1,200 words for CQM1H-series PLCs.
The equation for maximum data link I/O response time is as follows:
Input ON delay
1.5 ms
Cycle time of PLC at node #1 × 2
Communications cycle time × 3
15 ms × 2
9.9 ms × 3
PLC cycle time at node #7 × 2 (See note.) 8 ms × 2 (See note.)
Output ON delay
15 ms
Total (data link I/O response time)
92.2 ms
Note If the total number of data link words is greater than the maximum number of
words that can be exchanged per data exchange, the maximum data link I/O
response time will be cycle time of PLC at node #7 × 3.
In case of the CQM1H, however, the cycle time will be incremented by the
value obtained from dividing the total number of data link words by the maxi-
258
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Link I/O Response Time
Section 8-3
mum number of words (1,200 words) per time.
For example, if the total number of data link words is 5,000, the result will be
as shown below.
5,000/1,200 = 2.5 (approx. 3)
Cycle time of PLC at node #7 × (2+3)
The PLC cycle time when data link words exceed 12,000 using a CS/CJ-
series Controller Link Unit with unit version 1.2 or later is calculated as fol-
lows.
12,000 to 15,600 (approx.) words: × 3
15,600 (approx.) to 20,000 words: × 4
Noise may increase I/O delays.
Case 3
The following diagram illustrates the data flow that will produce the maximum
data link I/O response time when the cycle time of the PLC at node #1 < the
communications cycle time and the cycle time of the PLC at node #7 ≥ the
communications cycle time.
Input
I/O refresh
Input device
Input ON delay
Data exchange
1 cycle
X
(1)
Program
PLC at node #1
X
(2)
A
Controller Link Unit
transmission processing
Data link transmission
X
(3)
Controller Link Unit
transmission processing
Communications
cycle time
Previous communications
cycle data
X
(4)
Program
PLC at node #7
1 cycle
Output device
Output ON delay
Output
Data link I/O response time
There are four points shown in the diagram above where processing is
delayed, increasing the data link I/O response time.
1,2,3...
1. The input arrives in the PLC just after I/O refreshing, causing a delay of up
to one cycle before the input is read into the PLC.
2. At point A, data from the previous exchange is still being transferred, so
new data cannot be exchanged, causing a delay of one communications
cycle time. Furthermore, the data exchange then occurs just after the PLC
at node #1 passes the token for the polling node, causing another delay of
one communications cycle time before the data is transferred in data link
processing.
259
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Link I/O Response Time
Section 8-3
3. At node #7, data from the previous data exchange is still being transferred,
causing a delay of up to one cycle before the input is read into the PLC.
4. The data transferred in data link processing arrives at the PLC at node #7
after data exchange, so the data will not be read into the PLC until the next
data exchange, causing a delay of up to 1 to 2 cycle.
The maximum number of words that can be exchanged in a single data ex-
change is approx. 7,800 words for CS/CJ-series PLCs, approx. 3,700
words for CVM1 and CV-series PLCs, approx. 4,000 for C200HX/HG/HE
PLCs, and approx. 1,200 words for CQM1H-series PLCs.
The equation for maximum data link I/O response time is as follows:
Input ON delay
1.5 ms
Cycle time of PLC at node #1 × 2
Communications cycle time × 3
PLC cycle time at node #7 × 3 (See note.)
Output ON delay
8 ms × 2
9.9 ms × 3
20 ms × 3 (See note.)
15 ms
Total (data link I/O response time)
122.2 ms
Note If the total number of data link words is greater than the maximum number of
words that can be exchanged per data exchange, the maximum data link I/O
response time will be cycle time of PLC at node #7 × 4.
In case of the CQM1H, however, the cycle time will be incremented by the
value obtained from dividing the total number of data link words by the maxi-
mum number of words (1,200 words) per time.
For example, if the total number of data link words is 5,000, the result will be
as shown below.
5,000/1,200 = 2.5 (approx. 3)
Cycle time of PLC at node #7 × (3+3)
The PLC cycle time when data link words exceed 12,000 using a CS/CJ-
series Controller Link Unit with unit version 1.2 or later is calculated as fol-
lows.
12,000 to 15,600 (approx.) words: × 3
15,600 (approx.) to 20,000 words: × 4
Noise may increase I/O delays.
260
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Link I/O Response Time
Section 8-3
Case 4
The following diagram illustrates the data flow that will produce the maximum
data link I/O response time when the cycle time of the PLC at node #1 < the
communications cycle time and the cycle time of the PLC at node #7 < the
communications cycle time.
Input
I/O refresh
Input device
Data exchange
Input ON delay
1 cycle
X
(1)
Program
PLC at node #1
X
(2)
A
Controller Link Unit
transmission processing
Data link transmission
Controller Link Unit
transmission processing
Communications
cycle time
(3)
Previous communications
cycle data
X
Program
PLC at node #7
1 cycle
Output device
Output ON
delay
Data link I/O response time
Output
There are three points shown in the diagram above where processing is
delayed, increasing the data link I/O response time.
1,2,3...
1. The input arrives in the PLC just after I/O refreshing, causing a delay of up
to one cycle before the input is read into the PLC.
2. At point A data from the previous data exchange is still being transferred,
so the new data cannot be exchanged, causing a delay of up to one com-
munications cycle time. Furthermore, the data exchange then occurs just
after the PLC at node #1 passes the token that makes it the polling node,
causing another delay of up to one communications cycle time before the
data is transferred in data link processing.
3. The data transferred in data link processing arrives at the PLC at node #7
while data exchange is taking place, so the data will not be read into the
PLC until the next data exchange, causing a delay of up to 1 to 2 cycle.
The maximum number of words that can be exchanged in a single data ex-
change is approx. 7,800 words for CS/CJ-series PLCs, approx. 3,700
words for CVM1 and CV-series PLCs, approx. 4,000 for C200HX/HG/HE
PLCs, and approx. 1,200 words for CQM1H-series PLCs.
261
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Link I/O Response Time
Section 8-3
The equation for maximum data link I/O response time is as follows:
Input ON delay
1.5 ms
Cycle time of PLC at node #1 × 2
Communications cycle time × 4
PLC cycle time at node #7 × 2 (See note.)
Output ON delay
8 ms × 2
9.9 ms × 4
8 ms × 2 (See note.)
15 ms
Total (data link I/O response time)
88.1 ms
Note If the total number of data link words is greater than the maximum number of
words that can be exchanged per data exchange, the maximum data link I/O
response time will be cycle time of PLC at node #7 × 3.
In case of the CQM1H, however, the cycle time will be incremented by the
value obtained from dividing the total number of data link words by the maxi-
mum number of words (1,200 words) per time.
For example, if the total number of data link words is 5,000, the result will be
as shown below.
5,000/1,200 = 2.5 (approx. 3)
Cycle time of PLC at node #7 × (2+3)
The PLC cycle time when data link words exceed 12,000 using a CS/CJ-
series Controller Link Unit with unit version 1.2 or later is calculated as fol-
lows.
12,000 to 15,600 (approx.) words: × 3
15,600 (approx.) to 20,000 words: × 4
Noise may increase I/O delays.
Minimum Response Time
Input
I/O refresh
Input device
Data exchange
Input ON delay
1 cycle
Program
PLC at node #1
Controller Link Unit
transmission processing
Data link transmission
1 cycle
Communications
cycle time
Program
PLC at node #7
Output device
Output ON
delay
Data link I/O response time
Output
262
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Link I/O Response Time
Section 8-3
The equation for minimum data link I/O response time is as follows:
Input ON delay
---
Cycle time of PLC at node #1
PLC cycle time at node #7 (See note.)
Output ON delay
15 ms
20 ms (See note.)
---
Total (data link I/O response time)
35 ms
Note If the total number of data link words is greater than the maximum number of
words that can be exchanged per data exchange, the maximum data link I/O
response time will be cycle time of PLC at node #7 × 3.
In case of the CQM1H, however, the cycle time will be incremented by the
value obtained from dividing the total number of data link words by the maxi-
mum number of words (1,200 words) per time.
For example, if the total number of data link words is 5,000, the result will be
as shown below.
5,000/1,200 = 2.5 (approx. 3)
Cycle time of PLC at node #7 × (1+3)
Noise may increase I/O delays.
CVM1 and CV-series PLCs Under Asynchronous Operation
Maximum Response Time
Input
Input device
I/O refresh
Input ON delay
(1)
1 cycle
(2)
Program
PLC at node #1
Peripheral servicing interval
Controller Link Unit transmission processing
Data link transmission
(3)
Communications
cycle time
Controller Link Unit transmission processing
Previous communica-
tions cycle data
(4)
Peripheral servicing interval
Program
PLC at node #7
1 cycle
Output device
Output ON
delay
Output
Data link I/O response time
There are five points shown in the diagram above where processing is
delayed, increasing the data link I/O response time.
1,2,3...
1. The input arrives in the PLC just after I/O refreshing, causing a delay of up
to one cycle before the input is read into the PLC.
263
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Link I/O Response Time
Section 8-3
2. Data exchange occurs just after the PLC at node #1 passes the token that
makes it the polling node, causing a delay of up to one communications cy-
cle time before the data is transferred in data link processing.
3. At node #7, data from the previous data exchange is still being transferred,
causing a delay of up to one cycle before the input is read into the PLC.
4. The data transferred in data link processing arrives at the PLC at node #7
after data exchange, so the data will not be read into the PLC until the next
data exchange, causing a delay of up to one peripheral servicing interval.
Up to 3,700 words can be transferred in a single data exchange, so a delay
of another peripheral servicing interval will occur if more than 3,700 words
are being transferred.
5. The data is received after the PLC at node #7 has executed the instruction,
causing a delay of up to one cycle time.
Assume that the peripheral servicing interval of the PLCs at nodes #1 and #7
is 10 ms. The equation for maximum data link I/O response time is as follows:
Input ON delay
1.5 ms
Cycle time of PLC at node #1 × 2
Peripheral servicing interval of PLC at
node #1
15 ms × 2
10 ms
Communications cycle time × 3
9.9 ms × 3
Peripheral servicing interval of PLC at
node #7 × 2
10 ms × 2
PLC cycle time at node #7 × 2 (See note.) 20 ms × 2 (See note.)
Output ON delay
15 ms
Total (data link I/O response time)
146.2 ms
Note If the total number of data link words is greater than the maximum number of
words that can be exchanged per data exchange, the maximum data link I/O
response time will be cycle time of PLC at node #7 × 3.
Noise may increase I/O delays.
Minimum Response Time
Input
Input device
1 cycle
I/O refresh
Input ON delay
■ Program
PLC at node #1
Peripheral servicing interval
Data processing time
Data link transmission
Data processing time
Peripheral servicing interval
Program ■
PLC at node #7
Output device
Output
ON delay
Data link I/O response time
264
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Message Delay Times
Section 8-4
In this case, the data processing time required for data exchange and the data
transmission time are not negligible and need to be included in the calcula-
Data Processing Time (see page 254.)
0.0025 × (8 + 16) × 8 + 4.7 = 5.18 ≅ 5.2 ms
Data Transmission Time
Data transmission time varies with the baud rate.
Baud rate
2 Mbps
Data transmission time
Number of data link words × 0.008 ms
Number of data link words × 0.016 ms
1 Mbps
500 Kbps Number of data link words × 0.032 ms
In this example, the number of data link words is (8 + 16) × 8 = 192, so the
data transmission time can be determined as follows:
0.008 × (8 + 16) × 8 = 1.536 ≅ 1.5 ms
Assume that the sum of the instruction execution time and I/O refresh time for
the PLCs at nodes #1 and #7 is 1 ms. The equation for minimum data link I/O
response time is as follows:
Input ON delay
---
Instruction execution time + I/O refresh
time for PLC at node #1
1 ms
Data processing time
Data link transmission time
Data processing time
5.2 ms
1.5 ms
5.2 ms
1 ms
Instruction execution time + I/O refresh
time for PLC at node #7
Output ON delay
---
Total (data link I/O response time)
13.9 ms
Noise may increase I/O delays.
8-4 Message Delay Times
The two charts which follow indicate the sequence of processing which will
enable users to calculate the maximum delay time to be expected between
the time SEND(192) or RECV(193) is executed and the time the data is stored
in the destination or source node’s memory area, ready for use by other
instructions in the program.
8-4-1 CS/CJ-series, CVM1, and CV-series PLCs
SEND
The following diagram indicates the data flow which will yield the maximum
delay time from the time SEND(192)/SEND(90) is executed by the user pro-
gram to the time the Controller Link Unit stores the data in the destination
Unit’s memory.
265
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Message Delay Times
Section 8-4
Note Be sure to take into account the time required for data links and program exe-
cution, which are not included in the following example.
SEND(192)/SEND(90)
executed
Link Unit servicing (source node)
Link Service processing (source node)
Transmission processing
Communications cycle
Transmission delay
Reception processing
Link Service processing
(destination node)
Link Service
processing
(source node)
Max. transmission delay
Data stored
Max. transmission delay = Link Unit servicing interval (source node) + Link
service processing (source node) + Transmission processing + Communica-
tions cycle time + Transmission delay + Reception processing + Link Unit ser-
vicing interval (destination node) + Link service processing (destination node)
Link Servicing Interval (Source and Destination Nodes)
Link servicing depends on the execution mode of the PLC. The execution
modes on the source and destination modes need not be the same.
For synchronous execution, links are serviced once per PLC execution cycle.
For asynchronous execution, links are serviced according to the peripheral
servicing interval. Refer to the operation manual for the PLC for details. Refer
to the CVM1 and CV-series PLCs Operation Manual: Ladder Diagrams
(W202) or CS/CJ-series PLCs Instructions Reference Manual (W340) for
details.
Link Service Processing (Source and Destination Nodes)
Link service processing is the same as the PLC’s peripheral servicing and is
approximately 1 ms for Controller Link Units.
Transmission Processing
Number of words transferred × 0.00075 ms + 2 ms
Communications Cycle Time (with Data Links Inactive)
See 8-2 Communications Cycle Time (on page 251).
Transmission Delay Time
Transmission delay time varies with the baud rate.
Baud rate
2 Mbps
Transmission delay time
Number of words transferred × 0.008 + 0.112 ms
Number of words transferred × 0.016 + 0.224 ms
1 Mbps
500 Kbps Number of words transferred × 0.032 + 0.448 ms
266
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Message Delay Times
Section 8-4
Reception Processing
Number of words transferred × 0.00075 + 1.3 ms
Note The I/O response time can increase due to noise or restrictions on the number
of frames that can be transmitted while data links are operating.
Example
In this example, the maximum transmission delay is calculated for an instruc-
tion sending 256 words of data in a system with 32 nodes. Network specifics
are detailed below:
Baud rate:
Max. node address:
Number of nodes:
2 Mbps
32
32
Number of polled nodes per comm cycle: 4
Source node execution:
Destination node execution:
Number of words:
Synchronous
Asynchronous
256
Data link:
Inactive
Link servicing interval (source node)
Link service processing (source node)
Transmission processing
PLC cycle time (source node)
1 ms
0.00075 × 256 + 2 = 2.192 ≅
2.2 ms
Communications cycle time (See note.)
Transmission delay
600 × 4 + 110 × 32 + 320 × 0 + 4 ×
0 + 2,290 = 8,210 µs ≅ 8.2 ms
0.008 × 256 + 0.112 = 2.16 ≅
2.2 ms
Reception processing
0.00075 × 256 + 1.13 = 1.492 ≅
1.5 ms
Link servicing interval (destination node)
As required by Programming
Device
Link service processing (destination node)
1 ms
Total (max. transmission delay)
PLC cycle time (source node) +
Peripheral servicing interval
(destination node) + 16.1 ms
Note This communications cycle time is calculated assuming that there is no node
that transmits event frames before the SEND command is sent.
RECV Instruction
Maximum Delay Time
The data flow which will yield the maximum transfer interval from the time the
RECV(193)/RECV(98) instruction is executed by the user program to the time
the Controller Link Unit stores the data in the local Unit’s memory area is
described below.
Note Be sure to take into account the time required for data links and program exe-
cution, which are not included in the following example.
267
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Message Delay Times
Section 8-4
RECV (193)/RECV(98)
executed
Data stored
Link service processing (source node)
Link service interval (source node)
Link service processing (source node)
Transmission processing (command)
Reception processing (response)
Transmission delay (response)
Communications cycle
Transmission delay (command)
Reception processing (command)
Transmission processing (response)
Link service interval (destination mode)
Link service processing (destination node)
Maximum transmission delay
Max. transmission delay = Link servicing interval (source node) + Link service
processing (source node) + Transmission processing (command) + Communi-
cations cycle + Transmission delay (command) + Reception processing (com-
mand) + Link servicing interval (destination node) + Link service processing
(destination node) + Transmission processing (response) + Communications
cycle + Transmission delay (response) + Reception processing (response) +
Link servicing interval (source node) + Link service processing (source node).
Link Servicing Interval (Source and Destination Nodes)
Link servicing depends on the execution mode of the PLC. The execution
modes on the source and destination modes need not be the same.
For synchronous execution, links are serviced once per PLC execution cycle.
For asynchronous execution, links are serviced according to the peripheral
servicing interval. Refer to the CVM1 and CV-series PLCs Operation Manual:
Ladder Diagrams (W202) for details.
Link Service Processing (Source and Destination Nodes)
Link service processing is the same as the PLC’s peripheral servicing and is
approximately 1 ms for Controller Link Units.
Transmission Processing
Commands: 2 ms
Responses: Number of words transferred × 0.00075 ms + 2 ms
Communications Cycle Time (with Data Links Inactive
See 8-2 Communications Cycle Time (on page 251).
Transmission Delay Time
Transmission delay time varies with the baud rate.
Baud rate
2 Mbps
Transmission delay time
Number of words transferred × 0.08 + 0.112 ms
Number of words transferred × 0.016 + 0.224 ms
1 Mbps
500 Kbps Number of words transferred × 0.032 + 0.448 ms
Note Commands: Transmission delay time is calculated assuming that the number
of words to be transferred is zero.
Responses: Transmission delay time is calculated according to the number of
words to be transferred.
268
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Message Delay Times
Section 8-4
Reception Processing
Commands: 1.3 ms
Responses: Number of words transferred × 0.00075 ms + 2 ms
The I/O response time can increase due to noise or restrictions on the number
of frames that can be transmitted while the data link is operating.
Example
In this example, the maximum transmission delay is calculated for an instruc-
tion receiving 256 words of data in a system with 32 nodes. Network specifics
are detailed below:
Baud rate:
2 Mbps
Max. node address:
Number of nodes:
32
32
Number of polled nodes per comm cycle:
Source node execution:
Destination node execution:
Number of words:
4
Synchronous
Asynchronous
256
Data link:
Inactive
Link Unit servicing (source node) × 2
Link service processing (source node) × 2
Transmission processing (command)
Communications cycle × 2 (See note.)
PLC cycle time (source node) × 2
1 ms × 2 = 2 ms
2 ms
(600 × 4 + 110 × 32 + 320 × 0 + 4 ×
0 + 2,290) × 2 = 8,210 µs × 2 ≅
16.4 ms
Transmission delay (command)
0.112 ≅ 0.1 ms
Reception processing (command)
Link servicing interval (destination node)
1.3 ms
As required by Programming
Device (destination node)
Link service processing (destination node)
Transmission processing (response)
1 ms
0.00075 × 256 + 2 = 2.192 ≅
2.2 ms
Transmission delay (response)
Reception processing (response)
Total (max. transmission delay)
0.008 × 256 + 0.112 = 2.16 ≅
2.2 ms
0.00075 × 256 + 2 = 2.192 ≅
2.2 ms
PLC cycle time (source node) ×
2 + Peripheral servicing time
(destination node) + 29.4 ms
Note This communications cycle time is calculated assuming that there is no node
that transmits event frames before the RECV command is sent.
269
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Message Delay Times
Section 8-4
8-4-2 C200HX/HG/HE and CQM1H-series PLCs
SEND(90)
The following diagram indicates the data flow which will yield the maximum
delay time from the time SEND(90) is executed by the user program to the
time the Controller Link Unit stores the data in the destination Unit’s memory.
SEND(90)
executed
Link Unit servicing
(source node)
Transmission processing
Communications cycle
Transmission delay
Reception processing
Link Unit servicing (destination
node)
Max. transmission delay
Data stored
Max. transmission delay = Link Unit servicing interval (source node) + Trans-
mission processing + Communications cycle time + Transmission delay +
Reception processing + Link Unit servicing interval (destination node).
Link Servicing Interval (Source and Destination Nodes)
Link service processing is the same as the PLC’s peripheral servicing and is
approximately 1 ms for Controller Link Units.
Transmission Processing
Responses:
Number of words transferred × 0.00125 ms + 3 ms
Communications Cycle Time (with Data Links Inactive)
See 8-2 Communications Cycle Time (on page 251).
Transmission Delay Time
Transmission delay time varies with the baud rate.
Baud rate
2 Mbps
Transmission delay time
Number of words transferred × 0.08 + 0.112 ms
Number of words transferred × 0.016 + 0.224 ms
1 Mbps
500 Kbps Number of words transferred × 0.032 + 0.448 ms
Reception Processing
Responses:
Number of words transferred × 0.00125 ms + 2.3 ms
Note The I/O response time can increase due to noise or restrictions on the number
of frames that can be transmitted while the data link is operating.
270
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Message Delay Times
Section 8-4
Example
In this example, the maximum transmission delay is calculated for an instruc-
tion sending 256 words of data in a system with 32 nodes. Network specifics
are detailed below:
Baud rate:
Max. node number:
Number of nodes:
2 Mbps
32
32
Number of polled nodes: 4
Number of words:
256
Data link:
halted
Link Unit servicing (source node)
Transmission processing
PLC cycle time (source node)
0.00125 × 256 + 3 = 3.32 ≅ 3.3 ms
Communications cycle time (See note.)
600 × 4 + 110 × 32 + 320 × 0 + 4 ×
0 + 2,290 = 8,210 µs ≅ 8.2 ms
Transmission delay (command)
Reception processing
0.008 × 256 + 0.112 = 2.16 ≅
2.2 ms
0.00125 × 256 + 2.3 = 2.62 ≅
2.6 ms
Link servicing interval (destination node)
PLC cycle time (destination node)
Total (max. transmission delay)
PLC cycle time (source node) ×
2 + PLC cycle time (destination
node) + Peripheral servicing
time (destination node) +
16.3 ms
Note This communications cycle time is calculated assuming that there is no node
that transmits event frames before the SEND command is issued.
RECV(98) Instruction
Maximum Delay Time
The following indicates the data flow which will yield the maximum transfer
interval from the time the RECV(98) instruction is executed by the user pro-
gram to the time the Controller Link Unit stores the data in the local Unit’s
memory area.
Note Be sure to take into account the time required for data links and program exe-
cution, which are not included in the following example.
RECV(98) executed
Data stored
Max. transmission delay
Link Unit servicing
(source node)
Reception processing
(response)
Transmission processing
(command)
Transmission delay
Communications cycle
Transmission delay
Transmission processing
(response)
Reception processing
(command)
Link Unit servicing (destination
node)
Max. transmission delay = Link Unit servicing interval (source node) + Trans-
mission processing (command) + Communications cycle + Transmission
delay (command) + Reception processing (command) + Link Unit servicing
271
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Message Delay Times
Section 8-4
interval (destination node) + Transmission processing (response) + Communi-
cations cycle + Transmission delay (response) + Reception processing
(response) + Link Unit servicing interval (source node).
Link Servicing Interval (Source and Destination Nodes)
Link service processing is the same as the PLC’s peripheral servicing and is
approximately 1 ms for Controller Link Units.
Transmission Processing
Commands: 2 ms
Responses: Number of words transferred × 0.00125 ms + 3 ms
Communications Cycle Time (with Data Links Inactive)
See 8-2 Communications Cycle Time (on page 251).
Transmission Delay Time
Transmission delay time varies with the baud rate.
Baud rate
2 Mbps
Transmission delay time
Number of words transferred × 0.008 + 0.112 ms
Number of words transferred × 0.016 + 0.224 ms
1 Mbps
500 Kbps Number of words transferred × 0.032 + 0.448 ms
Note Commands: Transmission delay time is calculated assuming that the number
of words to be transferred is zero.
Responses: Transmission delay time is calculated according to the number of
words to be transferred.
Reception Processing
Commands: 2.3 ms
Responses: Number of words transferred × 0.00125 ms + 2.3 ms
The I/O response time might increase due to noise or restrictions on the num-
ber of frames that can be transmitted while the data link is operating.
Example
In this example, the maximum transmission delay is calculated for an instruc-
tion receiving 256 words of data in a system with 32 nodes. Network specifics
are detailed below:
Baud rate:
Max. node number:
Number of nodes:
2 Mbps
32
32
Number of polled nodes: 4
Number of words:
Data links:
256
Halted
272
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Message Delay Times
Section 8-4
Link Unit servicing (source node) × 2
Transmission processing (command)
Communications cycle time × 2 (See note.)
PLC cycle time (source node) × 2
3 ms
(600 × 4 + 110 × 32 + 320 × 0 + 4 ×
0 + 2,290) × 2 = 8,210 µs × 2 ≅
16.4 ms
Transmission delay (command)
Reception processing (command)
Link Unit servicing (destination node)
Transmission processing (response)
Transmission delay (response)
0.112 ≅ 0.1 ms
2.3 ms
PLC cycle time (destination node)
0.00125 × 256 + 3 = 3.32 ≅ 3.3
0.008 × 256 + 0.112 = 2.16 ≅ 2.2
0.00125 × 256 + 2.3 = 2.62 ≅ 2.6
PLC cycle time (source node) ×
2 + PLC cycle time (destination
node) + Peripheral servicing
time (destination node) +
29.9 ms
Reception processing (response)
Total (max. transmission delay)
Note This communications cycle time is calculated assuming that there is no node
that transmits event frames before the SEND command is executed.
273
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Message Delay Times
Section 8-4
274
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECTION 9
Troubleshooting and Maintenance
This section provides information on troubleshooting errors that occur during Controller Link Unit operation, as well as
9-1 Troubleshooting Using Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-1-1 CS/CJ-series Controller Link Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-1-2 C200HX/HG/HE and CQM1H-series Controller Link Units. . . . . .
9-1-3 CVM1 and CV-series Controller Link Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-1-4 Repeater Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-2 Status Area and Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-2-1 CS/CJ-series Controller Link Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-2-2 C200HX/HG/HE Controller Link Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-2-3 CVM1 and CV-series Controller Link Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-2-4 CQM1H-series Controller Link Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-3 Error Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-3-1 Error Log Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-3-2 Error Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-3-3 Reading and Clearing Error Logs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-4 Troubleshooting Error Messages in CX-Net Data Link Table Check. . . . . . .
9-5 Cleaning and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-5-1 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-5-2 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-6 Handling Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-6-1 Replacing the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-6-2 Setting the Unit after Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-6-3 Replacing the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
276
276
283
287
291
292
293
299
304
308
313
313
314
320
320
323
323
323
324
324
325
327
275
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting Using Indicators
Section 9-1
9-1 Troubleshooting Using Indicators
This section describes the errors indicated by the Controller Link Unit indica-
tors and possible remedies.
9-1-1 CS/CJ-series Controller Link Units
CS-series Unit
CJ-series Unit
CLK21-V1
RUN ERC
INS SD
CLK21-V1
TER ERH M/A LNK RD
RUN
ERC
INS
ERH
M/A
SD
RD
LNK
TER
RUN: Operating
ERC: Communications error
ERH: PLC error
INS:
LNK:
M/A:
Network participation
Data link
Data link mode
TER: Terminating resistance
Troubleshooting with RUN, ERC, ERH and INS Indicators
The RUN, ERC, ERH, and INS indicators can be used to check whether Con-
troller Link Unit startup and Network participation are operating normally.
Note Be sure to turn off the power to the PLC before performing any of the follow-
ing.
• Disconnecting the Unit or connectors.
• Securing Units or connectors.
• Setting hardware switches.
Indicators
Probable cause
Probable remedy
RUN ERC ERH INS
Lit
Not lit Not lit Lit
Unit operating normally;
Network participation nor-
mal.
---
Not lit Lit
---
---
Node address is set out of Set the node addresses to
range. between 1 and 32.
Controller Link Unit faulty. If the ERC indicators still
lights when the Unit is
mounted on another PLC,
replace the Controller Link
Unit.
Wired Network 62 Node
Enable Bit is set incor-
rectly.
Turn ON the Wired Net-
work 62 Node Enable Bit
and turn the power supply
OFF and ON.
276
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting Using Indicators
Section 9-1
Indicators
RUN ERC ERH INS
Not lit Not lit Not lit Not lit Power is not being sup-
Probable cause
Probable remedy
Check the power supply
plied correctly to the PLC. voltage and supply at the
recommended voltage.
The Controller Link Unit
has become loose.
Secure the Controller Link
The Controller Link Unit is Refer to CS-series PLCs
mounted in the wrong posi- or CJ-series PLCs and
tion.
mount the Unit correctly.
The Controller Link Unit is If the indicators do not light
faulty.
when the Unit is mounted
in another PLC, replace
the Controller Link Unit.
Lit
Lit
Lit
---
---
Lit
Not lit The same node address is Reset so that each node
being used by two different address is used only once
Units.
within the same Network.
The Unit is connected to a Check the Network and
SYSMAC LINK Network
(Optical Units only).
reconnect cables correctly.
---
to 7-4 Setting Routing
Tables. When no routing
table is being used, delete
The Unit is mounted to a
non-compatible PLC.
Refer to 1-2-4 Controller
Link Unit Models and PLCs
and reinstall the Unit on
the appropriate PLC.
An error has occurred in
the PLC.
Refer to the PLC’s opera-
tion manual and correct
the error. If the error occurs
EEPROM error
Refer to 9-2 Status Area
and Troubleshooting, cor-
rect the data where the
error has occurred, and
reset the Unit. If the error
occurs again, replace the
Controller Link Unit.
Two Units connected to the Reset so that Units con-
same PLC have the same nected to the same PLC
unit number.
(including the CPU Expan-
sion Racks), do not have
the same unit number.
Either there is an error in
the PLC I/O table or no
table has been created.
Create a correct I/O table
for the PLC.
277
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting Using Indicators
Section 9-1
Indicators
RUN ERC ERH INS
Lit --- ---
Probable cause
Probable remedy
Not lit Terminating resistance is
not set correctly. (Wired
Unit)
Turn ON the terminating
resistance at the nodes at
both ends of the Network
and turn it OFF at all other
nodes.
Cables are not connected Check the cable connec-
correctly.
tions are reconnect cor-
rectly.
The node address is larger Either reset the maximum
than the maximum node node address using the
address set for the network Controller Link Support
parameters.
Software or reset the node
address to below the maxi-
mum.
No other nodes exist.
Make sure that 2 or more
nodes exist within the Net-
No nodes have been set as Refer to 8-1-2 Setting the
polling nodes.
Polling and Polled Nodes
and set at least one polling
node. (Controller Link
Units should normally be
ent to other nodes (Wired TION 4 Preparations for
Unit).
Communications and reset
the baud rate.
The Wired Network 62
Node Enable Bit is ON in
some nodes and OFF in
When using node address
33 or higher, turn ON the
Wired Network 62 Node
other nodes in the network. Enable Bit in all the nodes,
then turn the power supply
OFF and ON again.
When using node address
33 or higher, configure the
network so that all nodes
are CS1W-CLK21-V1,
CJ1W-CLK21-V1, or
3G8F7-CLK21-V1. The
CS1W-CLK21, CJ1W-
CLK21, C200HW-CLK21,
CVM1-CLK21, or CQM1H-
CLK21 cannot be used.
278
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting Using Indicators
Section 9-1
Troubleshooting with LNK and M/A Indicators
Data Link Cannot be
Started
The following table describes the LNK and M/A indicators at the startup node
and their use in troubleshooting when a data link cannot be started.
Starting a data link depends on the Controller Link Unit operating normally
and participating in the Network. Refer to Troubleshooting with RUN, ERC,
ERH and INS Indicators earlier in this section and check Unit operation before
using the following table.
Indicators
LNK M/A
Lit
Flashing ---
Probable cause
Probable remedy
---
Data link operating normally.
---
There is an error in the data
link tables.
When the ERH indicator is
flashing, remake and set the
data link tables.
When manual setting is used, Refer to 5-2-2 Manual Setting
either data link tables have not and set data link tables for the
been created for the startup
node or there is an error in the
data link tables.
startup node.
When automatic setting is
used, either the data link
parameters for the startup
node have not been set or
there is an error in the data link
tables.
Refer to 5-2-4 Automatic Set-
ting and set the automatic
parameters for starting the
data links.
Automatic setting is used with Use a Controller Link Unit that
Refer to Automatic Setting on
page 129 for details.
When a number exceeding
12,000 was set for the data
The number of data link send
and receive words cannot
link send and receive words or exceed 12,000 and the same
the same memory area was
set for Area 1 and Area 2
memory area cannot be set for
Area 1 and Area 2 when using
using a CS/CJ-series Control- a CS/CJ-series pre-Ver. 1.2
ler Link Unit with unit version
1.2 or later that was then
Controller Link Unit. Either use
a CS/CJ-series Controller Link
replaced with a CS/CJ-series Unit with unit version 1.2 or
pre-Ver. 1.2 Controller Link
Unit.
later or reset the data link
tables.
Not lit
Not lit
Lit
Manually set data links are
already operating on the same links that are operating and
Network.
Stop the manually set data
restart the data links.
Not lit
Automatically set data links
are already operating on the
same Network.
Stop the automatically set data
links that are operating and
restart the data links.
There is an error in the startup Refer to the PLC’s operation
node PLC.
manual and correct the error. If
the error reoccurs, replace the
PLC.
279
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting Using Indicators
Section 9-1
Node Cannot Participate
in Data Link
The following table describes the LNK and M/A indicators when a node can-
not participate in the data links.
Data link participation depends on the Controller Link Unit operating normally
and participating in the Network. Refer to Troubleshooting with RUN, ERC,
ERH and INS Indicators earlier in this section and check Unit operation before
using the following table.
Indicators
LNK M/A
Lit
Probable cause
Probable remedy
---
Data link operating normally.
---
Flashing Lit
When manual setting is used, Refer to 5-2-2 Manual Setting
table.
Flashing Not lit
When automatic setting is
used, the data link parameters ting, reset the parameters for
Refer to 5-2-4 Automatic Set-
at the startup node are incor- the startup node DM Area so
rect for the local node (the
data link area is out of range
for the local node.)
that the local node can partici-
pate in the data link, and then
restart the data link.
When automatic setting is
Stop the data link, reset the
used, the local node is not set parameters for the startup
to participate in the data link at node DM Area so that the local
the startup node.
node can participate in the
data link, and then restart the
data link.
Automatic setting is used with Use a Controller Link Unit that
Refer to Automatic Setting on
page 129 for details.
When a number exceeding
12,000 was set for the data
The number of data link send
and receive words cannot
link send and receive words or exceed 12,000 and the same
the same memory area was
set for Area 1 and Area 2
memory area cannot be set for
Area 1 and Area 2 when using
using a CS/CJ-series Control- a CS/CJ-series pre-Ver. 1.2
ler Link Unit with unit version
1.2 or later that was then
Controller Link Unit. Either use
a CS/CJ-series Controller Link
replaced with a CS/CJ-series Unit with unit version 1.2 or
pre-Ver. 1.2 Controller Link
Unit.
later or reset the data link
tables.
Not lit
Lit
When manual setting is used, Set data link tables for the
there are no data link tables
set for the local node.
local node.
Data Link Cannot be
Stopped
Stopping the data link depends on the Controller Link Unit operating normally
and participating in the Network. Read the above explanations before
attempting to stop operation.
Note Stop the data link from the node at which the LNK indicator is lit (indicating
active data links). Data links cannot be stopped from nodes which do not have
active data links.
Troubleshooting of Other Errors
To configure a network that uses a node address higher than 32, all nodes
must be CS1W-CLK21-V1, CJ1W-CLK21-V1, or 3G8F7-CLK21-V1. The
Wired Network 62 Node Enable Bit in the DM Parameters Area must also be
turned ON (62 nodes max.) for all nodes. If the nodes are set differently, the
network will not be configured correctly. If the settings are incorrect, the follow-
ing problems will occur.
280
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting Using Indicators
Section 9-1
Configuring a Network with 33 Nodes or More
Problem Status
The ERC indicator is The Wired Network 62 Node Enable Bit
Cause and remedy
The node is not
present in the net-
work.
ON in the CS1W- in the DM Parameters Area is turned
CLK21-V1 or CJ1W- OFF. Turn ON the Wired Network 62
Node Enable Bit and then turn the
(ERC indicator: ON CLK21-V1, and a
RUN indicator: OFF node address higher power supply OFF and ON again.
INS indicator: OFF) than 32 is set.
The ERC indicator is The Units that can be used to configure
ON in the C200HW- a network that uses a node address
CLK21, CQM1H-
CLK21, CVM1-
CLK21, CS1W-
CLK21, or CJ1W-
higher than 32 are the CS1W-CLK21-
V1 and CJ1W-CLK21-V1 only. Either
configure the network using compatible
Units and Boards, or split the network
CLK21, and a node into two separate networks.
address higher than
32 is set.
The node is not
present in the net-
work
The INS indicator is
ON for some nodes
in the same net-
(ERC indicator: OFF work. Those nodes
RUN indicator: ON are C200HW-
INS indicator: OFF) CLK21, CQM1H-
CLK21, CVM1-
CLK21, CS1W-
CLK21, or CJ1W-
CLK21.
The INS indicator is The Wired Network 62 Node Enable Bit
ON for some nodes in the DM Parameters Area of the poll-
in the same net-
work. Those nodes
are CS1W-CLK21-
V1 or CJ1W-CLK-
V1.
ing node (CS1W-CLK21-V1 or CJ1W-
CLK-V1 with INS indicator ON) is OFF.
Turn ON the Wired Network 62 Node
Enable Bit, then turn the power supply
OFF and ON again.
The maximum number of nodes set in
the network parameters is less than the
number of nodes present in the net-
work.
Use CX-Net or the Controller Link Sup-
port Software to read the network
parameters, and check the maximum
number of nodes setting. Set the maxi-
mum number of nodes to a number that
is the same or larger than the number
of nodes in the network.
The maximum num- The polling node is a The Units that can be used to configure
ber of nodes in the
network is set to 32. CQM1H-CLK21,
CVM1-CLK21,
C200HW-CLK21,
a network that uses a node address
higher than 32 are the CS1W-CLK21-
V1 and CJ1W-CLK21-V1 only. Either
configure the network using compatible
Units and Boards, or split the network
into two separate networks.
CS1W-CLK21, or
CJ1W-CLK21.
The polling node is a The Wired Network 62 Node Enable Bit
CS1W-CLK21-V1 or in the DM Parameters Area of the poll-
CJ1W-CLK-V1.
ing node (CS1W-CLK21-V1 or CJ1W-
CLK-V1 with INS indicator ON) is OFF.
Turn ON the Wired Network 62 Node
Enable Bit, then turn the power supply
OFF and ON again.
281
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting Using Indicators
Section 9-1
Problem
Status
Cause and remedy
The data link status The data link status The default area for storing data link
is showing statuses storage area is set to status is the Special I/O Unit Area. The
of 32 nodes only.
default settings, and data for only node addresses 1 to 32 is
the data link status reflected when the data link status stor-
storage format speci- age format specification is set to 8 bits.
fication in the DM
Parameters Area is
set to the 8-bit for-
mat.
The polling node is a The Units that can be used to configure
C200HW-CLK21,
CQM1H-CLK21,
CVM1-CLK21,
CS1W-CLK21, or
CJ1W-CLK21.
a network of a network that uses a
node address higher than 32 are the
CS1W-CLK21-V1 and CJ1W-CLK21-
V1 only. Either configure the network
using compatible Units and Boards, or
split the network into two separate net-
works.
The polling node is a The Wired Network 62 Node Enable Bit
CS1W-CLK21-V1 or in the DM Parameters Area of the poll-
CJ1W-CLK-V1.
ing node (CS1W-CLK21-V1 or CJ1W-
CLK-V1 with INS indicator ON) is OFF.
Turn ON the Wired Network 62 Node
Enable Bit, then turn the power supply
OFF and ON again.
Error occurs when
The data link table
The Units that can be used to configure
transferring data link being transferred is a network of a network that uses a
tables.
for a C200HW-
CLK21, CQM1H-
CLK21, CVM1-
CLK21, CS1W-
CLK21, or CJ1W-
CLK21.
node address higher than 32 are the
CS1W-CLK21-V1 and CJ1W-CLK21-
V1 only. Either configure the network
using compatible Units and Boards, or
split the network into two separate net-
works.
The data link status The polling node is a
is showing statuses C200HW-CLK21,
of 32 nodes only.
CQM1H-CLK21,
CVM1-CLK21,
CS1W-CLK21, or
CJ1W-CLK21.
The polling node is a The Wired Network 62 Node Enable Bit
CS1W-CLK21-V1 or in the DM Parameters Area of the poll-
CJ1W-CLK-V1.
ing node (CS1W-CLK21-V1 or CJ1W-
CLK-V1 with INS indicator ON) is OFF.
Turn ON the Wired Network 62 Node
Enable Bit, then turn the power supply
OFF and ON again.
282
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting Using Indicators
Section 9-1
Configuring a Network with 32 Nodes or Less
Problem
Status
Cause and Remedy
Reset the node address between 1 and
The node is not
present in the net-
work.
The node with the
ERC indicator ON is 32, then turn the power OFF and ON
set to a node again.
(ERC indicator: ON address of 33 or
RUN indicator: OFF higher.
INS indicator: OFF)
The maximum num- A CS1W-CLK21-V1 The Wired Network 62 Node Enable Bit
ber of nodes in the or CJ1W-CLK21-V1 in the DM Parameters Area of the
network is set to 62. is present in the net- CS1W-CLK21-V1 or CJ1W-CLK-V1 is
work.
ON. Turn OFF the Wired Network 62
Node Enable Bit, then turn the power
supply OFF and ON again.
The data link status The corresponding
is showing statuses node is a CS1W-
for 62 nodes.
CLK21-V1 or CJ1W-
CLK21-V1.
The network partici-
pation status is
showing statuses for
62 nodes.
9-1-2 C200HX/HG/HE and CQM1H-series Controller Link Units
C200HX/HG/HE Unit
CQM1H-series Unit
CLK21
CLK21
RUN
ERC
INS
SD
TER
ERH
M/A
RUN
ERC
INS
SD
TER
ERH
M/A
RD
LNK
RD
LNK
RUN: Operating
ERC: Communications error
INS:
LNK:
M/A:
TER:
Network participation
Data link
Data link mode
Terminating resistance set
Troubleshooting with RUN, ERC, ERH and INS Indicators
The RUN, ERC, ERH, and INS indicators can be used to check whether Con-
troller Link Unit startup and Network participation are operating normally.
Note Be sure to turn off the power to the PLC before performing any of the follow-
ing.
• Disconnecting the Unit or connectors.
• Securing Units or connectors.
• Setting hardware switches.
Indicators
Probable cause
Probable remedy
RUN ERC ERH INS
Lit
Not lit Not lit Lit
Unit operating normally;
Network participation nor-
mal.
---
Not lit Lit
---
---
Controller Link Unit faulty. If the ERC indicators still
lights when the Unit is
mounted on another PLC,
replace the Controller Link
Unit.
283
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting Using Indicators
Section 9-1
Indicators
RUN ERC ERH INS
Not lit Not lit Not lit Not lit Power is not being sup-
Probable cause
Probable remedy
Check the power supply
plied correctly to the PLC. voltage and supply at the
recommended voltage.
The Controller Link Unit
has become loose.
Secure the Controller Link
Unit firmly.
The Bus Connection Unit
has become loose.
Tighten the mounting
screws on the Bus Con-
The Controller Link Unit is Refer to C200HX/HG/HE
mounted in the wrong slot. PLCs and CJ-series PLCs
and mount the Unit cor-
rectly.
The Controller Link Unit is If the indicators do not light
faulty.
when the Unit is mounted
on another PLC, replace
the Controller Link Unit.
Lit
Lit
Lit
---
---
Lit
Not lit The node address is out-
side the setting range.
Reset the node address to
within the 1 to 32 range.
The same node address is Reset so that each node
being used by two different address is used only once
Units.
within the same Network.
---
Bit setting error.
to 7-4 Setting Routing
Tables. When no routing
table is being used, turn
The Unit is mounted to a
non-compatible PLC.
Refer to 1-2-4 Controller
Link Unit Models and PLCs
and reinstall the Unit on
the appropriate PLC.
An error has occurred in
the PLC.
Refer to the PLC’s opera-
tion manual and correct
the error. If the error occurs
EEPROM error
Refer to 9-2 Status Area
and Troubleshooting, cor-
rect the data where the
error has occurred, and
reset the Unit. If the error
occurs again, replace the
Controller Link Unit.
284
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting Using Indicators
Section 9-1
Indicators
RUN ERC ERH INS
Probable cause
Probable remedy
Lit
---
---
Not lit Terminating resistance is
not set correctly.
Turn ON the terminating
resistance at the nodes at
both ends of the Network
and turn it OFF at all other
nodes.
Cables are not connected Check the cable connec-
correctly.
tions and reconnect cor-
rectly.
The node address is larger Either reset the maximum
than the maximum node node address using the
address set for the network Controller Link Support
parameters.
Software or reset the node
address to below the maxi-
mum.
No other nodes exist.
Ensure that 2 or more
nodes exist within the Net-
No nodes have been set as Refer to 8-1-2 Setting the
polling nodes.
Polling and Polled Nodes
and set at least one polling
node. (Controller Link
Units should normally be
set as polling nodes.)
The same operating level Reset so that each operat-
is set more than once for
the same PLC.
ing level is used only once.
The Bus Connection Unit
has become loose.
Tighten the mounting
screws on the Bus Con-
nection Unit (C200HX/HG/
ent to other nodes.
arations for Communica-
tions and set all nodes on
the network to the same
baud rate.
Troubleshooting with LNK and M/A Indicators
Data Link Cannot be
Started
The following table describes the LNK and M/A indicators at the startup node
and their use in troubleshooting when a data link cannot be started.
Starting a data link depends on the Controller Link Unit operating normally
and participating in the Network. Refer to Troubleshooting with RUN, ERC,
ERH and INS Indicators earlier in this section and check Unit operation before
using the following table.
285
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting Using Indicators
Section 9-1
Indicators
LNK M/A
Lit
Flashing ---
Probable cause
Probable remedy
---
Data link operating normally.
---
There is an error in the data
link tables.
the data link tables.
When manual setting is used, Refer to 5-2-2 Manual Setting
either data link tables have not and set data link tables for the
been created for the startup
node or there is an error in the
data link tables.
startup node.
When automatic setting is
used, either the data link
parameters for the startup
node have not been set or
there is an error in the data link
tables.
Refer to 5-2-4 Automatic Set-
ting and set the automatic
parameters for starting the
data links.
Automatic setting is used with Use a Controller Link Unit that
Refer to Automatic Setting on
page 129 for details.
Not lit
Not lit
Lit
Manually set data links are
already operating on the same links that are operating and
Network.
Stop the manually set data
restart the data links.
Not lit
Automatically set data links
are already operating on the
same Network.
Stop the automatically set data
links that are operating and
restart the data links.
There is an error in the startup Refer to the PLC’s operation
node PLC.
manual and correct the error. If
the error reoccurs, replace the
PLC.
Node Cannot Participate
in Data Link
The following table describes the LNK and M/A indicators when a node can-
not participate in the data links.
Data link participation depends on the Controller Link Unit operating normally
and participating in the Network. Refer to Troubleshooting with RUN, ERC,
ERH and INS Indicators earlier in this section and check Unit operation before
using the following table.
286
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting Using Indicators
Section 9-1
Indicators
LNK M/A
Lit
Probable cause
Probable remedy
---
Data link operating normally.
---
Flashing Lit
When manual setting is used, Refer to 5-2-2 Manual Setting
table.
Flashing Not lit
When automatic setting is
used, the data link parameters ting, reset the parameters for
Refer to 5-2-4 Automatic Set-
at the startup node are incor- the startup node DM Area so
rect for the local node (the
data link area is out of range
for the local node.)
that the local node can partici-
pate in the data link, and then
restart the data link.
Automatic setting is used with Use a Controller Link Unit that
Refer to Automatic Setting on
page 129 for details.
Not lit
Not lit
Lit
When manual setting is used, Set data link tables for the
there are no data link tables
set for the local node.
local node.
Not lit
When automatic setting is
used, the startup node is not
set to participate in the data
links.
Stop the data links, remake
and set the parameters in the
startup node’s DM Area, and
then restart the data link.
Data Link Cannot be
Stopped
Stopping the data link depends on the Controller Link Unit operating normally
and participating in the Network. Read the above explanations before
attempting to stop operation.
Note Stop the data link from the node at which the LNK indicator is lit (indicating
active data links). Data links cannot be stopped from nodes which do not have
active data links.
9-1-3 CVM1 and CV-series Controller Link Units
CLK21
RUN
ERC
TER
ERH
M/A
LNK
RD
INS
SD
RUN: Operating
ERC: Communications error
INS:
LNK:
M/A:
Network participation
Data link
Data link mode
Troubleshooting with RUN, ERC, ERH and INS Indicators
The RUN, ERC, ERH and INS indicators can be used to check whether Con-
troller Link Unit startup and Network participation are operating normally.
Note Be sure to turn off the power to the PLC before performing any of the follow-
ing.
• Disconnecting the Unit or connectors.
• Securing Units or connectors.
287
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting Using Indicators
Section 9-1
• Setting hardware switches.
Indicators
Probable cause
Probable remedy
RUN ERC ERH INS
Lit
Not lit Not lit Lit
Unit operating normally;
Network participation nor-
mal.
---
Not lit Lit
---
---
Controller Link Unit faulty. If the ERC indicators still
lights when the Unit is
mounted on another PLC,
replace the Controller Link
Unit.
Not lit Not lit Not lit Not lit Power is not being sup-
Check the power supply
plied correctly to the PLC. voltage and supply at the
recommended voltage.
The Controller Link Unit
has become loose.
Secure the Controller Link
The Controller Link Unit is Refer to CVM1 and CV-
mounted in the wrong slot. series PLCs and mount the
Unit correctly.
The Controller Link Unit is If the indicators do not light
faulty.
when the Unit is mounted
in another PLC, replace
the Controller Link Unit.
Lit
Lit
Lit
---
---
Lit
Not lit The node address is out-
side the setting range.
Reset the node address to
within the 1 to 32 range.
The same node address is Reset so that each node
being used by two different address is used only once
Units.
within the same Network.
---
Disable Bit setting error.
to 7-4 Setting Routing
Tables. When no routing
table is being used, set the
The Unit is mounted to a
non-compatible PLC.
Refer to 1-2-4 Controller
Link Unit Models and PLCs
and reinstall the Unit on
the appropriate PLC.
An error has occurred in
the PLC.
Refer to the PLC’s opera-
tion manual and correct
the error. If the error occurs
EEPROM error
Refer to 9-2 Status Area
and Troubleshooting, cor-
rect the data where the
error has occurred, and
reset the Unit. If the error
occurs again, replace the
Controller Link Unit.
The unit number is not set Reset the Unit number to
in the range from 0 to 15. within a range of 0 to 15.
The same unit number is
Reset so that each unit
set more than once for the number is set only once
same PLC.
within the same PLC
(including the Expansion
CPU Backplane.)
I/O tables have not been
Create I/O tables for the
created for the PLC or they PLC correctly.
are faulty.
288
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting Using Indicators
Section 9-1
Indicators
RUN ERC ERH INS
Probable cause
Probable remedy
Lit
---
---
Not lit Terminating resistance is
not set correctly.
Turn ON the terminating
resistance at the nodes at
both ends of the Network
and turn it OFF at all other
nodes.
Cables are not connected Check the cable connec-
correctly.
tions and reconnect cor-
rectly.
The node address is larger Either reset the maximum
than the maximum node node address using the
address set for the network Controller Link Support
parameters.
Software or reset the node
address to below the maxi-
mum.
No other nodes exist.
Make sure that 2 or more
nodes exist within the Net-
No nodes have been set as Refer to 8-1-2 Setting the
polling nodes.
Polling and Polled Nodes
and set at least one polling
node. (Controller Link
Units should normally be
ent to other nodes (Wired arations for Communica-
Unit).
tions and set all nodes on
the network to the same
baud rate.
289
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting Using Indicators
Section 9-1
Troubleshooting with LNK and M/A Indicators
Data Link Cannot be
Started
The following table describes the LNK and M/A indicators at the startup node
and their use in troubleshooting when a data link cannot be started.
Starting a data link depends on the Controller Link Unit operating normally
and participating in the Network. Refer to Troubleshooting with RUN, ERC,
ERH and INS Indicators earlier in this section and check Unit operation before
using the following table.
Indicators
LNK M/A
Lit
Flashing ---
Probable cause
Probable remedy
---
Data link operating normally.
---
There is an error in the data
link tables.
When the ERH indicator is
flashing, remake and set the
data link tables.
When manual setting is used, Refer to 5-2-2 Manual Setting
either data link tables have not and set data link tables for the
been created for the startup
node or there is an error in the
data link tables.
startup node.
When automatic setting is
used, either the data link
parameters for the startup
node have not been set or
there is an error in the data link
tables.
Refer to 5-2-4 Automatic Set-
ting and set the automatic
parameters for starting the
data links.
Automatic setting is used with Use a Controller Link Unit that
Refer to Automatic Setting on
page 129 for details.
Not lit
Not lit
Lit
Manually set data links are
already operating on the same links that are operating and
Network.
Stop the manually set data
restart the data links.
Not lit
Automatically set data links
are already operating on the
same Network.
Stop the automatically set data
links that are operating and
restart the data links.
There is an error in the startup Refer to the PLC’s operation
node PLC.
manual and correct the error. If
the error reoccurs, replace the
PLC.
290
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting Using Indicators
Section 9-1
Node Cannot Participate
in Data Link
The following table describes the LNK and M/A indicators when a node can-
not participate in the data links.
Data link participation depends on the Controller Link Unit operating normally
and participating in the Network. Refer to Troubleshooting with RUN, ERC,
ERH and INS Indicators earlier in this section and check Unit operation before
using the following table.
Indicators
LNK M/A
Lit
Probable cause
Probable remedy
---
Data link operating normally.
---
Flashing Lit
When manual setting is used, Refer to 5-2-2 Manual Setting
table.
Flashing Not lit
When automatic setting is
Refer to 5-2-4 Automatic Set-
used, the data link parameters ting, reset the parameters for
at the startup node are incor- the startup node DM Area so
rect for the local node (the
data link area is out of range
for the local node.)
that the local node can partici-
pate in the data link, and then
restart the data link.
Automatic setting is used with Use a Controller Link Unit that
Refer to Automatic Setting on
page 129 for details.
Not lit
Not lit
Lit
When manual setting is used, Set data link tables for the
there are no data link tables
local node.
set for the local node.
Not lit
When automatic setting is
used, the startup node is not
set to participate in the data
links.
Stop the data links, remake
and set the parameters in the
startup node’s DM Area, and
then restart the data link.
Data Link Cannot be
Stopped
Stopping the data link depends on the Controller Link Unit operating normally
and participating in the Network. Read the above explanations before
attempting to stop operation.
Note Stop the data link from the node at which the LNK indicator is lit (indicating
active data links). Data links cannot be stopped from nodes which do not have
active data links.
9-1-4 Repeater Units
PWR:
T/R1:
T/R2:
ON
SL1 com
SL2 com
PWR
T/R1
T/R2
Note Be sure to turn OFF the power to the Repeater Unit before disconnecting or
reconnecting cables.
291
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Area and Troubleshooting
Section 9-2
Troubleshooting with the PWR Indicator
indicator
status
Unit status
Possible error
Probable cause
Probable remedy
Lit
Power is being sup- ---
plied normally
---
---
Not lit
Power supply error Power supply
cables
Cables are loose.
Cables are broken.
Check the cable connections.
Check whether any of the cables
are broken.
Cable polarity is incorrect.
Check the cable connections.
Power supply
Repeater Unit
Power supply voltage or current is Check the power supply voltage,
wrong.
and replace the power supply with
a Power Supply Unit that will pro-
vide a correct supply.
The Repeater Unit is faulty.
Replace the Repeater Unit.
Troubleshooting with the T/R1 and T/R2 Indicators
indicator
status
Unit status
Possible error
Probable cause
Probable remedy
---
Lit or
flashing
The Unit is commu- ---
nicating normally.
Unit operating normally.
Not lit
Communications
Communica-
Cables are loose.
Cables are broken.
Check the cable connections.
error (transmission tions cables
signal error or no
signal)
Check whether any of the cables
are broken.
Cable polarity is incorrect.
Noise interference in cables.
Check the cable connections.
Check the wiring environment of
the cables.
Other nodes
The destination node does not
exist.
Check the destination Controller
Link Unit status (power supply,
cable connections).
The destination node has an
error.
Check the destination Controller
Link Unit status (baud rate setting,
terminating resistance settings,
statuses, error log, etc.).
Repeater Unit
Terminating resistance is set
incorrectly.
Check the terminating resistance
setting for the network.
The baud rate setting is incorrect. Check that the same baud rate is
set for all nodes in the same net-
work.
Noise interference
Check the operating environment
of the Unit.
The Repeater Unit is faulty.
Replace the Repeater Unit.
9-2 Status Area and Troubleshooting
The status of the Unit and the communications status of the Controller Link
Unit is recorded in the Status Area of the PLC. The cause of errors can be
found by searching the Status Area. The Status Area can be read using a Pro-
gramming Console, the SYSMAC Support Software, or the Controller Link
Support Software.
This section explains the contents of the Status Area and tells how to trouble-
shoot errors recorded there.
292
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Area and Troubleshooting
Section 9-2
9-2-1 CS/CJ-series Controller Link Units
The status of the Unit and Network is indicated in the following manner in the
PLC.
Status Area
Error Information:
CIO 1500 + 25 x (Unit No.)
1: Network parameter error (In PLC's EEPROM)
1: Data link table error (in PLC's EEPROM)
1: Routing table error (in PLC's EEPROM)
1: PLC system setting error
1: EEPROM error
1: Duplicate node address setting error
1: Inconsistent network parameters
1: Communications controller send error
1: Communications controller hardware error
1: Error log exists
Polling Node Address, Startup Node Address: CIO 1500 + 25 x (Unit No.) + 1
Polling node address
Startup node address
Each node address is displayed in 2-digit BCD.
Network Participation Status: CIO 1500 + 25 x (Unit No.) + 2, + 3
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
9
7
8
6
7
5
6
4
5
3
4
2
3
1
2
0
1
16 15 14 13 12 11 10
+ 2
+ 3
+ 4
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
−
−
62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49
+ 5
When CS1W-CLK21-V1 and CJ1W-CLK21-V1 Units are
used and the Wired Network 62 Node Enable Bit in the DM
Parameter Area software switches is ON, the network
participation status of nodes 33 to 62 will be returned in
words +4 and +5.
The numbers in the squares are node addresses.
The corresponding node participation status is as follows:
0: Not participating in network
1: Participating in network
Local Data Link Participation Status: CIO 1500 + 25 x (Unit No.) + 6
Allocation for automatic setting
00: Equality layout
01: 1:N allocation, common type
10: 1:N allocation, 1 to 1 type
11: 1:N allocation, chain type
Data link mode
0: Manual setting
1: Automatic setting
1: Local node data link participating
0: Local node data link not participating or data link
inactive
293
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Area and Troubleshooting
Section 9-2
Note Data link status is valid only when the local node is participating in the data
link. Confirm that the Local Data Link Active Bit is ON before referencing the
data link status.
The statuses of bits 12 to 14 are reflected only when using a CS1W-CLK21-
V1 or CJ1W-CLK21-V1.
Data Link Status: CIO 1500 + 25 × (Unit No.) + 7 to + 22
8-Bit Format Specified
+7
+8
+9
Node
Node
Node
Node
Node 10
Node 12
Node 14
Node 16
Node 18
Node 20
Node 22
Node 24
Node 26
Node 28
Node 30
Node 32
2
4
6
8
Node
1
3
5
7
9
Node
Node
Node
Node
+10
+11
+12
+13
+14
PLC status
0: Inactive (user program not running)
1: Active (user program running)
Node 11
Node 13
Node 15
Node 17
Node 19
Node 21
Node 23
Node 25
Node 27
Node 29
Node 31
PLC's CPU Unit error
0: Normal
1: Error
+15
+16
+17
+18
+19
Communications error (data link reception)
0: Normal
1: Error
+20
+21
+22
Data link participation
0: Not in data link or data link inactive
1: In data link
Offset error
0: Normal
1: Error
Error: Offset exceeds
number of send words.
Note When a data link with node addresses
higher than 32 is required, specify the
beginning storage word rather than us-
ing the default.
Insufficient (short) receive area Insufficient: Receive
0: Sufficient
area is smaller than
send area. Excess data
is truncated; other data
is received.
1: Insufficient
(In this case, a 31 word area is used
when the 8-bit format is specified.)
Remaining receive area
0: Not remaining
1: Remaining
Remaining: Receive
area is larger than send
area. Data is received
and remaining words
are cleared.
294
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Area and Troubleshooting
Section 9-2
4-Bit Format Specified
Node 4
Node 8
Node 3
Node 7
Node 2
Node 6
Node 1
Node 5
Node 12 Node 11 Node 10 Node 9
Node 16 Node 15 Node 14 Node 13
Node 20 Node 19 Node 18 Node 17
Node 24 Node 23 Node 22 Node 21
Node 30 Node 27 Node 26 Node 25
Node 32 Node 31 Node 30 Node 29
Node 36 Node 35 Node 34 Node 33
Node 40 Node 39 Node 38 Node 37
Node 44 Node 43 Node 42 Node 41
Node 48 Node 47 Node 46 Node 45
Node 52 Node 51 Node 50 Node 49
Node 58 Node 55 Node 54 Node 53
Node 60 Node 59 Node 58 Node 57
PLC status
0: Inactive (user program not running)
1: Active (user program running)
PLC's CPU Unit error
0: Normal
1: Error
0
0
Node 62 Node 61
Communications error (data link reception)
0: Normal
1: Error
Data link participation
0: Not in data link or data link inactive
1: In data link
The data link status can be reflected in 4-bit format only when using a CS1W-
CLK21-V1 or CJ1W-CLK21-V1. It is reflected in 8-bit format with other mod-
els.
When the first data link status word is set to the default (0000) for either the
manually set data link tables or automatically set data link tables (In the first
data link status word parameter), the data link status is stored in the above
area (CIO 1500 + 25 × (Unit No.) (+ 7 to +22)).
When a different area has been set for the first data link status word, the sta-
tus is stored in the specified area. The status storage format is the same as
the one shown in the above diagram.
Note Refer to 5-4 Checking Data Link Status for details on status flags.
Bit Status and Error Processing
Data Link Status
Bit status
Probable cause
Probable remedy
PLC’s CPU Unit error is 1: A fatal PLC error, non-fatal Refer to the PLC’s opera-
ON
PLC error, or a watchdog
timer error has occurred.
tion manual and correct
the error. If the error occurs
The Unit is mounted to a
non-compatible PLC.
Refer to 1-2-4 Controller
Link Unit Models and PLCs
and mount onto the correct
PLC.
295
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Area and Troubleshooting
Section 9-2
Bit status
Probable cause
Probable remedy
Communications error is 1: The relevant node is not in Enter the node in the Net-
ON
the Network.
work.
A communications error
Conduct an echoback test
has occurred as a result of using the Controller Link
noise.
Support Software and if
this does not correct the
error, check the usage
A communications error
has occurred.
shooting with RUN, ERC,
ERH and INS Indicators
and troubleshoot accord-
ingly.
Data link participation is 0: The relevant node is not
Enter the relevant node in
OFF
part of data links.
occurs, refer to page 291
Node Cannot Participate in
Data Link and troubleshoot
accordingly.
There are no active data
links in the Network.
Activate the data links.
Offset error is 1: ON
The offset is greater than
the number of send words words at the relevant node,
Check the number of send
at the relevant node.
the number of receive
words at the local node
and the offset, then reset
the data link table correctly.
Receive area insufficient
(short) is 1: ON
The send area at the rele- When the intention is not to
vant node is larger than the receive all data, use as is
receive area and some
data cannot be received.
(data that cannot be
received will be read and
discarded.)
When it differs from the
intended data link, check
the number of send words
at the relevant node, the
number of receive words at
the local node and the off-
set, then reset the data link
table correctly.
Receive area remaining is The send area at the rele- When the intention is to
1: ON vant node is smaller than leave some space in the
the receive area and some receive area, use as is (the
of the area will be unused. surplus receive area will be
cleared to 0.)
When it differs from the
intended data link, check
the number of send words
at the relevant node, the
number of receive words at
the local node and the off-
set, then reset the data link
table correctly.
296
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Area and Troubleshooting
Section 9-2
Other Status
Bit status
Probable cause
Probable remedy
Error log exists (CIO 1500 Error information on the
Using the Controller Link
Support Software or an
FINS command, read the
cause of the current error.
Alternatively, use past error
log records to troubleshoot
the problem.
+ 25 × n, bit 15) is 1: ON
Controller Link Unit (an
error log) has been
recorded.
Communications controller The Controller Link Unit is Replace the Controller Link
send error (CIO 1500 + 25 faulty.
Unit.
× n, bit 11) is 1: ON
Inconsistent network
parameters (CIO 1500 +
25 × n, bit 10) is 1: ON
Indicates that the network Check the network param-
parameters recorded in the eters on the Network in
CS/CJ Bus Unit Area differ use using the Controller
from the values of the Net- Link Support Software, and
work in use.
reset necessary parame-
ters.
Node address duplicate
setting error (CIO 1500 +
25 × n, bit 9) is 1: ON
The same node address
has been used more than address is used only once
once.
Reset so that each node
within the same Network.
EEPROM error (CIO 1500 An error has occurred
Check the status of bits 00
to 02 in (CIO 1500 + 25 ×
n, and correct any prob-
lems found. If the error
occurs again, replace the
CPU Unit.
+ 25 × n, bit 7) is 1: ON
while writing data to the
CPU Unit’s EEPROM.
PLC system setting error
(CIO 1500 + 25 × n, bit 3) data is damaged.
is 1: ON
The CPU Unit’s EEPROM Check the status of bits 00
to 02 in (CIO 1500 + 25 ×
n, and correct any prob-
lems found. If the error
occurs again, replace the
CPU Unit.
The PLC is protected.
Set the PLC’s protect
Routing table error
(CIO 1500 + 25 × n, bit 2) within the CPU Unit’s
is 1: ON
The routing table data
Refer to 7-4 Setting Rout-
ing Tables and reset the
routing tables correctly. If
the error occurs again,
replace the Controller Link
Unit.
EEPROM is damaged.
There is an error in the
routing table setting.
When using a routing
table, refer to 7-4 Setting
Routing Tables and reset
the routing tables correctly.
If no routing tables are
being used, delete the
tables.
297
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Area and Troubleshooting
Section 9-2
Bit status
Data link table error
(CIO 1500 + 25 × n, bit 1) the CS/CJ CPU Bus Unit
is 1: ON
Probable cause
Probable remedy
The data link table data in Refer to 5-3 Starting and
Stopping Data Links and
reset the data link tables
correctly. If the error occurs
again, replace the CPU
Unit.
Area is damaged.
There is an error in the
data link table settings.
When using manually set
data links, refer to 5-3
Starting and Stopping Data
Links and remake and set
the data link tables cor-
rectly. When manually set
data links are not being
tables.
Network parameter error
The network parameter
Refer to 8-1-3 Network
(CIO 1500 + 25 × n, bit 0) data in the CS/CJ CPU
Parameters and reset the
Bus Unit Area is damaged. data correctly. If the error
occurs again, replace the
is 1: ON
CPU Unit.
Either set the EEPROM
Clear Bit in the DM Param-
eter Area to ON, or use the
Initialize network parame-
ters operation on the Main-
tenance Menu of the
Controller Link Support
Software to initialize the
network parameters and
ply.
There is an error in the net- Refer to 8-1-3 Network
work parameter settings, or Parameters and reset the
node address of the local
node is larger then the
maximum address set
within the network parame-
ters.
network parameters or the
node address.
Terminating Resistance Status: CIO 1500 + 25 × (Unit No.) + 24
Terminating resistance status: 0: OFF
1: ON
298
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Area and Troubleshooting
Section 9-2
9-2-2 C200HX/HG/HE Controller Link Units
The status of the Unit and Network is indicated in the following manner in the
PLC.
Status Area
Duplicate Operating Levels/Refresh Error: AR 00
Operating level 1
Operating level 0
A bit will be turned ON (1) the
next cycle when
1) The same operating level is
set more than once or
2) A refresh error occurs
between the Controller LInk
Unit and the PLC's CPU Unit.
Routing Table Error/Unit Restart Bits: AR 01
Operating level 1
Operating level 0
Resets the Controller Link Unit.
Turn ON (1) and then OFF (0)
to reset Unit.
Operating level 1
Operating level 0
1: Routing table error
Network Participation Status: AR 08, AR 09, AR 12, AR 13
Operating level 0
AR 08
AR 09
Operating level 1
AR 12
AR 13
The numbers in the squares indicate node addresses.
The corresponding node participation status is as follows:
0: Not part of network
1: Part of network
Communications Controller Hardware Error, EEPROM Error: AR 11, AR 15
Operating level 0
AR 11
Operating level 1
AR 15
1: Communications controller hardware error
1: EEPROM error
Service Time: AR 16, AR 17
Operating level 0
AR 16
Operating level 1
AR 17
The service time for each PLC cycle is calculated by the PLC
and displayed in 0.1-ms units in 4-digit BCD.
Operating Level Connection Status, Inconsistent Network Parameters: AR 24
Operating level 1
1: Network parameters do not match
Operating level 0
Operating level 1
Operating level 0
1: Connecting to the operating level
299
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Area and Troubleshooting
Section 9-2
Polling Node Address, Startup Node Address: SR 238, SR 242
Operating level 0
SR 238
Operating level 1
SR 242
Polling node address
Startup node address
Each node address is displayed in 2-digit BCD.
Data Link Status: SR 239
to SR 241, SR 243 to
SR 245
When the data link status stored in the start word for the manual setting data
link table or automatic setting data link parameters is not set or is set to 0, the
data link status of only node addresses 1 to 6 will be displayed in the following
area.
Operating Operating
level 0
level 1
SR 239
SR 240
SR 241
SR 243
SR 244
SR 245
Node
Node
Node
2
4
6
Node
Node
Node
1
3
5
PLC status
0: Inactive (user program not running)
1: Active (user program running)
PLC's CPU Unit error
0: Normal
1: Error
Communications error (data link reception)
0: Normal
1: Error
Data link participation
0: Not in data link or data link inactive
1: In data link
Offset error
0: Normal
1: Error
Error: Offset exceeds
number of send words.
Insufficient (short) receive area Insufficient: Receive
0: Sufficient
1: Insufficient
area is smaller than
send area. Excess data
is truncated; other data
is received.
Remaining receive area
0: Not remaining
1: Remaining
Remaining: Receive area
is larger than send area.
Data is received and
remaining words are
cleared.
Operating Level Status: SR 252
1: Local node data link participating
SEND/RECV Enable Flag
0: Disabled (operating)
1: Enabled (not operating)
SEND/RECV Error Flag
0: Normal completion
1: Error
Operating level 1
Operating level 0
1: Local node data link participating
SEND/RECV Enable Flag
0: Disabled (operating)
1: Enabled (not operating)
SEND/RECV Error Flag
0: Normal completion
1: Error
Note Data link status is valid only when the local node is participating in the data
link. Confirm that the local node’s data links are active in the operating level
status in SR 252 before referencing the data link status.
300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Area and Troubleshooting
Section 9-2
Data Link Status: First Data Link Status Word + 0 to + 15
Node
Node
Node
Node
2
4
6
8
Node
Node
Node
Node
Node
Node 11
Node 13
Node 15
Node 17
Node 19
Node 21
Node 23
Node 25
Node 27
Node 29
Node 31
1
3
5
7
9
Node 10
Node 12
Node 14
Node 16
Node 18
Node 20
Node 22
Node 24
Node 26
Node 28
Node 30
Node 32
PLC status
0: Inactive (user program not running)
1: Active (user program running)
PLC's CPU Unit error
0: Normal
1: Error
Communications error (data link reception)
0: Normal
1: Error
Data link participation
0: Not in data link or data link inactive
1: In data link
Offset error
0: Normal
1: Error
Error: Offset exceeds
number of send words.
Insufficient (short) receive area Insufficient: Receive
0: Sufficient
1: Insufficient
area is smaller than
send area. Excess data
is truncated; other data
is received.
Remaining receive area
0: Not remaining
1: Remaining
Remaining: Receive
area is larger than send
area. Data is received
and remaining words
are cleared.
Note Refer to 5-4 Checking Data Link Status for details on status flags.
Troubleshooting with Status Flags
Data Link Status
Bit status
Probable cause
Probable remedy
PLC’s CPU Unit error is 1: A fatal PLC error, non-fatal Refer to the PLC’s opera-
ON
PLC error, or a watchdog
timer error has occurred.
tion manual and correct
the error. If the error occurs
The Unit is mounted to a
non-compatible PLC.
Refer to 1-2-4 Controller
Link Unit Models and PLCs
and mount onto the correct
PLC.
Communications error is 1: The relevant node is not in Enter the node in the Net-
ON
the Network.
work.
A communications error
Conduct an echoback test
has occurred as a result of using the Controller Link
noise.
Support Software and if
this does not correct the
error, check the usage
A communications error
has occurred.
shooting with RUN, ERC,
ERH and INS Indicators
and troubleshoot accord-
ingly.
301
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Area and Troubleshooting
Section 9-2
Bit status
Probable cause
Probable remedy
Data link participation is 0: The relevant node is not
Enter the relevant node in
OFF
part of data links.
occurs, refer to page 280
Node Cannot Participate in
Data Link and troubleshoot
accordingly.
There are no active data
links in the Network.
Activate the data links.
Offset error is 1: ON
The offset is greater than
the number of send words words at the relevant node,
Check the number of send
at the relevant node.
the number of receive
words at the local node
and the offset, then reset
the data link table correctly.
Receive area insufficient
(short) is 1: ON
The send area at the rele- When the intention is not to
vant node is larger than the receive all data, use as is
receive area and some
data cannot be received.
(data that cannot be
received will be read and
discarded.)
When it differs from the
intended data link, check
the number of send words
at the relevant node, the
number of receive words at
the local node and the off-
set, then reset the data link
table correctly.
Receive area remaining is The send area at the rele- When the intention is to
1: ON vant node is smaller than leave some space in the
the receive area and some receive area, use as is (the
of the area will be unused. remaining receive area will
be cleared to 0.)
When it differs from the
intended data link, check
the number of send words
at the relevant node, the
number of receive words at
the local node and the off-
set, then reset the data link
table correctly.
302
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Area and Troubleshooting
Section 9-2
Other Status
Bit status
Probable cause
Probable remedy
Duplicate Operating Lev-
els/Refresh Error:
The same operating level is If two units are required,
set twice within the same
PLC.
set them to different oper-
ating levels.
Operating level 0: AR0011
Operating level 1: AR0010
A refresh error has
Secure the Controller Link
occurred between the PLC Unit firmly.
and the Unit.
One of the above flags is 1:
ON
For C200HX/HG/HE PLCs,
tighten the screws on the
Bus Connection Unit.
If the error occurs even
when the Unit is mounted
on another PLC, replace
the Controller Link Unit.
Routing Table Error/Unit
Restart:
The routing table data
within the DM Area is dam- ing Tables and reset cor-
aged.
Refer to 7-4 Setting Rout-
rectly. If the error occurs
again, replace the Control-
ler Link Unit.
Operating level 0: AR0113
Operating level 1: AR0112
One of the above flags is 1:
ON
There is an error in the
routing table setting or a
Routing Table Enable Bit
(software switch) setting
error.
When using routing tables
refer to 7-4 Setting Routing
Tables and reset them cor-
rectly.
When no routing tables are
being used, turn OFF the
Routing Table Enable Flag.
Communications controller The Controller Link Unit is Replace the Controller Link
hardware error:
faulty.
Unit.
Operating level 0: AR1114
Operating level 1: AR1514
One of the above flags is 1:
ON
EEPROM error:
An error occurred when
writing data to EEPROM.
Remake and set the data
link table and the network
parameters. If the error
occurs again, replace the
Controller Link Unit.
Operating level 0: AR1115
Operating level 1: AR1515
The EEPROM data link
tables or the network
parameters are damaged.
One of the above flags is 1:
ON
There is an error in the
data link or network param-
eter settings.
Inconsistent network
parameters:
Indicates that the network Check the network param-
parameters in the eters on the Network,
EEPROM of the Controller using the Controller Link
Link Unit differ from those Support Software, and
Operating level 0: AR2407
Operating level 1: AR2406
in the Network.
reset the necessary
parameters.
One of the above flags is 1:
ON
303
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Area and Troubleshooting
Section 9-2
9-2-3 CVM1 and CV-series Controller Link Units
The status of the Unit and Network is indicated in the following manner in the
PLC.
Status Area
Error Information: CIO 1500 + 25 × (Unit No.)
1: Network parameter error (In PLC's EEPROM)
1: Data link table error (in PLC's EEPROM)
1: Routing table error (in PLC's EEPROM)
1: PLC system setting error
1: EEPROM error
1: Duplicate node address setting error
1: Inconsistent network parameters
1: Communications controller send error
1: Error log exists
Polling Node Address, Startup Node Address: CIO 1500 + 25 × (Unit No.) + 1
Polling node address
Startup node address
Each node address is displayed in 2-digit BCD.
Network Participation Status: CIO 1500 + 25 × (Unit No.) + 2, + 3
+ 2
+ 3
The numbers in the squares indicate node addresses.
The corresponding node participation status is as follows:
0: Not part of the network
1: Part of the network
Local Data Link Participation Status: CIO 1500 + 25 × (Unit No.) + 6
1: Local node data link participating
0: Local node data link not participating or data link
inactive
Note Data link status is valid only when the local node is participating in the data
link. Confirm that the Local Data Link Active Bit is ON before referencing the
data link status.
304
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Area and Troubleshooting
Section 9-2
Data Link Status: CIO 1500 + 25 × (Unit No.) + 7 to + 22
+7
Node
Node
Node
Node
2
4
6
8
Node
Node
Node
Node
Node
Node 11
Node 13
Node 15
Node 17
Node 19
Node 21
Node 23
Node 25
Node 27
Node 29
Node 31
1
3
5
7
9
+8
+9
+10
+11
+12
+13
+14
+15
+16
+17
+18
+19
+20
+21
+22
Node 10
Node 12
Node 14
Node 16
Node 18
Node 20
Node 22
Node 24
Node 26
Node 28
Node 30
Node 32
PLC status
0: Inactive (user program not running)
1: Active (user program running)
PLC's CPU Unit error
0: Normal
1: Error
Communications error (data link reception)
0: Normal
1: Error
Data link participation
0: Not in data link or data link inactive
1: In data link
Offset error
0: Normal
1: Error
Error: Offset exceeds
number of send words.
Insufficient (short) receive area Insufficient: Receive
0: Sufficient
1: Insufficient
area is smaller than
send area. Excess data
is truncated; other data
is received.
Remaining receive area
0: Not remaining
1: Remaining
Remaining: Receive
area is larger than send
area. Data is received
and remaining words
are cleared.
When the first data link status word is set to the default (0000) for either the
manually set data link tables or automatically set data link tables (In the first
data link status word parameter), the data link status is stored in the above
area (CIO 1500 + 25 × (Unit No.) (+ 7 to +22)).
When a different area has been set for the first data link status word, the sta-
tus is stored in the specified area. The status storage format is the same as
the one shown in the above diagram.
Note Refer to 5-4 Checking Data Link Status for details on status flags.
Bit Status and Error Processing
Data Link Status
Bit status
Probable cause
Probable remedy
PLC’s CPU Unit error is 1: A fatal PLC error, non-fatal Refer to the PLC’s opera-
ON
PLC error, or a watchdog
timer error has occurred.
tion manual and correct
the error. If the error occurs
The Unit is mounted to a
non-compatible PLC.
Refer to 1-2-4 Controller
Link Unit Models and PLCs
and mount onto the correct
PLC.
305
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Area and Troubleshooting
Section 9-2
Bit status
Probable cause
Probable remedy
Communications error is 1: The relevant node is not in Enter the node in the Net-
ON
the Network.
work.
A communications error
Conduct an echoback test
has occurred as a result of using the Controller Link
noise.
Support Software and if
this does not correct the
error, check the usage
A communications error
has occurred.
shooting with RUN, ERC,
ERH and INS Indicators
and troubleshoot accord-
ingly.
Data link participation is 0: The relevant node is not
Enter the relevant node in
OFF
part of data links.
occurs, refer to page 291
Node Cannot Participate in
Data Link and troubleshoot
accordingly.
There are no active data
links in the Network.
Activate the data links.
Offset error is 1: ON
The offset is greater than
the number of send words words at the relevant node,
Check the number of send
at the relevant node.
the number of receive
words at the local node
and the offset, then reset
the data link table correctly.
Receive area insufficient
(short) is 1: ON
The send area at the rele- When the intention is not to
vant node is larger than the receive all data, use as is
receive area and some
data cannot be received.
(data that cannot be
received will be read and
discarded.)
When it differs from the
intended data link, check
the number of send words
at the relevant node, the
number of receive words at
the local node and the off-
set, then reset the data link
table correctly.
Receive area remaining is The send area at the rele- When the intention is to
1: ON vant node is smaller than leave some space in the
the receive area and some receive area, use as is (the
of the area will be unused. surplus receive area will be
cleared to 0.)
When it differs from the
intended data link, check
the number of send words
at the relevant node, the
number of receive words at
the local node and the off-
set, then reset the data link
table correctly.
306
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Area and Troubleshooting
Section 9-2
Other Status
Bit status
Probable cause
Probable remedy
Error log exists (CIO 1500 Error information on the
Using the Controller Link
Support Software or an
FINS command, read the
cause of the current error.
Alternatively, use past error
log records to troubleshoot
the problem.
+ 25 × n, bit 15) is 1: ON
Controller Link Unit (an
error log) has been
recorded.
Communications controller The Controller Link Unit is Replace the Controller Link
send error (CIO 1500 + 25 faulty.
Unit.
× n, bit 11) is 1: ON
Inconsistent network
parameters (CIO 1500 +
25 × n, bit 10) is 1: ON
Indicates that the network Check the network param-
parameters recorded in the eters on the Network in
CPU Unit’s EEPROM differ use using the Controller
from the values of the Net- Link Support Software, and
work in use.
reset necessary parame-
ters.
Node address duplicate
setting error (CIO 1500 +
25 × n, bit 9) is 1: ON
The same node address
has been used more than address is used only once
once.
Reset so that each node
within the same Network.
EEPROM error (CIO 1500 An error has occurred
Check the status of bits 00
to 02 in (CIO 1500 + 25 ×
n, and correct any prob-
lems found. If the error
occurs again, replace the
CPU Unit.
+ 25 × n, bit 7) is 1: ON
while writing data to the
CPU Unit’s EEPROM.
PLC system setting error
(CIO 1500 + 25 × n, bit 3) data is damaged.
is 1: ON
The CPU Unit’s EEPROM Check the status of bits 00
to 02 in (CIO 1500 + 25 ×
n, and correct any prob-
lems found. If the error
occurs again, replace the
CPU Unit.
The PLC is protected.
Set the PLC’s protect
Routing table error
(CIO 1500 + 25 × n, bit 2) within the CPU Unit’s
is 1: ON
The routing table data
Refer to 7-4 Setting Rout-
ing Tables and reset the
routing tables correctly. If
the error occurs again,
replace the Controller Link
Unit.
EEPROM is damaged.
There is an error in the
routing table setting.
When using a routing
table, refer to 7-4 Setting
Routing Tables and reset
the routing tables correctly.
If no routing tables are
being used, delete the
tables.
307
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Area and Troubleshooting
Section 9-2
Bit status
Data link table error
(CIO 1500 + 25 × n, bit 1) the EEPROM of the CPU
is 1: ON
Probable cause
The data link table data in Refer to 5-3 Starting and
Stopping Data Links and
reset the data link tables
correctly. If the error occurs
again, replace the CPU
Unit.
Unit is damaged.
There is an error in the
data link table settings.
Starting and Stopping Data
Links and remake and set
the data link tables cor-
rectly. When manually set
data links are not being
used, delete the data link
Network parameter error
The CPU Unit’s EEPROM Refer to 8-1-3 Network
(CIO 1500 + 25 × n, bit 0) data link tables or the net- Parameters and reset the
is 1: ON work parameters are dam- data correctly. If the error
aged.
occurs again, replace the
CPU Unit.
Either set the EEPROM
Clear Bit in the DM Param-
eter Area to ON, or use the
Initialize network parame-
ters operation on the Main-
tenance Menu of the
Controller Link Support
Software to initialize the
network parameters and
then cycle the power sup-
There is an error in the net- Refer to 8-1-3 Network
work parameter settings, or Parameters and reset the
node address of the local
node is larger then the
maximum address set
within the network parame-
ters.
network parameters or the
node address.
9-2-4 CQM1H-series Controller Link Units
Status Area
Error Information: IR 190
1: Network parameter error (In PLC's EEPROM)
1: Data link table error (in PLC's EEPROM)
1: Routing table error (in PLC's EEPROM)
1: PLC system setting error
1: EEPROM error
1: Duplicate node address setting error
1: Inconsistent network parameters
1: Communications controller send error
1: Error log exists
308
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Area and Troubleshooting
Section 9-2
Polling Node Address, Startup Node Address: IR 191
Polling node address
Startup node address
Each node address is displayed in 2-digit BCD.
Network Participation Status: IR 192 and IR 193
IR 192
IR 193
The numbers in the squares indicate node addresses.
The corresponding node participation status is as follows:
0: Not part of the network
1: Part of the network
Local Data Link Participation Status: IR 90
1: Local node data link participating
0: Local node data link not participating or data link
inactive
Note Data link status is valid only when the local node is participating in the data
link. Confirm that the Local Data Link Active Bit is ON before referencing the
data link status.
Data Link Status: IR 91 to
IR 93
When the first data link status word is not set or is set to the default (0000) for
either the manually set data link tables or automatically set data link tables,
the data link status is stored in the following words for nodes 1 to 6 only.
IR 91
Node
Node
Node
2
4
6
Node
Node
Node
1
3
5
IR 92
IR 93
PLC status
0: Inactive (user program not running)
1: Active (user program running)
PLC's CPU Unit error
0: Normal
1: Error
Communications error (data link reception)
0: Normal
1: Error
Data link participation
0: Not in data link or data link inactive
1: In data link
Offset error
0: Normal
1: Error
Error: Offset exceeds
number of send words.
Insufficient (short) receive area Insufficient: Receive
0: Sufficient
1: Insufficient
area is smaller than
send area. Excess data
is truncated; other data
is received.
Remaining receive area
0: Not remaining
1: Remaining
Remaining: Receive
area is larger than send
area. Data is received
and remaining words
are cleared.
Note Refer to 5-4 Checking Data Link Status for details on status flags.
309
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Area and Troubleshooting
Section 9-2
Bit Status and Error Processing
Data Link Status
Bit status
Probable cause
Probable remedy
PLC’s CPU Unit error is 1: A fatal PLC error, non-fatal Refer to the PLC’s opera-
ON
PLC error, or a watchdog
timer error has occurred.
tion manual and correct
the error. If the error occurs
The Unit is mounted to a
non-compatible PLC.
Refer to 1-2-4 Controller
Link Unit Models and PLCs
and mount onto the correct
PLC.
Communications error is 1: The relevant node is not in Enter the node in the Net-
ON
the Network.
work.
A communications error
Conduct an echoback test
has occurred as a result of using the Controller Link
noise.
Support Software and if
this does not correct the
error, check the usage
A communications error
has occurred.
shooting with RUN, ERC,
ERH and INS Indicators
and troubleshoot accord-
ingly.
Data link participation is 0: The relevant node is not
Enter the relevant node in
OFF
part of data links.
occurs, refer to page 291
Node Cannot Participate in
Data Link and troubleshoot
accordingly.
There are no active data
links in the Network.
Activate the data links.
Offset error is 1: ON
The offset is greater than
Check the number of send
the number of send words words at the relevant node,
at the relevant node.
the number of receive
words at the local node
and the offset, then reset
the data link table correctly.
310
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Area and Troubleshooting
Section 9-2
Bit status
Probable cause
Probable remedy
Receive area insufficient
(short) is 1: ON
The send area at the rele- When the intention is not to
vant node is larger than the receive all data, use as is
receive area and some
data cannot be received.
(data that cannot be
received will be read and
discarded.)
When it differs from the
intended data link, check
the number of send words
at the relevant node, the
number of receive words at
the local node and the off-
set, then reset the data link
table correctly.
Receive area remaining is The send area at the rele- When the intention is to
1: ON vant node is smaller than leave some space in the
the receive area and some receive area, use as is (the
of the area will be unused. surplus receive area will be
cleared to 0.)
When it differs from the
intended data link, check
the number of send words
at the relevant node, the
number of receive words at
the local node and the off-
set, then reset the data link
table correctly.
Other Status
Bit status
Probable cause
Probable remedy
Error log exists (IR 19015) Error information on the
Using the Controller Link
Support Software or an
FINS command, read the
cause of the current error.
Alternatively, use past error
log records to troubleshoot
the problem.
is 1: ON
Controller Link Unit (an
error log) has been
recorded.
Communications controller The Controller Link Unit is Replace the Controller Link
send error (IR 19011) is 1: faulty.
ON
Unit.
Inconsistent network
Indicates that the network Check the network param-
parameters (IR 19010) is 1: parameters recorded in the eters on the Network in
ON
CPU Unit’s EEPROM differ use using the Controller
from the values of the Net- Link Support Software, and
work in use.
reset necessary parame-
ters.
Node address duplicate
The same node address
Reset so that each node
setting error (IR 19009) is has been used more than address is used only once
1: ON
once.
within the same Network.
EEPROM error (IR 19007) An error has occurred
Check the status of bits
IR 19000 to IR 19002 and
correct any problems
found. If the error occurs
again, replace the CPU
Unit.
is 1: ON
while writing data to the
CPU Unit’s EEPROM.
311
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Area and Troubleshooting
Section 9-2
Bit status
Probable cause
Probable remedy
Routing table error
(IR 19002) is 1: ON
The routing table data
within the CPU Unit’s
EEPROM is damaged.
Refer to 7-4 Setting Rout-
ing Tables and reset the
routing tables correctly. If
the error occurs again,
replace the Controller Link
Unit.
There is an error in the
routing table setting.
When using a routing
table, refer to 7-4 Setting
Routing Tabless and reset
the routing tables correctly.
If no routing tables are
being used, delete the
Data link table error
(IR 19001) is 1: ON
The data link table data in Refer to 5-3 Starting and
the EEPROM of the CPU
Unit is damaged.
Stopping Data Links and
reset the data link tables
correctly. If the error occurs
again, replace the CPU
Unit.
There is an error in the
data link table settings.
Starting and Stopping Data
Links and remake and set
the data link tables cor-
rectly. When manually set
data links are not being
used, delete the data link
Network parameter error
(IR 19000) is 1: ON
The CPU Unit’s EEPROM Refer to 8-1-3 Network
data link tables or the net- Parameters and reset the
work parameters are dam- data correctly. If the error
aged.
occurs again, replace the
CPU Unit.
Either set the EEPROM
Clear Bit in the DM Param-
eter Area to ON, or use the
Initialize network parame-
ters operation on the Main-
tenance Menu of the
Controller Link Support
Software to initialize the
network parameters and
then cycle the power sup-
There is an error in the net- Refer to 8-1-3 Network
work parameter settings, or Parameters and reset the
node address of the local
node is larger then the
maximum address set
within the network parame-
ters.
network parameters or the
node address.
Terminating Resistance Status: IR 95
Terminating resistance status: 0: OFF
1: ON
312
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error Log
Section 9-3
9-3 Error Log
The error log records errors that occur in the Controller Link Unit and the time
they occur. The error log can be read or cleared by using Programming
Devices, such as the Controller Link Support Software, the CX-Net, or Sup-
port Software for the CPU Unit (SYSMAC Support Software), or by using the
message service (FINS commands for the Controller Link Unit.)
9-3-1 Error Log Table
Errors are recorded in an error log table in the Unit’s RAM, with one record for
each error and a maximum of 39 records.
Errors of significance are also recorded in the Unit’s EEPROM so that when
the power to the Unit is turned OFF or reset, a record of the error will remain.
(The error log table in EEPROM automatically reads the Unit’s RAM when the
power is turned ON again.)
Item
Specification
No. of records
Data code
39 max.
Binary (Times are in BCD)
10 bytes
Length of each record
Configuration of records
Error code: 2 bytes (Refer to page 314)
Detail code: 2 bytes (Refer to page 314)
Time: 6 bytes (Refer to the following
page)
Record order
From the oldest record to the most
recent.
If the number of records exceeds 39, the oldest record will be deleted and the
most recent error recorded.
Error Log Table Configuration
0
Error code
Detail
Record
(Oldest)
Min
S
Day
Hour
Month
Year
Error code
Detail
Record
Min
Day
Year
S
Hour
Month
Error code
Detail
Record
(Newest)
Min
Day
Year
S
Hour
Month
313
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error Log
Section 9-3
Time Information
The time is recorded in BCD with one byte each for the year (the rightmost
two digits), month, day, hour, seconds, and minutes of the time the error
occurred.
Note
1. The PLC’s time information can be read and used in the Controller Link
Unit. When the time cannot be read from the PLC, all error log times will
but 0. This can occur for PLC startup errors, Unit No. errors, CPU Unit er-
rors, or PLC model errors. When error logs like these are read from the
Controller Link Support Software, they will be dated 0 s, 0 min, 0 hr, 0 day,
0 month, 2000.
2. When replacing the battery for CS/CJ-series PLCs, it will be necessary to
switch the power supply ON and reset the internal clock.
If the internal clock is not reset, time information in the error log will not be
recorded correctly.
3. The time information will be all zeros for CQM1H-series PLCs unless a
Memory Cassette with a clock is mounted in the CPU Unit. The time infor-
mation will be all zeros in the year 2000 if it is read from Support Software.
9-3-2 Error Codes
The following table lists the error codes (in 4-digit hexadecimal) and the con-
tents of the errors.
Error
code
Contents
Detail code
1st byte 2nd byte
00 Hex 00 Hex
Correction
Written to Applicable
EEPROM PLC
0001 PLC watchdog timer error
Hex
Replace PLC’s CPU Yes
Unit.
All
0002 PLC service monitor error
Hex
Monitor time (unit: ms)
Check operating
environment.
Yes
CV, CS/CJ
CV
0003 PLC shared RAM error
Hex
01 Hex:
Cyclic
00 Hex
Check operating
environment.
Yes
02 Hex:
Event
04 Hex:
CPU bus link
0004 CPU Bus Unit ID number error
Hex
00 Hex
00 Hex
Check I/O
Connecting Cables.
Yes
Yes
CV, CS/CJ
CV
0005 Unit number error
Hex
Unit set
value
The value
recognized
Check the Unit
number setting. Rec-
by the CPU reate the I/O table.
Unit
0006 CPU Unit error
Hex
Bit 11:No relevant Unit in
I/O table.
Check the Unit num- Yes
ber settings. Recre-
ate the I/O table.
CV, CS/CJ
Bit 12: Hardware test unit
number recognized.
Bit 13: Incorrect unit num-
ber.
Bit 14: Duplicated unit
number.
000D PLC model error
Hex
Not set
troller Link Unit Mod-
els and PLCs and
PLCs and check the
PLC model.
C200HX/HG/
HE
314
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error Log
Section 9-3
Error
code
Contents
Detail code
1st byte 2nd byte
00 Hex 00 Hex
Correction
Written to Applicable
EEPROM
PLC
000E I/O Bus error
Hex
Check the operating Yes
environment.
CS/CJ
000F PLC initialization error
Hex
Check the operating Yes
environment.
CS/CJ
CS/CJ
0010 PLC Setup exceeds capacity
Hex
Reduce the number Yes
of CPU Bus Units
mounted on each
CPU Unit by one.
0011 PLC initialization error
Check the operating Yes
environment.
CS/CJ
CS/CJ
CS/CJ
Hex
(Time out)
0012 CPU Unit memory error
Hex
01 Hex:
Read error
02 Hex:
01 Hex:
Data link
table
02 Hex: Net-
work param-
eters
Reset the appropri-
ate data.
Yes
0013 CPU Unit write-protected
Hex
Release the CPU
Unit write protect.
Yes
Write error
03 Hex:
Routing
table
04 Hex: PLC
Setup Area
315
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error Log
Section 9-3
Error
code
Contents
Detail code
1st byte 2nd byte
Correction
Written to Applicable
EEPROM
PLC
0101 Transmission failed; local node
Hex not in Network
Command block
Bits 0 to 7:
Source node address
Bits 8 to 14:
Source Network
address
Refer to page 276
Troubleshooting
Using Indicators and
place the local node
into Network.
No
All
All
0103 Transmission failed; retry count
Hex exceeded
Using the Controller No
Link Support Soft-
ware or FINS
Bit 15:
OFF
commands, run
echoback test and
check operating envi-
ronment if errors
occur.
Response block
Bits 0 to 7:
Destination node
address
Bits 8 to 14:
Destination Network
address
0104 Transmission failed; maximum
Hex number of frames exceeded.
Reduce the number No
of events per com-
munications cycle or
increase the maxi-
mum number of
All
All
Bit 15:
ON
(1st byte: bits 8 to 15;
2nd byte, bits 0 to 7)
network parameter
0105 Transmission failed; node
Hex address incorrect
No
and CV-series Con-
troller Link Units and
check node address
settings to be sure
they are within range
and unique.
0106 Transmission failed; redundant
Hex node address
Correct node
addresses so that
they are unique
within the same
No
All
All
All
0107 Transmission failed; destination
Hex node not in Network
shooting Using Indi-
cators and place
destination node into
0108 Transmission failed; specified
and CV-series Con-
troller Link Units and
check unit address
and unit number of
destination.
No
Hex
Unit does not exist
316
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error Log
Section 9-3
Error
code
Contents
Detail code
1st byte 2nd byte
Correction
Written to Applicable
EEPROM
PLC
0109 Transmission failed; destination Command block
Increase number of No
retries or reconfig-
ure system to distrib-
ute load.
All
All
Hex
busy
Bits 0 to 7:
Source node address
Bits 8 to 14:
Source Network address
Bit 15:
OFF
010A Transmission failed; communica-
Hex tions controller error
Conduct an echo-
back test and if the
effects of noise are
considerable, recon-
sider the operating
environment. Restart
the Controller Link
Unit. If the error
Yes
Response block
Bits 0 to 7:
Destination node
address
Bits 8 to 14:
Destination Network
address
occurs again,
replace the Unit.
010B Transmission failed; PLC error
Hex
Bit 15:
ON
Refer to the PLC
operating manual. If
the error occurs
again, replace the
PLC.
No
No
All
(1st byte: bits 8 to 15;
2nd byte, bits 0 to 7)
010C Transmission failed; unit number
Check unit number
settings to be sure
they are within range
and unique.
CV, CS/CJ
Hex
incorrect
010D Transmission failed; destination
Hex address incorrect
Check routing tables. No
Check routing tables No
Check routing tables. No
All
All
All
All
010E Transmission failed; routing
Hex tables not registered
010F Transmission failed; routing table
Hex error
0110 Transmission failed; too many
Hex relay points
Check routing tables No
and system configu-
ration. Use a CS/CJ-
series CPU Unit with
unit version 2.0 or
later and CX-Pro-
grammer Ver. 4.0 or
higher to send com-
mands across three
or more network lev-
els.
0111 Transmission failed; command
Hex packet too long
Be sure to use the
FINS command
format.
No
No
No
All
All
0112 Transmission failed; header
Hex error.
Be sure to use the
correct FINS
command format.
0113 Transmission failed; I/O setting
Hex error
Check I/O table
accuracy.
CV, CS/CJ
CV, CS/CJ
0114 Transmission failed; CPU bus
Hex error
Check Unit and cable No
connections and
clear error.
0115 Transmission failed; redundant I/
Hex O allocations
Check unit numbers No
for redundancywithin
the same PLC.
CV, CS/CJ
CV, CS/CJ
0116 Transmission failed; CPU Bus
Hex Unit error
Check Unit and cable No
connections and
clear error.
317
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error Log
Section 9-3
Error
code
Contents
Detail code
1st byte 2nd byte
Correction
Written to Applicable
EEPROM
PLC
0117 Internal buffer full
Hex
Command block
Bits 0 to 7:
Source node address
Bits 8 to 14:
Source Network address
Bit 15:
OFF
Increase number of No
retries or reconfig-
ure system to distrib-
ute load.
All
All
0118 Illegal packet discarded
Hex
Check for nodes
sending illegal
packets.
Yes
Response block
Bits 0 to 7:
Destination node
address
Bits 8 to 14:
Destination Network
address
Bit 15:
ON
(1st byte: bits 8 to 15;
2nd byte, bits 0 to 7)
0203 EEPROM error
Hex
01 Hex:
Read error
02: Hex:
01 Hex:
Data link
tables
02 Hex:
Network
parameters
03 Hex:
Routing
tables
For CVM1 and CV-
series PLCs, check
that the PLC is not
protected.
Yes
C200HX/HG/
HE, CV,
CQM1H
Write error
Remake and set the
relevant data. If the
error occurs again for
the CVM1 and
CV-series, replace
the CPU Unit and for
the C200HX/HG/HE
PLCs, replace the
Controller Link Unit.
0206 Number of participating nodes
Network
Number of
Check network
No
All
All
All
All
Hex
decreased (local node still partic- parameters non-partici- parameters, node
ipating)
maximum
node
address
pating nodes participation, cables,
and terminating
0207 Number of participating nodes
No
No
resistance.
Hex
decreased (local node not partic-
ipating)
0208 Polling node changed
Hex
Address of
previous
polling node node
Address of
new polling polling node.
Check previous
0209 Inconsistent network parameter 00 Hex
Hex
Address of
Using the Controller Yes
polling node Link Support Soft-
ware, check network
parameters.
020C Time out with token
Hex
00 Hex
Error status Check network
(See note.) parameters, node
participation, cables,
and terminating
No
All
resistance.
0210 Communications controller send 00 Hex
Hex error
Error status Replace the Control- Yes
(See note.) ler Link Unit.
All
All
0211 Duplicate address error
Hex
00 Hex
Local node
address
Reset so that each
node address is used
only once within the
same Network.
No
0214 Node address setting error
Hex
Not specified
Check the node
address settings and
correct them.
Yes
CS/CJ,
CQM1H
318
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error Log
Section 9-3
Error
code
Contents
Detail code
1st byte 2nd byte
Backup
Correction
Written to Applicable
EEPROM
PLC
0216 Backup power supply error (Opti- 00 Hex
Hex cal Units only)
Check the status of
No
CS/CJ
power sup- the backup power
ply error dis- supply and power
tinction:
supply cables.
01 Hex:
OFF to ON
02 Hex: ON
to OFF
021A Set table logic error
Hex
00 Hex
01 Hex: Net- Remake and set the Yes
work param- appropriate data.
All
eters
02 Hex:
Check the unit ver-
sion.
Data link
tables
03 Hex:
Routing
tables
021B Hardware error
Hex
00 Hex
Not set
Error status Replace the Control- No
(See note.) ler Link Unit.
All
021C Data link error inactive
Hex
Restart the Control- Yes
ler Link Unit.
All
0220 Reduced number of participating Separated nodes 1 to 16
Check the node
No
CS/CJ
Hex
nodes (separated nodes)
correspond to bits 0 to 15
(1st byte: bits 8 to 15, 2nd arated nodes,
parameters, the sep-
byte: bits 0 to 7)
cables, and terminat-
ing resistance set-
tings.
0221
Hex
Separated nodes 17 to 32
correspond to bits 0 to 15
(1st byte: bits 8 to 15, 2nd
byte: bits 0 to 7)
0222
Hex
Separated nodes 33 to 48
correspond to bits 0 to 15
(1st byte: bits 8 to 15, 2nd
byte: bits 0 to 7)
0223
Hex
Separated nodes 49 to 62
correspond to bits 0 to 13
(1st byte: bits 8 to 15, 2nd
byte: bits 0 to 7)
0230 Data link stop requested
Hex
Start node
address
Stop node
address
Check the applica-
tion and Support
Software operation if
the data link was not
intentionally stopped.
Yes
No
CS/CJ
0300 Packet discarded
Hex
Not set
Not set
Conduct an echo-
back test and find the
cause of the error.
All
All
0601 Unit error
Hex
Check the operating Yes
environment.
Note
1. Applicable PLCs: CV = CVM1 and CV-series PLCs, CS/CJ = CS-series
and CJ-series PLCs, All = All models of PLC.
2. Errors indicated by error codes 0101 to 0116 are recorded only when the
frame was discarded because transmission was impossible.
3. Error code 0230 hex is only recorded for Controller Link Units with unit ver-
sion 1.2 or later.
319
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting Error Messages in CX-Net Data Link Table Check
Section 9-4
Error Status
The status of each bit indicates that an error has occurred as given in the dia-
gram below.
1: Token timeout error
1: Polling timeout error
1: Communications controller hardware error
1: Polling node was changed
1: Nodes in Network changed (added or removed)
1: Communications controller send error
1: Node address duplication error
9-3-3 Reading and Clearing Error Logs
Error logs can be read or cleared using the Controller Link Support Software,
the CX-Programmer, PLC Programming Devices, or the message service.
The following examples are for the Controller Link Support Software and the
message service. When using a PLC Programming Device, refer to the Pro-
gramming Device’s operation manual for details.
Controller Link Support Software
Read or clear the error log using the following procedure.
1,2,3...
1. Display the Main Menu.
2. Select “E: Error log.”
3. Designated the node. The error log for the designated node will be dis-
played.
4. Press the F7 (Clear) Key. The designated node error log will be cleared.
Message Service
Reading an Error Log
Send the ERROR LOG READ FINS command (command code 2102) to the
appropriate node. Refer to 6-5-11 ERROR LOG READ.
Clearing an Error Log
Send the ERROR LOG CLEAR FINS command (command code 2103) to the
appropriate node. Refer to 6-5-12 ERROR LOG CLEAR.
9-4 Troubleshooting Error Messages in CX-Net Data Link
Table Check
This section describes the error messages displayed during data link table
checks performed with CX-Net and the required troubleshooting. Perform
data link table checks by selecting Validate Table from the Table Menu in the
CX-Net’s Datalink Component Screen, or when transferring data link tables
(by selecting Online - Transfer to PLC).
320
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting Error Messages in CX-Net Data Link Table Check
Section 9-4
Example Display of Error List
Note
(1) If any errors (except for warnings) are detected during the table check
performed when transferring data link tables, the data link tables will not
be transferred even if the OK Button is clicked. Remove the cause of the
error and then transfer the data link tables again.
(2) Messages (in the Contents field) preceded by “Warning,” indicate a warn-
ing, not an error that will prevent operation continuing. Check the contents
of the message, and confirm that the intended settings and allocations
are correct. Click the OK Button to transfer the data link tables without
any changes.
(3) The following two messages indicate warnings for CS/CJ-series Control-
ler Link Units with unit version 1.2 or later and errors for CS/CJ-series
pre-Ver. 1.2 Controller Link Units.
Node XX Node size:
Warning: The total send and receive size of ** exceeds 12000.
Node XX Area Overlap:
Warning: Link memory areas 1 and 2 are both set to – [Area]
Error message
Troubleshooting
Node XX Link area
exceeded
Total link area 1 Start Address ** The size ** of Link Area 1 starting from start address **
size ** is outside max area size
exceeds the maximum size for the corresponding area.
Check the maximum number of words in the corresponding
area of the CPU Unit being used, and either change the start
address or reduce the number of data link words.
Total link area 2 Start Address ** The size ** of Link Area 2 starting from start address **
size ** is outside max area size
exceeds the maximum size for the corresponding area.
Either change the start address or reduce the number of
data link words.
Node XX Dest
Warning: Size outside bounds of The number of receive words at the destination node is
Link from node **. Enter value in smaller than the number of send words at the source node.
range ** to **
Change the number of send words or number of receive
words if the allocations are not intended. If the allocations
are intended, the data link tables can be transmitted without
making any changes.
Invalid [Area] offset. Enter value The value equal to or higher than the number of send words
in range ** to **
at node XX is set in the number of offset words for the desti-
nation node. If the allocation is not intended, change either
the number of send words or the number of receive words. If
the allocations are intended, the data link tables can be
transmitted without making any changes.
321
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting Error Messages in CX-Net Data Link Table Check
Section 9-4
Error message
Troubleshooting
The number of receive words at the destination node is
Node XX Dest Over-
flow
Warning: Overflow occurred
larger than the number of send words at the source node.
Change the number of send words or number of receive
words if the allocations are not intended. If the allocations
are intended, the data link tables can be transmitted without
making any changes.
Warning: Block outside bounds of The number of receive words at the destination node is
Link from node **. Enter value in smaller than the number of send words at the source node.
range ** to **
Change the number of send words or number of receive
words if the allocations are not intended. If the allocations
are intended, the data link tables can be transmitted without
making any changes.
Node XX Node size
Warning: The total node send
and receive size of ** exceeds
12000
The total number of send and receive words exceeds
12,000. Controller Link Units with unit version 1.2 or later are
required for data links with 20,000 send and receive words.
For pre-Ver. 1.2 Controller Link Units, reduce the number of
send and receive words.
Total Node send size of **
exceeds max 20000
The total number of send and receive words exceeds
20,000. Reduce the number of send and receive words to
within the maximum.
Total Node send size of **
exceeds max 8000
The total number of send and receive words exceeds 8,000.
Reduce the number of send and receive words to within the
maximum.
Total Node send size of **
exceeds max 62000
The total number of send and receive words exceeds
62,000. Reduce the number of send and receive words to
within the maximum. (The 62,000 maximum can be
exceeded by personal computer boards only.)
Total Node send size is 0
The number of allocated words for node ** in node No. xx is
0. Change the number of words or delete the node.
Total Node send size of **
exceeds max 1000
The total number of send words for node XX exceeds 1,000.
Set the number of send words to 1,000 words or less.
Node XX Area Overlap Warning: Duplicated area exists The same words have been allocated for both the Data Link
Node XX Area Conflict in Area 1 and status area
Area 1 and status area. If the duplication is not intended,
change the settings for either area. If the duplication is
intended, the data link tables can be transmitted without
making any changes.
Warning: Duplicated area exists The same words have been allocated for both the Data Link
in Area 2 and status area
Area 2 and status area. If the duplication is not intended,
change the settings for either area. If the duplication is
intended, the data link tables can be transmitted without
making any changes.
Warning: Link memory areas 1
and 2 are both set to - [Area]
The same area has been set for both Data Link Area 1 and
2. The same area can be set if using Controller Link Units
with unit Ver. 1.2 or later. If a pre-Ver. 1.2 Controller Link Unit
is being used, set a different area each for Area 1 and Area
2. (This message is displayed for CS/CJ-series CPU Units
only.)
Link memory areas 1 and 2 are
both set to [Area]
The same area has been set for both Data Link Area 1 and
2. Set a different area each for Area 1 and Area 2. (This mes-
sage is displayed for CS/CJ-series CPU Units only.)
Link memory areas 1 and 2 are
both set to [Area]
The same address has been set for the Data Link Area and
the area in which both Area 1 and Area 2 are set. Reset the
addresses so that no duplication occurs. (This message is
displayed for CS/CJ-series CPU Units only.)
The XX symbol refers to the corresponding node address. The two
asterisks (**) refer to the corresponding area type, address, and number of
words.
322
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning and Inspection
Section 9-5
9-5 Cleaning and Inspection
This section describes cleaning and inspection procedures that are to be per-
formed as daily maintenance.
9-5-1 Cleaning
Conduct the following periodic cleaning to keep the Controller Link Unit in
optimum condition.
• Wipe the Unit with a dry, soft cloth daily.
• For stains that cannot be removed with a dry cloth, dip the cloth in
medium strength alcohol (2%), wring the cloth tightly, and then wipe down
the Unit.
• If glue, vinyl, or tape is left on the Unit for long periods of time, it will stain.
Remove these items during cleaning.
!Caution Do not use volatile solvents such as benzine or paint thinner, or chemical
cloths for cleaning. They will damage the quality of the coating on the Unit.
9-5-2 Inspection
Controller Link Units must be inspected on a regular basis to ensure correct
operation. Inspections should be conducted once every 6 to 12 months. If the
Unit is subject to extremes in temperature or humidity, inspections should be
conducted on a more regular basis.
Tools and Equipment Need for Inspection
The following tools and equipment will be needed to perform inspection and
adjustments.
• Assorted flat-blade and Phillips screwdrivers
• Circuit tester or digital voltmeter
• Industrial-grade alcohol and clean cotton cloth
• Synchroscope
• Pen-chart recording oscilloscope
• Thermometer, hygrometer
Inspection Items
Inspect the follow items to see if they deviate from the prescribed standards. If
any items do deviate from the standard either adjust so they are within the
operating range or adjust the Unit accordingly.
Item
Description
Inspection instrument
Ambient condi- Temperature: 0° to 55°C
Thermometer
tions
Humidity: 10% to 90% (no conden- Hygrometer
sation or freezing)
Dust-free
Sight
Installation
Units securely attached?
Communications cable connectors
tight?
Flat-blade screwdriver and
sight
Communications cabling used for
external wiring intact (no breaks)?
323
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Handling Precautions
Section 9-6
9-6 Handling Precautions
The Controller Link Unit is a Network device. If the Unit is damaged, it will
effect the entire Network, so always ensure repairs are undertaken immedi-
ately. We recommend that you have a spare Controller Link Unit on hand so
that repairs may be conducted quickly.
9-6-1 Replacing the Unit
Observe the following precautions when replacing the Unit.
• Always turn OFF the power before replacing the Unit.
• Check that the new Unit is not faulty.
• If you suspect that a poor connection is the cause of a malfunction, clean
the connectors using a clean, soft cloth and industrial-grade alcohol.
Remove any lint or threads left from the cloth, and remount the Unit.
• When returning a faulty Unit for repairs, always attach a detailed fault
report to the Unit and return to you nearest OMRON outlet as listed at the
back of this manual.
Note
1. The DM Parameter Area for Controller Link Units without “-V1” (CS1W-
CLK21 and CJ1W-CLK21) and that for Controller Link Units with “-V1”
(CS1W-CLK21-V1 and CJ1W-CLK21-V1) differ in the way shown below.
• Differences in Software Switches (D30000 + 100 × Unit No.)
Bit address
Bit 11
Unit
CS1W-CLK21
CJ1W-CLK21
CS1W-CLK21-V1
CJ1W-CLK21-V1
Reserved for system use (fixed at 0)
Used as the Wired Network 62 Node Enable Bit.
0: 32 nodes max.
1: 62 nodes max.
Bit 06
Reserved for system use (fixed at 0)
Used as one of the bits for specifying the data link mode. Mode
set to automatic setting with 1:N allocation when this bit is
turned ON.
0
0
0
Manual set-
ting
0
0
1
Automatic
setting -
equality lay-
out
0
0
1
Automatic
setting - 1:N
allocation
(Bit 05)
(Bit 04)
0
0
Manual set-
ting
0
1
Automatic
setting
• Difference in Data Link Automatic Setting Parameters (D3000 + 100 ×
Unit No. + 12 to 25)
Word
Unit
address
CS1W-CLK21
CJ1W-CLK21
CS1W-CLK21-V1
CJ1W-CLK21-V1
+12 to +25
Reserved for system use (fixed at 0)
Used to make parameter settings for automatic data link cre-
ation with 1:N allocation. (Only possible when automatic setting
with 1:N allocation is selected by setting software switch bits
04, 05, and 06 to 1, 0, and 1 respectively.)
Because of the differences shown above, when using a Controller Link Unit
without “-V1”, if a value other than 0 is set in the above areas of the CPU
Unit’s DM Parameter Area, if the Unit is Unit with “-V1”, there is a possibility
of malfunction, particularly in data link operation. Therefore, before replac-
ing the Unit (i.e., while the Unit without “-V1” is still mounted), check that 0
is set in all the above areas, and then set as required after the Unit has
been replaced.
2. In order to prevent faulty operation be sure to turn off the power to all nodes
before replacing the Unit.
324
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Handling Precautions
Section 9-6
Relay Terminal Blocks (CJ1W-TB101) can be used on any node but the
cations cable connected and turn OFF the power to only the Unit being re-
placed. Refer to Appendix C Using the Relay Terminal Block for details.
3. When replacing the Unit, do not reconnect that node to the Network before
carrying out the procedures listed below. In particular, a node with a small
address will become the polling node and communicate the initial network
parameter status to other nodes, so there is the chance that network pa-
rameters in the entire Network will be damaged.
9-6-2 Setting the Unit after Replacement
After replacing a Controller Link Unit, reset the hardware switches, software
switches, and data link tables, and wire it in the same manner as the previous
Unit. This section describes settings that require particular care. Refer to the
Unit replacement methods later in this section for details on replacing the Unit.
!Caution After replacing the CPU Unit, transfer important data, such as DM and HR
Area contents, to the new CPU Unit before restarting operation. Depending
on the program, accidents can occur as a result of incorrect DM or HR Area
contents.
CS/CJ-series, CVM1, and CV-series Controller Link Units store data such as
data link tables, network parameters, and routing tables in the CPU Unit.
When replacing the CPU Unit, reset these settings using the Controller Link
Support Software.
Resetting Network Parameters
When a C200HX/HG/HE or CQM1H-series Controller Link Unit has been
replaced or a CPU Unit has been replaced for a CS/CJ-series, CVM1, or CV-
series Controller Link Unit, it is necessary to reset the network parameters,
cedures, refer to 5-2 Setting Data Links and for routing table resetting
procedures, refer to 7-4 Setting Routing Tables.
1,2,3...
1. Network parameters are read from the polling node when the Network is
activated and this information is distributed to all nodes in the Network. For
this reason, set the polled/polling node setting in the DM Parameter Area
for the node replaced to a polled node before reconnecting the Unit to the
Network. For C200HX/HG/HE and CQM1H-series Controller Link Units,
the EEPROM Clear Bit in the DM Parameter Area will already be set to
clear EEPROM (ON or 1).
CS/CJ-series Controller Link Units
DM 30000 + 100 × n
−
– : Other settings
n = Unit number
Polled node/polling node 0: Polling node
1: Polled node
C200HX/HG/HE Controller Link Units
Operating level 0
DM 6400
Operating level 1
DM 6420
–: Other settings
0: Do not clear EEPROM
EEPROM Clear Bit
1: Clear EEPROM
Polled node/polling node 0: Polling node
1: Polled node
325
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Handling Precautions
Section 9-6
CVM1 and CV-series Controller Link Units
DM 2000 + 100 × n
– : Other settings
n = Unit number
Polled node/polling node 0: Polling node mode
1: Polled node
CQM1H-series Controller Link Units
DM 6400
–: Other settings
EEPROM Clear Bit
0: Do not clear EEPROM
1: Clear EEPROM
Polled node/polling node 0: Polling node
1: Polled node
2. Turn the power off once, connect the Controller Link Network and turn the
power on again. Check that the Unit is participating in the Network.
If the INS indicator is lit and the ERC and ERH indicators are off, then the
Unit is in the Network.
3. Return the Polled node/polling node setting of the node in which the Unit
was replaced to “polling node.” For C200HX/HG/HE and CQM1H-series
Controller Link Units, the EEPROM Clear bit will already be set to not clear
EEPROM.
CS/CJ-series Controller Link Units
DM 30000 + 100 × n
−
– : Other settings
n = Unit number
Polled node/Polling node 0: Polling node
1: Polled node
C200HX/HG/HE Controller Link Units
Operating level 0
DM 6400
Operating level 1
DM 6420
–: Other settings
0: Do not clear EEPROM
EEPROM Clear Bit
1: Clear EEPROM
Polled node/polling node 0: Polling node
1: Polled node
CVM1 and CV-series Controller Link Units
DM 2000 + 100 × n
– : Other settings
n = Unit number
Polled node/Polling node 0: Polling node mode
1: Polled node
CQM1H-series Controller Link Units
DM 6400
–: Other settings
0: Do not clear EEPROM
EEPROM Clear Bit
1: Clear EEPROM
Polled node/polling node 0: Polling node
1: Polled node
4. Restart the Controller Link Unit or turn the power off and then back on
again, and then check to see if the Unit is participating in the Network.
If the INS indicator is lit and the ERC and ERH indicators are not lit, then
the Unit is in the Network.
Note Restart the Unit only when the data links are halted.
326
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Handling Precautions
Section 9-6
Using the above procedure to reset the network parameters of the node that
was replaced to the same as the other nodes in the Network.
!Caution When a C200HX/HG/HE or CQM1H-series Controller Link Unit has been
replaced or a CPU Unit has been replaced for a CS/CJ-series, CVM1, or CV-
series Controller Link Unit, do not connect that node to the Network before
carrying out the above procedures. In particular, a node with a small address
will become the polling node and communicate the initial network parameter
status to other nodes, so there is the chance that network parameters in the
entire Network will be damaged.
9-6-3 Replacing the Unit
C200HX/HG/HE and CQM1H-series Controller Link Units
Using the Controller Link
Support Software
1,2,3...
1. From the Maintenance Menu on the Controller Link Support Software, se-
lect “Unit Back-up” and then “Unit –> Computer.” The data will be saved as
a file in the Unit’s EEPROM.
Data link tables and network parameters are saved in this way.
2. Turn off all nodes in the Controller Link Network.
3. Detach the communications cables and the Bus Connection Unit attached
to the Controller Link Unit to be replaced and remove the Unit.
4. Mount the new Controller Link Unit in the PLC and connect the communi-
cations cables and the Bus Connection Unit. (Refer to SECTION 3)
C200HX/HG/HE only) and the terminating resistance for the new Unit to
the same settings as the previous Unit. (Refer to SECTION 4.)
6. Turn on only those PLCs for which Units were replaced.
7. From the Maintenance Menu on the Controller Link Support Software, se-
lect “Unit Back-up” and then “Computer –> Unit” and the data saved in step
1. will be loaded to the Unit’s EEPROM.
8. Cycle the power supply to the PLC where the Unit was replaced.
9. Turn on all other nodes in the Controller Link Network.
10. Using the Controller Link Support Software, read the network parameters
and make sure the Network is operating normally.
11. If the data links are not activated automatically, activate the data links from
the data link startup node.
12. Check that the data links are operating normally by using the “Data Link
Status Monitor” on the Controller Link Support Software.
Not Using the Controller
Link Support software
Note When manually set data links are used, the Controller Link Support Software
is essential. When the Controller Link Unit being replaced does not have
active manually set data links or it has active automatically set data links, the
replacement process can be carried out without the Controller Link Support
Software. In this case, however, a Programming Device is necessary.
1,2,3...
1. Turn off all nodes in the Controller Link Network.
327
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Handling Precautions
Section 9-6
2. Detach the communications cables and the Bus Connection Unit attached
to the Controller Link Unit to be replaced and remove the Unit.
3. Mount the new Controller Link Unit in the PLC and connect the communi-
cations cables and the Bus Connection Unit. (Refer to SECTION 3.)
C200HX/HG/HE only) and the terminating resistance for the new Unit to
the same settings as the previous Unit. (Refer to SECTION 4.)
5. Turn ON only those PLC for which Units were replaced.
6. Set the following software switches on the new Controller Link Unit using
the Programming Device.
• Polled node/ polling nodes: ON (polled node)
• EEPROM Clear But: ON (EEPROM Clear)
C200HX/HG/HE Operating level 0 Operating level 1
– : Other settings
0: Do not clear EEPROM
DM 6400
DM 6420
EEPROM Clear Bit
1: Clear EEPROM
CQM1H Series DM 6400
Polled node/polling node 0: Polling node
1: Polled node
7. Turn off the power again to PLCs for which the Controller Link Unit has
been changed.
8. If the CPU Unit DIP switch pin 5 of the PLC for which the Controller Link
Unit has been replaced is ON (automatic transmission), set to OFF (no au-
tomatic transmission.)
9. Turn off all nodes in the Controller Link Network.
10. If the Controller Link Support Software can be operated, use it to read the
network parameters and make sure the Network is operating normally.
11. If the data links are not activated automatically, activate the data link from
the data link startup node.
12. If the Controller Link Support Software can be operated, use it to check
that the data links are operating normally by monitoring the data link status.
13. Return the software switches set in step 6. in the new Controller Link Unit
to the following settings using the Programming Device.
• Polled node/polling node: OFF (polling node)
• EEPROM Clear Bit: OFF (Do not clear EEPROM)
C200HX/HG/HE Operating level 0 Operating level 1
–: Other settings
0: Do not clear EEPROM
DM 6400
DM 6420
EEPROM Clear Bit
1: Clear EEPROM
CQM1H Series DM 6400
Polled node/polling node 0: Polling node
1: Polled node
Check the above if the Controller Link Support Software can be used.
14. If DIP switch pin 5 on the CPU Unit was switched from ON to OFF in set
8., turn the PLC OFF once, return the DIP switch to ON, and turn the power
ON again.
CS/CJ-series, CVM1, and CV-series Controller Link Units
Note CS/CJ-series, CVM1, and CV-series Controller Link Unit data is stored in the
EEPROM of the CPU Unit. For this reason even if the Controller Link Unit is
replaced, on the hardware settings must be made to return all settings to their
328
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Handling Precautions
Section 9-6
previous status. If, however, the CPU Unit is replaced, the data link tables and
routing tables will need to be reset.
1,2,3...
1. Turn off all nodes in the Controller Link Network.
2. Detach the communications cables attached to the Controller Link Unit to
be replaced and remove the Unit.
3. Mount the new Controller Link Unit in the PLC and connect the communi-
cations cables. (Refer to SECTION 3.)
tance for the new Unit to the same settings as the previous Unit. (Refer to
SECTION 4.)
5. Turn on the power to the PLCs at all nodes in the Controller Link Network
other than those for which the Controller Link Unit was replaced.
6. Check that all the other nodes are active and then turn on the power to the
PLC with the Controller Link Unit that was replaced.
7. Using the Controller Link Support Software, read the network parameters
and make sure the Network is operating normally.
8. If the data links are not activated automatically, start the data links from the
data link startup node.
9. Check that the data links are operating normally by monitoring them from
the Controller Link Support Software.
329
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Handling Precautions
Section 9-6
330
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECTION 10
Adding Nodes and Editing Active Data Link Tables
This section describes the methods used to perform functions without turning OFF the PLC power to the existing network,
such as adding nodes to the Controller Link Network and changing data link tables while the data links are active.
10-1 Adding Nodes Using a Repeater Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-1-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-1-2 Procedure for Adding Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-1-3 Precautions when Connecting Nodes Using a Repeater Unit. . . . . .
10-2 Changing the Data Link Tables with Active Data Links. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-2-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-2-2 Example of Changing Data Link Table with Active Data Links . . .
10-2-3 Operations when Changing Data Link Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
332
332
333
333
336
336
336
336
(Theoretical) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
337
338
10-2-5 Procedure for Changing the Data Link Tables with CX-Programmer
331
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding Nodes Using a Repeater Unit
Section 10-1
10-1 Adding Nodes Using a Repeater Unit
10-1-1 Overview
The CS1W-RPT01 Repeater Unit can be used to add new nodes to the net-
work without turning OFF the power to the existing network.
Example of Adding Nodes Using a T-branch Line
System Configuration at Startup
System Configuration after Adding Nodes
The power to the PLC does not
need to be turned OFF to the nodes
shown within the broken line.
CS1W-RPT01
Repeater Unit
CS1W-RPT01
Repeater Unit
Newly added nodes
Example of Adding Nodes with a Repeater Unit on One End
System Configuration at Startup
System Configuration after Adding Nodes
The power to the PLC does
not need to be turned OFF
to the nodes shown within
the broken line.
Newly added nodes
(See note 1.)
CS1W-RPT01
Repeater Unit
CS1W-RPT01
Repeater Unit
Note
1. Connect the communications cable for the existing network and the com-
munications cable for the new nodes to different communications cables
terminal blocks (SL1 and SL2) on the Repeater Unit.
2. Connect a CS1W-RPT01 Repeater Unit to the system in advance to en-
able adding new Controller Link nodes after the system is operating and
without turning OFF the power to the existing network.
332
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding Nodes Using a Repeater Unit
Section 10-1
10-1-2 Procedure for Adding Nodes
(1) Number of nodes registered in network and
node addresses
(2) Baud rate setting
(3) CS1W-RPT01 Repeater Unit connection
(4) Data link mode when data links are
active/inactive
(5) Wired Network 62 Node Enable Bit setting in
the DM Parameter Area
Check the operating
conditions and setting
status of the existing
network.
System Configuration before Adding Nodes
Set the baud rate and
terminating resistance
switch on the
CS1W-RPT01
Repeater Unit
Setting the
Repeater Unit
Repeater Unit.
(6) Ladder program (program that includes the
new nodes)
(1) Set the baud rate to match the settings for the existing network.
(2) Set the terminating resistance switch: Turn ON the terminating resistance for
the Repeater Unit if it is at the end of the segment.
(Do not connect the communications cables yet.)
Prepare the
nodes to be
added.
(1) Create I/O tables
(2) Transfer user programs, etc.
Setting the
additional
nodes
(1) Set the node address to a number that is
not being used by another node on the
network.
(2) Set the baud rate to match the settings for
the existing network and Repeater Unit.
(3) Set the terminating resistance switch: Turn
ON the terminating resistance for the nodes
at both ends of the network (segment) only.
System Configuration after Adding Nodes
Set the Control-
ler Link settings
for the new no-
des.
CS1W-RPT01
Repeater Unit
The cable to the new
node is not connected.
Turn ON the
power to the
new nodes.
Do not connect the communications cables yet.
(1) Set the polling/polled node setting to Polled.
(2) Set the Wired Network 62 Node Enable Bit to match the setting for
the existing network.
Set the DM
Area
parameters.
Check that the error indicators (ERC and ERH) are not lit.
(When the node address is set to 33 or higher, the ERC indicator
may turn ON. Turn ON the Wired Network 62 Node Enable Bit (to
enable 62 nodes), turn ON the power again, and check that the
ERC indicator is OFF.
Turn OFF the
power to the
new nodes.
System Configuration after Adding Nodes
CS1W-RPT01
Connect the
communications
cables.
The cable to the new
node is connected.
Repeater Unit
Check that the PWR indicator is lit.
Turn ON the
power to the
Repeater Unit.
Connecting
and checking
the cables
Join the new node to the existing network.
The node is participating in the network normally if the INS
indicator is lit and the ERC and ERH indications are not lit.
Turn ON the
power to the
new nodes.
Return the
polling/polled node
setting in the DM Area
parameters to Polling.
10-1-3 Precautions when Connecting Nodes Using a Repeater Unit
When data links are active in the existing network, check the following items
before adding nodes to the network. If the inappropriate data link tables or
parameters are set, the system may not operate properly.
• If the new node will participate in user-set data links, make sure that the
appropriate data link tables are set in the corresponding nodes.
• If the new node will not participate in user-set data links, make sure that
the data link tables of the corresponding nodes are deleted.
333
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding Nodes Using a Repeater Unit
Section 10-1
• If automatic settings are used, make sure that the appropriate DM Area
parameters have been set.
Check that the new data transmission that will be performed due to the new
nodes has been considered in the user program for the existing network
before adding the nodes. If the ladder program is not suitable, the system may
not operate properly.
Make sure that the node addresses of the new nodes are not already being
used by other nodes in the same network. If the same node address is used
by more than one node, a node duplication error will be detected when the
node is added, communications will stop, and the node with the same address
will not be able to the join the network. Data may also be unexpectedly
received from the incorrectly set node. To restore a Controller Link Unit with a
duplicated address, reset the node address correctly, then turn ON the power
to the corresponding PLCs again, or restart the Controller Link Units.
Always set the baud rate of the new nodes and the Repeater Unit to the same
baud rate used for the existing network. If a different baud rate is set when
adding a new node, the communications for the whole network including the
existing network will be unstable and communications errors will occur.
Set the terminating resistance of the new nodes to the Repeater Unit as
shown in the following diagram. If terminating resistance is set incorrectly,
communications errors may occur.
• Adding Nodes Using T-branch Lines
System Configuration after Adding Nodes
Terminating
Terminating
resistance ON
resistance ON
Terminating
resistance ON
CS1W-RPT01
Repeater Unit
Newly added nodes
Terminating
resistance ON
Turn ON terminating resistance at the
nodes on both ends of each segment
shown within broken lines.
• Adding Nodes with a Repeater Unit at One End
Terminating
resistance ON
Terminating
resistance ON
Terminating
resistance ON
CS1W-RPT01
Repeater Unit
Newly added nodes
Terminating
resistance ON
Turn ON terminating resistance at
the nodes on both ends of each
segment shown within broken lines.
334
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding Nodes Using a Repeater Unit
Section 10-1
Before connecting the new nodes to the existing network, always set the poll-
ing/polled node setting to Polled. If the nodes are connected to the existing
network with this setting set to Polling, the corresponding node may become
the polling node for the network, which will affect the network in the following
ways. After the new nodes are participating in the network normally, return the
polling/polled node setting to polling node.
• When the data link startup switch (software switch in the DM Area param-
eters) of the new node is OFF, all the data links for the whole network
including the existing network will be inactive.
• When the network parameters being used are different from the default
values, the network parameters will return to the default values.
Always set the Wired Network 62 Node Enable Bit in the DM Area parameters
of the new node to match the settings of the existing network. If different set-
tings are used, the network may not be configured correctly.
When a new node is to be added to a system that is already wired over a long
distance using T-branch lines or Repeater Units, turn OFF the power to the
PLCs in the segment where the node is to be added. The power to the PLCs
The procedure for adding nodes is the same as 10-1-2 Procedure for Adding
Nodes.
Systems with an Existing T-branch Line
The power to the PLCs of the
segment shown within the dot-dash
broken line does not need to be
turned OFF.
CS1W-RPT01
Repeater Unit
The power to the PLCs in the
segment shown within the dash
broken line must be turned OFF.
New node to be added
Systems Wired with an Existing Repeater Unit
New node to be added
The power to the PLCs of the segment
shown in the dot-dash broken line
does not need to be turned OFF.
The power to the PLCs in the
segment shown in the dash broken
line must be turned OFF.
CS1W-RPT01
Repeater Unit
335
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the Data Link Tables with Active Data Links
Section 10-2
10-2 Changing the Data Link Tables with Active Data Links
10-2-1 Overview
The data link tables can be changed and data link tables can be allocated for
newly added nodes while the system’s data links are active if the following
Controller Link Units and Support Boards are used.
Models that Support Data Link Table Changes during Active Data Links
Model
Remarks
CS1W-CLK21-V1
CJ1W-CLK21-V1
Wired Controller Link Unit for CS-series PLCs
Wired Controller Link Unit for CJ-series PLCs
3G8F7-CLK21-E-V1 Wired Controller Link Support Board for PCI Bus
Note
1. When using Controller Link Units and Support Boards that are not listed in
the above table, data link tables cannot be changed while data links are ac-
tive.
2. CX-Programmer version 3.2 must be used to change data link tables with
active data links. CX-Programmer version 3.1 or lower versions cannot be
used.
10-2-2 Example of Changing Data Link Table with Active Data Links
System Configuration at Startup
System Configuration after Adding Nodes
CS1W-RPT01
Repeater Unit
CS1W-RPT01
Repeater Unit
Newly added nodes
Data Link Area
Data Link Area
Without stopping the data links, the data
link tables can be changed to exchange
data link data with the new nodes.
10-2-3 Operations when Changing Data Link Tables
The Controller Link Unit/Support Board that receives the command from the
CX-Programmer version 3.2 or higher to change a data link table with active
data links will temporarily stop refreshing data with the PLC, change to the
new data link table (data link refresh allocation) and then resume refreshing
data links.
Nodes with data link tables that are changed will send the data from immedi-
ately before the tables were changed while PLC data link refreshing is
stopped.
336
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the Data Link Tables with Active Data Links
Section 10-2
Command re-
ceived to change
with active data
links
Change during
active data links
completed
Time
Data link area of node with the data link table
to be changed
Most recent data read from
Unit
Data immediately
before change
Most recent data read from
Unit.
Data link send data
Most recent data received
from other node
Data immediately
before change
Most recent data received from
other node
Data link receive data
Refresh stopped
Refresh resumed
the data link status will not turn ON in any of the nodes in the network.
Refer to 10-2-4 Timing Required to Change Data Link Tables with Active Data
Links (Theoretical) for details on timing required to change the data link
tables.
10-2-4 Timing Required to Change Data Link Tables with Active Data
Links (Theoretical)
When changing data link tables with active data links, the data refresh for the
corresponding node will stop temporarily. During that time, even if the data in
the data link send area in the PLC is refreshed, it will not be sent as data link
data to other nodes. Data received from other nodes will also not be shown in
the data link receive area of nodes with data link tables that are being
changed. The data refresh interrupt timing (maximum theoretical value) is as
follows:
Data link refresh maximum interrupt time = 2 × Unit cycle time of the node
with data link table being changed (See note 1.) + 3 × communications cycle
time (ms)
Note
1. When CS- or CJ-series PLCs are being used, if the total number of data
link send words exceeds 7,800 words, this value is multiplied by 3.
2. Consider the effect of the data link refresh interrupt time on the applica-
tions when changing the data link tables. If the maximum interrupt time is
not suitable for the user application, transfer the data link table after stop-
ping the data links from a Programming Device as before, and then restart
the data links.
337
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the Data Link Tables with Active Data Links
Section 10-2
10-2-5 Procedure for Changing the Data Link Tables with CX-
Programmer
The procedure for changing a data link table with active data links is shown
here using CX-Programmer version 3.2 and the following system configura-
tion.
Node 1 Node 2 Node 3
Node 4
CS1W-RPT01
Repeater Unit
Newly added node
Node 4
Data Link Area
Node 1 Node 2 Node 3
The table contents are as follows:
Area 1: DM Area
First word: DM 00000
Send and receive words: 10 words each
In this example, by adding node 4 to the network, the receive
area from node 4 is added to the data link table of node 1.
!Caution Check that the contents of the data link table to be changed are correct for the
corresponding node before changing them. If an incorrect data link table is
set, the unexpected operation of the system may result in injury.
Note
1. Check that the contents of the data link table to be changed will be appro-
priate for the corresponding node. If the data link table is set with inappro-
priate data, the Unit may operate abnormally and cause injury.
2. Check that the effects of the data link table to be changed has been con-
sidered in the user programs before changing a data link table.
3. CX-Programmer version 3.2 or higher must be used to change a data link
table with active data links. CX-Programmer version 3.1 or lower versions
cannot be used.
Procedure
1,2,3...
1. Create the new data link table to be transferred to the node whose data link
table is to be changed (node 1) offline.
2. Save the created data link table in a file.
3. Connect the personal computer to CX-Net so that it is online.
4. Select Data Link − Setup from the Menu.
5. Open the data link table file saved in step 1.
338
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the Data Link Tables with Active Data Links
Section 10-2
6. Use the mouse to select node 1, whose data link table is to be changed.
7. Select Online − Transfer to PLC while datalink active.
8. The following message box will be displayed. Click the Yes Button.
If the Yes Button is clicked, the current data link table open in CX-Net will
be compared with the data link table of the node to be changed.
If the No Button is clicked, the data link tables will not be compared.
After comparison, is there is any discrepancy, the following message box
will be displayed. Click the OK Button to check the differences.
The differences between the data link table open on CX-Net and that of the
node to be changed will be displayed.
9. Check that the changes are correct, and click the OK Button.
339
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the Data Link Tables with Active Data Links
Section 10-2
10. The Data Link Table Transfer Confirmation Message Box will be displayed.
Click the Yes Button to transfer the data link table. The transfer can be can-
celled by clicking the No Button. (The active data link table will not be
changed if the transfer is cancelled.)
11. When the data link table is written correctly, the following message box will
be displayed.
Note Transfer data link tables with active data links for one node at a time. When
the Online - Transfer to PLC while datalink active field is selected, the follow-
ing message box will be displayed. Deselect the field and execute the com-
mand again.
340
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the Data Link Tables with Active Data Links
Section 10-2
341
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the Data Link Tables with Active Data Links
Section 10-2
342
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A
Standard Models
Controller Link Units
Applicable PLC
CS-series PLCs
CJ-series PLCs
Model number
Remarks
CS1W-CLK21-V1
CJ1W-CLK21-V1
See CPU Units and Pro-
gramming Devices in this
appendix.
CVM1 and CV-series PLCs CVM1-CLK21
C200HX/HG/HE PLC
CQM1H-series PLCs
C200HW -CLK21
CQM1H -CLK21
Controller Link Support Board
Applicable computer
Model number
3G8F5-CLK21-E
Remarks
IBM PC/AT or compatible
Controller Link Support
Software included.
Controller Link Support Software
Applicable computer
Model number
C200HW-ZW3AT2-EV2
Remarks
IBM PC/AT or compatible
For CS/CJ-series,
C200HX/HG/HE, CVM1,
and CV-series PLCs
Repeater Units
Model
Remarks
CS1W-RPT01
CS1W-RPT02
CS1W-RPT03
Wire-to-wire
Wire-to-optical (H-PCF cable)
Wire-to-optical (GI cable)
Communications Cables (Twisted-pair Cables)
Model
Manufacturer
Remarks
Li2Y-FCY2 x 0.56 qmm
Kromberg & Schubert,
Komtec Department
German company
Draka Cables Industrial
Spanish company
1 x 2 x AWG – 20PE +
Tr.CUSN + PVC
#9207
Belden
USA company
ESVC 0.5 x 2 C-1362
ESNC 0.5 x 2 C-99-087B
Bando Densen Co.
Japanese company
Japanese company
Nihon Electric Wire &
Cable Co.
Relay Terminal Block
Name
Model number
Remarks
Wired Controller Link Unit
Relay Terminal Block
CJ1W-TB101
Cannot be used on the
nodes on both ends of the
network.
343
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Standard Models
Appendix A
CX-Programmer with CX-Net
Applicable
computer
Name
Model number
Applicable PLCs
IBM PC/AT or
compatible run-
ning Windows 95/
98 or Windows
NT
CX-Programmer
with CX-Net
CS/CJ-series,
C200HX/HG/HE,
CVM1, CV-series,
and CQM1H-series
PLCs
WS02-CXPC@-E-V@
CPU Units and Programming Devices
CPU Units
PLC
Model number
Remarks
CS-series PLCs
CS1H-CPU67-V1
CS1H-CPU66-V1
Earlier versions of the
CPU Units can also be
used.
CS1H-CPU65-V1
CS1H-CPU64-V1
CS1H-CPU63-V1
CS1G-CPU45-V1
CS1G-CPU44-V1
CS1G-CPU43-V1
CS1G-CPU42-V1
CJ-series PLCs
CS1G-CPU45
CS1G-CPU44
---
---
SYSMAC C200HX,
C200HG, or C200HE
or C200HZ PLCs
C200HE-CPU32/42-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU33/43/53/63-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU34/44/54/64-(Z)E
SYSMAC CV500,
CV1000, or CV2000
PLCs (see note 1)
CV500-CPU01-EV1
CV1000-CPU01-EV1
CV2000-CPU01-EV1
Earlier versions of the
CPU Units can also be
used.
SYSMAC CVM1 PLCs
(see note 1)
CVM1-CPU01-EV2
CVM1-CPU11-EV2
CVM1-CPU21-EV2
CVM1D-CPU21-E
Earlier versions of the
CPU Units can also be
used.
SYSMAC
CQM1H-series PLCs
CQM1H-CPU51
CQM1H-CPU61
---
Note Routing tables are required if any of the CVM1 or CV-series CPU Units in
the network have been manufactured on or before April 1996. The
manufacturing data can be determined from the lot number on the side of
the CPU Unit.
Lot No.: @
@
4
6 … … … Manufactured in April 1996
Indicates the last digit of the manufacturing
year. In this example, the year is 1996.
Indicates the month of manufacture. October,
November, and December are indicated by x, y,
and z respectively. In this example, the month is
April.
344
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Standard Models
Appendix A
Other Products Used with Controller Link Units
Name
Model number
Remarks
Bus Connection
Unit
C200HW-CE001
Required to connect a Controller Link Unit
to a C200HZ, C200HX, C200HG, or
C200HE CPU Unit.
C200HW-CE002
C200HW-CE012
Required to connect two Controller Link
Units, or one Controller Link Unit and one
other Communications Unit to a C200HZ,
C200HX, C200HG, or C200HE CPU Unit.
Required to mount both a Controller Link
Unit and a PLC Card Unit to a C200HZ,
C200HX, C200HG, or C200HE CPU Unit.
Communications C200HW-COM01
Boards C200HW-COM04
Required to mount a Controller Link Unit to
a C200HZ, C200HX, C200HG, or C200HE
CPU Unit.
Refer to the operation manual for the relevant PLC for further information on the above products.
345
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B
Memory Areas
This appendix provides easy reference to the words in PLC memory areas used by Controller Link Networks.
CS/CJ-series PLCs
Auxiliary Area
Word(s)
A202
Bit(s)
Function
00 to 07
Communications Port Enabled (Network Communi-
cations Enabled) Flags
A203 to A210
A219
00 to 15
00 to 07
Port #0 to #7 Completion Codes
Port #0 to #7 Execute Error (Network Communica-
tions Execute Error) Flags
A302
A401
A402
00 to 15
13
CS/CJ CPU Bus Unit Initializing Flags
Duplicate Number Error Flag (fatal error)
CS/CJ CPU Bus Unit Setting Error Flag
CS/CJ CPU Bus Unit Error Flag
03
07
A410
A417
A427
A501
00 to 15
00 to 15
00 to 15
00 to 15
CPU Bus Unit Duplicate Number
CS/CJ CPU Bus Unit Error, Unit Number Flags
CS/CJ CPU Bus Unit Setting Error Unit Number
CS/CJ CPU Bus Unit Restart Bits
Network Status Flags
Bits A20200 through A20207 are turned ON to indicate that ports #0 through #7, respectively, are enabled for
that an error has occurred in ports #0 through #7, respectively, during data communications using SEND(90),
RECV(98), CMND(490), or PMCR. Refer to page 189.
A203 through A210 contain the completion codes for ports #0 through #7, respectively, following data commu-
nications using SEND(90), RECV(98), CMND(490), or PMCR. Refer to page 189.
CS/CJ CPU Bus Unit Initializing Flags
Bits A30200 through A30215 turn ON while the corresponding CS/CJ CPU Bus Units (Units #0 through #15,
respectively) are initializing.
CS/CJ CPU Bus Unit Setting Error Flag and Unit Number
Bit A40203 is turned ON when the CS/CJ CPU Bus Units actually installed differ from the Units registered in
the I/O table. The unit number of the CS/CJ CPU Bus Unit involved is written to word A427.
Bits A42700 through A42715 correspond to CS/CJ CPU Bus Units #0 through #15, respectively. When a error
occurs, the bit corresponding to the unit number of the CS/CJ CPU Bus Unit involved is turned ON.
CS/CJ CPU Bus Unit Error Flag
Bit A40207 is turned ON when a parity error occurs during the transmission of data between the CPU Unit and
CS/CJ CPU Bus Units. The unit number of the CS/CJ CPU Bus Unit involved is written to word A417.
CS/CJ CPU Bus Unit Numbers
Bits A41000 through A41015 correspond to CS/CJ CPU Bus Units #0 through #15, respectively. When two
CPU Bus Units have the same unit number, the bits corresponding to the unit numbers of the CS/CJ CPU Bus
Units involved are turned ON.
347
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Areas
Appendix B
CS/CJ CPU Bus Unit Duplication Error Flag
Bit A40113 is turned ON when two CS/CJ CPU Bus Units have been assigned the same unit number. The dupli-
cated unit number is indicated in A410.
CS/CJ CPU Bus Unit Error, Unit Number Flags
When an error occurs in a data exchange between the CPU Unit and an CS/CJ CPU Bus Unit, the CS/CJ CPU
Bus Unit Error Flag (A40207) is turned ON and the bit in A417 corresponding to the unit number of the Unit
where the error occurred is turned ON.
CS/CJ CPU Bus Unit Restart Bits
Bits A50100 through A50115 can be turned ON to reset CS/CJ CPU Bus Units number #0 through #15,
respectively. The Restart Bits are turned OFF automatically when restarting is completed.
CIO Area: CS/CJ CPU Bus Unit Area
The CS/CJ CPU Bus Unit Area (CIO Area) is allocated to CS/CJ CPU Bus Units according to the unit numbers
assigned to them, as shown below. Each Unit is allocated 25 words.
Unit no.
Words
Unit no.
Words
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1500 to 1524
1525 to 1549
1550 to 1574
1575 to 1599
1600 to 1624
1625 to 1649
1650 to 1674
1675 to 1699
8
1700 to 1724
1725 to 1749
1750 to 1774
1775 to 1799
1800 to 1824
1825 to 1849
1850 to 1874
1875 to 1899
9
10
11
12
13
14
Error Information: CIO 1500 + 25 × (Unit No.) (See page 304.)
1: Network parameter error (In PLC's EEPROM)
1: Data link table error (in PLC's EEPROM)
1: Routing table error (in PLC's EEPROM)
1: PLC system setting error
1: EEPROM error
1: Duplicate node address setting error
1: Inconsistent network parameters
1: Communications controller send error
1: Communications controller hardware error
1: Error log exists
Polling Node Address, Startup Node Address: CIO 1500 + 25 × (Unit No.) + 1 (See page 304.)
Polling node address
Startup node address
Each node address is displayed in 2-digit BCD.
348
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Areas
Appendix B
Network Participation Status: CIO 1500 + 25 × (Unit No.) + 2, + 3 (See pages 190, 304.)
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
16 15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
+ 2
+ 3
+ 4
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
−
−
62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49
+ 5
The numbers in the squares indicate node addresses.
The corresponding node participation status is as follows:
0: Not part of the network
1: Part of the network
Local Data Link Participation Status: CIO 1500 + 25 × (Unit No.) + 6 (See page 304.)
Allocation for automatic setting
00: Equality layout
01: 1:N allocation, common type
10: 1:N allocation, 1 to 1 type
11: 1:N allocation, chain type
Data link mode
0: Manual setting
1: Automatic setting
1: Local node data link participating
0: Local node data link not participating or data link
inactive
Data Link Status: CIO 1500 + 25 × (Unit No.) + 7 to + 22 (See pages 156, 305.)
When the first data link status word for manually set data link tables or for automatically set data links is not set
or is set to 0, the data link status is stored in the words shown below.
8-Bit Format Specified
+7
Node
Node
Node
Node
Node 10
Node 12
Node 14
Node 16
Node 18
Node 20
Node 22
Node 24
Node 26
Node 28
Node 30
Node 32
2
4
6
8
Node
Node
Node
Node
Node
Node 11
Node 13
Node 15
Node 17
Node 19
Node 21
Node 23
Node 25
Node 27
Node 29
Node 31
1
3
5
7
9
+8
+9
+10
+11
+12
+13
+14
PLC status
0: Inactive (user program not running)
1: Active (user program running)
PLC's CPU Unit error
0: Normal
1: Error
+15
+16
+17
+18
+19
Communications error (data link reception)
0: Normal
1: Error
+20
+21
+22
Data link participation
0: Not in data link or data link inactive
1: In data link
Offset error
0: Normal
1: Error
Error: Offset exceeds
number of send words.
Note When a data link with node addresses
higher than 32 is required, specify the
beginning storage word rather than us-
ing the default.
Insufficient (short) receive area Insufficient: Receive
0: Sufficient
area is smaller than
send area. Excess data
is truncated; other data
is received.
1: Insufficient
(In this case, a 31 word area is used
when the 8-bit format is specified.)
Remaining receive area
0: Not remaining
1: Remaining
Remaining: Receive
area is larger than send
area. Data is received
and remaining words
are cleared.
349
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Areas
Appendix B
4-Bit Format Specified
Node 4
Node 8
Node 3
Node 7
Node 2
Node 6
Node 1
Node 5
Node 12 Node 11 Node 10 Node 9
Node 16 Node 15 Node 14 Node 13
Node 20 Node 19 Node 18 Node 17
Node 24 Node 23 Node 22 Node 21
Node 30 Node 27 Node 26 Node 25
Node 32 Node 31 Node 30 Node 29
Node 36 Node 35 Node 34 Node 33
Node 40 Node 39 Node 38 Node 37
Node 44 Node 43 Node 42 Node 41
Node 48 Node 47 Node 46 Node 45
Node 52 Node 51 Node 50 Node 49
Node 58 Node 55 Node 54 Node 53
Node 60 Node 59 Node 58 Node 57
PLC status
0: Inactive (user program not running)
1: Active (user program running)
PLC's CPU Unit error
0: Normal
1: Error
0
0
Node 62 Node 61
Communications error (data link reception)
0: Normal
1: Error
Data link participation
0: Not in data link or data link inactive
1: In data link
Terminating Resistance Status (CIO 1500 + 25 × (Unit No.) + 24 (See page 305.)
Terminating resistance status: 0: OFF
1: ON
350
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Areas
Appendix B
DM Area: CS/CJ CPU Bus Unit Area
The CS/CJ CPU Bus Unit Area (DM Area) is allocated to CS/CJ CPU Bus Units according to the unit numbers
assigned to them, as shown below. Each Unit is allocated 100 words, of which 10 words are used. In the Con-
troller Link Unit this area is called the DM Area.
Unit no.
Words
Unit no.
Words
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
DM30000 to
DM30009
8
DM30800 to
DM30809
DM30100 to
DM30109
9
DM30900 to
DM30909
DM30200 to
DM30209
10
11
12
13
14
15
DM31000 to
DM31009
DM30300 to
DM30309
DM31100 to
DM31109
DM30400 to
DM30409
DM31200 to
DM31209
DM30500 to
DM30509
DM31300 to
DM31309
DM30600 to
DM30609
DM31400 to
DM31409
DM30700 to
DM30709
DM31500 to
Software Switches (DM30000 + 100 × Unit No.) (See pages 145, 243, 249, 318.)
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0: Always set to 0.
Data Link Start Bit
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Data link status
storage format
0: 8-bit format
1: 4-bit format
Start: Changed from OFF to ON or set to ON
when power is turned ON.
Data link mode
000: Manual
Stop: Changed from ON to OFF.
001: Automatic, equality layout
101: Automatic, 1:N allocation
Wired Network 62 Node
Enable Bit
0: 32 nodes max.
1: 62 nodes max.
CS1 CPU Bus Unit PLC Setup Initialization (See note 1.)
0: Do not initialize CS1 CPU Bus Unit PLC Setup
1: Initialize CS1 CPU Bus Unit PLC Setup
Polling node/polled node bit
0: Polling node
1: Polled node
Note 1: Initializes the network parameters registered in the CS1 CPU Bus Unit PLC Setup Area on the CPU Unit
and clears the data link tables.
2: Be sure to set the bit in the DM Area's (CPU Bus Unit Area's) software switches (D30000 + 100 × unit
number) described as "always set to 0" to 0. Not doing so may result in the data link not starting properly.
If a data link is started with bit 7 of the software switches set to 1, the data link status will be stored in a
format different to the one described in this manual (when using CS-series or CJ-series Controller Link Units).
351
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Areas
Appendix B
Parameters for Automatically Setting Data Links with Equality Layout: D30000 + 100 × (Unit
No.) + 1 to 9 (See page 145.)
15
8
7
0
+1 Area 1 data link start word (BCD)
+2 Area 1 type
00
+3 Number of send words per node of area 1 (BCD)
+4 Rightmost 4 digits of data link start word of area 2 (DM area) (BCD)
Leftmost digit of data link start word of area
2 (BCD)
+5 Area 2 type
+6 Number of send words per node of area 2 (BCD)
+7 First data link status word (BCD)
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
9
7
8
6
7
5
6
4
5
3
4
2
3
1
2
0
1
Nodes to participate in the data links
+8 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
The numbers indicate node numbers.
The value assigned indicates whether the
node is to participate in the data links.
+9 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
+10 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
Participate:
1
Not participate: 0
+11
−
−
62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49
BCD: Set the value as binary-coded decimal.
Parameters for Automatic Data Link Creation with 1:N Allocation: D30000 + 100 × (Unit No.) +
12 to 25
Common Type
15
8
7
0
1:N allocation type (Set value 0001 = Common type)
N+12
N+13
N+14
N+15
N+16
N+17
N+18
N+19
N+20
N+21
N+22
N+23
N+24
N+25
Start word for area 1 (bit-access area, BCD)
Area for area 1
00
Area 1 send size (number of words) for master node (BCD)
Area 1 send size (number of words) for slave nodes (BCD)
Rightmost 4 digits of start word of area 2 (DM area) (BCD)
Area for area 2
Leftmost digit of start word of area 2 (BCD)
Area 2 send size (number of words) for master node (BCD)
Area 2 send size (number of words) for slave nodes (BCD)
First word to store data link status (bit-access area) (BCD)
16
32
48
---
15
31
47
---
14
30
46
62
13
29
45
61
12
28
44
60
11
27
43
59
10
26
42
58
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
25
41
57
24
40
56
23
39
55
22
38
54
21
37
53
20
36
52
19
35
51
18
34
50
17
33
49
Words N+22 through N+25 register nodes that will participate in the data links. The numbers shown in the table
are the node addresses. The bit status for each node address indicates whether the node is to participate in
the data links.
Participate: ON
Not participate: OFF
352
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Areas
Appendix B
1 to 1 Type
15
8
7
0
1:N allocation type setting (Set value 0002 = 1 to 1 type)
N+12
N+13
N+14
N+15
N+16
N+17
N+18
N+19
N+20
N+21
N+22
N+23
N+24
N+25
Rightmost 4 digits of start word (BCD)
Area
Leftmost digit of area start word (BCD)
Number of common send words for master node (BCD)
Number of individual send words for master node (BCD)
Number of send words for slave nodes (BCD)
0000 (Reserved)
0000 (Reserved)
0000 (Reserved)
First word to store data link status (bit-access area) (BCD)
16
32
48
---
15
31
47
---
14
30
46
62
13
29
45
61
12
28
44
60
11
27
43
59
10
26
42
58
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
25
41
57
24
40
56
23
39
55
22
38
54
21
37
53
20
36
52
19
35
51
18
34
50
17
33
49
Words N+22 through N+25 register nodes that will participate in the data links. The numbers shown in the table
are the node addresses. The bit status for each node address indicates whether the node is to participate in
the data links.
Participate: ON
Not participate: OFF
Chain Type
15
8
7
0
1:N allocation type setting (Set value 0003 = Delivery type)
N+12
N+13
N+14
N+15
N+16
N+17
N+18
N+19
N+20
N+21
N+22
N+23
N+24
N+25
Rightmost 4 digits of area start word (BCD)
Area
Leftmost digit of area start word (BCD)
Number of master common send words (BCD)
Number of receive and send words per node (BCD)
0000 (Reserved area)
0000 (Reserved area)
0000 (Reserved area)
0000 (Reserved area)
First word to store data link status (bit-access area) (BCD)
16
32
48
---
15
31
47
---
14
30
46
62
13
29
45
61
12
28
44
60
11
27
43
59
10
26
42
58
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
25
41
57
24
40
56
23
39
55
22
38
54
21
37
53
20
36
52
19
35
51
18
34
50
17
33
49
353
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Areas
Appendix B
Words N+22 through N+25 register nodes that will participate in the data links. The numbers shown in the table
are the node addresses. The bit status for each node address indicates whether the node is to participate in
the data links.
Participate: ON
Not participate: OFF
C200HX/HG/HE PLCs
SR Area
Communications Instruction Response Codes: SR 237 (See page 191.)
SR 237
Operating level 1 response code
Operating level 0 response code
Each response code is in 2-digit hexadecimal.
Polling Node Address, Startup Node Address: SR 238, SR 242 (See page 300.)
Operating level 0
SR 238
Operating level 1
SR 242
Polling node address
Startup node address
Data Link Status: SR 239 to SR 241, SR 243 to SR 245 (See pages 156, 300.)
When the first data link status word for manually set data link tables or for automatically set data links is not set
or is set to 0, the data link status of only node addresses 1 to 6 will be given in the following area.
Operating Operating
level 0
level 1
SR 239
SR 243
Node
Node
Node
2
4
6
Node
Node
Node
1
3
5
SR 240
SR 241
SR 244
SR 245
PLC status
0: Inactive (user program not running)
1: Active (user program running)
PLC's CPU Unit error
0: Normal
1: Error
Communications error (data link reception)
0: Normal
1: Error
Data link participation
0: Not in data link or data link inactive
1: In data link
Offset error
0: Normal
1: Error
Error: Offset exceeds
number of send words.
Insufficient (short) receive area Insufficient: Receive
0: Sufficient
1: Insufficient
area is smaller than
send area. Excess data
is truncated; other data
is received.
Remaining receive area
0: Not remaining
1: Remaining
Remaining: Receive area
is larger than send area.
Data is received and
remaining words are
cleared.
354
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Areas
Appendix B
Operating Level Status: SR 252 (See pages 189, 300.)
1: Local node data link participating
Network Instruction Enable Flag
0: Disabled (operating)
Operating level 1
Operating level 0
1: Enabled (not operating)
Network Instruction Error Flag
0: Normal completion
1: Error
1: Local node data link participating
Network Instruction Enable Flag
0: Disabled (operating)
1: Enabled (not operating)
Network Instruction Error Flag
0: Normal completion
1: Error
AR Area
Duplicate Operating Levels/Refresh Error: AR 00 (See page 299.)
Operating level 1
Operating level 0
A bit will be turned ON (1) the
next cycle when
1) The same operating level is
set more than once or
2) A refresh error occurs
Unit and the PLC's CPU Unit.
Routing Table Error/Unit Restart Bits: AR 01 (See page 299.)
Operating level 1 Resets the Controller Link Unit.
Turn ON (1) and then OFF (0)
to reset Unit.
Operating level 0
Operating level 1
Operating level 0
1: Routing table error
Data Link Start Bits (See page 154.)
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
AR 07
Data link Start Bit for level 0 (AR 0700)
Start: Changed from OFF to ON or set to ON
when power is turned on
Stop: Changed from ON to OFF
Data link Start Bit of level 1 (AR 0704)
Start: Changed from OFF to ON or set to ON
when power is turned on
Stop: Changed from ON to OFF
Network Participation Status: AR 08, AR 09, AR 12, AR 13 (See pages 190, 299.)
Operating level 0
AR 08
AR 09
Operating level 1
AR 12
AR 13
The numbers in the squares indicate node addresses.
The corresponding node participation status is as follows:
0: Not part of network
1: Part of network
355
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Areas
Appendix B
Communications Controller Hardware Error, EEPROM Error: AR 11, AR 15 (See page 299.)
Operating level 0
AR 11
Operating level 1
AR 15
1: Communications controller hardware error
1: EEPROM error
Service Time: AR 16, AR 17 (See page 299.)
Operating level 0
AR 16
Operating level 1
AR 17
The service time for each PLC cycle is calculated by the PLC
and displayed in 0.1-ms units in 4-digit BCD.
Operating Level Connection Status, Inconsistent Network Parameters: AR 24 (See page 299.)
Operating level 1
1: Network parameters do not match
Operating level 0
Operating level 1
1: Connecting to the operating level
Operating level 0
DM Parameter Area
Software Switches: DM 6400 and DM 6420 (See pages 145, 243, 249, 318.)
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
0
8
0
7
0
6
0
5
4
3
0
2
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
Data link mode
00: Manual
01: Automatic
Routing table enabled/disabled
1: Enabled
0: Disabled
EEPROM Clear Bit 0: Do not clear EEPROM
1: Clear EEPROM
Polling node/polled node bit
0: Polling node
1: Polled node
Parameters for Automatically Setting Data Links: DM 6400 to DM 6409, DM 6420 to DM 6429
(See page 145.)
Level 0 Level 1
15
8
7
0
DM 6401 DM6421 Area 1 data link start word (BCD)
DM 6402 DM6422 Area 1 type
00
DM 6403 DM6423 Number of send words per node of area 1 (BCD)
DM 6404 DM6424 Rightmost 4 digits of data link start word of area 2 (DM area) (BCD)
Leftmost digit of data link start word of area
2 (BCD)
DM 6405 DM6425 Area 2 type
DM 6406 DM6426 Number of send words per node of area 2 (BCD)
DM 6407 DM6427 First data link status word (BCD)
15 14 13 12 11 10
DM 6408 DM6428 16
9
8
9
7
8
6
7
5
6
4
5
3
4
2
3
1
2
0
1
Nodes to participate in the data links
15 14 13 12 11 10
The numbers indicate node numbers.
The value assigned indicates whether the
node is to participate in the data links.
DM 6409 DM 6429 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
BCD: Set the value as binary-coded decimal.
Participate:
1
Not participate: 0
356
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Areas
Appendix B
Routing Tables (DM 6450 to DM 6499) (See page 243.)
When the use of routing tables is enabled by the software switch setting, the routing tables are stored in these
words. Do not use them for anything else.
CVM1 and CV-series PLCs
Auxiliary Area
Word(s)
A001
Bit(s)
00 to 15
00 to 15
00 to 15
12
Function
CPU Bus Unit Restart Bits
A015
A302
A401
A402
CPU Bus Service Disable Bits
CPU Bus Unit Initializing Flags
CPU Bus Error Flag
03
CPU Bus Unit Setting Error Flag
CPU Bus Unit Error Flag
07
A405
A410
A422
A427
A502
00 to 15
00 to 15
00 to 15
00 to 15
00 to 07
08 to 15
00 to 15
CPU Bus Unit Error Unit Number
CPU Bus Unit Duplicate Number
CPU Bus Unit Error Unit Number
CPU Bus Unit Setting Error Unit Number
Port #0 to #7 Enabled Flags
Port #0 to #7 Execute Error Flags
Port #0 to #7 Completion Codes (See page 191)
A503 to A510
CPU Bus Unit Restart Bits
Bits A00100 through A00115 can be turned ON to reset CPU Bus Units number #0 through #15, respectively.
The Restart Bits are turned OFF automatically when restarting is completed.
Do not turn these bits ON and OFF in the program; manipulate them from the CVSS.
CPU Bus Service Disable Bits
Bits A01500 through A01515 can be turned ON to stop service to CPU Bus Units numbered #0 through #15,
respectively. Turn the appropriate bit OFF again to resume service to the CPU Bus Unit.
CPU Bus Unit Initializing Flags
Bits A30200 through A30215 turn ON while the corresponding CPU Bus Units (Units #0 through #15, respec-
tively) are initializing.
CPU Bus Error and Unit Flags
Bit A40112 is turned ON when an error occurs during the transmission of data between the CPU Unit and CPU
Bus Units, or a WDT (watchdog timer) error occurs in a CPU Bus Unit. The unit number of the CPU Bus Unit
involved is contained in word A405.
Bits A40500 through A40515 correspond to CPU Bus Units #0 through #15, respectively. When a CPU Bus
Error occurs, the bit corresponding to the unit number of the CPU Bus Unit involved is turned ON.
CPU Bus Unit Setting Error Flag and Unit Number
Bit A40203 is turned ON when the CPU Bus Units actually installed differ from the Units registered in the I/O
table. The unit number of the CPU Bus Unit involved is written to word A427.
Bits A42700 through A42715 correspond to CPU Bus Units #0 through #15, respectively. When a error occurs,
the bit corresponding to the unit number of the CPU Bus Unit involved is turned ON.
CPU Bus Unit Error Flag and Unit Numbers
Bit A40207 is turned ON when a parity error occurs during the transmission of data between the CPU Unit and
CPU Bus Units. The unit number of the CPU Bus Unit involved is written to word A422.
Bits A42200 through A42215 correspond to CPU Bus Units #0 through #15, respectively. When a CPU Bus
Unit Error occurs, the bit corresponding to the unit number of the CPU Bus Unit involved is turned ON.
357
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Areas
Appendix B
CPU Bus Unit Numbers
Bits A41000 through A41015 correspond to CPU Bus Units #0 through #15, respectively. When two CPU Bus
Units have the same unit number, the bits corresponding to the unit numbers of the CPU Bus Units involved
are turned ON.
Network Status Flags
Bits A50200 through A50207 are turned ON to indicate that ports #0 through #7, respectively, are enabled for
the SEND(192), RECV(193), and CMND(194). Bits A50208 through A50215 are turned ON to indicate that an
error has occurred in ports #0 through #7, respectively, during data communications using SEND(192),
RECV(193), or CMND(194).
A503 through A510 contain the completion codes for ports #0 through #7, respectively, following data commu-
nications using SEND(192), RECV(193), or CMND(194).
CIO Area: CPU Bus Unit Area
The CPU Bus Unit Area is allocated to CPU Bus Units according to the unit numbers assigned to them, as
shown below. Each Unit is allocated 25 words. The Controller Link Units use 22 of the words allocated to them.
Unit no.
Words
Unit no.
Words
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1500 to 1524
1525 to 1549
1550 to 1574
1575 to 1599
1600 to 1624
1625 to 1649
1650 to 1674
1675 to 1699
8
1700 to 1724
1725 to 1749
1750 to 1774
1775 to 1799
1800 to 1824
1825 to 1849
1850 to 1874
1875 to 1899
9
10
11
12
13
14
Error Information: CIO 1500 + 25 × (Unit No.) (See page 304.)
1: Network parameter error (In PLC's EEPROM)
1: Data link table error (in PLC's EEPROM)
1: Routing table error (in PLC's EEPROM)
1: PLC system setting error
1: EEPROM error
1: Duplicate node address setting error
1: Inconsistent network parameters
1: Communications controller send error
1: Error log exists
Polling Node Address, Startup Node Address: CIO 1500 + 25 × (Unit No.) + 1 (See page 304.)
Polling node address
Startup node address
Each node address is displayed in 2-digit BCD.
Network Participation Status: CIO 1500 + 25 × (Unit No.) + 2, + 3 (See pages 190, 304.)
+ 2
+ 3
The numbers in the squares indicate node addresses.
The corresponding node participation status is as follows:
0: Not part of the network
1: Part of the network
358
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Areas
Appendix B
Local Data Link Participation Status: CIO 1500 + 25 × (Unit No.) + 6 (See page 304.)
1: Local node data link participating
Data Link Status: CIO 1500 + 25 × (Unit No.) + 7 to + 22 (See pages 156, 305.)
When the first data link status word for manually set data link tables or for automatically set data links is not set
or is set to 0, the data link status is stored in the words shown below.
+7
+8
+9
Node
Node
Node
2
4
6
Node
Node
Node
1
3
5
+10
+11
+12
+13
+14
+15
+16
+17
+18
+19
+20
+21
Node
8
Node
7
Node 10
Node 12
Node 14
Node 16
Node 18
Node 20
Node 22
Node 24
Node 26
Node 28
Node 30
Node 32
Node
9
PLC status
Node 11
Node 13
Node 15
Node 17
Node 19
Node 21
Node 23
Node 25
Node 27
Node 29
Node 31
0: Inactive (user program not running)
1: Active (user program running)
PLC's CPU Unit error
0: Normal
1: Error
Communications error (data link reception)
0: Normal
1: Error
Data link participation
0: Not in data link or data link inactive
1: In data link
+22
Offset error
0: Normal
1: Error
Error: Offset exceeds
number of send words.
Insufficient (short) receive area Insufficient: Receive
0: Sufficient
1: Insufficient
area is smaller than
send area. Excess data
is truncated; other data
is received.
Remaining receive area
0: Not remaining
1: Remaining
Remaining: Receive
area is larger than send
area. Data is received
and remaining words
are cleared.
359
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Areas
Appendix B
DM Area: CPU Bus Unit Area
The CPU Bus Unit Area (DM Area) is allocated to CPU Bus Units according to the unit numbers assigned to
them, as shown below. Each Unit is allocated 100 words, of which 10 words are used. In the Controller Link
Unit this area is called the DM Area.
Unit no.
Words
Unit no.
Words
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
DM2000 to
DM2009
8
DM2800 to
DM2809
DM2100 to
DM2109
9
DM2900 to
DM2909
DM2200 to
DM2209
10
11
12
13
14
15
DM3000 to
DM3009
DM2300 to
DM2309
DM3100 to
DM3109
DM2400 to
DM2409
DM3200 to
DM3209
DM2500 to
DM2509
DM3300 to
DM3309
DM2600 to
DM2609
DM3400 to
DM3409
DM2700 to
DM2709
DM3500 to
Software Switches (DM2000 + 100 × Unit No.) (See pages 145, 243, 249, 318.)
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
0
8
0
7
0
6
0
5
4
3
0
2
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Data link Start Bit
Start: Changed from OFF to ON or set to ON
when power is turned on
Stop: Changed from ON to OFF
Data link mode
Set to 01 for automatic setting.
(00 is for manual setting. Other values are invalid.)
EEPROM Clear Bit* 0: Do not clear EEPROM
1: Clear EEPROM
Polling unit/polled unit bit
0: Polling unit
1: Polled unit
*Clears the network parameters, data link tables,
and routing tables stored in EEPROM in the PLC's
CPU Unit.
360
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Areas
Appendix B
Parameters for Automatically Setting Data Links: DM 2000 + 100 × (Unit No.) + 1 to + 9 (See
page 147.)
15
8
7
0
Area 1 data link start word (BCD)
Area 1 type
+1
+2
+3 Number of send words per node of area 1 (BCD)
+4 Rightmost 4 digits of data link start word of area 2 (BCD)
Leftmost digit of data link start word
of area 2 (BCD)
+5 Area 2 type
+6 Number of send words per node of area 2 (BCD)
+7 First data link status word (BCD)
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
9
7
8
6
7
5
6
4
5
3
4
2
3
1
2
0
1
+8
+9
16 15 14 13 12 11 10
Nodes to participate in the data links
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
BCD: Set the value as binary-coded decimal.
The numbers indicate node numbers.
The value assigned indicates whether the
node is to participate in the data links.
Participate:
1
Not participate: 0
CQM1H-series PLCs
AR Area
Word
AR 00
Bits
Name
Contents
11
11
Communications Unit Error Flag
Communications Unit Restart Bit
Response code
Turns ON when an error occurs in a Communications Unit.
Turn ON this bit to restart the Communications Unit.
AR 01
AR 02
00 to 07
(SEND(90), RECV(98), or CMND(––)).
(See page 191.)
08
Network Instruction Error Flag
Network Instruction Enable Flag
1: Abnormal end
(See page 190.)
09
0: SEND(90), RECV(98), or CMND(––) execution not possi-
1: Execution possible (not executing)
(See page 190.)
15
Communications Unit Connected Turns ON when a Communications Unit is mounted to the
Flag
PLC.
AR 03
00 to 15
Communications Unit Servicing
Time
Indicates the servicing time for the last cycle in 0.1-ms units
(4-digit BCD.)
Data Link Start Bit: AR 07 (See page 113.)
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Data link Start Bit (AR0700)
Start: Changed from OFF to ON or set to ON
when power is turned on
Stop: Changed from ON to OFF
361
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Areas
Appendix B
Local Data Link Participation Status: IR 90 (See page 309.)
1: Local node data link participating
0: Local node data link not participating or data link
inactive
Data Link Status: IR 91 to IR 93 (See pages 156, 309.)
When the first data link status word is not set or is set to the default (0000) for either the manually set data link
tables or automatically set data link tables, the data link status is stored in the following words for nodes 1 to 6
only.
IR 91
Node
Node
Node
2
4
6
Node
Node
Node
1
3
5
IR 92
IR 93
PLC status
0: Inactive (user program not running)
1: Active (user program running)
PLC's CPU Unit error
0: Normal
1: Error
Communications error (data link reception)
0: Normal
1: Error
Data link participation
0: Not in data link or data link inactive
1: In data link
Offset error
0: Normal
1: Error
Error: Offset exceeds
number of send words.
Insufficient (short) receive area Insufficient: Receive
0: Sufficient
1: Insufficient
area is smaller than
send area. Excess data
is truncated; other data
is received.
Remaining receive area
0: Not remaining
1: Remaining
Remaining: Receive
area is larger than send
area. Data is received
and remaining words
are cleared.
Terminating Resistance Status: IR 95 (See page 312.)
Terminating resistance status: 0: OFF
1: ON
362
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Areas
Appendix B
Error Information: IR 190 (See page 309.)
1: Network parameter error (In Controller Link's EEPROM)
1: Data link table error (in Controller Link's EEPROM)
1: Routing table error (in Controller Link's EEPROM)
1: EEPROM error
1: Duplicate node address setting error
1: Inconsistent network parameters
1: Communications controller send error
1: Communications controller hardware error
1: Error log exists
Polling Node Address, Startup Node Address: IR 191 (See page 309.)
Polling node address
Startup node address
Network Participation Status: IR 192 and IR 193 (See page 309.)
The numbers in the squares indicate node addresses.
The corresponding node participation status is as follows:
0: Not part of the network
1: Part of the network
Control Bits: DM 6400 (See pages 113, 243, 249, 325.)
Routing Table Enable Bit
1: Enabled
0: Disabled
Data link mode
00: Manual setting
01: Automatic setting
EEPROM Clear Bit
0: Do not clear EEPROM
1: Clear EEPROM
Polled node/polling node
0: Polling node
1: Polled node
363
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Areas
Appendix B
Automatic Data Link Parameters: DM 6401 to DM 6409 (See page 150.)
DM 6401 Area 1 data link start word (BCD)
DM 6402 Area 1 type
00
DM 6403 Number of send words per node of area 1 (BCD)
DM 6404 Rightmost 4 digits of data link start word of area 2 (BCD)
Leftmost digit of data link start word
of area 2 (BCD)
DM 6405 Area 2 type
DM 6406 Number of send words per node of area 2 (BCD)
DM 6407 First data link status word (BCD)
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
9
7
8
6
7
5
6
4
5
3
4
2
3
1
2
0
1
DM 6408 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
Nodes to participate in the data links
DM 6409 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
BCD: Set the value as binary-coded decimal.
The numbers indicate node numbers.
The value assigned indicates whether the
node is to participate in the data links.
Participate:
1
Not participate: 0
Routing Tables: DM 6450 to DM 6499 (See page 239.)
These words are used for the routing tables if the data links are enabled in the software switches. Do not use
these words for any other purpose if data links are enabled.
364
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C
Using the Relay Terminal Block
This appendix describes how to use the CJ1W-TB101 Wired Controller Link Unit Relay Terminal Block. Using a
Relay Terminal Block enables replacing a Controller Link Unit while network communications are still in
progress.
Appearance
Name
Model number
Remarks
Wired Controller Link Unit CJ1W-TB101
Relay Terminal Block
Cannot be used on the
nodes on both ends of the
network.
Relay Terminal Blocks (CJ1W-TB101) can be used on any node but the end nodes to enable replacing the
Controller Link Unit with the communications cable connected and turn OFF the power to only the Unit being
replaced.
Note The built-in terminating resistance connected at the Units at the end of the network prevents using the
Relay Terminal Block on the end Units.
Connecting the Relay Terminal Block to the Communications
Terminal Block on the Controller Link Unit
1. Connect the communications cables from the two adjacent nodes together to the terminals on the Relay
Terminal Block. The tightening torque for the Relay Terminal Block terminal screws is 0.5 N·m.
2. Remove the terminal block cover from the communications terminal block on the Controller Link Unit and
loosen the three screws on the communications terminal block. (If adjacent Units are close enough to inter-
fere with work, remove the three screws.)
3. Confirming that the signal lines and shield lines are aligned properly with the markings on the Controller Link
Unit, insert the Relay Terminal Block and tighten the screws on the communications terminal block to secure
the Relay Terminal Block. The tightening torque for the three communications terminal block terminal screws
is 0.5 N·m.
365
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Relay Terminal Block
Appendix C
ON
BAUD
RATE
1
2
1
O
N
2
SW1
Relay Terminal Block
TER SW
ON
Connect the Relay
Terminal Block.
4. Attach the terminal block cover to the communications terminal block on the Controller Link Unit.
ON
BAUD
RATE
1
2
1
O
N
2
SW1
TER SW
Relay Terminal Block
Connect the Relay
Terminal Block.
ON
Replacing a Controller Link Unit with a Relay Terminal Block
Use the following procedure to replace a Controller Link Unit with a Relay Terminal Block. The communications
cables are left connected to the Relay Terminal Block during the procedure, and only the Relay Terminal Block
itself must be disconnected from the Controller Link Unit and then connected to the new Controller Link Unit.
The following procedure describes only steps required for the Relay Terminal Block. Refer to 9-6-1 Replacing
the Unit for details on the replacement operation.
1. Turn OFF the power supply to the PLC with the Unit to be replaced.
2. Remove the communications terminal block cover from the Unit.
3. Loosen the three screws on the communications terminal block. (If adjacent Units are close enough to in-
terfere with work, remove the three screws.)
4. Remove the Relay Terminal Block with the communications cables still attached to it.
!CautionDo not allow the metal portions of the Relay Terminal Block or the communications cable crimp ter-
minals to come into contact with any conductive material.
5. Replace the Controller Link Unit. Set the node number, baud rate, operating level, and terminating resis-
tance switches on the new Unit to the same settings as the previous Unit. With the C200HX/HG/HE or
CQM1H PLC, turn ON the power to the PLC, download the data that was backed up from the previous Unit
to EEPROM in the new Unit, and then turn OFF the power again.
6. Remove the communications terminal block cover from the new Unit.
7. Loosen the three screws on the communications terminal block on the new Unit. (If adjacent Units are close
enough to interfere with work, remove the three screws.)
8. Attach the Relay Terminal Block to the new Unit with the communications cables still attached to it, making
sure to align the signal lines and shield line with the markings on the Controller Link Unit.
9. Tighten the screws on the communications terminal block to secure the Relay Terminal Block. The tighten-
ing torque for the three communications terminal block terminal screws is 0.5 N·m.
10. Attach the terminal block cover to the communications terminal block on the Controller Link Unit.
11. Turn ON the power supply to the new Unit. (The power supply to other nodes should still be ON.)
366
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Relay Terminal Block
Appendix C
Note 1. Signal will still be flowing through the communications cables during the replacement procedure if the
network is still operating. Use an insulated screwdriver and be very sure that the metal portions of the
Relay Terminal Block or the communications cable crimp terminals do not come into contact with any
conductive material.
2. Replace the Unit only after confirming that doing so will not affect the system, including the affects of
separated nodes or communications errors.
3. Always turn OFF the power supply to all nodes when connecting communications cables to or remov-
ing them from the Relay Terminal Unit.
367
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
ERROR CLEAR, 222
MEMORY AREA READ, 214
MEMORY AREA WRITE, 215
PROGRAM AREA READ, 216
PROGRAM AREA WRITE, 217
commands for Controller Link Units, 201
ERROR LOG CLEAR, 211
ERROR LOG READ, 210
NETWORK STATUS READ, 205
commands for CVM1 and CV-series PLCs, 183
communications
1:N allocations
4-bit format, 156, 158, 160, 295, 350
8-bit format, 156, 157, 160, 294, 349
A-B
AR Area
reading, 214, 216
writing, 215
automatic setting
1:N allocations, 10, 130, 131
bits
Bus Connection Units
models, 345
C
C200HX/HG/HE PLCs
models, 343, 365
optical, 74
models, 344
SEND, 169
mechanism, 248
preparations, 32
SEND delay time, 270
cables, 8
selecting functions, 25
Communications Boards
optical, 74
CJ-series PLCs
memory areas, 347
clock
reading, 221
setting, 221
CMND instruction
commands
models, 343, 365
active data links, 251
Controller, 51
Controller Link, 2
network
connections, 66
reading operating status, 205
Controller Link Support Boards
models, 343
Controller Link Units
212
CLOCK READ, 221
CLOCK WRITE, 221
C200HX/HG/HE, 49
369
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CJ Series
settings, 89
CQM1H Series
settings, 100
CS Series
CQM1H-series PLCs, 120
data links, 8
settings, 86
CVM1 and CV Series
CVM1 and CV-series PLCs, 51
creating, 27
counters
manual setting, 32, 114
examples, 106, 123
modes, 160
reading Completion Flag status, 214, 216
CPU Units
CQM1H-series PLCs
CMND, 179
installation, 64
procedures, 32
RECV, 176
SEND, 175
starting, 153, 201
CS-series PLCs
status, 156
memory areas, 347
stopping, 153, 201
models, 344
dimensions
memory areas, 357
CQM1H Units, 54
CS-series Units, 46
SEND, 173
DM Area
SEND delay time, 265
SEND/RECV instructions, 173
CVM1 PLCs
reading, 214, 216
writing, 215
E-F
error codes, 314
table, 313
CX-Net, 24, 113
CX-Programmer, 24, 237, 238
data areas
errors
clearing, 211, 222
error handling, 9
See also Memory Areas
data link table
370
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
error log, 7
reading, 210
manual setting
FAL/FALS No., 221
FINS commands
response codes
responses, 199
sending and receiving, 199
flags
examples, 123
designating addresses, 212
writing, 215
procedure, 40
specifications, 188
model numbers
SEND/RECV, 189
status
forced status
reading PLC model number, 219
models, 16
N
network
specifying, 251
relay errors, 226
remote Controller Link networks, 237
node addresses
controlling, 222
reading, 224
I
I/O tables, 32, 35
indicators
setting
Controller Link Units
CQM1H Units, 101
CVM1 and CV Units, 98
node configurations, 9
nodes
CS-series Units, 45
CVM1 and CV-series Units, 51
inspection
installation, 32, 58
CJ-series PLCs, 63
extending to 62
non-fatal error data, 220
number of polled units, 250
CQM1H-series PLCs, 64
CS-series PLCs, 61
CVM1 and CV-series PLCs, 60
instructions
O-P
offsets
application example, 110
usage, 110
Optical Fiber Cables
optical fiber cables
See also cables
RECV, 167
IR Area
reading, 214, 216
PLC
L-M
maintenance
modes, 220
changing to RUN mode, 218
PLC memory addres. See also Memory Areas
cleaning, 323
371
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
reading, 219
message service, 166
SEND/RECV instructions, 167
settings
receiving routing table settings, 243
status, 219
polling cycle
baud rates
polling node
CQM1H Units, 101
CS-series Wired Units, 88
node addresses
setting, 249
precautions
general, xx
handling, 324
replacing the Unit, 324
safety, xx
procedures
message service, 27
programming
Programming Devices, 21, 237
programs
reading, 216
writing, 217
CQM1H Units, 101
CS-series Wired Units, 87
operating levels
CS-series Wired Units, 88
polling nodes, 249
terminating resistance
CQM1H Units, 102
CS-series Wired Units, 89
unit numbers
CS-series Wired Units, 86
specifications
R
RAS functions, 7
RECV, 168
RECV delay time, 267
RECV instruction, 167
C200HX/HG/HE PLCs, 271
data link, 111
general, 13
status area, 7
response codes, 191, 225, 227
troubleshooting, 292
stopping and starting
data links
synchronous operation, 256
system configuration, 11
saving, 242
setting, 240
procedure, 241
T
transferring, 243
terminating resistance
setting
S
CQM1H Units, 102
CS-series Wired Units, 89
CVM1 and CV Units, 99
timers
SEND, 167
SEND delay time, 265
SEND instruction, 167
C200HX/HG/HE PLCs, 270
372
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
status area, 292
status flags, 301
using indicators, 276
U-W
unit numbers
setting
CS-series Wired Units, 86
CVM1 and CV Units, 98
wiring
Wired Controller Link Units, 66
373
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
374
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revision History
A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual.
Cat. No. W309-E1-09
Revision code
The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision. Page numbers refer to the
previous version.
Revision code
Date
Revised content
1
2
February 1997
August 1997
Original production
Removed “-HZ” model suffix throughout the manual.
Page 76: “CMND” corrected to “SEND” in the diagram for the “PC to computer”
message service in the table.
Page 88: “C” bit added to the program example.
Page 145: Second sentence removed and the equations corrected for 8-3-2
Data Processing Time.
3
February 1999
CS1W-CLK11 and CS1W-CLK21 Controller Link Units for CS/CJ-series PCs
added.
“Common memory” corrected to “shared memory” throughout the manual.
Addition of new 3G8F5-CLK11-E optical model and optical system information
throughout the manual.
4
5
September 1999
May 2001
CQM1H-CLK21 Controller Link Units for CQM1H-series PCs added.
CJ1W-CLK21 Controller Link Units for CJ-series PCs added (including chang-
ing “CS1” to “CS” or CS/CJ” according to context).
An appendix was added on the Relay Terminal Block.
Information on optical systems removed.
Page xiii: “Connector” changed to “any terminal block.”
Page xiv: “Connector” removed, “communications connector” changed to “Bus
Connection Unit,” and “backup power supply cable” removed.
Page xv: “CS1W-CLK11” removed.
Page 3: Graphic altered.
Page 5: Information added on personal computer boards.
Page 6: Information on H-PCF and GI cables added.
Pages 6 and 17: Note changed/added.
Pages 10 and 16: Information added/changed in table.
Pages 11 and 12: Information added on wiring.
Page 15: Note and information following it removed and other changes.
Page 17: Note added in graphic.
Page 19: Parenthetic information changed in procedure.
Page 30: Unit number callout corrected.
Page 45: Recommended wire added.
Page 54: Corrected “bottom switch” to “front switch.”
Page 76: Notes changed.
Page 146: Corrected version information.
Page 159: Restriction added on number of read words.
Page 250: First paragraph in 9-3 Error Log corrected.
375
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revision History
Revision code
Date
Revised content
06
February 2003
“PC” changed to “PLC” throughout the manual. Information related to the
CQM1H-CLK21 was added and information related to the CS1W-CLK21 was
removed. In addition, the following changes were made.
Page v: Changes made to information on product references.
Pages 17, 73, 104, 272: Information on software switches added.
Pages 52, 55: Changes made to table giving baud rates.
Pages 79, 80: “-EV@” added to model numbers in several of places.
Page 100: Parenthetic information added to first paragraph.
Page 107: Programming examples added.
Pages 137, 141: Numerical change: 120000 changed to 121000.
Pages 214, 216: “Scan” changed to “cycle” in several places.
Page 250: Minor change made to first paragraph.
07
08
09
June 2003
September 2004
January 2006
Numerous changes were made to add the new functions and features of CS1W-
CLK21-V1 and CJ1W-CLK21-V1 Units and the CS1W-PRT01/02/03 Repeater
Units.
Extensive changes were made to the manual mainly to add information on the
upgraded functionality of new unit versions, including an overview of the new
system of unit version codes.
"CS1-series" changed to "CS-series" throughout the manual.
Page v: Information on general precautions notation added and
copyright information moved from page vii.
Page xv: Information on liability and warranty added.
Pages 115, 117, 119, and 120: "PC" changed to "PLC."
376
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Authorized Distributor:
Printed in Japan
Cat. No. W309-E1-09
Note: Specifications subject to change without notice
This manual is printed on 100% recycled paper.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|